Home Economic Papers Political Essays Bibiliography Biography Links
| |
Where Did All The Money Go?
How Lower Taxes, Less Government, and Deregulation Redistribute Income and
Create Economic Instability
Summary
George H. Blackford © 2009,
last updated 5/1/2014
Part I examines how changes in economic policy over the
past forty years have affected the economic system and explains how these policy
changes have affected the way in which our economic system functions.
Chapter 1: Income, Fraud, Corruption, and
Efficiency
discusses the way in which deregulation and the change in attitude toward
regulating economic behavior has led to a rise in fraud and
corruption within our economic and political systems, and how this increase in
fraud and corruption has, in turn, led to a loss in economic efficiency through the creation of
speculative bubbles and an inequitable distribution of income derived from
speculative rather than productive endeavors.
Chapter 2: International
Finance and Trade discusses how
deregulation in the area of international finance has led to international financial crises that have necessitated government bailouts of our financial institutions to keep them from failing.
The way in which this change in policy has led to an overvalued dollar that has wrought havoc
with the American economy as it devastated our manufacturing industries and
transformed the United States from the largest creditor nation in the world to
the largest debtor nation in the world is also discussed. The Appendix at the
end of this chapter provides a primer on the way in which international exchange
rates are determined and how these rates affect economic interactions between countries.
Chapter 3: Mass Production, Income, Exports,
and Debt examines
the relationship between mass-production technology, the distribution of income,
exports, and debt within the economic system. It is argued that in
order to be economically viable, mass production
techniques require mass markets—that is, markets with large numbers of people
who have purchasing power—otherwise, the mass quantities of goods and services
that can be produced via mass-production techniques cannot be sold. The
viability of mass markets within a society, in turn, depends on the distribution
of income in that the distribution of income limits the extent to which domestic
mass markets can be sustained without an increase in debt relative to income: The less concentrated the distribution of income, the larger the domestic mass
market that can be sustained; the more concentrated the distribution of income,
the smaller the domestic mass markets that can be sustained.
It is also argued that, in a mass production economy, the mass
markets needed to obtain full employment can only be maintained in the face of an
increasing
concentration of income if there is an increase in debt relative to income.
It is further argued that the process by which debt must be increased in this
situation is unsustainable. As debt increases relative to income the strain on the financial system
must grow, and, eventually, a financial crisis must result as the ability to service
the growing debt falters. Hence, the financial crisis of 1929-1933
following the increase in debt and the concentration of income in the 1920s, the
savings and loan crisis of 1987-1991 following the increase in debt and the
concentration of income in the 1980s, and the current financial crisis following
the increase in debt and the concentration of income in the 2000s.
Chapter 4: Going into Debt
examines the relationship between the deregulation of our financial system and
the rise of domestic debt from 1970 through 2010. The way in
which financial institutions create debt through the process of financial
intermediation is explained, and it is argued that there are
powerful incentive within the financial system that lead financial
institutions to fund speculative bubbles that increase debt beyond any
possibility of repayment. When this occurs a financial crisis that brings
down the economic system is inevitable. It is further argued
that not only is this what happened during the housing bubble in the 2000s, it
is also what happened during the real estate and stock-market bubbles of the 1920s, and the
parallels between the between the 2000s and the 1920s are examined.
Part II explains how our financial system works and
how the changes in economic policy that have occurred over the past forty
years led to the economic catastrophe we are in the midst of today.
Chapter 5: Nineteenth Century
Financial Crises
gives a brief history of our financial system as it evolved during the
nineteenth century. The way in which financial institutions—specifically,
banks but any financial institution that finances long-term assets through
short-term debt must be included here—differ from other businesses is
examined.
The fundamental liquidity and solvency problems
that are unique to banks are
explained along with the way in which increasing leverage within the financial
system leads to financial crises that cause economic instability. The
fundamental mechanism by which banks create debt—namely,
by virtue of the fact that banks are able to increase the amount of money they
can borrow from the non-bank public by increasing the amount of money they lend to the
non-bank public—is explained in this chapter.
The implications of the fundamental problems endemic in the
banking system with regard to economic instability are examined as well as the failings of the nineteenth century banking systems that led to
financial crises.
Chapter 6: The Federal Reserve and Financial Regulation
explains the way in which our modern financial system is structured by the Federal
Reserve. How the Federal Reserve determines the amount of currency
that is available to the economic system is explained as well as how the interaction between the
banking system and the non-bank public—given the amount of currency that is made available by the Federal Reserve—determines the amount of debt created by the banking system as the banking system increases the amount it can
borrow by increasing the amount it lends.
The way in which the Crash of 1929 and the Great Depression
of the 1930s led to a change in attitude toward the
nineteenth century ideological dictates of free-market capitalism is also
examined in this chapter. It is argued that the resulting change from an
ideological to a pragmatic view of the economic system led to the
creation of a comprehensive system of financial regulation in the 1930s through
the 1960s that served our
country well until we began to dismantled this system in the 1970s.
Chapter 7: Rise of the Shadow
Banking System
examines the process by which the pragmatic system of
financial regulation created in the
wake of the Great Depression was dismantled as the failed, nineteenth-century ideology
of free-market capitalism began to gain favor again among policy makers in the
1970s.
The basics of financial markets and the nature of financial instruments are
explained along with the changes in the financial system that
came about through the creation of markets for collateralized debt instruments.
It is shown how the change in attitude toward regulation, combined with the
creation of markets for collateralized debt instruments, led to the rise of
financial institutions—shadow banks—that
operated outside the purview of the financial regulatory system and yet operated
like banks in that they held long-term assets financed by short-term debt.
The way in which the shadow banks pose all of the treats to
economic stability that an unregulated banking system poses is examined, and it
is argued that since the shadow banks were allowed to operate outside the
purview of the regulatory system, there was nothing to keep them from reverting
to the kinds of behaviors that led to the kinds of crisis we experienced during
the era of unregulated finance that culminated in the Crash of 1929 and drove us
into the Great Depression of the 1930s.
Chapter 8: LTCM and the Panic
on 1998
examines the first major financial crisis caused by a shadow bank: the worldwide
panic that resulted from the near failure of a single hedge fund, Long-Term
Capital Management (LTCM), in 1998.
It is shown that all of the problems
endemic in the failure to regulate the shadow banking system—problems that
subsequently led to the financial crisis we are in the midst of today—were
acknowledged in the government reports on this crisis submitted by the
President's Working Group and by the General Accounting Office.
It is
further argued that ideological blindness on the part of policy
makers in the Clinton administration and the Republican congress at the time made it impossible for
those in charge of our government to even see the extent of the threat these
problems posed let alone to follow the recommendations of
the General Accounting Office and bring shadow banks under the purview of the
regulatory system.
Chapter 9: Securitization, Derivatives, and
Leverage
explains the basics of the securitization process, the nature of financial
derivatives, and the way in which financial derivatives increase leverage and,
hence, risk within the financial system.
How Mortgage Backed Securities
(MBSs) come into being is also explained in this chapter along with
Collateralized Debt Obligations (CDOs), Credit Default Swaps, synthetic CDOs,
and options and futures contracts.
The risks involved in trading financial derivative in
over-the-counter markets as opposed to trading these kinds of financial
instruments on exchanges with the protections provided by a clearinghouse are
explained as well, and the reasons why the failure to regulate the markets for
financial derivatives had such devastating consequences when the crisis began in
2007 are examined.
Chapter 10: The Crash of 2008
chronicles the events that led up to the Crash of 2008 and the way in which we
dealt with the economic catastrophe that followed. It is argued that
because of the extent to which debt was allowed to accumulate, and the extent to
which the unregulated markets for over-the-counter derivatives were able to
increase risk in the financial system, the financial situation we faced in 2008
was far worse than anything we faced in 1929.
It is further argued that there
are but three threads by which the economy is hanging today that have made it
possible for us to avoid, so far at least, the disastrous consequences that
followed the Crash of 1929, and that these three threads are there only because
of the size of our federal government. These three threads are
1) the heroic actions of the Federal Reserve in keeping the world's financial
system from collapsing, 2) the size and stability of federal government
expenditures that placed a break on the downward spiral of income and output
that was initiated by the crash in 2008, and 3) the existence of our social-insurance programs that have mitigated the kind of human misery and suffering
that, in the absence of these kinds of programs, inevitably accompany the kind
of economic catastrophe we are in the midst of today.
Finally, it is argued that the
free-market ideologues—whose mantra of lower taxes, less government, and
deregulation brought on the economic crisis we are in the midst of today—are
doing everything they can to cut the three threads by which our economic system
is hanging, and in this Alice-in-Wonderland world in which we live there
is every reason to believe they are going to do this if and when they regain
control of the federal government.
Part III: The Federal Budget
Part III examines the history of the national debt,
the federal budget, and our social-insurance programs in an attempt to sort
through the sophistry endemic in the debate surrounding these entities.
All of the data
in these chapters are taken from the official statistics published in the
Office of
Management and Budget's Historical Tables or from other official
government documents.
Chapter 11: History of the National Debt
begins by explaining a number of definitions and relationships—such
as definitions of gross and net national debt and the relationship between the national debt and surpluses and deficits in the federal budget—that
are required to understand what the national debt is and where it comes from.
The importance of measuring the national debt relative to some other variable in
the economic system, such as GDP, is explained.
The history of the national
debt is examined for the 83 years between 1929 and 2012. The basic
conclusions that result are that the primary sources of the national debt are 1)
increases in defense expenditures associated with war, 2) economic downturns
associated with recessions and depressions, and 3) cutting taxes in the face of
rising government expenditures. These conclusions are reinforced when we
look at the history of the federal budget in the next chapter.
A number of technical issues surrounding the
construction of aggregate measures of economic activity—such as measures of
total output, the average price level, and the level of productivity in the
economy—are explained in the appendix at the end of this chapter.
Chapter 12: History of the Federal Budget examines the history of the
federal budget from the perspective of how our country has changed since 1929.
All of the major categories of the federal
budget are plotted in this chapter from 1940 through 2012.
It is argued that
the loss of faith in free-market
capitalism brought on by the Great Depression and our international interventionist
policies brought on by World War II and the ensuing Cold War
had profound effects on the American psyche
that led to dramatic changes in the federal budget following 1929. In looking at the history of the budget we find that
these factors led to a dramatic increase in the size of the budget
relative to the economy in the 1930s through the 1950s, and that this increase was dominated in the
1940s by an increase in defense expenditures. We also find that while the size of
the federal budget relative to the economy has been relatively constant since
the 1960s, the composition of the budget has changed dramatically. The
most dramatic change has been the decrease in the
fraction of the budget that is devoted to defense and the increase in the
fraction that is devoted to Human Resources—that is, devoted to the social-insurance programs that came out of Roosevelt's New Deal, the
most important of which are Social Security and Medicare.
The primary mechanisms by which
the increase in the Human Resources component of the budget has been financed
over the past 60 years is seen to have been a decrease in expenditures on
national defense and an increase payroll taxes as a percent of GDP. This
decrease in national defense and increase in payroll taxes was used to finance a
reduction of all other taxes collected by the federal government as well. The reduction of taxes on corporations
has been especially dramatic in this regard.
Finally, it is argued that if we are to have less government the place we have to
cut the budget is in the Human Resources portion of the budget and possibly defense
since virtually everything else has been cut to the
bone since 1980.
Chapter 13: Human Resources and Social-Insurance
examines the portion of the federal budget devoted to the social-insurance programs (Human Recourses)
that have grown out of Roosevelt's New Deal.
This category of the budget has gone from
33.4% of the budget and 4.6% of GDP in 1950 to 64.4% of the budget and 12.7% of
GDP in 2007.
The great
bulk of the expenditures in this category fund our social-insurance
programs.
We find that Human
Resources is dominated by federal healthcare and retirement programs and
that Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security dominate these programs. Healthcare and
retirement went from 0.0% and 5% of the budget in 1940 to 25% and 26% of the
budget in 2007, respectively. All other categories of Human Resources
were less than 5% of the
budget during the entire period. In terms of GDP, healthcare and
retirement grew to 4.9% and 5.2% of the economy by 2007 while none of the
other categories in Human Resources exceeded 1% of the economy during that period save
unemployment compensation which hit 1.1% of GDP in 1976 following the 1973-1975
recession.
When we examine the data we
find that 71% of the increase in the total costs of Human Resources programs
since 1965 can be attributed to the increase in the cost of healthcare, 21%
to the increase in the cost of federal retirement programs, less than 6% by
the increase in the cost of federal non-healthcare, public assistance
programs, and less than 3% by the increases in the cost of all other Human
Resource programs combined.
Chapter 14: Welfare, Tax Expenditures, and Redistribution examines
the welfare programs in the federal budget, that is, those programs the benefits
of which are available to aid the poor and are specifically designed to
redistribute income from those who are better off to those who are less
fortunate.
We find that total welfare expenditures grew gradually from
1952 through1967 and then increased dramatically from 4.3% of the budget and
0.85% of GDP in 1967 to 16.3% of the budget and 3.2% of GDP in 2007. When we break these expenditures down
into cash and non-cash benefits we find that expenditures on cash-benefit welfare programs
relative to the economy and federal budget in 2007 was essentially the same as
it was in 1965, less than 5% of the budget. We also find that while
virtually all of the cash-benefit welfare payments went to people who were not
employed in 1965, fully half of the cash-payment welfare expenditures went to
the working poor in 2007, rather than to recipients who were not employed.
We also find that expenditures on non-cash
assistance programs represented 73% of welfare expenditures in 2007 and only 27%
of the welfare expenditures were cash benefit programs. At the same time,
we find that the Medicaid program amounted to 7.0% of the budget in 2007 and,
thus, accounted for 42% of all welfare expenditures in 2007 and 56% of all
expenditures on non-cash assistance programs. None of the other welfare
programs exceeded 2% of the budget in 2007 or 0.4% of our gross income.
The single most important factor in driving up the cost of welfare since 1967 is
to be found in the Medicaid program.
In addition to welfare expenditures, there
were over 200 provisions in the federal tax code in 2007 that had the effect of
redistributing income within our society. These provisions are referred to as
tax expenditures, and since the
benefits of tax expenditures are guaranteed by law to all who qualify for them,
they are, in fact, entitlement programs.
In examining the various categories of tax
expenditure entitlements in the federal budget we find that the extent to which tax
expenditures redistribute income from the general tax payer to upper income
groups far exceeds the extent to which welfare programs redistribute income from
the general tax payer to lower income groups.
Part IV: Coming to Grips with Reality
Part IV examines the major economic problems with
which we are faced today, the way in which we should deal with these
problems, and the role played by ideology in creating these problems and in
preventing solutions to these problems.
Chapter 15: Federal Versus Non-Federal Debt
examines the fundamental difference between
federal debt and non-federal debt and the lessons that should have been learned
from the 1930s with regard to the importance of this difference as it relates to
the stability of the economic system. It is argued that the most serious
problem we face today is our non-federal debt, not our federal debt, and that it
was the attempt to follow conservative fiscal and monetary policies from 1929
through 1933 that drove us into the debts of the Great Depression. It is
also argued that the way in which our debt problem was solved during the 1930s
and 1940s was by increasing economic growth, and the way the economic growth
that solved our debt problem and took us out of the Great Depression was through
a massive increase in government expenditures that was accompanied by dramatic
increases in taxes.
Finally, is argued that none of the lessons
that should have been learned from our experiences in the 1930s through the
1970s with regard to the federal debt have been learned by the free-market
ideologues whose only vision for the future is lower taxes, less government,
deregulation, and paying off the national debt. It is further argued that
one of the lessons that should have been learned—namely, the need for higher
taxes in this situation—has not been learned even by most of those who have
learned the other lessons that should have been learned from our experiences of
the 1930s through the 1970s.
Chapter 16: Managing
the Federal Budget examines the fiscal problems we
face. It is argued that if the government is to be made fiscally sound we must provide the
government services that the people demand, and then collect the taxes
necessary to pay for these services. It is further argued that this could be done quite easily by 1) rescinding the
2001-2003 Bush tax cuts, 2) eliminating unwarranted tax deductions and credits, 3) increasing the top marginal tax rates, and
4) increasing taxes on corporations.
It is also argued that
if those who
benefit the most from our economic system do not pay back in taxes enough to
rebuild the
public infrastructure and social capital that is consumed in the process of reaping the
benefits they gained from our economic system, there is little hope for the
future. It is further argued
that this does not mean just the top one or
two percent of the income distribution must pay back. It means that everyone
who is capable of making a contribution toward this end must do their part. If this is
not done we will consume the public resources that were
left for us by previous generations, and in failing to replenish those
resources, we will limit the economic possibilities for future generations.
Chapter 17:
Social Security, Healthcare, and Taxes looks at the
problems created by the baby boomers retiring with regard to Social Security,
Medicare, and the federal budget.
The
Moment of Truth report written by
Erskine Bowles
and
Alan Simpson
is examined in detail in this chapter and is found
wanting.
It is argued that there are many ways to deal with
the relatively minor problems posed by the baby boomers retiring when it comes
to Social Security that do not involve the drastic changes in Social Security
called for by Bowles and Simpson. At the same time, it is argued that
containing the cost of Medicare is a serious problem and that the engine that
drives up cost in the Medicare program is to be found in the private healthcare
system, not in Medicare itself.
It is argued that t he
most obvious, simplest, most efficient, and most cost effective way to deal with
this problem would be to extend the Medicare program to the entire population,
thereby, providing a mechanism by which costs in the entire system can be
controlled. It is further argued that if we are to preserve Social
Security and Medicare and, at the same time, provide all of the other government
programs and services demanded by the American people in a fiscally responsible
way, we must raise taxes.
Chapter 18: Ideology Versus Reality
examines the extent to which free-market ideologues fail to perceive the real
world as it actually is and the consequences to society that result from their
failure to come to grips with reality. It is argued that this ideological
view is based on a straw-man caricature of government that completely ignores
all of the essential functions that government performs in our daily lives and
without which civilized society is impossible,
and the
academic model that explains how, and under
what circumstances a free-market economy is supposed to work not only completely
ignores the role of government in our economic and social lives, but the
assumptions on which the logical consistency of this model depends are
impossible to achieve in the real world.
Chapter 19: Beyond
the Current Crisis
goes beyond the current economic disaster caused by
deregulating the world’s financial system. It is argued that
globalization, combined with technological improvements in transportation and
communication over the past thirty years have led to incredible growth in
productivity and output throughout the world. Unfortunately, this growth is
derived from the same failed, nineteenth-century ideological paradigm of
free-market capitalism that led to the deregulation of our financial system.
This paradigm is terribly flawed in its failure to understand
the necessity to regulate pollution and to preserve our natural resources. If we value the kind of world
we leave to our children and grandchildren we cannot sit back and hope for the
best as unregulated markets squander our natural resources and pollute our
planet. It is argued that the problems posed by population growth, the worldwide drive to industrialize, and
the finite nature of our natural resources cannot be solved by markets alone. They can only be solved through the international cooperation of governments.
Autobiographical Information and Acknowledgements
provides some autobiographical information and attempts to acknowledge the
contributions others have made to whatever accomplishment I may have achieved in
life.
Selective Bibliography
lists a number of books that have contributed to my understanding of how the
world works.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 1: Income, Fraud, Corruption, and Efficiency
George H. Blackford © 2009, last updated 5/1/2014
There’s class
warfare, all right, but it’s my class, the rich class,
that’s making war, and we’re winning.
Warren E. Buffett
Changes in the economic landscape over the forty years
leading up to the 2007 financial crisis are astounding. This is particularly true when it comes to changes in
the tax code. The maximum marginal income tax was reduced from
70% to 35%, the maximum capital gains tax from
28% to 15.7%, the maximum corporate profits tax from
50% to 34%, the maximum tax on dividends from
70% to 15%, and the maximum marginal estate tax from
70% to
35%. At the same time, payroll taxes were increased as
were taxes on cigarettes, alcohol, and other sales and excise taxes
as government fees and fines and the tuition at public colleges and
universities were increased as well. All of these changes have made our
system of government finance more
regressive—that is, they increased the proportion of
income taken by the government from low and middle-income groups relative to
the proportion taken from upper-income groups. (PCCW)
Changes in the area of market regulation have been particularly
dramatic as well. Much of our regulatory system had been dismantled, either through
legislative changes, deliberate under funding of the regulatory agencies, or through the appointment of individuals to head these
agencies who did not believe in regulating markets and were willing to restrict the enforcement of existing regulations. (Frank
Kuttner
Amy
NYT
Bair)
A
third area of economic policy in which there have been profound changes is in the area of international finance
and trade. Of particular importance was the abandonment in 1973 of the
managed international exchange system set up by the
Bretton Woods Agreement in 1944 and replacing it with what became known as
the
Washington Consensus which championed unrestricted international finance
and trade. This eventually led to
innumerable bilateral trade agreements negotiated with China since
Nixon's historic visit in 1972, the
North American Free Trade Agreement in 1994, and our joining the
World Trade Organization in 1995. (Mavroudeas
Stiglitz
Galbraith
Reinhart
Philips
Morris
Eichengreen
Rodrik)
All of
these changes were championed in the name of economic efficiency and
have, in fact, made it possible for countless individuals to amass huge
amounts of wealth over the past forty years. What’s wrong with that? Haven’t
we all benefited from the generation of all that wealth? Well, not exactly.
It is
instructive to look at how the distribution of income has changed since the
onset of the changes in economic policy mentioned above.
Bottom 90%
Figure 1.1 shows the average real income, both including and excluding capital
gains, measured in 2012 prices, of all families in the bottom 90% of the
income distribution in the United States from 1917 through 2012. In 2012 this
group consisted of 145 million families that received an income (including
capital gains) of $113,820 or
less. The average income for this group was $30,997 in 2012.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
It is clear from Figure 1.1 that the 90% of the families at the bottom of the income
distribution did not benefit at all from the increase in income that occurred
from 1973 through 2012. While the average real income of this group rose
dramatically from 1933 through 1973, increasing by a factor of 5, it trended downward
from 1973 through the 1980s and didn't start to trend upward again until
1993. This upward trend was short lived, however, as the real income for the
lower 90% began to decrease again after 2000.
The average real income of the bottom 90% of the income
distribution actually fell by 13% during the 39 year period from 1973 through
2012. This 13% decrease provides a stark contrast to the 368%
increase in real income this group experienced in the 39-year period that proceeded 1973.
In absolute terms, average real income increased by $27,985 from 1934 through
1973 and fell by $4,587 from 1973 through 2012. The $30,997 average
income the bottom 90% of the income distribution received in 2012 was actually
less than the $31,006 average this income group received 46 years ago in 1966.
The fall in average real income from 1973
through 2012 received by the bottom 90% of the income distribution is particularly stark in
light of the
104% increase in productivity that took place in the
economy during this period. None of the benefits of this increase in
productivity went to the bottom 90% of the income distribution. (Saez
Gordon
Sum)
As is indicated in Figure 1.2,
the situation was somewhat better for families in the top 90 to 95% of the
income distribution. In 2012, this group consisted of the 8.0 million
families that received an income between $113,820 and $161,438. The 2012
average income for this group was $133,530.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
Like the bottom 90%, the average real income of this group
rose dramatically from 1933 through 1973, increasing by a factor of 3.75. After 1973, its
average income leveled off but began an upward trend in 1982 that peaked in
2000 and again in 2007. It then receded somewhat by 2012. While the average real income of this top 90 to 95%
of the population did increase by 25% from 1973 through 2012, this increase
for that 39-year period was a mere fraction of the 251% increase this group
experienced during the 39 years that proceeded 1973 and a third
($26,704) of the $76,375 increase this group received in absolute terms during
this 39-year period.
The pattern in Figure 1.2
repeats itself in Figure 1.3 for the next 4% of the income distribution. In 2012,
this group consisted of 6.4 million families that received between
$161,438 and
$393,941, and the 2012 average income for this group was $226,405. The
44%
increase in real income for this group for the 39-year period following 1973
was, again, far less than the 187% increase for this group during
the 39-year period before 1973
and only 68% ($69,669) of the $102,127 increase they had
received in absolute terms during this period.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
It's not until we get to the top 1% of the income
distribution that this pattern changes, though not everyone in this group
benefited equally. Figure 1.4 shows the average income of the top 99.0 to 99.5% of the
income distribution. In 2012, this group consisted of 803,405 families that
received between $393,941 and $611,805 with an average income of $477,738.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
The average real income of this group increased by
74%
during the 39-year period from 1973 through 2012, a significant improvement
over lower-income groups. Even though this is less than half of the 165% increase this group
received in the 40-year period preceding 1973, the $203,097 increase in real
income that took place from 1973 through 2012 is at least greater than the
$171,155 increase in real income that this group received from 1934 through
1973.
It's not until we get to the top 1/2 of the top 1%, however, that we come to the first income group that unambiguously
benefited from the changes in tax, deregulatory, and international policies
wrought by the policy changes that have taken place during the past forty years.
Figure 1.5 through Figure 1.7
break down the top half of the top1% of the income distribution into three
Groups:
Figure 1.5 shows the average income of the top 99.5 to 99.9% of the
income distribution. In 2012, this group consisted of 642,724 families that
received incomes between $611,805 and $1,906,047 with an average income of
$969,544.
Figure 1.6 shows the average income of the top 99.9 to 99.99% of the
income distribution. In 2012, this group consisted of 144,613 families that
received incomes between $1,906,047 and $10,256,235 with an average income of
$3,661,347.
Figure 1.7 shows the average income of the top 0.01% of the income
distribution. In 2012, this group consisted of 16,068 families with incomes
equal to or above $10,256,235 with an average income of $30,785,699.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
Here are the true benefactors of the changes in tax,
deregulation, and international trade policies over the past forty years.
While the average real income of the bottom 90% of the population fell from
$36 thousand a year in 1973 to $31 thousand a year in 2012, the average real
income of the top 0.5% of the population more than tripled:
For the top
99.5-99.9% it went from $426 thousand to $970
thousand a year, a $544 thousand increase compared to a $231 thousand increase
from 1934 through 1973.
For the top 99.9-99.99% it went from $971 thousand to
$3.7 million a year, a $2.7 million increase compared to a $402 thousand
increase from 1934 through 1973.
And for the top .01% it went from $4.5 million to $30.8
million a year, a $26.3 million increase compared to a $1.9 million increase
from 1934 through 1973, all measured in 2012 dollars.
The relative magnitudes of the numbers
involved can be seen in Figure 1.8 which plots the average incomes
(including capital gains) of the various income
groups from 1913 through 2011 on the same scale.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
This is what the changes in economic policy in the name of
free-market capitalism and economic efficiency over the past forty years have
led to, namely, a huge windfall for the upper 0.5% of the income distribution,
a net loss for the bottom 90% of
the income distribution, and relatively little if anything for the 90-99.5% of the income
distribution in between. (Piketty
Saez
Gordon
Sum) What's more, the situation is even worse
for those families at the bottom 90% of the income distribution than the
above numbers indicate.
The average income of the bottom 90% would have fallen even further than the
13% indicated in Figure 1.1 were it not for the fact that the
percentage of women who participate in the labor force has increased over
30% since 1973. This suggests that the number of two
income families in the bottom 90 percent of the income distribution must have
increased significantly during this period as mothers were forced to leave
their children to the care of others and enter the labor force in order to
maintain their family's standard of living.
When this is combined with a more highly regressive tax
structure—higher payroll taxes, excise taxes, fines and fees, and higher
tuition at public colleges and universities—it is clear that the 90% of the
population at the bottom of the income distribution is significantly worse off
today than it was forty years ago.
The effects of changes in regulatory policy began to
manifest themselves early in the1980s after the
Depository Institutions Deregulation and Monetary Control Act of 1980
and
Garn–St. Germain Depository Institutions Act were
passed. These acts 1) lessened the capital and reserve requirements of banks,
2) provided mechanisms to assist failing banks rather than closing them down,
3) phased out interest rate ceilings on bank deposits, and 4) expanded the kinds of
loans
thrifts (savings
and loans and
savings banks) could make so as to allow them to become
more like
commercial banks. (FDIC)
The purpose of these acts was to enhance the level of competition in the
financial markets in order to improve the economic efficiency in these
markets. This is not exactly how this grand experiment in
deregulation worked out.
The early 1980s was a particularly ominous time to
deregulate the savings and loans. At the end of the 1981 recession 10% of
the savings and loans were
insolvent on an accounting basis, and institutions that
had no
tangible equity at all controlled 35% of the industry's
assets. (Black
FDIC)
These savings and loans—with their federally insured deposits—were allowed to
compete on an equal footing with the rest of the financial system in spite of the fact that insolvent financial institutions have
nothing to lose by rolling the dice and betting the farm on high stakes
investments in trying to recoup their losses. After all, if they win they
keep it all. If they lose, they just increase their insolvency, and since
they were bankrupt to start with, they are no worse off than they were
before. Their investors and taxpayers take the increased losses if they lose,
not the owners and managers of the savings and loans. (Garcia)
What's more, the reduced regulation and supervision created
innumerable opportunities to exploit the system through fraud. As a result,
the character of the savings and loan industry changed after deregulation as a
new breed of owners, such as
Charles H. Keating and
Hal Greenwood Jr., began to shift out of home mortgages
and into commercial real estate loans, direct investments in real estate
projects, junk bonds and other securities, and innumerable other risky areas where the potential
for fraud abounds—areas they had been barred from entering since the 1930s as
a result of the lessons learned from the 1920s. (FDIC
Black
Akerlof
Stewart)
There was a virtual explosion in
Acquisition, Development, and Construction (ADC) loans
issued by savings and loans following deregulation whereby real estate
developers were allowed to borrow money for a project with no interest or
principal payments for three years. The savings and loans added huge fees to
these loans, which they booked as income in the year the loans were made.
The interest was also booked as income as it accrued over the three years of
the loan even though no interest was paid. This led, through the magic
of accounting, to huge paper profits out of which the owners and managers of
the savings and loans paid themselves huge dividends, salaries, and bonuses in
real cash even though no cash had been
received for fees or interest owed.
What happened when the loans came due and the developers couldn't pay?
No problem. The savings and loans just refinanced the loans, added more fees
and interest to the principal, booked more paper fee and interest income, and
paid themselves more dividends, salaries, and bonuses in real cash. And they
were allowed to finance all of this through brokered deposits—federally
insured certificates of deposit that were sold by brokerage firms, such as
Merrill Lynch, to investors all over the country. The
money from federally insured brokered deposits allowed the savings and loans
to expand their deposit base, expand their ADC loans, finance innumerable
other fraudulent schemes, increase their paper profits, and to come up with
the real cash necessary to finance the huge payments of dividends, salaries,
and bonuses that their managers and owners took out of these institutions. (Black
Akerlof
Stewart
FDIC)
While this was going on, the inflow of credit into a number of regional commercial
real estate markets that accompanied this expansion of savings and loan
activity, mostly in the Southwest and Northeast, started
speculative
booms in these markets. As these bubbles
developed, the fraudulently managed institutions began to threaten
the honestly managed institutions—not just among the savings and loans
but among the savings and commercial banks as well. Fraudulently managed
savings and loans bid fiercely for brokered deposits as they bid up
the rates paid on these deposits. This, in turn, increased costs in the
entire financial system as the fraudulently managed savings and
loans dug the hole deeper for everyone. Honestly managed institutions
that were forced to, or were naively willing to invest in the booming
commercial real estate markets made the situation worse.
ADC scams were not the only scams that followed in the wake
of the deregulation of the early 1980s. Deregulation made it possible
for
Michael Milken and other corporate raiders of the 1980s to finance their
leveraged buyouts and hostile takeovers by funneling the junk bonds they
issued into captive savings and loans as they used the assets of the target
companies as collateral for the junk bonds they issued. The proceeds
from the sale of those bonds were then used not only to payoff the existing
stockholders but to pay huge dividends and bonuses to the raiders themselves
as the companies taken over were driven into bankruptcy along with the savings
and loans that financed them.
As the
speculative bubbles in the markets fueled by ADC scams burst
and the companies taken over in junk bond scams began to go bankrupt toward the
end of the 1980s and into the 1990s, the result was the first major financial crisis in the
United States since the
Great Depression. (FDIC)
In the end, some 1,300 savings institutions failed, along with 1,600
banks. That amounted to almost a third of all savings institutions along with
10% of all banks in existence at the time.
By comparison, only 243 banks failed between 1934 and 1980.
In addition, some 300 fraudulently run savings and loans that were nothing
more than
Ponzi schemes failed at the peak of this disaster.
In the end, the corporate raiders and owners and managers
of the savings and loans walked away with billions, and the tax payers took
the losses. It costs the
American taxpayer
$130 billion to reimburse the depositors in these failed institutions. In addition,
the resulting financial
crisis was a precursor to the
1990-1991 recession. (Black
FDIC
Krugman
Akerlof
Stewart)
While the number of banks that failed during this crisis
was only a third of the number that failed during the Great Depression, the
extraordinary nature of the
savings and loan crisis
is indicated by the graph constructed by the
FDIC
that is displayed in Figure 1.9. This chart shows the number of FDIC insured commercial
and savings banks that failed each year from 1934 through 1995. While it
includes only the 1,600 FDIC insured institutions that failed and does not
include the 1,300 failed savings and loans insured by the
FSLIC,
it clearly indicates the degree of stability in the system since the end of
World War II through the 1970s before the era of deregulation began in
earnest, and the degree to which deregulation in the 1980s destabilized the
system.
Source:
FDIC
While there was an
attempt by Congress to reregulate the
financial markets in the late 1980s and early 1990s, and taxes were raised
somewhat during the late Bush I and early Clinton administrations, (TF
TAP) the cat was out of the bag. The fortunes made by
those who looted the savings and loans during the 1980s clearly demonstrated
how lower tax rates on unearned and ultra high incomes combined with a lack of
oversight on the part of government regulators made it possible for fortunes
to be made by those willing to bend or ignore the law. Even though over a
thousand individuals associated with the savings and loan debacle were
convicted of felonies, most walked away with their fortunes intact. (Black
Akerlof
Stewart) This was the lesson learned by those at the
top of the economic food chain, and this same lesson was drawn from the
experiences in other industries as well.
Throughout the 1980s, fortunes were made through
junk bond financing of
hostile takeovers and
leveraged buyouts that led to the dissolution of
American companies, repression of wages, the looting of corporate
pension funds and other assets, and the outsourcing of American jobs overseas
and to Mexico. (Stewart
Smith) Usury laws were repealed throughout the
country, and credit card companies were allowed to charge exorbitant interest
rates, exact unreasonable fees, and to manipulate payment dates and the dates at
which payments were recorded to force customers to pay late charges
even though they had mailed their payments on time. (PRIG) At the same time, credit card companies devised elaborate schemes to lure
naive and financially unsophisticated customers deeper and deeper into debt.
(Frontline
MSN)
With so much money involved, the lack of government
regulation allowed the entire fiduciary structure of our economic and
political systems to become corrupted. Throughout the 1980s and 1990s
stockholders lost control of corporations as the corporate governance
structure broke down. Boards of directors became vassals of their CEOs, and
management salaries and bonuses soared to astronomical levels. The major
accounting firms found they could make more money advising corporations how to
make paper profits in order to justify increases in management salaries and bonuses than
they could by providing independent audits of companies' books for
stockholders. Brokerage firms found they could make more money hyping
worthless mutual funds and internet, energy, and telecom stocks than they
could by providing sound investment advice to their clients. Investment banks
found it more profitable to dissolve their partnerships, become corporations,
and speculate for their own account with investors' money than to
provide underwriting and advisory services to their clients. (Bogle
Galbraith
Stewart
Baker
Kuttner
Phillips)
All of this involved huge conflicts of interest between
corporation and mutual fund managers and the stockholders these managers are
supposed to serve, accounting firms and the investing public the accounting
firms are supposed to serve, brokerage firms and the investors the brokerage
firms are supposed to serve, and investment banks and the businesses the
investment bankers are
supposed to serve. These conflicts of interest contributed directly
to the
Drexel Burnham Lambert,
Charles Keating,
Michael Milken,
Ivan Boesky, and other
insider trading,
junk bond, and
Savings and Loan frauds that were a direct cause of the
junk bond, and
commercial real estate bubbles of the 1980s, the
bursting of which was a precursor to the
1990-1991 recession. They also contributed directly to
the
HomeStore/AOL,
Enron,
Global Crossing, and
WorldCom frauds that were a direct cause of the
dotcom and
telecom bubbles of the 1990s, the bursting of which led
to the
2001 recession.
In addition, throughout this entire period, antitrust laws
were ignored as corporations were allowed to merge into mega institutions with
overwhelming economic and political power. Laws against interstate banking
were repealed in 1994, (IBBEA)
and as the banking industry began to concentrate its power, key regulatory
constraints on the financial system were removed in 1999 with the repeal of
the
Glass-Steagall prohibition against commercial
bank holding companies becoming conglomerates that
provide both
commercial and
investment banking services along with insurance and
brokerage services. (FSMA)
In 2000, the
Commodity Futures Modernization Act which blocked
attempts to regulate the
derivatives markets was passed.
These changes made possible the accumulation of wealth in
the 1980s, 1990s, and 2000s at levels that were heretofore unimaginable.
Along with that wealth came unimaginable levels of economic and political
power. And along with that power came a virtual collapse of integrity in our
financial and political systems. In the wake of the
dotcom and
telecom bubbles bursting and the collapse of the
HomeStore/AOL,
Enron,
Global Crossing, and
WorldCom frauds, the mega banks and accounting firms
that facilitated these frauds found they could make hundreds of billions of
dollars by
securitizing
subprime mortgages. This
discovery set in motion a set of forces that drove our economic system—along
with that of the entire world—headlong into a catastrophe of epic proportions.
Securitizing subprime mortgages
became so profitable that by the early 2000s there were not enough qualified
subprime borrowers to meet the demands of the securitizers.[1.1]
Rather than cut back their operations, predatory mortgage originators (such as
Washington Mutual,
Countrywide,
IndyMac,
New Century,
Fremont Investment & Loan, and
CitiFinancial) talked millions of naive people into
applying for subprime mortgages by misrepresenting the nature of these
mortgages. The most serious misrepresentation was to offer borrowers an
adjustable rate, negative amortization mortgage with an
unreasonably low
teaser rate without explaining the effect on their
monthly payment when the initial rate adjusted to the market rate. Using this
and other ploys, borrowers who qualified for modest subprime mortgages at
reasonable subprime rates, were talked into applying for exorbitant subprime
mortgages at rates they could not afford. Even borrowers who qualified for
modest prime rate mortgages at reasonable prime rates, were talked into
applying for exorbitant subprime mortgages they could not afford. At the same
time, borrowers not qualified for any kind of mortgage at all were approved
for subprime mortgages. (Senate
FCIC
WSFC
Spitzer)
Next, in order to sell these mortgages it was necessary for
mortgage originators to obtain appraisals of the underlying properties
consistent with the values of the mortgages being originated. To obtain these
appraisals mortgage originators shopped around for appraisers who would write
consistent appraisals and shunned appraisers who would not. This guaranteed
rising incomes for appraisers that cooperated with the mortgage originators
and falling incomes for those that did not. At the same time, some
lenders setup in-house mortgage appraisal subsidiaries so as to guarantee
the kinds of appraisals they wanted. The result was a systematic upward
bias in real-estate appraisals, and the flow of funds into the real estate
sector led to a systematic upward bias in housing prices.
(FCIC
WSFC)
As it became more difficult to find subprime borrowers, the
securitizers turned to
alt-A borrowers. At this point real-estate speculators
got into the act. As housing prices rose, speculators discovered they could
get
alt-A mortgages with little or no money down and
without any verification of the assets, income, or employment status they
reported on the applications for these loans. These
no-doc loans, as they were called in the beginning,
were soon to become known as
ninja loans—short for No Income, No Job, and no Asset
loans—or just plain
liar loans. As a result, a host of speculators took out alt-A mortgages knowing
that if the prices of their properties
increased they would profit greatly, and if the prices of
their properties went down they could walk away from these mortgages with
little or no loss to themselves. When such financing was combined with
fraudulently obtained appraisals, many speculators were able to walk away from
their loans with a profit without making a single payment on their mortgage. (T2P
Senate
FCIC
WSFC)
Firms that securitize mortgages were the next link in the
financial food chain that fed off the subprime and alt-A mortgages. In
order for investment banks and other firms that securitized mortgages to sell
the Mortgage Backed Securities (MBSs)
at the highest possible price
they had to receive the highest possible ratings from a
bond rating agency. To accomplish this, the
securitizers followed
the lead of the mortgage originators to steer their business to bond rating
agencies that gave them the highest ratings and away from those that gave them
lower ratings. In this way the companies that securitized mortgages were able to get the three major bond rating agencies (Moody’s,
Standard and Poor’s, and
Fitch) to give
triple-A ratings to mortgage backed securities even
though the rating agencies had no creditable basis on which to rate these securities. (House
FCIC
WSFC)
From 2002 through 2007, literally millions of fraudulent
obtained subprime and alt-A mortgages provided the collateral for trillions of dollars
of Mortgage Backed Securities (MBSs) that were spread throughout the financial
system of the entire world. (T2P
FCIC
WSFC) As these toxic MBSs spread
around the world—as well as into banks, insurance companies, pension funds,
money market funds, mutual funds, and institutional endowment funds at
home—hundreds of billions of dollars were paid out in salaries, bonuses, and
dividends to those who participated in the securitization process. Even
the managers of the banks, insurance companies, and mutual and endowment funds
that bought these toxic assets—and whose stock holders eventually
suffered losses as a result—were paid billions of dollars as their paper profits grew
along with the housing bubble.
Huge fortunes were amassed as this process
grew beyond all bounds of reason, and as the fraud grew in the subprime and
alt-A mortgage markets the
officials in control of the federal government during the Bush II
administration did nothing to stop it. When state or local authorities
complained to the federal government about the predatory lending practices in
their communities, not only did the
Federal Reserve—which had the absolute authority under
the
Home Ownership and Equity Protection Act (HOEPA) to
stop these practices (Natter
WSFC)—do nothing to clamp down on
the predatory practices in the mortgage market, the Bush II Justice
Department actually went to court to keep state and local authorities from
regulating this market. (Spitzer
FCIC
WSFC) As a result, no restraints were placed on the
mortgage originators, securitizers, or bond rating agencies as the entire
securitization process became corrupted.
The resulting housing bubble grew dramatically in the early
2000s, and as with all speculative bubbles, it was only a matter
of time before it burst. By
the time it did, $10
trillion worth of mortgages on residential properties with inflated prices
were created that could not sustain their value. To make things worse,
virtually all of the worst of the worst mortgages—the fraudulently obtained
subprime and alt-A mortgages—were bundled into
Mortgage
Backed Securities and sold all over the world, and
over half of the triple-A rated tranches of those MBSs ended up on the books of our own financial
institutions—on the books of investment and commercial banks, money
market funds, mutual funds, pension funds, and insurance companies throughout
the country. (NYU)
As housing prices began to fall, the Mortgage Backed Securities that were created
while housing prices were driven up to unsustainable levels lost their value
and the ensuing panic drove all of the investment banks and most of the major
commercial banks in our country into insolvency. To keep the financial system
from collapsing and driving the economy into a depression comparable to that
of the 1930s, the government had to step in and prop up the financial system
with $700 billion in TARP
funds. At the same time, the Federal Reserve was forced to increase
reserve bank credit by over
$1.5 trillion dollars in order to end the resulting run on the financial system. In
the meantime, the unemployment rate hit
10%; trillions of
dollars of wealth held by insurance companies, mutual funds, pension funds,
and 401Ks evaporated, and the financial and international exchange systems of
the entire world were destabilized as a worldwide economic crisis
followed in the wake of this disaster. (Stiglitz
NYU
FCIC
WSFC)
The securitization of fraudulently obtained subprime and
alt-A mortgages in the early to mid 2000s was, undoubtedly, the greatest fraud in history, one that sent
shockwaves throughout the entire world. Those who bought homes during the
housing bubble facilitated by this fraud, whose pension plans were invested in the
toxic assets created as a result of this bubble, who had a stake in
the endowment and mutual funds that invested in these assets, the small investors with 401Ks, those who depend on wages and salaries
for their livelihood and found themselves unemployed as a result of the
economic collapse caused by the bursting of the housing bubble, and those who lost their homes as a
result of the collapsing housing market and the recession that followed were particularly hard hit by the economic catastrophe
that followed in the wake of this disaster. At the same time, many, if
not most of those who
stood at the center of this fraud made fortunes. (FCIC
WSFC)
The same is true of the economic disasters that followed
the hostile takeover/leverage buyout craze and the savings and loan fiasco of
the 1980s and the dotcom and telecom bubbles of the late 1990s and early
2000s. Huge profits, bonuses, and windfall gains were generated as asset
prices were bid up in the process of creating these speculative bubbles, and
all of these bubbles were precursors to economic catastrophes. (Stewart
FCIC
WSFC) The extent to which this is so is shown in
Figure 1.10through Figure 1.12.
Figure 1.10 provides a breakdown of the share of total income
(including capital gains) that went
to the top 10% of the income distribution from 1913 through 2010. This graph shows the relative
stability of the share of total income of the top 90-99% of the income
distribution since1945 compared to that of the top 1%. It also shows the
volatility of the share of total income that went to the top 1% before 1945
and after 1980 compared to the relative stability of the share this group
received in the period of restrictive financial regulation from 1945 to 1980.
Of particular interest is the way in which the volatility of the top 1% is
tied to speculative bubbles.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
The extent to which the top 1% of the income distribution
benefited from these bubbles is clearly shown in Figure 1.10 by:
-
the 53% increase in income share this group received
during the
1921-1926 real estate bubble and the 1926-1929 stock
market bubble that led up to the
Great Crash of 1929 and the
Great Depression of the 1930s,
-
the 55% increase in income share this group received
during the 1981-1988
junk bond, and
commercial real estate bubbles of the 1980s that led
up to savings and loan crisis and the
1990-1991 recession,
-
the 51% increase in income share this group received
during the 1994-2000
dotcom and
telecom bubbles that led up to the
stock market crash of 2000 and the
2001 recession, and
-
the 39% increase in income share this group received
during the 2002-2007 housing bubble that led up to the
Great Crash of 2008 and the worldwide economic crisis
we are in the midst of today.
Similarly, Figure 1.11 shows the amount of income received in the form of capital
gains as a percent of total income from 1916 through 2012. This figure displays a pattern similar to that in
Figure 1.10 with relatively little volatility in the percent of total
income received in the form of capital gains during the period of restrictive
financial regulation from 1945 to 1980 compared to the preceding and following
periods. While the 1986 spike in this graph conflates the effects of the
anticipated 1987 increase in the capital gains tax with
the effects of the stock
market and commercial real estate bubbles of the 1980s, there were no capital
gains tax increases in the 1920s, 1990s, or 2000s.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
The increase in capital gains by fully 6% of total income
in the 1920s, 1990s, and 2000s depicted in Figure 1.11 clearly shows the effects of speculation on income during
these eras that led to economic catastrophes as those who profited from these
bubbles realized huge capital gains, and it is, perhaps, worth emphasizing
here that these are realized capital gains. When the crash came
there was someone or some institution on the other side of the sale that
generated these realized capital gains
that realized the
loss including pension funds, insurance companies, 401ks, endowment funds, and
taxpayers when depositors and financial institutions were bailed out.
While Figure 1.10 and Figure 1.11 deal with family income,
Figure 1.12 shows how the financial system fared through the housing
bubble of the 2000s both in nominal terms and as a percent of GDP.
Source:
Economic Report of the President, 2012
(B91PDF|XLS);
Bureau of Economic Analysis
(1.2.5).
Of particular interest in Figure 1.12 is the 163% increase in financial sector profits
from 2000 through 2006 following
passage of the
Financial Services Modernization Act in 1999 and the
Commodity Futures Modernization Act in 2000. These two
acts, combined with the refusal by the Bush II administration and the
Greenspan Federal Reserve to enforce what little financial regulation
remained gave the non-depository financial institutions a free hand to do
just about whatever they wanted to do in the world of finance. What they
wanted to do was securitize millions of fraudulently obtained subprime and
alt-A mortgages and sell those mortgages all over the world. In the process
they accumulated over a trillion dollars in additional profits from 2001
through 2007 in excess of what they would have made if there had been no
housing bubble and their profits had stayed at their 2000 level.
Deregulation of the financial markets was done in the name
of economic efficiency, but the massive fortunes made in the process of
creating the dotcom and housing bubbles had nothing to do with economic efficiency. Nor were there economic efficiencies gained in the fortunes
made in the commercial real estate and junk bond bubbles created during the
savings and loan fiasco or in the leverage buyout/hostile takeover craze of
the 1980s or in the credit card predation that has grown in such immense
proportions during the past thirty years.
These fortunes were amassed in the process of squandering
our economic resources on a massive scale as companies were driven dangerously
into debt through leveraged buyouts and hostile takeovers or in attempting to
avoid such takeovers; funds were directed into sham internet companies, and
resources were directed into the production of redundant telecom facilities
and innumerable real estate projects that sat empty as the bubbles burst and
millions of people lost their jobs, their homes, their pensions, their life
savings, and their hopes and dreams for the future in the wake of the economic
catastrophes that followed.
Economic efficiency means producing more with a given
amount of resources toward the end of improving human well being. It’s not
about transferring income and wealth from the bottom of the income distribution to the
top. This transfer of income and wealth may seem efficient from the perspective of those
at the top. It is clearly not efficient from the perspective of the vast
majority of the population at the bottom. The suggestion that the policy
changes that have occurred over the past forty years—policy changes that led
to a collapse of the fiduciary structure of society, gave rise to massive
frauds, generated massive rewards for those who perpetrated these frauds, and
harmed the vast majority of the population to the benefit of the few—have
somehow improved the economic efficiency of the American economy is absurd.
Over 8 million people had lost their jobs by 2010 as a
result of the housing
bubble bursting in 2006, and 4 million families lost their homes. In 2010,
another 4.5 million families were seriously behind in their mortgage payment
or in the process of foreclosure. “In the fall of 2010, 1 in every 11
outstanding residential mortgage loans in the United States was at least one
payment past due but not yet in foreclosure.” Nationwide, 10.8 million
families—22.5% of all families with mortgages—owed more on their mortgages in
2010 than their houses were worth. In Florida, Michigan, and Nevada more than
50% of all mortgages were underwater, and it is projected that by the time
this crisis is over as many as 13 million families could lose their homes. (FCIC)
These numbers are the end result of the economic policy
changes we have made over the past forty years, and there’s nothing efficient
about them.
[1.1] The
basic mechanism by which securitization is accomplished, while complicated
in practice, is fairly simple in principle:
First, the originator or sponsor of the securitization process forms a
special corporation—generally referred to as a
Special Purpose Vehicle or SPV—for the purpose of purchasing the assets to
be securitized.
Second, the sponsor sells the assets to be securitized to the SPV.
Third, the
SPV holds these assets in trust pledging the revenue from the assets
as collateral for the securities issued by the SPV. The securities (bonds) issued by
the SPV are referred to as
Asset Backed Securities or ABSs since they are collateralized (backed) by
the assets held in trust by the SPV. When the assets that back the SPV’s
securities are mortgages, these securities are referred to as
Mortgage Backed Securities or MBSs.
Finally, the proceeds from the sale of the ABSs issued by the SPV are used to
pay the sponsor for the assets it sold to the SPV.
The sponsor makes money off this process by being able
to sell its assets at a higher price to the SPV than it would otherwise be
able to obtain and by charging the SPV an initial fee
for setting up the securitization process. The sponsor may also receive a continuing
management fee for managing the assets and liabilities of the SPV.
The
above explanation has provided only the basics for understanding what
securitization is about, and we will return to this subject in Chapter 8. For a more detailed explanation that is quite
readable see the
Financial Crisis Inquiry Commission’s
Final Report of the National Commission on the Causes of the Financial and
Economic Crisis in the United States.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 2: International Finance and Trade
George H. Blackford ©
2009, last updated 5/1/2014
The
American dollar became
overvalued in the markets for international exchange in the late 1950s
as Europe recovered from the devastation of World War II.[2.1] This problem came to a head in 1973 when the Nixon administration allowed
the 1944
Bretton Woods Agreement to collapse along with its
fixed
exchange rate system and its provisions for
controlling
international capital flows. International
exchange rates have
floated in
unregulated markets ever since. As a result, the international exchange
system has become the largest gambling casino in the history of man.
Financial institutions place trillions of dollars of bets in this casino on a
daily basis as they direct international capital flows throughout the
world. Insiders who gamble in this market can make fortunes, but
when things go wrong, the results can be catastrophic. (Mavroudeas
EPE
Stiglitz
Klein
Johnson Crotty
Bhagwati
Philips
Galbraith
Morris
Reinhart
Kindleberger
Smith
Eichengreen
Rodrik)
There have been four occasions since 1974 where the United States government
has had to step in to bail out American financial institutions that bet wrong
in this casino: The first was in the early 1980s during the
Latin
American Debt Crisis caused by American financial institutions over
extending themselves in making loans to Latin American countries. The second
was in 1994 during the
Mexican Peso
Crisis caused by American financial institutions over extending themselves
in making loans to Mexico. The third was in 1998 when an American hedge fund,
Long Term Capital Management, over extended
itself throughout the entire world during the
Asian Currency Crisis
that precipitated the 1998
Russian Default. The fourth was in 2008 when the world financial
system ground to a halt in the wake of the
Subprime Mortgage Crisis caused by American financial institutions
over extending themselves all over the world in marketing securities backed by fraudulently obtained mortgages.
All of these crises led to economic catastrophes—for the Latin American
countries in the 1980s, for Mexico following the Peso Crisis in 1994, for
Russia and the South and East Asian countries following the 1998 Asian
Currency Crisis, and for most of the world following the worldwide financial
crisis of 2008. At the same time, these crises were preceded by huge paper
profits for the institutions that fostered the speculative bubbles that led to
these crises as well as huge salaries and bonuses for the managers of these
institutions. Those who were able to take advantage of these catastrophes
made fortunes while most everyone else was left holding the bag. This is
especially so for those who rely on wages and salaries for their livelihood,
who are forced to live with the uncertainty and economic losses caused by
these catastrophes, and whose taxes must pay for the economic bailouts that
resulted. (Stiglitz
Klein
Johnson Crotty
Bhagwati
Philips
Galbraith
Morris
Reinhart
Kindleberger
Smith
Eichengreen
Rodrik)
In addition to creating a cycle of international crises and bailouts, the
officials in charge of our government have allowed the American dollar to be
overvalued in international markets for much of the past thirty years. This
act of misfeasance, malfeasance, or just plain incompetence has been so
devastating to our economic system that it will take decades, if not
generations, to repair the damage. (Phillips
Eichengreen)
In theory, the interaction of supply and demand in the markets for
international exchange is supposed to yield an optimal allocation of
international investment, production, and consumption. But this theory
ignores the casino like nature of the foreign exchange markets and the ability
of a country to undervalue
its currency in world markets if left unchallenged to do so.
(Bergsten) In the
real world, a persistent deficit in a country's balance of trade is often far from ideal,
and can have devastating consequences.
When the dollar is overvalued it causes domestic prices to be too
high relative to foreign prices to achieve a balance in trade. The
result is an increasing
deficit
in its balance of trade as
imports
grow more rapidly than
exports. This kind of trade
imbalance places
pressure on wages and prices in the domestic economy as the
under pricing of foreign goods threatens domestic producers with
unfair competition from abroad. (Autor)
The extent to which our trade policies have allowed this to happen is
indicated in Figure 2.1, which show our international
current account balance from 1946 through 2008,
both in terms of absolute dollars and as a percent of GDP. The current
account balance is determined primarily by the difference between the value of
our exports and the value of our imports. As is explained in the
Appendix at the end of this
chapter, it also includes net foreign transfers and the
difference between income earned by Americans on foreign investments and
income earned on domestic investments by foreigners, though these components of
the current account balance are generally quite small compared to the values of exports and imports.
Source:
Economic
Report of the President, 2013 (B103PDF|XLS),
Bureau of Economic Analysis
(1.2.5).
The graphs in this figure clearly show the consequences of our international
policies as we went from a relatively stable balance through 1980 to a $160
billion deficit in 1987 that amounted to 3.4% of GDP. This balance gradually
adjusted through 1991 then fell precipitously to reach a record deficit of
$804 billion in 2006, a deficit equal to 6.0% of GDP.
International exchange rates are supposed to adjust to eliminate this kind of
imbalance, as they seemed to have in the 1980s, but, as was noted above, this will occur
only if a country is not allowed to undervalue its currency in world markets
over time. Figure 2.2 shows the Chinese yuan/dollar exchange rate from 1988
through the first quarter of 2014. Here is a classic example of how unregulated foreign
exchange markets can fail to adjust as they are supposed to. Even though the
trade deficit with China grew from
$68.8 billion in 1999 to
$372.7 billion through 2005, there was virtually no change in the yuan/dollar
exchange rate in spite of this increase.
Source:
Economic Report of the President: 2006 (B110PDF|XLS)
OANDA .
It is worth emphasizing at this point that even though our trade deficit with
China is three times that of our deficit with the rest of Asia, all of Europe,
or with Latin America, the problem is not just with the yuan/dollar exchange
rate. As should be clear from Figure 2.3, the entire structure of US exchange rates
is overvalued
today. The table in this figure shows the US balance of trade with its
major trading partners and with the major trading areas of the world from 2001
through the third quarter of 2009. A clear indication of the degree to
which the entire structure of US exchange rates is too high is given by the
fact that the only entity in this table with which the United States has not had
a consistent negative balance over this nine years is Singapore.
Source:
Economic
Report of the President, 2013
(B105PDF-XLS).
Undoubtedly, some of the deficits exhibited in this table can be explained by
the growing need for U.S. dollars as international reserves held by foreign
countries, but certainly not all.
This situation is unsustainable, and the exchange markets will eventually adjust to
correct this imbalance, but when this kind of imbalance is
allowed to persist for any length of time, the eventual adjustment has the
potential to precipitate a crisis that can lead to an economic disaster—a
disaster that could have been avoided had this kind of imbalance not been
allowed to occur in the first place. (Stiglitz
Galbraith
Reinhart
Eichengreen
Rodrik
Bergsten)
Even more important is the fact that the persistence of this kind of imbalance has
terribly destructive effects on our economy. The result of the unfair competition created by the overvalued US dollar has
been the destruction of entire industries in the United States as much of the
manufacturing sector of our economy has been outsourced to foreign
lands. Particularly hard hit in this regard are the computer and consumer
electronics industries. Equally disturbing is the fact that the technologies
necessary to produce these goods have been shipped abroad as well. These
technologies are essential to the increases in productivity necessary to
improving our economic well being, but once the industries that embody these
technologies are gone, they may be gone for a very long time. Even if the value
of the dollar were to fall in the near future, it would take years to
reconstitute many of these industries and to embed in the American economy the
requisite capital and technologies needed to produce these goods. (Phillips
Eichengreen
Rodrik
Palley)
The trade deficits cause by an overvalued dollar have another disturbing
consequence. When we have a deficit in our balance of trade, the demand for
dollars in the exchange markets to finance our exports is less than the supply
of dollars made available in these markets through the purchase of our
imports. This difference shows up as a deficit in our current account.[2.2] When
such a deficit exists, foreigners end up accumulating more dollars than they
need to purchase the amount of our exports they are willing to purchase at
existing exchange rates.
At this point, foreigners have a choice: They can either refuse to accept
more dollars at the existing exchange rates and, thereby, force our exchange
rates down—thus, stimulating our exports and inhibiting our imports until a
current account
balance is obtained at a lower exchange rate—or they can use the excess
dollars they are accumulating to purchase assets from Americans in the
international capital markets. The assets purchased are essentially any
asset an American is willing to sell for dollars but primarily consist of financial assets
such as government and corporate securities.
The balance in the international capital market is referred to as our
capital account balance, and this balance must, by definition, exactly
offset our current account balance—that is, a deficit in our current account
must, by definition, be offset by a surplus in our capital account that is exactly equal to
the deficit in our current account. (Ott
B103PDF-XLS)
When foreigners buy American assets in the international capital market, they
are, in effect, investing in the United States. At the same time, to the
extent these assets are government and corporate bonds, they are lending us
money. To the extent these assets are not government and corporate bonds
they must be corporate stocks, American businesses, real estate, or other
nonfinancial
assets in the United States. This means that the greater our current account deficit, the grater
our capital account surplus must be, and, as a result, the
current account deficits displayed in Figure 2.1 above indicate the
rate at which we were driving ourselves into debt or selling our companies and
other assets off to foreigners.
Figure 2.4 shows the
Net International Investment Position of the United States from 1976
through 2013, both in terms of absolute dollars and as a percent of GDP,
where Net International Investment is the difference between the value of the
assets Americans own in foreign lands and the value of the assets foreigners
own in the United States.
It shows how the surpluses in our capital account that correspond to the
deficits in our current account have accumulated. The extent to which this difference is made up of debt
obligations—mostly corporate and government bonds—represents the net debt
Americans owe to foreigners.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis
( 1.2.5). (1)
It is clear from this figure that there has been a fundamental change in our
indebtedness to foreigners as a result of our free trade policies. Since
1976, our Net International Investment Position has gone from a positive $458
billion as measured in 2005 dollars (8.9% of our GDP) to a negative $2.3
trillion by 2010 (17.6% of our GDP). At the end of World War II the United
States was the largest creditor nation in the world, but as a result of the
over valuation of the dollar, this ended in 1985 when we became a net debtor
to the rest of the world. As a result of our trade policies we have
increased our net debt
and sold off American assets to foreigners to
the tune of some $2.7 trillion since 1984,
and, in the process,
we
went from being the world's largest creditor
nation to the world's largest debtor nation. (BEA XLS
IMF)
For a country to accumulate foreign debt as it runs a persistent trade deficit
is not, in itself, a bad thing. The United States followed this course
throughout the nineteenth century and into the twentieth, but throughout that
period we used that debt to import capital goods and foreign technology. We invested in
public education and other public infrastructure that led to tremendous increases in
productivity in agriculture and manufacturing. We built national railroad and
telegraph systems and created steel, oil, gas, electrical, automobile,
and aviation industries. Our trade policies protected our manufacturing
industries as our economy grew more rapidly than our foreign debt, and as
Europe squandered its resources in senseless conflicts, by the end of World
War I the United States had become a net creditor nation and the economic powerhouse
of the world.
This is not the course we have followed over the past thirty years. We
have exported rather than imported capital goods and technology, and, in return, we
borrowed to import consumer goods. We invested less in our public
education, transportation, and other public infrastructure systems than other
countries have invested, rather
than more. While we made huge advances in the electronics and computer
industries over the last forty years, our trade policies are not protecting
our manufacturing industries, and we have outsourced the manufacturing and
technological components of these industries to foreign lands. As a result,
our economy is not growing more rapidly than our foreign debt, and it is the
United States that is squandering its resources in senseless conflicts.
This process of rising trade deficits can sustain itself only so long as
foreigners are willing to lend us the dollars to finance these deficits.
This situation is unsustainable, and when
foreigners refuse to continue to do so—as eventually they must if our foreign
debt continues to rise faster than our GDP—the existence of this debt makes us
vulnerable to the same kinds of international financial crises faced by other
countries that have found themselves in a similar situation. (Eichengreen
Rodrik
Galbraith
Reinhart
Philips Stiglitz
Kindleberger
Morris
Klein)
The dramatic
redistribution of income within our society, the breakdown of the fiduciary structure of our economic and
political systems, the increasing prevalence and severity of speculative
bubbles, and the dramatic deterioration of our net international investment
position are all direct results of the economic policy changes that
have led to the deregulation of our economic system over the past forty years.
All of these phenomena are interrelated, and they are also interrelated with
two other phenomena we have experienced in the wake of these policy
changes—namely, the dramatic increase in domestic debt and the
rise in financial and economic instability.
The
exchange rate between the American dollar and a foreign country's currency is
nothing more than the price foreigners must pay in their currencies to
purchase dollars. If the Chinese must pay 10 yuan to purchase one
dollar of our currency, the YUAN/USD exchange rate will be 10y per dollar.
Similarly, if the EURO/USD exchange rate is 0.75 euros per dollar that means
that Europeans
must pay 0.75e to purchase one dollar of our currency. In general, the higher
our
exchange rate the higher the price foreigners must pay in their currencies
to purchase dollars; the lower our exchange rate the lower the price
foreigners must pay in their currencies to purchase dollars.
This
works in reverse, of course, when it comes to us buying foreign currencies. If the YUAN/USD
exchange rate is 10y per dollar then we can purchase 10y for one dollar,
which works out to a price of 10 cents per yuan. If the exchange rate is
5y per dollar we can only purchase 5y for one dollar, which works out to a
price of 20 cents per yuan. In general, the higher the exchange rate the lower the price we
must pay in our
currency for a foreign currency; the lower the exchange rate the higher the
price we must pay in our currency for a foreign currency.
Exchange rates are extremely important in determining the flow of
international trade because if we wish to purchase goods from a foreign
country we must pay for those goods in the currency of that country.
Similarly, if foreigners wish to purchase goods from us they must pay us in
dollars. As a result, the exchange rates between currencies determine the
prices people must pay in their own currencies for the goods
they import from other countries.
To see
how this works, consider a bushel of wheat in China that costs 20y. If the
YUAN/USD exchange rate is 10y per dollar, someone in the United States who
wished to purchase a bushel of Chinese wheat has to come up with $2 to
purchase the 20y necessary to pay the Chinese farmer in yuan. The dollar
price of Chinese wheat in this situation will be $2/bushel. If, instead,
the exchange rate is only 5y per dollar, the American purchaser has to
come up with $4 to purchase the 20y needed to purchase this bushel of wheat.
This means the dollar price
of Chinese wheat will increase to $4/bushel even though the yuan price of
wheat in China hasn't changed. In general, the higher
our exchange rates the lower the prices in dollars we must pay for foreign
goods; the lower our exchange rates the higher the prices in dollars we must
pay for foreign goods.
Again,
this works in reverse when it comes to the Chinese buying from us. If
the price of a bushel of wheat in the United States is $3, and our exchange
rate with China is 10y per dollar, someone in China who wishes to purchase
a bushel of American wheat will have to come up with 30y to
purchase the $3 needed to pay the American farmer in dollars, and the yuan
price of American wheat will be 30y/bushel. But if our
exchange rate falls to 5y per dollar the Chinese importer will have to come
up with only 15y to purchase the $3 needed to purchase the American wheat, and
the yuan price of American wheat will fall to 15y/bushel even though the
dollar price of wheat in the United States hasn't changed.
In general, the higher our exchange rates
the higher the prices foreigners must pay in their currencies for our
goods; the lower our exchange rates the lower the prices foreigners
must pay in their currencies for our goods in their currencies.
The
importance of exchange rates in determining the flow of
imports and exports
between countries should be clear from the above. If our exchange rate is
10y per dollar, it is not cost effective for the Chinese to purchase our
$3/bushel wheat since the yuan price of American wheat is 30y/bushel and the
yuan price of Chinese wheat is only 20y/bushel. But if the exchange
rate is 5y per dollar, the yuan price of American wheat is only 15y/bushel, and
the yuan price of Chinese wheat is still 20y/bushel. Thus, even though it is not cost effective for the Chinese to
purchase American wheat if the exchange rate is 10y per dollar, it is cost
effective for them to do so when the exchange rate is 5y per dollar,
assuming, of course, that it costs less than 5y per bushel to transport wheat
from the United States to China.
Similarly, if the exchange rate were 5y per dollar, it would not be cost effective
for us to buy Chinese wheat since the dollar price of Chinese wheat would be $4/bushel, and it
would only costs us $3/bushel to buy domestically produced wheat. But if
the exchange rate were to increase to 10y per dollar, the dollar price of
Chinese wheat would fall to $2/bushel, and we could save $1 per bushel by buying Chinese wheat
instead of producing our own.
The
point is that exchange rates play a crucial role in determining whether or not
it is profitable for us to import goods from foreign countries or foreigners
to purchase the goods we export: When our exchange rates go up, the
dollar prices of goods produced in foreign countries
go down, and it becomes more profitable for us to import foreign goods; when our exchange rates go down, the dollar prices of goods produce in foreign
countries go up, and it becomes less profitable for us to import foreign goods.
At the same time, when our exchange rates go up, the foreign currency prices
of our goods in foreign countries go up, and it becomes less profitable for
foreigners to purchase our exports; when our exchange rates go down, the
foreign currency prices of our goods in foreign countries go down, and it
becomes more profitable for foreigners to purchase our exports.
The
wage rate is nothing more than the price of labor. As a result, the exchange
rate determines the relative wages between countries in the same way it
determines any other relative price between countries.
If the
price of labor is 40y/hr in China and the exchange rate is 10y per dollar,
it will cost us $4 to purchase the 40y that an hour of labor costs in China.
This means that the dollar price of Chinese labor will be $4/hr.
If the exchange rate is 5y per dollar, it will cost us $8 to purchase
the 40y that an hour of labor costs in China, and the dollar price of Chinese labor will be $8/hr. Thus, an increase in the exchange rate
will decrease the price of foreign labor in terms of dollars, just as it will
decrease any other foreign price in terms of dollars, and a fall in the exchange rate
will increase the price of foreign labor in terms of dollars, just as it will
increase any other foreign price in terms of dollars.
This
brings us to a very important point, namely, that just because the exchange
rate is such that wages are lower in a given country (such as China) when
measured in the same currency (either yuans or dollars) than they are in the
United States, this does not mean that everything will be cheaper to produce
in that country than in the United States. The reason is that the price of
labor is only one of the factors that determine the cost of producing
something. There are other costs as well, in particular, the costs of natural
resources and of capital. In addition, the cost of labor does not depend solely by the
price of labor. It also depends on the
productivity of labor, that is, on the amount of output that can be produce
per hour of labor employed.
The
importance of this
should become clear when we consider that, in spite of the fact wages
are much lower in China than they are in the United States, we do not import wheat from China. The reason is that, in
general, capital equipment is scarce and very expensive in China relative to
labor, including the kinds
of farm equipment we take for granted in the United States. The scarcity of
capital equipment, in turn, means
that much of the work that is done by capital equipment in the United States must
be done by people in China to the effect that more labor is required to
produce a given quantity of a good in China than is required to produce that
same quantity of that good in the United States.
The
fact that it takes more labor to produce a given quantity of wheat in China
than it does in the United States means that the cost of labor in
producing wheat is higher than the dollar price of labor indicates. In
fact, when we combined the cost of labor in China with all of the other costs
of producing wheat, including the cost of farm equipment, transportation,
energy, taxes, etc. we find that, at the existing exchange rate, it
actually costs more to produce a given quantity of
wheat in China than it does in the United
States. This is so even though the dollar price of Chinese labor is
far below the dollar price of American labor. As a result, the price of
Chinese wheat—which is determined by the
total cost of producing wheat, not just the price of labor—when measured in
dollars at the existing exchange rate, is higher than the dollar price of wheat in the United
States, and we do not import wheat from China. Instead, China imports
wheat from us.
It is the dollar prices of foreign produced goods
relative to the dollar prices of domestically produced goods that determines which
goods we import from foreign countries and which goods foreign countries import from us,
not the dollar prices of labor. And the fact that these relative prices are determined by exchange rates means that
in order to understand how imports and exports are determined, we must look
at how exchange rates are determined between countries as well as how prices are determined
within countries. (Smith)
Since a country must pay for the goods it imports in the
currencies of the countries in which its imports are produced, a country’s
imports must be financed in the
foreign exchange market,
that is, in the market in which the currencies of various countries are bought
and sold. The most important source of demand in this
market comes from foreigners who purchase a country's currency in order to
obtain the exchange needed to purchase the country's exports. Similarly, the most important source of supply comes from
a country's importers who sell the country's currency in order
to obtain the foreign exchange needed to finance imports.
When the value of a country's imports is
equal to the value of its exports it can obtain enough foreign exchange in the
foreign exchange market to finance its imports from the sale of its exports.
But if the value of its imports exceeds the value of its exports there will be
a deficit in its
balance of trade, and it will not be able to finance all of its imports in
this way. This deficit must be financed, and one of the ways it can be
financed is from income earned by individuals and institutions in the country
on the investments they have made in foreign countries that are denominated in
the foreign currencies.
When individuals or institutions in a country own
earning assets that are denominated in foreign currencies, the earnings on
those assets can only be spent in the domestic economy if they are converted
into the domestic currency in the foreign exchange market. As they are
converted, they contribute to the supply of foreign exchange available to that
country. By the same token, when individuals or institutions in foreign
countries own earning assets that are denominated in a country's domestic
currency, the earnings on those assets can only be spent in the foreign
countries if they are converted into foreign currencies in the foreign
exchange market. As they are
converted, they contribute to the country's demand for foreign exchange.
A similar situation exists when individuals or
institutions simply transfer funds abroad. When an individual sends
money to a family member abroad or a business transfers funds to a foreign
subsidiary or a government provides aid to a foreign country in the form of
cash it increases the demand for the foreign currency and the supply of the
domestic currency in the foreign exchange market as those funds are converted
into foreign currencies by their recipients. As a result, these kinds of
international transfers of funds contribute to the supply and demand in the
foreign exchange market in the same way international payments of income
contribute to the supply and demand in this market.
A countries net exports—that
is, difference between its exports and its imports—plus its net income
(similarly defined) on foreign investments plus
its net transfers of funds is
referred to as the country's
current account balance. The
significance of this balance is that it defines the extent to which a country
is able to pay for its current imports, current transfers of funds abroad, and
current income earned by
foreigners who hold earning assets denominated the country's currency out of
the foreign exchange it receives from the sale of its current exports, receipt
of current transfers of funds from
foreigners, and its income received from holdings of earning assets denominated in foreign
currencies.
The composition of the current account balance for the
United Sates from 1929 through 2013 is shown in Figure 2.5. The
extent to which our Current Account Balance has been dominated by our
balance of trade
(Net Exports) is clear in this figure. Only during the
Marshall Plan
following World War II have they differed significantly.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis (4.1)
When a country's current account is balanced all of its
current international expenditures can be financed by its current
international receipts of foreign exchange, where its current expenditures and receipts are those
that are generated through the ordinary process of producing goods and earning
income in the international economic system. When there is a deficit in
a country's current account all of the country's current international
expenditures cannot be financed through its current receipts, and when there is a surplus in a country's current account the
country receives more than enough foreign exchange from its current receipts
to finance its current international expenditures.
By definition, one country's current
account deficit is some other country's current account surplus, and countries
with deficits must must finance those deficits if their current account
obligations are to be met. Since current account deficits cannot be
financed through the ordinary process of producing goods, earning income, and
international transfers,
the only way they can be financed is through a transfer of assets from surplus
countries' to deficit countries. These asset transfers are referred to
as
international capital flows, and they represent a willingness of
foreigners in surplus countries to invest in deficit countries—either directly
by purchasing real assets in the country or indirectly by purchasing the
country's financial obligations, usually bonds or other forms of debt.
Foreign investments of this sort can be used to finance a deficit in a
country's current account because foreigners must pay for these investments in
the deficit country's currency just as they must pay for the deficit country's
exports in its currency.
As is
explained in the text, a deficit in a country's
balance of trade or in its current account is not, in itself, a bad thing, but there are two potential
problems when it occurs. The first arises from the fact that while decisions
regarding imports and exports tend to progress relatively slowly over time,
the purchase and sale of financial assets in international markets can be
executed almost instantly. This can lead to serious instability in the markets
for foreign exchange as speculation and the concomitant speculative bubbles
that culminate in financial panics and economic crises are accompanied by, and
are often the result of, dramatic shifts in international capital flows.
The second potential problem that can arise
when foreign investment is used to finance trade deficits has to do with the
way in which these investments can be used to
manipulate exchange rates.
If a country with a trade surplus is willing to make foreign
investments it can accumulate assets in deficit countries
and, thereby, prevent its exchange rates from rising (deficit countries'
exchange rates from falling). This makes it possible for the surplus country
to keep the demand for its exports from falling in response to its surplus.
The risk in doing this is that, because the assets being accumulated are
denominated in foreign currencies, those who accumulate foreign assets in this
way will take a capital loss on these assets in terms of their own currency if and when its exchange rates
eventually rises (foreign rates fall) since these assets will then be worth
less in terms of the domestic currency of the surplus country.
It is worth noting, however, that
this potential for capital loss is not necessarily a deterrent to a country
artificially suppressing its exchange rate in this way. To the extent the
accumulated foreign assets can be transferred to the country's central bank or
to its government, it is the central bank or government that will take the
capital loss when exchange rates eventually adjust rather than those who earn
their incomes in the exporting industries or otherwise benefit from the lower
exchange rate. In addition, as is noted in Chapter 3, a trade surplus makes it
possible for the distribution of income to be concentrated at the top of the
income distribution in that when a country has a surplus in its balance of
trade, full employment can be maintained with a higher concentration of income
than in the absence of a trade surplus. It is also worth noting that, as is
apparent from Figure 2.3, almost all countries have been willing to
take this risk vis-à-vis the American dollar in recent years in order to build
up their international reserves, stimulate their economies, or maintain the
concentration of income within their societies.
Allowing countries to prevent their exchange rates from
rising and, thereby, keeping our exchange rates from falling has led to our
exchange rates being overvalued in the market for foreign exchange for most of
the past thirty years as foreign countries have accumulated surpluses in their
balance of trade while we have accumulated deficits in ours. As a result, foreign goods
have been undervalued in our domestic markets for most of the past thirty
years which has given importers an unfair, competitive advantage in these
markets. This has placed a serious drag on the American economy and has had a
particularly a devastating effect on our manufacturing industries. In
addition, as we will see in Chapter 3,
to the extent this drag has contributed to the need for a rising debt to
maintain employment, it has also contributed to the instability of the American economy.
Endnote
[2.1] See the
Appendix on International Exchange at the end
of this chapter for a discussion of
what it means for the dollar to be overvalued and for an explanation of international exchange rates, financial markets,
and the relationship between international trade
and capital flows.
[2.2] That is, to the
extent this deficit is not offset by net foreign income/transfers. See Appendix: The Foreign Exchange Market
at the end of this chapter.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 3: Mass Production, Income, Exports, and
Debt
George H. Blackford ©
2009, last updated 5/16/2014
The history of economic development over the past four hundred years has been
one of ever increasing output throughout the world as productivity increases in
agriculture, textiles, steel, transportation, manufacturing, and, in today's
world, automation, communication, and information technologies have been made possible through
specialization, the division of labor, and the development of other
mass-production
technologies.
The concept of interchangeable parts along with technological advances in
the machine-tool, steel, and transportation industries, combined with the use of
assembly-line techniques and the development of electrical power and other
utilities have led to a literal explosion in manufacturing since the beginning of the twentieth century. Automobiles, airplanes,
farm and industrial equipment, construction materials, electronic equipment,
home appliances, power tools, medical equipment and supplies, drugs, furniture,
clothing, meat packing, fast foods, canned goods and other processed
foods—virtually all of the goods the vast majority of the people spend
the bulk of their incomes on today and many of the services, such as big-box retail,
financial, and
distribution services, as well—have proved to be amenable to the mass-production
techniques that were developed or refined in the last century.
The process of technological advance and the development of mass-production
techniques holds the potential for dramatic improvements in the economic
wellbeing of the world’s population as ever greater quantities of goods can be
produced with ever smaller amounts of human effort, but there is a catch: In
order to be economically viable, mass production techniques require mass
markets—that is, markets with large numbers of people who have purchasing
power. Otherwise, the mass quantities of goods and services that can be
produced via mass-production techniques cannot be sold. The existence of
mass markets within a society, in turn, depends crucially of the distribution of income within
that society: The less concentrated the distribution of income, the larger the
domestic mass market
will be; the more concentrated the distribution of income, the smaller the
domestic mass market will be.
This brings us to the crux of the problem endemic in the changes in the
distribution of income that have taken place during the past thirty years, namely, that the share of income that went to the
top 1% of the income distribution in the 2000s was twice what it was in the 1960s
and 1970s.
Doubling the income share of the top 1% from approximately
8% in 1980 to 18% in 2007 means the share of the bottom 99% went from 92% to
82%. As a result, the bottom 99% of the income distribution—99 out of 100
families—had, on average, 11% less purchasing power from income relative to the
output produced in 2007 than the bottom 99% had relative to the output produced
in 1980, and as we go down the income scale the reduction in purchasing power
from income becomes more dramatic.
The World Top
Incomes Database shows that the fall in income for the bottom
90%
of the income distribution
from 1980 to 2007 was 20%. This means that in 2007 the
bottom 90%
of the
population—9 out of 10 families—had, on average, 20% less purchasing power from
income relative to the output produced in 2007 than the bottom
90%
had in 1980
relative to the output produced in 1980.
In addition to the decrease in domestic purchasing power from income relative to
the output produced experienced by the vast
majority of the population since 1985, a substantial portion
of the remaining purchasing power generated through the production
of goods and services has been siphoned off by an
increase in imports relative to exports.
As can be seen in Figure 3.1, until 1983 the United States
Current Account Balance
barely exceeded 1% of GDP other than in the aftermath of
World War II. As a result,
changes in imports and exports played a relatively minor role in the development
of mass-production markets in the United States throughout most of the
twentieth century. This changed after 1982 as our current
account deficit (i.e., negative Current Account Balance) grew. While exports remained essentially unchanged from 1980 through 2007, going from
9.8% to 11.5% of GDP, imports increased from 10.3% to 16.4% of GDP. As a
result, our Current Account
Balance went from a 0.3% of GDP surplus to a 4.8% deficit.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis (4.1
1.1.5)
One would expect this kind of structural change, when
combined with the increased concentration of income, to have a disruptive effect
on employment and output as prices and profits fell in those areas that compete
with imports and serve mass markets while prices and profits increased in those
areas that serve the top 1% of the income distribution. But it would seem
that the increase in income concentration and imports has had little effect on
the viability of our domestic mass markets. There has, of course, been a rather devastating effect in the manufacturing
sector of our economy as the decline in the
rust-belt states can attest, but in spite of the losses in manufacturing and
the three minor recessions we experienced from 1980 through 2006,
unemployment and
inflation trended downward over the period as employment and
productivity rose. At the same time, mass market retailers such as
Wall-Mart and Home Depot seem to have thrived.
The purchasing
power necessary to maintain domestic output and employment in our
mass-production society had to come from
somewhere as the incomes of the vast majority of the population fell relative to
the ability to produce and imports rose relative to exports from 1985 through
2006. Given the circumstances, the only place from which it could have come was through the transfer of purchasing power from those
who had it and did not wish to purchase newly produced goods and services
in the quantities needed to maintain our mass-production economy to the vast
majority of the population that was losing purchasing power and
was willing to
purchase newly produced goods in the quantities needed to maintain our
mass-production economy. This is especially so in view of the
almost continuous increase in productivity that
occurred since 1980.
The primary mechanism by which purchasing power is
transferred from those who do not wish to spend to those who do wish to spend is
through the creation of debt, that is, by those who have purchasing power and
are unwilling to use it lending to those who are willing borrow in order to use
it.[3.1]
To the extent borrowed money is used to purchase newly produced goods and
services that would otherwise not have been purchased, an increase in debt leads
to an increase in the demand for goods and services. In so doing,
increasing debt provides a mechanism by which it is possible to maintain mass
markets and full employment as productivity increases, income becomes more
concentrated, and imports increase relative to exports without the need for
prices to adjust to redistribute income[3.2]
or for exchange rates to adjust to reduce imports relative to exports.
The point is,
given the state of mass production technology within our society, the domestic
markets necessary to support full employment could not have been maintained
without an increase in debt as the income transfer to the top 1% and 10% of the income
distribution examined in Chapter 1 took place and, thus, diluted the purchasing power of the rest of
the population relative to the output produced. This is especially so as the situation was made even worse
as imports of mass produced goods increased relative to exports and productivity
increased.
Since employment, output, and productivity all increased during this period, it
should not be surprising to find that debt increased dramatically as well.[3.3]
The dramatic changes that have occurred in the concentration of income and the
growth in debt since 1913 are shown in Figure 3.2 which plots the income share received by the
Top 1% of
the income distribution through 2012 as well as
Total Debt, Non-Federal Debt, and Federal Debt outstanding in
the United States from 1916 through 2013. These changes have had profound effects on
the development of mass markets and the utilization of mass-production
technologies within the economic system
throughout the twentieth century. They have also had profound effects on
economic instability.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database,
Federal
Reserve (L1),
Historical Statistics of the U.S.
(Cj870
Ca9-19),
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5).[3.4]
The expansion of mass production undoubtedly received a huge boost from the
increase in Exports and the
expansion of Federal Debt
that accompanied the 1914 outbreak of World
War I That boost proved unsustainable, however, as the economy
entered the
1920-1921 recession at war's end. This
recession was followed by a
speculative bubble in the real-estate market that was superseded by a
speculative bubble in the stock market.
As can be seen in Figure 3.2, these two bubbles were accompanied by an
increase in both debt and the concentration of income as
Total Debt went from 156% of GDP in 1920 to
192% in 1928 and the income share received by the
Top 1% went from 14.5% of total income
(excluding capital gains) to 19.6% in those eight years.
The expansion of debt that offset the concentration of
income in the 1920s not only allowed the markets for mass-produced goods to grow
with the economy during that decade,[3.5] as we will see in
Chapter 4, it also made these markets increasingly vulnerable to an economic downturn and, in the process, undermined the
stability of the financial system. As a result, when the economic downturn
began in the summer of 1929, and the stock market crashed in the fall of that
year, the financial system began to founder. The absence of deposit
insurance combined with an unwillingness (or inability) of the Federal Reserve
to prop up the banking system led to a run on the system in the fall of 1930 that caused the
financial system to implode. This worsened the economic downturn as the economy spiraled
downward from 1929 through 1933. (Meltzer,
Friedman and Schwartz,
Fisher,
Skidelsky
Eichengreen
Kindleberger)
The
phenomenal fall in wages, prices, output, and income that resulted caused
Total Debt as percent of GDP to increase from 184% of GDP in 1929 to 295% by 1933.
As we will see in Chapter 15, this
dramatic increase in the debt ratio was caused by the 45% decrease in GDP that
occurred during this period, rather than by an increase in debt. Total debt
actually fell by 12% from 1929 through 1933. In
the meantime, over
10,000 banks failed along with
129,000 other businesses; the unemployment
rate soared to
25% of the labor force, and
12 million people found themselves unemployed by the time
the downward spiral of the economy came to an end in 1933.
This 283% debt ratio was, of course, unsustainable, and a massive
deleveraging
of the system took place as
Total Debt as a percent of GDP fell from 295% in
1933 to 184% by 1940. As we shall see, again in Chapter 15, this deleveraging took place through the
growth in GDP as unemployment fell and output and prices increased rather than
through a fall in the debt itself which actually increased during this period.
Even though GDP managed to increase by 80% from 1933 through 1940, the actions of the
federal government were too little and too late to maintain the mass markets
necessary to keep output from falling dramatically through 1933 or to bring the
system back to full employment before 1942. Federal
Debt more than doubled, and even though the income share ae the
Top 1% fell
substantially from its 1928 high of 19.6%, it remained above 15% in all but one
year during the 1930s. The rate
of unemployment remained above 14% for the entire decade following 1930 and, as
is shown in Figure 3.3, did not
fall below 14% until 1941.
Source:
Bureau of Labor Statistics (1),
Economic Report of the President, 1960
(D17).
The decade of the 1940s was dominated by World War II as the federal government
took over the economy. Not a single automobile was produced in the
United States from early in 1942 through 1945, and production of other consumer
durable goods was suspended as well. Government mandated wage and price
controls were instituted, and consumer goods were rationed as every effort was
made to direct our economic resources into the production of war materials. The
massive increases in government expenditures this entailed, combined with the
extraordinary increase in the size of the military, brought the economy to near
full employment in 1942 and to extraordinarily low levels of unemployment from
1943 through 1945. In addition, taxes were increased substantially as the top
marginal tax rate was eventually set at
94%.
(Kennedy)
In spite of the dramatic increase in Federal Debt during the war—from
44% of GDP
in 1941 to 111% by 1945—Total
Debt as a percent of GDP hardly increased as it went from 163% to 178%.
This feat was accomplished through a massive deleveraging of the non-federal
sector of the economy as wage and price controls and rationing combined with the
tremendous increase in production, hence, income, made it possible for the
ratio of
Non-Federal Debt to GDP to fall from 120% of GDP in 1941 to just 67% by
1945. This fall in
Non-Federal Debt set the stage for what was to follow.
The Prosperous Years: 1950 through 1973
The economy did not suffer the fate at the end of World War II it had
suffered at the end of World War I. A massive demobilization took place as our
factories retooled from the mass production of war materials to the mass production of
civilian goods, and millions of service men and women were discharged from the
military, but there was no major recession, and, as can be seen in Figure 3.3, unemployment remained below 6%
for twelve years following World War II and below 7% until 1975.
The fact that Europe and Asia were devastated by the war
aided the transition to a peacetime economy in that the need to rebuild the
war-torn countries caused Exports (Figure 3.1) to remain high during the four years following the war. At the same
time, government policies, such as the
GI Bill,
helped to ease the transition from military to civilian life for millions of
veterans as they mustered out of the service.
Federal Debt decreased almost continuously relative to GDP following
World War II, form a 1945 high of 111% of GDP to
its post-war low of 23.1% of GDP in 1974—a fall of 88 percentage points.
Total debt, on the other hand, increased gradually relative to GDP from 1951 through 1981, going from
129% of GDP to 165%. This increase of 36 percentage points in total debt
took place in spite of a 44
percentage point decrease in Federal Debt over that 21 year period. The reason
is that while Federal Debt relative to GDP was decreasing over this period, it was decreasing at
half the rate at which
Non-Federal debt was increasing.
Non-Federal debt went from 67% of GDP in 1951 to 139% in 1981—a 72 percentage
point increase that more than offset the 44 percentage point fall in
Federal Debt.
While there
was a relatively large increase in Non-Federal Debt through 1975, that
debt was sustainable in that it was not backed by investments based on
speculative bubbles or on consumers’ incomes created by speculative bubbles. It
was backed by profitable investments both in the private and public sectors of
the economy—investments in private capital and public infrastructure that
increased productivity sufficiently to be self financing—and by consumers’
incomes that were derived from the employment created by those profitable
investments.
Given the financial regulatory system put in place in the 1930s, the fall in
income share of the Top 1% throughout the 1950s and 1960s (from 11.4% of total
income in 1950 to 7.7% in 1973) made it possible for
domestic mass markets to grow with the economy in such a way as to support the
increases in mass production and productivity that took place during this period
with relatively full employment and without an expansion of exports relative to
imports. As a
result, the
domestic economy was able to grow and the vast majority of
the population was able to prosper without creating the kinds of speculative
bubbles that led to the economic catastrophe of the 1930s even though the
expansion of domestic markets were aided by an expansion of debt.
The latter
half of the 1960s through the first half of the 1980s—an era dubbed
The Great
Inflation
by Allen Meltzer—presented a unique challenge to economic policy makers. From
1952 through 1965 the effective annual rate of inflation was 1.72%. From 1965
through 1984 it was 5.96%, and from 1975 through 1981 it was 7.66%. Efforts to
end the inflation along with the 1973
Arab oil
embargo
and the concomitant quadrupling of the price of oil led to a number of shocks to
the economic system. The turmoil of the times was reflected in a sharp fall in
the growth of output in 1967, and a series of recessions
that occurred in 1970, 1973-1975, 1980, and 1981.
The rise in interest rates combined with the
1980 and 1981 recessions that
resulted from the
efforts
by the Federal Reserve to bring the inflation to an end left thrift institutions in desperate straits, but this did not pose a
serious threat to the economic system itself. The existence of deposit
insurance made it possible to avoid a run on these institutions and this
allowed time to resolve the problem in an orderly way. The real threat to the
system came from the changes in economic policies that took place in the 1980s
in response to the problems caused by inflation and the energy crisis of the
1970s.
The results of the policy shift that took place in the 1980s are reflected in
Figure 3.2 by the increase in
Total Debt as a percent of GDP from 164% in 1981
to 231% by 1990 as the ratio of Federal Debt
to GDP increased by 16 percentage
points and that of
Non-Federal Debt by 51 percentage points. The 67 percentage
point increase in
Total Debt that took place during the 1980s was six times
the average for the previous three decades, and it not only fueled speculative
bubbles in the commercial real-estate markets that brought on the
savings and loan crisis in the 1980s,
it also funded the
hostile takeover/junk bond bubble
that helped to create the current account deficits shown in Figure 3.1
that contributed to the decline of our manufacturing industries.
What is of particular interest here, however, is how the increase in debt made
it possible for unemployment to trend downward over the decade in spite of the
fact that imports rose
and then fell
relative to exports and the concentration of income that went to the Top 1% of
the income distribution increased from 8.2% of total income in 1980 to 13.0% by
1990.
The 1990s began with a minor recession as the unemployment rate reached 9.7% of
the labor force in 1992, up from 5.3% in 1989. Income concentration was fairly stable from 1988 through the first half of the
1990s
as the share of the
Top 1% went from 13.2% in 1988 to 12.9% in
1994. Following 1994, however, there was a significant increase in
concentration as the share that went to the Top 1% reached 16.5% by 2000.
This was above where it had been in the early 1920s when the speculative bubbles
began and above where it had been
in all but two of the years our economy had stagnated through the 1930s when
there were no speculative bubbles or wars to stimulate the economy.
There was some deleveraging that took place in the non-federal sector
of the economy in the first two years of the 1990s, and then
Non-Federal Debt continued upward at a steady pace until
it began to increase more rapidly following 1997. In the meantime,
Federal Debt peaked at 48.5% of GDP in 1993 and declined to 31.8% of GDP by 2001
as Total Debt went from 231% of GDP in 1990 to
265% by 2000.
At the same time, there was a dramatic
increase in imports relative to exports as the deficit in our
Current Account went from 1.3% to 4.0% of GDP. (Figure 3.1) In addition, productivity
increased dramatically as the average increase in output per hour during the
last half of the 1990s was
almost twice that of the average increase for the previous ten years.
All of these factors would have made it difficult, if not impossible, to
maintain the domestic mass markets needed for full employment in the absence of
the 33 percentage-point increase in Total Debt that took place during that
period as unemployment fell from 7.5% of the labor force in 1992 to 4.0% in
2000.
It is also worth noting that, by all accounts,
financial
wealth more than tripled in the five years from 1995 through 2000. The
NASDAQ Composite Index went from a low of
791 in 1995 to a high of 5048 in
2000 as the
Standard & Poor's 500 Index went from
501 to 1527.
In the process, this unprecedented—except for the 1920s—increase in the value of
stocks decreased the cost of equity capital for corporations, and thereby lowered the cost of
financing investment through equity relative to the cost of financing investment
through debt. At the same time, the fact that realized capital gains steadily
rose from 3.0% of total income in 1995 to 9.7% in 2000 made it possible for many
to increase their consumption or investment expenditures without having to rely
on debt. Both of these factors would tend to bolster domestic markets by
offsetting the effects of increasing imports and income concentration.
In addition, unlike the situation in 1980s, as we will see
below, there was, in fact, a significant increase in the average real income
that went to the bottom
90%
of the income distribution from 1993 through 2000 in spite of the increase in
the concentration of income at the top that took place during that period. In any event, times seemed prosperous after 1995 until
the stock market crashed in March of 2000, and the trillions of
dollars of illusory paper wealth that had been created by the stock market bubble
began to evaporate.
Even though tens, if not hundreds of billions of dollars had been wasted in the
development of worthless dotcom companies such as
Webvan.com,
Pets.com, and
Flooz.com, and billions more had been wasted in companies such as
Enron,
Global Crossing, and
WorldCom there was not a collapse in the financial
system when the Dotcom Bubble burst comparable to what had taken place following
the Crash of 1929. What was different about the increase in paper wealth
generated by the stock-market bubble in the latter half of the 1990s is that,
unlike the 1920s, and in spite of the fact that Total Debt had increased
substantially leading up to the crash, the Dotcom Bubble was not financed
directly through an excessive buildup of debt collateralized by stocks.
The reason is that since the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Federal Reserve has had the power to set
the margin requirement on loans collateralized by stocks, that is, has the power
to set the minimum down payment
a buyer must put up when borrowing money to buy stocks. The margin requirement
was 50% during the 1990s which limited the amount of money speculators could
borrow using stocks as collateral to 50% of the
value of the stock. In the 1920s the margin was as low as
10% in the unregulated markets of the times which allowed speculators to borrow as much as 90% of the purchase price
when purchasing stock. Even though the Federal Reserve refused to increase the margin requirement on stocks to keep the
speculative bubble in the stock market from growing during the 1990s, the
existence of a 50% margin requirement on loans collateralized by stocks minimized the damage
caused by the Dotcom Bubble bursting.
As a result, few defaulted on their loans when this bubble burst, and there
was not a wave of distress selling of assets which, as we will see in Chapter 4, had occurred
following the Crash of 1929. While tens of millions of people were
adversely affected as trillions of dollars of wealth disappeared into thin air,
the financial system remained intact, and the economic system survived
fairly well with a relatively minor economic downturn as unemployment increased
from 4% of the labor force in 2000 to 6% by 2003. And since there were no
insured deposits involved, there was no government bailout of depositors with
taxpayers' money as there had been in the
savings and loan debacle of the
1980s, though the federal
Pension Benefit
Guarantee Corporation insurance program
did take a hit.
Then came the speculative bubble in the housing market brought on by the
unregulated securitization of subprime mortgages. Unlike the stock-market
bubble of the 1990s, the housing-market bubble of the 2000s was financed
directly through
an excessive buildup of debt collateralized by mortgages.
Following passage of the
Financial Services Modernization Act in 1999 and the
Commodity Futures Modernization Act in 2000, the era of unregulated finance
reached its pinnacle in the first half of the first decade of the twentieth-first century. It was
an era of abiding faith in the ability of freewheeling capitalism to solve our
economic problems by allowing unfettered markets to allocate resources in their
most efficient manner. This freedom from regulation was supposed to bring economic prosperity to all. As it turned
out, it didn’t. Instead, as is shown in Figure 3.1 and Figure
3.2, the cowboy finance that resulted led to dramatic
increases in Imports, a further concentration of income, and a dramatic
increase in debt.
The income share of
the
Top 1% fell from 16.5% in 2000 to
15.0% in 2002 as the fallout from the recession took its toll, and then,
following the
Bush tax cuts, increased to 18.3% of total income by 2007—just 1.3
percentage points below the peak it had reached in 1928. At the same time,
imports increased relative to exports as the deficit in our Current Account went
from 4.0% to 4.9% of GDP, and
Total Debt increased continuously from 2000
through 2008—from 265% to 353% of GDP, an 88 percentage point increase in just
seven years. At this point
Total Debt as a percent of GDP was
excessive even by the standard set in 1933 after GDP had fallen by 40% from its
1929 high.[3.6]
By 2007 the GDP stood at $14.5 trillion and the
Total debt at $51.1
trillion!
Why the System Collapsed
Servicing a debt of $51 trillion out of an
income of $14 trillion places a huge burden on the system
through the transfer of income from debtors to creditors. Even an average
interest rate as low as 3% would require a transfer equal to 11% of GDP when total debt
is as high as 370% of GDP. An average interest rate of 5% would require a
transfer equal to 18% of GDP. In terms of real money, a 3%
average rate of interest on the total debt of $54 trillion that existed in 2008
would have required that $1.6 trillion/year be transferred from debtors to
creditors. A 5% average rate of interest would have required a $2.7 trillion
transfer.
Figure 3.4 shows the interest rates paid on triple-A rated corporate
bonds (Aaa Bonds), Municipal Bonds, conventional Mortgages, and
Prime Rate loans from 1940
through 2012. The graphs in this figure indicate that interest rates in
the early 2000s were comparable to those in the 1960s when
Total Debt was less than 150% of GDP. It should be obvious
that a return to the interest rates of the 1970s or 1990s with
Total Debt equal to 353% of GDP, as it was in 2008, would
present a daunting challenge.
Source:
Economic Report of the President, 2013
(B73PDF|XLS)
Even more important is the fact that
Non-Federal Debt had risen to 321% of GDP
by 2008. Unlike the federal government which has the constitutional right to
print money, those entities that make up the non-federal sector of the economy—whether they are individuals, businesses, financial institutions, or municipal
governments—must service their debt out of income. When they cannot service
their debt out of income they must refinance. Barring the ability to refinance,
the only options to which they can turn is to the dreaded distress selling of
assets or to default on their financial obligations—the kind of selling of assets and defaults that, as we
shall
see in Chapter 4 through
Chapter 6, lead to
financial crises.
Non-federal
debt of this magnitude makes the economic system extremely fragile, and when
much of that debt is the product of financing a speculative bubble and backed by
assets and incomes
generated by that bubble, the situation is even worse. It should be no surprise
that in the face of the debt that existed in the mid 2000s, it was the upturn in
interest rates in 2005 and 2006 caused by the Federal Reserve's attempt to
moderate the housing boom that brought the housing bubble to an end in 2006 and
sent shockwaves through the financial system in 2007.
It should also be no surprise that the bursting of the
housing bubble in the United States reverberated throughout the rest of the
world. The rise of the failed nineteenth-century ideology of
Laissez-faire/free-market Capitalism that led to the deregulation of
our financial system at home was not an exclusively American phenomenon.
It had been promulgated all over the world by institutions such as the
International Monetary Fund
in the name of the now infamous
Washington
Consensus. (Klein) The result was not only financial
deregulation and a housing bubble in the United States financed by expanding
debt, but
in many countries in Europe and
elsewhere around the world. As a result, the
crisis that was to explode in the American financial system in 2008 was destine
to create a worldwide economic catastrophe.
100 Years of Income and Unemployment
It is, perhaps, worth emphasizing the obvious at this
point, namely, that the degree of concentration at the top of the income
distribution is related to the income at the bottom, and both are affected by
economic policies.
Figure
3.5
plots the concentration of income
of the Top 1% of the income
distribution and the average real income (measured in 2012 prices) received by
the Bottom 90% from 1913/17 through 2012. The
way in which economic policies have affected these variables over the past one
hundred years can best be understood by examining the historical context in
which these variables have changed.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
T he income share
of
the Top
1% (excluding capital gains) in this figure averaged 16.9% of total income
from 1917 through 1933 with a low of
14.5% in 1920 and a high of 19.6% in 1928. The average real income of
the
Bottom 90%
averaged $9,447 during this period and
fell from a high
of $11,291 in 1917 to a low of $6,676 in 1920 but had increased back to $10,536
by 1929.
It then plummeted to $6,940 from 1929 through 1933.
When we look at the historical context within which these changes took place we
find that they began with
World War I, followed by a rather steep recession in
1920 and 1921, a
real-estate bubble from 1922 through 1926, a
Stock-market bubble from 1926 through the fall of 1929, and three years of
recession
in which the rate of
unemployment increased from 3.5% in 1929 to 24.9% in 1933.
We also find
that, except during World War I, this was an era of less government, lower
taxes, and virtually no regulation,
and it ended in the depths of
the Great Depression
at
the beginning of the
New Deal—that
is, at the beginning of an era of more government, higher taxes, and more
regulation.
The average real income of the Bottom 90% began to increase
after 1933 but was essentially the same in 1940
($9,862) as it had been in 1920 ($9,676) and was still significantly below where
it stood in 1917 ($11,291). At the same time, the concentration of income
of
the Top 1%
averaged 15.9% from 1933 through 1940 and fell below 15% in only one year during
that period. Unemployment remained
above 14% throughout that period.
Figure 1 and Figure 2 also shows the effects of World War II
and its immediate aftermath as the government took over the economic system,
instituted wage and price controls, rationed consumer goods, and increased
personal and corporate tax rates dramatically. The result was a dramatic fall in
unemployment, and the concentration of income of the Top 1% fell from 15.7% of total income in
1940 to 11.4% by 1950. At the same time there was a dramatic increase in the average real income of
the Bottom 90% from $9,862 in 1940 to $18,797 in 1950.
The Prosperous Years: 1950 through 1973
Over the 23 years following 1950
we see another dramatic increase in the average real
income of the Bottom 90%
as it went from
$18,797 in 1950 to $34,956 in 1973. At the same
time, the concentration of total income at the top decreased fairly
consistently throughout this period, falling from 11.4% of total income in 1950
to 7.7% in 1973.
Unlike the period leading up to 1933, this was decidedly an era of higher taxes, more government, and more regulation of the economy.
As can be seen in Figure 3.6, government
made a relatively minor direct contribution to output in
1929, as reflected in the National Income and Product Accounts. The
direct contribution of
All Governments (federal, state, plus local) to GDP was less than 10%
in 1929. It didn't exceed 15% until the beginning of the
New Deal in
1933, and it
remained at about that level through the remainder of the 1930s as the average
real income of the Bottom 90% increased from $6,940 in 1933 to $9,862
in 1940.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5)
In addition, taxes were exceedingly low prior to the
1930s. The
maximum marginal personal income tax rate was
7% before World War I, and even though it was raised to
77% during the war it had been cut back to
25% by 1925 where it remained until 1931. The maximum corporate tax
rate was
2% prior to World War I and was raised to
12% during the war where it essentially remained until 1932.
This changed dramatically in the 40 year period
following the
New Deal
during which taxes and the direct contribution of All Governments to
GDP increased dramatically as the average real income of the Bottom 90%
increased fourfold, from $6,940 in 1933 to $34,956 in 1973.
For the 23 year period from 1950
through 1973 the direct contribution of All Governments to
GDP averaged 22.8% as the real income of the Bottom 90% increased from
$18,797 to $34,956. At the same time, the tax structure put in
place during World War II was, for the most part, left in place. The top
marginal personal income tax rate was
91% and
the corporate rate was
52% until the 1965,
Kennedy-Johnson tax cuts reduced these rates to
70%
and
48%.
The increase in the direct contribution of All
Governments to GDP not only represented a direct increase in output during
this period, it also led to a direct increase in employment as employment by
governments (excluding the military) increased from 9.8% of the labor force
in 1950 to 15.5% in 1973. (Figure 4) The great bulk of this increase took the form
of an increase in teachers, police officers, firefighters, public health and
safety inspectors, and regulatory personnel.
Bureau of Labor Statistics, (A-1
B-1)
The increase in the direct contribution of All
Governments also led to
substantial increases in productivity as a result of government investments
in public education and scientific
research, public transportation (city streets, county roads, state and
interstate highways, bridges, ports, and subway, bus, and rapid transit systems),
public health, water and waste treatment facilities, and other forms of public
infrastructure. In addition, government investments in our regulatory
systems not only led to significant improvements in public health and safety
during this period, they also kept the financial system from blowing up the
economy—there
were no speculative bubbles from 1933 through 1973 of the kind that lead to
financial and economic crises.
It is clear from Figure 3.3 and Figure 3.5
through Figure 3.7 that this era of higher taxes, more government, and
more regulation from 1950 through 1973 led to low unemployment (averaging 4.8%
for the entire period and exceeding 6% in only two years) and a dramatic
increase the average real income of the Bottom 90% of the income
distribution.
It is also clear, or at least it should be clear, that
the increase in real income at the bottom was one of the most important
factors that fueled the economy during this period. It was the increase
in income at the bottom that caused the increase in output from 1950 through
1973, not the other way around. There is just no way all of the automobiles
and refrigerators and washing machines and air conditioners and TVs and the
countless other mass-produced goods and services that were produced during
this period could have been sold if the income of the
Bottom 90%
had not increased in the way it
did.
Who would have
purchased all that mass-produced stuff if the concentration of income at the
top and the average real income at the bottom had, instead, regressed back to
their trends from 1917 through 1940 shown in Figure 3.5?
What would it have taken to maintain a fully
employed economy if, following World War II, the concentration of income at
the top and the average real income at the bottom had reverted back to their
trends leading up to the war?
The answer to the later question can be found by looking back to
the era that preceded World War II—the speculative bubbles of the 1920s and the
secular stagnation of the 1930s—during which the concentration of income at the
top remained high and the average real income at the bottom failed to rise.
This was a period that ended in a decade in which the rate of unemployment never
fell below
14% and in which the unemployment problem was not solved until the
government took over the economy during World War II.
The answer to the latter question can also be found by looking
forward to the era that followed 1973 when the average real income at the bottom
again failed to rise and the concentration of income at the top began to regain
the ground it had lost since 1928.
Therate of unemployment was 5.6% in 1973.
From 1974 through 1980 it averaged 6.8%, and in 1980
the actual rate
of unemployment stood at 7.1%. Undoubtedly, these dismal unemployment statistics were partly caused by
the episodes of tighter monetary
policy that resulted from the tremulous efforts of the Federal
Reserve to fight the inflation that was raging at the time, and partly by the
reduction in the direct contribution of All Governments to GDP from 24.2% in
1967 to 20.6% in 1980.
It is also fairly safe to say that the relentless war waged against
cost push inflation during this period played a major role in determining these
statistics as the
average real
income of the Bottom 90%
fell from $34,956 in 1973 to $32,413 by 1980.
Then came the
Reagan Revolution with its mantra of lower
taxes, less government, and deregulation.
While many government programs were cut during the
Reagan years, as a result of the anti-Soviet defense buildup, the direct
contribution of All Governments to GDP barely budged, going from 20.6%
of GDP in 1980 to 20.5% in 1988. Reagan's successes in lowering taxes
(cutting the top marginal personal income and corporate tax rates from
70%
and
48%
in 1980 to
28%
and
34%, respectively, by 1988) and deregulating the economy,
however, did help to lower the unemployment rate to 5.3% by the time
he left office as the
commercial real estate and junk bond bubbles that led to the Savings and Loan Crisis
grew. But this triumph was short lived as these bubbles burst and
unemployment rose to
7.5% in 1992 in the wake of the ensuing 1990 recession.
The net effect of this episode was to increase the
concentration of income of the Top 1% from 8.2% in 1980 to 13.5% by 1992 as the average real
income of the
Bottom 90%
fell from $32,413 to $31,174 during this period.
Then came
the 1990s in which we saw 1) a rather small
increase in the top marginal personal and corporate tax
rates from
28.0% and
34.0%
to
39.6% and
35.0%,
respectively, 2)
a significant cut in the direct contribution of All Governments to GDP from
20.6% of GDP to 17.8%, 3) a dramatic
increase in
our current account deficit
from 0.7% of GDP in 1992 to 4.0% by 2000, and 4) an almost total emasculation of the
regulatory systems within the federal government.
Aided by the largest stock-market bubble since the
1920s, the unemployment rate fell from 7.5% of the labor force in 1992 to just 4.0% in 2000 as the average real income of the
Bottom 90% increased from $31,174
to $35,799, surpassing, for the first time, the $34,956 level it had achieved in
1973. This feat was accomplished in spite of
a significant increase in the concentration of
income
of
the Top 1% from 13.5% to 16.5% of total income.
Unfortunately, when the dotcom and telecom bubbles burst and the dust had
settled from the resulting
2001 recession,
by 2003 the rate of unemployment had increased to 6.0% of the labor force, and
the average real income of the
Bottom 90%
had fallen back to $33,368 and was,
again, below the level it had achieved in 1973.
Finally, we have the aftermath of the financial deregulation of the late
1990s where the unemployment rate fell from to 6.0% in 2003 to 4.5% in 2007, and the average real income of the
Bottom 90% increased
somewhat during this period, from $33,368 to
$34,816, slightly below the $34,956 level it had achieved in 1973.
Then, in the wake of the housing bubble bursting in 2007 and the financial and economic systems melting down in
2008 the unemployment rate spiked to 9.6% of the labor force in 2010 and was
still at 7.4% in 2013, six years after the recession began and in spite of a 4.2% fall in the labor
force participation rate during this period.
But the real story of this era is the increase the income share
of the Top 1%
from 15.2% of total income in 2003 to 18.3% in 2007, falling to 16.7% in 2009
in the wake of the Housing Bubble
bursting and then rebounding to 19.3% of total
income by 2012—just 0.3 percentage points below the high of 19.6% it had
achieved in 1928—while the average real income of the
Bottom 90%
fell from $34,816 in 2007 to $30,439 in 2012, a level
not seen since 1967!
Summary
Just as it is clear from our historical examination of Figure
3.1 that the end
result of the era of higher taxes, more government, and more
regulation was low unemployment and a dramatic increase the average real
income of the Bottom 90% of the income distribution, it is just as clear
from our historical examination of this figure that the end result of the two eras of lower taxes,
less government, and deregulation that we have experienced during the past one
hundred years was speculative bubbles, sporadic and rising
unemployment, and falling average income for the Bottom 90% of the
income distribution.
These same results are embodied in
Figure 3.8 which plots the average real
income
of
the Top 1%, Top 5-1%, Top 10-5%, and the
Bottom 90% of the income distribution from 1917 through 2012 on the same
graph.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
There's something wrong with this picture, and it is fairly easy to
see exactly what's wrong with it. As John F.
Kennedy pointed out,
the rising tide that lifts all boats comes from a flood of rising
income at the bottom of the income distribution not from
spouting geysers at the top.
Today we
are faced with the same kind of situation we faced in the 1930s:
Given
the state of mass-production technology,
the distribution of income is incapable of providing the domestic mass markets—that
is, markets with large numbers of people who have purchasing power—needed to achieve full employment in the
absence of a speculative bubble.
If we do not come to grips
with this problem our domestic markets for mass-produced goods will continue
to erode, and we will be plagued with boom and bust cycles of economic
instability that eventually lead to economic stagnation
as we run out of
speculative bubbles to stimulate the economy. It will be impossible to maintain the standard of living of
the vast majority of our population in this situation
as our economic
resources are transferred out of those industries that produce for domestic
mass markets and into those industries that produce for the privileged few. (King)
Not only will it be impossible
to maintain the standard of living of the vast majority of our population if
the concentration of income is not reduced, those at the top will eventually find they are getting a larger piece of an ever
decreasing pie. It is domestic mass markets that make mass production
possible, and it is mass production—made
possible by our domestic mass markets—that
made the United States the economic powerhouse of the world.
The erosion of our domestic mass markets erodes the very foundation on which
our economic system rests, and to the extent this foundation is undermined,
our ability to produce is undermined as well.
(Ostry)
The only way a country can
take advantage of mass-production technologies in the absence of an income
distribution that provides domestic mass markets capable of purchasing
the output it can produced without increasing debt relative to income is by producing for export and running a current account
surplus.
Unfortunately, continually running a current account surplus leads to increasing the debts of
foreigners relative to their incomes.
Increasing domestic debt relative
to domestic income, or the debts of foreigners relative to their incomes is
not sustainable in the long run. The transfer burden from debtor to
creditor must eventually overwhelm the system and lead to a financial crisis
that will cause the system to collapse. It
is no accident that the current economic crisis began, and, at least so far,
has hit the hardest those countries that were running substantial current
account deficits in the face of speculative bubbles in their domestic
economies.
The
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Cj870
Ca9-19
provides estimates of total debt from 1916 through 1976,
and the Federal Reserve's
Federal Reserve's Flow of Funds Accounts (L1)
provide estimates of total debt from 1945 through 2013,
but the two series are only roughly comparable. For the thirty-one years in
which they overlap, the Federal Reserve's estimates as a percent of GDP are
systematically below the Historical Statistic's estimates by an average
of 12%. Both sets of data are plotted individually in Figure 3.9.
Source:
Federal
Reserve (L1),
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Cj870
Ca9-19),
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5).
In constructing Figure 3.2, the Historical Statistics'
estimates were used to estimate Total Debt from 1900 through 1945 and
the Flow of Funds' estimates were used from 1945 through 2012. The
estimates from both sources are plotted for the year 1945, hence, the two points
in the Total Debt and Non-Federal Debt curves in Figure 3.2
where Non-Federal Debt is obtained by subtracting Federal Debt
from Total Debt in this figure.
There was no need to make an adjustment if the Federal Debt and
GDP series used in constructing this figure as the differences in the
estimates provided by the
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Ca9-19)
and the
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5)
in the years they overlap are insignificant.
When comparisons are made in the text between 1945 and years prior to 1945 the
Historical Statistics value for 1945 will be used, and the Flow of Funds
value will be used for
comparing 1945 with subsequent
years.
Endnotes
[3.1]
The idea that income must be redistributed to take advantage of
an increase in productivity may seem to be unorthodox to some economists, but
the need for redistribution is, in fact, implicit within the standard
competitive model that lies at the core of neoclassical economics. The
distribution of income is simply assumed to adjust automatically to accommodate
increases in productivity in this model as the system is assumed to remain at
full employment and long run economic profits are competed away. In the real
world, of course, the economic system does not stay at full employment and
economic profits do not necessarily get competed away. As a result, there is no
reason to believe that a society that exists in the real world will be able to
take full advantage of an increases in productivity irrespective of the
distribution of income since the distribution of income does not necessarily
adjust in the real world the way it is assumed to adjust in the competitive
model.
It should, perhaps, also be
noted that since this model is typically presented in terms of a system of
equations derived from the optimizing behavior of a typical household and a
typical firm, the distribution of income is not even considered in this
model, except by way of the assumption that the amount of income the typical
household receives is determined by the quantities of productive resources
it owns and the prices these resources are able to command in the
marketplace. As a result, the standard model gives only a partial
explanation of the distribution of income.
Since income is determined by the
ownership of productive resources in this model, it is implicitly assumed that
the distribution of income is ultimately determined by the distribution of
wealth among households. This means that to examine how the distribution of
income affects the economic system we must go beyond the system of equations
that are derived from the optimizing behavior of the typical household and firm
and consider how the distribution of wealth can be expected to affect the
preferences of the typical household and how these preferences can be expected
to affect the typical firm.
If the typical household is to
describe a society that has a high concentration of wealth and, hence, income,
it is reasonable to assume that the preferences of the household that typifies
that society will favor those kinds of outputs that serve the wealthy few rather
than those that serve a mass market and that the typical firm will employ
technologies that produce these kinds of outputs most efficiently. By the same
token, if the household is to describe a society that has a low concentration of
wealth/income it is reasonable to assume that the preferences of the typical
household will favor those kinds of outputs that serve mass markets and the
typical firm will employ technologies that produce these kind of outputs most
efficiently. There is nothing in the standard model that is inconsistent with
these assumptions.
[3.2]
It is,
perhaps, worth noting that a simple regression of the income share of the top 1%
on the ratio of
Total Debt to GDP
explains 88% of the variation in this income share from 1970 through 2008:
SIMPLE REGRESSION
P99-100 = 0.1041TotalD%GDP - 11.15CNST
COEF. SD. ER. t(37) P-VALUE
PT.R SQ.
Debt%GDP
0.1041 6.295E-3 16.54 1.118E-18 0.8809
CNST -11.15 1.406 -7.93 1.696E-9
0.6296
R SQ. = 0.8809, ADJ.R SQ. = 0.8776,
D.W. = 0.4462
SD.ER.EST. = 1.266, F(1/37) = 273.5
(P-VALUE = 1.118E-18)
|
If we add exports, imports,
productivity, prices, and unemployment to the mix, the explanatory power of
the regression reaches 97% with all of the coefficients significant at the 5%
level and a Durbin-Watson statistic in the upper half of the indeterminate
range:
MULTIPLE REGRESSION
P99-100 = 0.02401Debt%GDP +
0.4219Exports%GDP - 0.3851Imports%GDP + 0.07293Productivity + 0.03409CPI
- 0.5343UnemployRate + 0.8225CNST
COEF. SD. ER. t(32) P-VALUE PT.R SQ.
Debt%GDP
0.02401 0.01055 2.275 2.975E-2 0.1392
Exports%GDP 0.4219
0.1336 3.159 3.446E-3 0.2377
Imports%GDP -0.3851 0.1535
-2.509 1.737E-2 0.1644
Productivity 0.07293 0.03353
2.175 3.712E-2 0.1288
CPI 0.03409 0.009314 3.66 9.004E-4 0.2951
UnemployRate -0.5343 0.08673
-6.161 6.824E-7 0.5426
CNST 0.8225 2.196 0.3745 7.105E-1
4.363E-3
R SQ. = 0.9746, ADJ.R SQ. = 0.9698, D.W. = 1.414
SD.ER.EST. = 0.6282, F(6/32) =
204.7 (P-VALUE = 4.354E-24)
|
[3.3] The role of
borrowing in this situation is explained quit succinctly by
Cynamon
and Fazzari:
The willingness and ability of the bottom 95% to borrow excessively that
kept their demand growing robustly despite their stagnant income growth and
sowed the seeds of the Great Recession. Without this borrowing, demand from
the bottom 95% cannot come close to attaining the level necessary to reach
full employment. Demand from the top 5% has continued to follow the
pre-recession trend, but this is not enough. The problem is not so much that
output produced by the rising productivity of the middle class is
distributed to the upper class, who do not spend it. Rather, the problem is
that absent either wage and salary growth or excessive borrowing by the
middle class, the spending of the bottom 95% is inadequate to generate the
demand growth necessary to push the economy toward full employment at an
acceptable pace. A large share of the aggregate income that we could enjoy
if our resources were fully utilized is never created at all due to
inadequate demand.
It is worth noting, however, that the government's increase in borrowing
leading up to the Great Recession had the same effect in increasing demand
as borrowing by the bottom 95%.
[3.4] See the Appendix on Measuring Debt at
the end of this chapter for an explanation of the way
in which the data from the Historical Statistics of the U.S.,
Federal
Reserve Flow of Funds Accounts, and
Bureau of Economic Analysis are used in this figure.
[3.5]
Robert Reich in his
Aftershock: The Next Economy and America's Future
provides the following quote form
Marriner
Eccles's
Beckoning Frontiers, published in 1950, in which Eccles describes
the forces that led to the Great Depression:
As mass
production has to be accompanied by mass consumption, mass consumption, in
turn, implies a distribution of wealth—not of existing wealth, but of wealth
as it is currently produced—to provide men with buying power equal to the
amount of goods and services offered by the nation's economic machinery.
Instead of achieving that kind of distribution, a giant suction pump had by
1929-30 drawn into a few hands an increasing portion of currently produced
wealth. This served them as capital accumulations. But by taking purchasing
power out of the hands of mass consumers, the savers denied to themselves
the kind of effective demand for their products that would justify a
reinvestment of their capital accumulations in new plants. In consequence,
as in a poker game where the chips were concentrated in fewer and fewer
hands, the other fellows could stay in the game only by borrowing. When
their credit ran out, the game stopped.
Robert Reich and Marriner Eccles are the only two
individuals I have run across so far that seem to understand problem of a
concentration of the distribution of income in a mass-production economy.
[3.6] It should be noted that these are only rough
comparisons due to the differences in the way current and historical total
debt is estimated. See the Appendix on Measuring Debt at the end of
this chapter.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 4:
Going Into Debt
George H. Blackford © 2009, last updated 5/1/2014
Figure 4.1 shows a breakdown of the public and private
domestic debt in the United
States from 1945 through 2013 in both absolute dollars and as a percent of GDP. As is
shown in this figure,
Total debt
increased from less than $500 billion in 1950 to over $59 trillion by 2013
and, in the process, increased from 155% to 363% of GDP. It can also be seen that
Federal Debt decreased rather consistently through the mid 1970s, and even though
Federal Debt increased considerably after 1980 through (from $735 billion
and 26% of GDP to $12.3 trillion and 74% of GDP by 2013), Federal Debt played a
relatively minor role in the increase in the total. The major source of the increase in
total debt following 1981
was in the non-federal sector of the economy.
Source:
Federal
Reserve (L1),
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5).
The pattern of Non-Federal Debt increases displayed in
Figure 4.1 is particularly telling. This debt increased from $1.3
trillion in 1970 to $46.6 trillion in 2008 and, in the process, increased from
121% of GDP to 321%. The increase was gradual until 1981 and then went from
$4.4 trillion and 138% of GDP to $11.3 trillion and 189% in just 9 years. It
dipped slightly relative to GDP in 1992 then increase dramatically over the next 14 years.
It is no accident that the dramatic jump in
Non-Federal Debt from 1983 through 1990 followed on the heels
of the
Depository Institutions Deregulation and Monetary Control
and
Garn–St. Germain Depository Institutions
acts being
passed in 1980 and 1982. As was noted in
Chapter 1, it was the deregulatory provisions in
these acts that led to the first major financial crisis in the United States
since the
Crash of 1929. It is also no accident that the explosion
of debt came to an end in 1990 on the heels of the savings and loan
crisis or that Non-Federal Debt began to rise again in the mid 1990s.
The savings and loan crisis marked a minor setback
in the movement
to deregulate the financial sector. Congress to passed seven major pieces of legislation to reregulate the financial sector
in response to this crisis .
The first was the
Competitive Equality Banking Act in 1987 to
recapitalize the
Federal Savings and Loan Insurance
Corporation (FSLIC), which was bankrupted by the crisis, and
to strengthen the supervision in the
savings and loan industry. Two years later Congress passed the
Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act
which transferred savings and loan deposit insurance from the failed FSLIC to
the FDIC, reorganized and further strengthened the supervisory structure of
the savings and loan industry, and created and funded the
Resolution Trust Corporation to deal with the savings
and loan institutions that had failed. (FDIC)
Next came the
Comprehensive Thrift and Bank Fraud Prosecution and Taxpayer Recovery Act
of 1990 to deal with the abusive practices of the new breed of savings and
loan owners/managers, and in 1991 the
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act
was passed. This act greatly increased the powers of the
FDIC, put forth new capital requirements for banks,
created new regulatory and supervisory examination standards, and established
prompt corrective action standards that
ostensibly took away some
of the discretion of regulators when it came to dealing with insolvent
institutions.
Finally, Congress passed the
Home Ownership and Equity Protection Act of 1994 which
dealt with abuses in the home mortgage market and gave the Federal Reserve the
power to regulate this market.
These acts, combined with the enhanced vigilance on the
part of regulators brought on by the savings and loan crisis, put an end to
the explosion of domestic debt that accompanied the financial deregulation of
the early 1980s. Unfortunately, this setback to the deregulatory
movement was only temporary.
As the crisis wore on the general public failed to
appreciate the seriousness of the situation. The reason is, the
consequences of the crisis seemed to be relatively minor. There was a minor
recession in 1990 that lasted into 1991, and the crisis
cost the taxpayers
some $130 billion, but there was no sense of panic at the near meltdown of the
financial system. Deposit insurance prevented a run on the system, and the lives of relatively few people were seriously disrupted. At
the same time, as was noted in
Chapter 1, a relatively large number of people made
personal fortunes out of this crisis. Since there was very little public
outcry, very few lessons were learned, and there were virtually no political
consequences for those who brought this crisis about.
The mantra of lower taxes, less government, and
deregulation carried the Republican Party to victory in the 1988 presidential
election in spite of the savings and loan debacle. What's more, the
successes of the Republican Party throughout the 1980s had a profound effect
on the leadership of the Democratic Party. A significant number of Democrats
who opposed the free-market economic policies advocated by the Republicans either retired
or were defeated at the polls. As a result, many Democrats began to embrace these
policies—either out of conviction or to enhance their political survival. As
the electorate shifted to the right on economic issues, the Democratic Party
shifted to the right on these issues as well, and by the time of the 1992
election, opposition to financial deregulation was muted.
Bill Clinton held himself out as a "New Democrat" who
embraced "values that were both liberal and conservative." He promised to
reinvent "government, away from the top-down bureaucracy of the industrial
era, to a leaner, more flexible, more innovative model appropriate for the
modern global economy." When he became president he invited a number of
ideologically minded economists to join his administration, three of which
came to the fore:
Alan Greenspan,
Robert Rubin, and
Lawrence Summers. (Turgeon)
Alan Greenspan was appointed by Ronald Reagan to chair the
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve and was
reappointed to this position twice by Clinton. Robert Rubin was co-chairman
of
Goldman Sachs before Clinton selected him to chair the
National Economic Council and then appointed him to
replace
Lloyd Benson as
Secretary of Treasury. Lawrence Summers worked as an
economist in the Reagan White House before he joined the Clinton
Administration, first as
Treasury Undersecretary for International Affairs and
then as a replacement for Rubin as Secretary of Treasury. This is the
triumvirate that dominated economic policy deliberations in the Clinton
Administration—the group Time Magazine dubbed “The
Committee to Save the World.” (Ramo
Frontline)
There was little hope for financial regulation from this
group. While the
Home Ownership and Equity Protection Act was passed in 1994, its provisions giving the
Federal Reserve responsibility for regulating the mortgage market were
dutifully ignored by Greenspan, and the
Riegle-Neal Interstate Banking and Branching Efficiency Act
was passed that same year allowing interstate banking throughout the United
States. Passage of this bill was particularly ominous in light of the fact
that the
Sherman Antitrust Act of 1890 and
Clayton Antitrust Act of 1914—enacted to protect the
public from anticompetitive practices on the part of businesses—had been
virtually ignored since the
Reagan Revolution began in 1980.
The spirit of deregulation got a further boost from the
1994 election. When the dust settled from that election Republicans had
control of both the House and the Senate for the first time since 1954, and it
was clear that the movement to reregulate the financial system was dead. A
seemingly blind faith in free-market capitalism and deregulation became the
tenor of the times. The extent to which this was so was made clear by Clinton
in his
1996 State of the Union Address when he announced to
the world that "the era of big government is over" and took pride in the fact
that his administration had eliminated "16,000 pages of unnecessary rules and
regulations."
On November 4, 1999, Congress passed the
Financial Services Modernization Act
(FSMA) which was signed
into law by President Clinton on November 12. This act repealed those
portions of the
Glass-Steagall Act of 1933 that prevented commercial bank holding companies from becoming conglomerates that are able to provide
both
commercial
and
investment
banking services as well as insurance and brokerage services. Congress then
passed the
Commodity Futures Modernization Act (CFMA) on December 14,
2000 which Clinton signed into law on December 21. This act explicitly
prevented both the
Commodity Futures Trading Commission and state gambling
regulators from regulating the
derivatives markets.
While the laws passed in the late 1980s and early 1990s led
to stronger regulation of depository institutions, such as commercial and
savings banks and savings and loans, by the mid 1990s the antiregulatory
atmosphere in Washington made the enforcement of the new laws problematic, and,
as we will see, passage of the
FSMA
and
CFMA in 1999 and 2000 gave a free
hand to
investment banks,
bank holding companies,
hedge funds, and
special purpose vehicles in the markets for
repurchase agreements and
financial derivatives. (See Chapter 8.)
The story of this era is reflected in Figure 4.1 which shows
1) the dramatic increase in Non-Federal debt as a percent of GDP following the deregulation of depository institutions and lax supervision on the part of regulators
in the early 1980s, 2) the leveling off and slight fall in this debt as a percent of GDP in response to
the reregulation of depository institutions and greater vigilance on the part
of regulators in the late 1980s and early1990s, 3) the beginning of the increase
in this debt in the mid 1990s as the regulatory attitude in Washington
changed, and 4) the continuing increase in this debt ration from 2000 through 2008 following the passage of FSMA and CFMA. This same story is told in Figure 4.2
which shows the expansion of debt on the part of financial institutions over
this same period.
Source:
Federal
Reserve (L1),
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5).
Figure 4.3 shows what happened in the mortgage markets
following the deregulation of the financial system in the 1980s. The increase in commercial mortgages as a percent of GDP
that fueled the speculative bubble in the commercial real estate markets of
the early 1980s is clearly visible in this figure, as is the collapse in this market following the bursting
of this bubble. The increase in commercial mortgages that fueled the
speculative bubble in the commercial real estate markets that accompanied the
speculative bubble in the housing market during the early 2000s is also
clearly visible in this figure, as is the
collapse of this market following the crash of 2008.
Source:
Federal
Reserve (L2),
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5).
Figure 4.3 also shows the dramatic increase in residential mortgages as a
percent of GDP that took place during the commercial real-estate bubble in the
1980s and the huge increase that fueled the housing bubble in the 2000s along with
the collapse of this market following 2007.
It should not be surprising that the behavior of
nonfinancial debt is related to the degree of regulation in the financial system.
Creating debt is what financial institutions do.
Financial institutions provide the mechanisms by which
borrowing and lending take place within society. In the process they provide
other services such as
insurance, a
safe and convenient place to keep money,
pension plans, and
brokerage and
underwriting services. They also deal in
equities, that is,
stocks as opposed to
loans,
bonds,
mortgages, and other types of
debt instruments. They underwrite the sale of newly
issued equities and broker the purchase and sale of previously issued
equities. They may also invest in equities, but the main business of finance
is debt, not equities. Debt is where the money is. Without debt, there would
be no financial system as we know it.
The primary mechanism by which financial institutions
create debt is through the process of
intermediation which means they intermediate between
the ultimate borrowers and lenders in society. They take in money from the
individuals and businesses that are the ultimate lenders and relend
the money to individuals and businesses that are the ultimate borrowers.
Banks take in money from their depositors who are the ultimate lenders and
relend the money in the markets for consumer and business loans. Insurance
companies take in money from their policy holders who are the ultimate lenders
and relend the money in the mortgage and bond markets. Pension funds take in
money from employees who are the ultimate lenders and relend the money in the
mortgage and bond markets as well.
In addition, certain financial institutions, historically banks but,
as we will see in Chapter
7, in today's
world shadow banks as well, have the power to
create debt out of thin air as a major portion of the money they lend is lent back to them to be relent again.
This process of intermediation is an essential part of the
economic system, and without it the system cannot function. The problem is
that while the ability for the economic system to function depends crucially
on this process, in the absence of strict government regulation and
supervision, this process is highly unstable. The reason this is so, and why
these institutions must be regulated and supervised is obvious—financial
institutions lend other peoples’ money. They take money from one group of
people and lend it to another group of people as they take a cut in the
process.
Not only does this process provide innumerable
opportunities for fraud to flourish on a grand scale, there are powerful forces within society
that drive the system of financial intermediation to fund speculative bubbles that
increase debt beyond any possibility of repayment. The reason for this is
also obvious—the more financial institutions are able to lend, the greater
their cut, and the more money they are able to make. In addition, those in
the financial system who handle other peoples’ investments have access to
information that provides opportunities to profit from speculative bubbles in
ways that are not available to those outside the system. (Stewart
WSFC)
The simple fact is this: huge fortunes can be made by those
who are able to take advantage of speculative bubbles. As was pointed
out in
Chapter 1, and worth repeating here, the extent to which the top 1% of the income distribution
benefited from these bubbles is clearly shown in
Figure 1.9 by the
-
53% increase in income share this group received during
the
1921-1926 real estate bubble and the 1926-1929 stock
market bubble that led up to the
Great Crash of 1929 and the
Great Depression of the 1930s.
-
55% increase in income share this group received during
the 1981-1988
junk bond, and
commercial real estate bubbles of the 1980s that led
up
to savings and loan crisis and the
1990-1991 recession.
-
51% increase in income share this group received during
the 1994-2000
dotcom and
telecom bubbles that led up to the
stock market crash of 2000 and the
2001 recession.
-
39% increase in income share this group received during
the 2002-2007 housing bubble that led up to the
Great Crash of 2008
and the worldwide economic crisis
we are in the midst of today.
Similarly,
Figure 1.10 shows the amount of income received in the form of
capital gains as a percent of total income from 1916 through 2010.
The increase in capital gains by fully 6% of total income
in the 1920s, 1990s, and 2000s depicted in this figure clearly shows the effects of speculation on income during
these eras that led to economic catastrophes as those who profited from these
bubbles realized huge capital gains. And again,
Figure 1.11 shows the trillion dollars plus in additional
profits reflected in the spike from 2001 through 2007 that financial
institutions would not have made if there had been no housing bubble and their
profits had stayed at their 2000 level.
It is no mystery why speculative bubbles persist in the
face of such massive gains by those who are able to take advantage of these
bubbles. The problem is, of course, that when those in charge of our financial
institutions are allowed to finance speculative bubbles and increase debt
beyond any possibility of repayment, they do not place only their own money
and economic wellbeing at
risk. They place other peoples' money and economic wellbeing at risk, and they threaten to
bring down the entire economic system.
There are a host of powerful arguments, based on seemingly
sound economic theory and irrefutable logic, put forth by those who favor
deregulating markets to explain why unregulated financial markets lead to
economic efficiency, growth, and prosperity, and why government regulation is
the source of all problems, (Fox
Taleb
Dowd) but we are not talking about theory or logic
here. We are talking about cold hard historical fact that goes far
beyond what happened in the savings and
loan crisis of the 1980s, the
dotcom
and telecom bubbles of the 1990s, and the
housing bubble and
sub-prime mortgage
fraud of the early 2000s. We are talking about the economic catastrophes
brought on by the financial
crises
in
1819,
1837,
1857,
1873,
1893, and
1907,
and we are talking about the last time this happened in the United States—1929.
(Fisher
Keynes
Polanyi
Kindleberger
Minsky
Phillips
Morris
Dowd
Reinhart
Johnson
Skidelsky
Kindleberger
Kennedy)
The
Crash of 1929 brought an end to the
Roaring Twenties with a vengeance, and the experience
of the
Great Depression that followed had a profound effect on
the American psyche for the next fifty years. The story of the 2000s is very much the story of the 1920s—namely, extreme excess on the part of an unregulated financial system—and it
is worth reexamining that story within the context of what we
have experienced over the past forty years.
The 1920s began with a rather steep recession in
1920-1921 followed by a
speculative bubble in the real estate market. The real
estate bubble burst in 1926 and was superseded by a speculative bubble in the
stock market. There was a mild economic downturn in
1927, a brief recovery that same year, and another mild
downturn in the summer of
1929. Then the stock market bubble came to a dramatic climax in the fall of 1929. (Galbraith
Friedman
Meltzer
Kindleberger
Eichengreen
Kennedy)
The
Crash of 1929
began on October 24—a day that became known as
Black Thursday—when
the stock market dropped dramatically in the morning and recovered somewhat in
the afternoon. While prices rallied on Friday, there were two more black days
to come. When trading resumed after the weekend, the Dow fell by
13%
on
Black Monday
and it fell an additional
12%
on
Black Tuesday.
There were rallies that followed, but, overall, the stock market lost
80%
of its value from its high in 1929 to its low in 1932 and the Dow fell by
almost
90%.
As stock prices fell in the fall of 1929, the mild
recession that had begun in the summer became severe, and a banking crisis
began in the fall of 1930 that reached its climax in 1933 when some
4,000 banks and
1,700 savings and loans went under in that year alone.
By the time the crisis came to an end some
10,000 banks had gone out of business along with
129,000 other businesses, and we were in
the depths of the
Great Depression.
From 1929 through 1933, unemployment went from
1.6 million to
12.8 million as the unemployment rate jumped from
3.2% of the labor force to
24.9%.
The economy experienced a major
deflation as consumer prices fell by
25% and wholesale prices by
30%. The total value of goods and services produced in
the United States fell by
46%, the level of production fell by over
30%.
Just as happened in 2008, the financial crisis in the United States
spread throughout the rest of the world, and the entire
world faced an economic catastrophe of epic proportions. (Kindleberger)
The depression lasted more than ten years. There were
still
8.1 million people unemployed in 1940, and the
unemployment rate did not fall below
14% until 1941. It wasn't until 1943—when the economy
was fully mobilized for World War II—that the unemployment rate finally fell
below its 1929 level, and by then the United States had increased the size of its
military by over
8.5 million soldiers. In other words, we did not
solve the unemployment problem created by the Great Depression until we were
fully mobilized for World War II and had drafted a number of people into the
military comparable to the number who were unemployed in 1940, though,
obviously, there was a bit of overkill here when it came to solving the
unemployment problem. (Figure 4.4)
Source:
Bureau of Labor Statistics (1),
Economic Report of the President, 1960
(D17).
It was clear to most people at the time that the cause of
the problem was rampant speculation in the stock market financed by expanding
debt. In fact, the debt created by the financial system during the 1920s had
grown to unreasonable levels in all areas, not just in the stock market. This
debt was unsustainable, and the stock market crash was just the trigger that
set in motion a set of forces that, in the face of this debt, brought down the
entire economic system. (Fisher)
When the stock market crashed, the value of stocks that
provided the collateral for speculative loans fell. This led to a panic in
the financial sector as financial institutions tried to cut their losses by
recalling existing loans and refusing to make new loans, not just loans
collateralized by stocks but all loans. The financial system simply froze,
and credit became unavailable. This forced debtors whose loans were
called or
who could not refinance their loans when they came due to sell the collateral
underlying their debts as well as other assets in order to meet their
obligations. These forced sales of collateral and other assets, in turn,
caused asset prices to fall throughout the financial system, and debtors began
to default as the value of their assets fell below the value of the loans they
had to repay. (Fisher)
As the panic grew, businesses that were unable to finance
their inventories and payrolls for lack of credit were forced to cut back
their operations and layoffs began. At the same time, households that were
unable to finance the purchase of such things as new homes, automobiles, and
other durable goods for lack of credit were forced to cut back their
expenditures. As output, employment, and business and household expenditures
fell, income fell as well. The rise in uncertainty and the heightened sense
of fear and pessimism toward the future exacerbated the situation. The result
was a vicious spiral downward as falling output and employment led to falling
income and expenditures which, in turn, led to falling output and
employment. (Keynes)
All of this should sound familiar, given our experience
during the current crisis, since this is exactly what happened in the mortgage
market following the bursting of the housing bubble in 2007 and the financial
system grinding to a halt in September of 2008.
Debt in the American economy
had grown to
unsustainable levels by 2007, and when the housing
market crashed, the value of the real estate that provided the collateral for
real estate loans began to fall. This led to a panic in the financial sector as
financial institutions tried to cut their losses by recalling existing loans
and refusing to make new loans, not just loans collateralized by real estate
but all loans. The financial system simply froze, and credit became
unavailable. This led to the same kind of forced selling of collateral and
other assets that, in turn, caused asset prices to fall in the same way asset
prices had fallen following
the stock market crash in 1929. It also initiated the same kind of vicious
downward spiral in output and employment in 2008 and 2009 that the economy
experienced in 1930 through 1933 with falling output and employment leading to
falling income and expenditures which, in turn, led to falling output and
employment. (FCIC
WSFC)
There were some fundamental differences, however.
Following the stock market crash in 1929,
the lack of deposit insurance led to a banking crisis in the fall of 1930 as people began taking money out of the banks in an attempt to
protect their savings by hoarding cash. At the same time, the Federal Reserve
was both unwilling and unable to react appropriately to the deteriorating
situation. This, in turn, caused the money supply to fall by
25% from 1929 to 1933 which, combined with the fall in
output and employment, caused wages and prices to fall as well. The resulting
deflation caused the debt that had been accumulated during the 1920s to become
an overwhelming burden since this debt now had to be repaid in the face of
falling wages, prices, and incomes. To make matters worse, wages and prices
fell more rapidly than the debt could be liquidated which caused the real
burden of the debt to increase even as the total debt fell. (Fisher
Friedman
Meltzer
Kindleberger)
In short, because of the unsustainable level of debt that
had accumulated during the 1920s and the inability and unwillingness of the
Federal Reserve to act, as debtors found themselves unable to meet their
contractual obligations, the contract system within the economy broke
down; widespread bankruptcy followed, and the financial system simply
imploded. It was the implosion of the financial system—brought on by an
unsustainable level of debt combined with falling output, income, money
supply, wages, and prices—that brought down the rest of the economy and
created the
Great Depression of the 1930s. (Fisher
Keynes
Friedman
Meltzer
Kindleberger
Eichengreen
Kennedy)
So far at least, we have been able to avoid this kind of
implosion of the financial system accompanied by a downward spiral of wages
and prices during the current crisis.
The vast majority of our political leaders, and
most renowned
economists, entered the
1930s with an abiding faith in the nineteenth century ideology of free-market
capitalism. They were convinced that markets were self correcting; attempts
at government intervention would do more harm than good, and that if the
economy was just left to its own devices competition in free markets would
allow wages and prices to adjust to bring the economic system back to full
employment. Many even believed the economic system would be made better by
the experience of a depression in that depressions weeded out economically
inefficient firms and, thereby, made the economy more productive. (Kennedy) This
attitude was personified in the infamous advice of President Hoover's Treasury
Secretary, Andrew Mellon, to
. . . liquidate labor, liquidate stocks, liquidate farmers,
liquidate real estate . . . it will purge the rottenness out of the system. High
costs of living and high living will come down. People will work harder, live
a more moral life. Values will be adjusted, and enterprising people will pick
up from less competent people. (CP)
The experience of the 1930s provided a shocking dose of
reality.
With total output falling by
30%, the unemployment rate increasing to
25%, tens of thousands of business going bankrupt, and
human misery increasing at an accelerating rate, it was impossible for
economists to explain just how the economic system was going to be made better
by all of this or why the government should not be allowed to intervene to do
something about it. There had to be something wrong with an ideological
theory that proclaimed it was a good thing for society to be going through
what it was going through at the time. The only explanation the theory could
offer for the dismal unemployment statistics was that wages were not falling
fast enough to bring the system back to full employment. But by 1933, wages
had already fallen by
22% in manufacturing,
26% in mining, and
53% in agriculture.
There was obviously something wrong with the theory, and
all but those with the most blind ideological faith in the miraculous powers
of free markets could see that there was something wrong with the theory.
The Crash of 1929 was not the first financial crisis
brought on by rampant speculation and reckless behavior in our financial
system. As was noted above, there were
crises in
1819,
1837,
1857,
1873,
1893, and
1907 that led up to
1929, and the economic fallout from each seemed to be
worse than the one that came before. The Great Depression that followed
the Crash of 1929 was the straw that broke the camel’s back, and, in response,
our political leaders of the 1930s through the 1960s abandoned the
failed
nineteenth century ideology of free-market capitalism in favor of a pragmatic
regime of regulated-market capitalism. This led to the creation of an
elaborate system of regulatory and supervisory institutions designed to keep
our financial institutions in check. It also led to the elaborate system of
government sponsored social-insurance programs we have today—Social
Security,
unemployment
compensation,
Medicare,
Medicaid,
Supplemental Security Income,
Temporary Assistance to Needy Families,
and various food and housing assistance programs—programs
that were designed to alleviate the sufferings caused by the vagaries endemic
in our economic system. These systems actually worked for some fifty
years to accomplish their ends, and, in the case of our social-insurance programs, are still working today.
Unfortunately, as new generations replaced old and memories
of the 1920s and Great Depression faded an antigovernment movement began to
take hold in the 1970s, and the failed nineteenth century ideology of
free-market capitalism became fashionable among our economic and political
leaders again. (Frank) As a result, the regulatory and supervisory system that
served us so well since the 1930s was systematically dismantled to the point that
it was virtually gutted by the early 2000s. This made it possible for
our financial institutions to repeat the folly of the 1920s and drive our
nation—along with the rest of the world—into another economic catastrophe of
epic proportions, just as these institutions had done in the 1920s.
The history of unregulated finance in the
United States, and, indeed, throughout the world, has been one financial
crisis and economic catastrophe after another. The reason for this is
that there is a certain element of magic that lies at the very center of the
financial system. Understanding how this magic works is essential to
understanding the financial system itself. In the next six chapters we
will look at the history of our financial system over the past two hundred years with
an eye toward explaining how this magic works and why the failure to
understand this magic or to remember this history made the Crisis of 2008
virtually inevitable.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter
5:
Nineteenth
Century Financial Crises
George H. Blackford ©
2009, last updated 5/1/2014
Prior to the
Civil War, all you needed to start a bank was a charter from a state and
access to a printing press. Banks would accept deposits, make loans, and
print banknotes that were, in essence, a promise by the bank to pay the bearer
on demand an amount of gold or silver at a fixed price. Banks accepted
deposits in the form of gold, silver, and banknotes issued by private banks and made loans,
generally in the form of banknotes that they printed themselves. The
banknotes printed and issued by private banks circulated in the community
alongside coins minted by the United States Mint and the mints of other
countries. Given the lack of specie (i.e., gold or silver coins) banknotes
printed and issued by private banks served as the primary
medium of exchange
in the economy and were the dominant form of money.
There was a
great deal of financial instability caused by this kind of monetary system,
and there were at least three major financial crises prior to the Civil War,
one in
1819,
1837, and
1857. At the same time, there were two attempts by the federal
government to regulate the financial system during this period. The first
was by way of the
First Bank of the United States which existed from 1791 to 1811, and the
second was by way of the
Second Bank of the United States which existed from 1816 to 1836.
The First and
Second Banks of the United States were the only banks chartered by the
federal government prior to the Civil War, and by virtue of the fact that
federal deposits were kept in these banks they dominated the financial system.
They preformed many of the functions of a
central bank in that they policed the other banks in the system by collecting their
banknotes
and presenting them for redemption in gold or silver thereby limiting the
ability of the other banks to print money. In so doing they controlled the
money supply and credit conditions in the country and added an element of
stability to the financial system.
These banks,
however, were private banks chartered to serve the interests of their
stockholders, not to serve the public good, and it was felt by many that the
political and economic power they wielded by virtue of their relationship to
the government was abused. The fate of the Second Bank of the United States
was sealed when its president, Nicholas Biddle, opposed Andrew Jackson in
the 1832 election. A bill to renew its charter was vetoed by Jackson in
that year, and the last nail was driven into its coffin in 1833 when Jackson
decreed that no more government money would be deposited in the Second Bank
of the United States. (Trumbore
eNCyclopedia
Phillips)
The demise of
the Second Bank of the United States left the country with no financial
institution that could perform the functions of a central bank, but even
with the First and Second Banks of the United States the situation was far from
satisfactory. Since each bank was responsible for the bank notes it
issued, one had to evaluate the worth of a given banknote on the
basis of the soundness of the issuing bank—that is, its ability to honor its
promise to redeem its banknotes in gold or silver—and with hundreds of banks
issuing these notes this was no easy task. There were literally thousands
of different kinds of banknotes in circulation by 1860, and, as a result,
banknotes did not necessarily trade at par. (Dwyer)
Banknotes issued by failed banks circulated alongside the notes of sound
banks and, of course, counterfeiting has always been a problem—even before
the Civil War. (OCC)
The result was a very unstable and inefficient monetary system that hindered
the growth of trade and economic development. (Grossman)
This situation
changed dramatically with the passage of the
National Banking Acts of 1863 and 1864. These acts created the
National Banking System with the intent of providing a stable and
uniform national currency and, not coincidently, to help finance the Civil
War. These two goals were accomplished by requiring that the banknotes
printed by national banks be backed by Treasury securities equal to ninety
percent of the value of the banknotes printed by national banks. These
securities could then be sold to redeem the notes if the issuing bank
failed. In addition, in 1865 a 10% tax was levied on non-national-bank
banknotes and on all transactions using non-national-bank banknotes. The
existence of this tax essentially forced all banks that wished to print
their own banknotes to join the National Banking System.
The fact that banks were forced to purchase
Treasury securities in order to print banknotes not only helped to
finance the Civil war, it also limited the amount of
banknotes that could be circulated in the economic system by the amount of
Treasury securities that were available to banks to back the notes they
issued. The result was
a stable, uniform national currency made up of 1) national banknotes tied to
the total value of Treasury debt outstanding, 2)
United Sates Notes which were the
greenbacks printed by the federal government to pay the troops during
the Civil War, and 3)
Gold Certificates issued by the Treasury which were, in effect,
warehouse receipts for gold held at the Treasury. (OCC)
While the
National Banking Acts of 1863 and 1864, bolstered by the 1865 tax on
non-national-bank banknotes, did provide a stable and uniform
national currency, these dramatic changes in our financial system did not solve the problem of financial crises.
The reason is that these reforms failed to deal directly with the fundamental liquidity and solvency
problems faced by banks that causes the financial system to be inherently
unstable.
Most
businesses can meet their liquidity needs (i.e., their needs for cash) by
structuring the term to maturity of their liabilities (i.e., debts that they
owe) to match the term to maturity of their assets (i.e., things that they
own). They can, for example, finance real estate which yields a return over
a relatively long period of time with 15 to 20 year loans, equipment with a
shorter lifespan with 5 to 10 year loans, and inventories with loans that
corresponds to the period of time it takes for their inventories to turn
over. A business that has its liabilities structured in this way can
generally muddle through with the hope of rebuilding its equity, even if it
is insolvent (i.e., even if it owes more than the value of the assets it can
sell to pay its debts) so long as it can service its debt and so long as it
can retain the confidence of its short-term creditors.
The situation
is fundamentally different for a bank. The primary source of funds for a
bank is the deposits it issues, most of which are very short-term
liabilities. At the same time most of the assets of the bank are made up of
relatively long-term commercial, business, and real estate loans that it
makes to its customers. These assets have term to maturities far beyond the
term to maturities of the bank's deposits, many of which, namely, checking
accounts, are payable on demand. Thus, by their very nature banks
are not able to structure the term to maturity of their liabilities to match
the term to maturity of their assets.
As was
indicated above, an ordinary business can generally muddle through when it
is in financial difficulty so long as it can service its debt and retain the
confidence of its short-term creditors. This is so because, in general, a
relatively small portion of an ordinary business's total liabilities are
short term and the number of short-term creditors with which it must contend
is relatively small. As a result, an ordinary business generally has the
option of sitting down with its local banker and suppliers, opening its
books, and undertaking a rational discussion of its financial viability to
arrive at a rational decision as to whether or not its short-term credit
should be continued. The situation is much different for a bank.
Even a small
bank has literally thousands of short-term creditors that hold its deposits,
and unlike the debts of most businesses, a large portion of a bank's deposits
(its checking accounts) are payable on demand. What’s more, in an
unregulated financial system that lacks deposit insurance there is no incentive at all for the depositors
of a bank to even listen if a bank tries to explain its financial situation.
The depositors know that if the bank were to fail those who close
their accounts first while the bank still has cash on hand to cover its
withdrawals will not lose their money, while those who wait will not be able
to get their money out of the bank until its assets are liquidated. As
a result, those who wait
potentially risk losing everything.
This means
that each individual bank, as well as the entire banking system itself,
depends crucially on the confidence the public has in the bank and the
banking system. As a result, banks are particularly susceptible to a panic
that results in what is known as a
run on the bank where all of its depositors lose confidence in
the bank and try to close their accounts at the same time. And when a
run occurs even the strongest bank can be driven out of business if it is
unable to borrow enough funds to meet the demands of its depositors for cash or sell
off its assets at prices sufficient to maintain its solvency.
The solvency
problem faced by any businesses, including a bank, is best understood in
terms of
the fundamental equation of double entry bookkeeping:
assets = liabilities +
owners' equity
where
assets refers to the value of everything the business owns;
liabilities refers to the value of everything the business owes,
and
owners' equity (also referred to as equity, equity capital, or
just capital) is defined as the difference between the value of the assets
owned by the business and the value of the liabilities owed by the business:
owners' equity ≡ assets -
liabilities.
The
significance of this equation for our purposes is that it illustrates the
solvency problem of banks, namely, the need to maintain a positive owners'
equity. If the value of the liabilities of a bank are greater than the
value of its assets, its owners' equity (net worth, equity, . . . , etc.) will be negative and the bank will be insolvent.
The fact that it is insolvent means that if the bank (or any business that
is insolvent) is forced into bankruptcy the value of its assets are
insufficient to cover the value of its liabilities and some of its
debtors will not get paid back what they have lent to the bank (or
business). This is a very precarious situation for a bank because in an
unregulated banking system without deposit insurance, no one wants to hold
deposits in a bank that is insolvent.
Not only is
the liquidity problem of banks fundamentally different from the liquidity
problem of ordinary businesses, the solvency problem of banks is fundamentally
different as well. Compared to banks, most businesses borrow very little
relative to their equity capital, that is, relative to the amount of money
the owners of the business have invested in the business. In fact, many
businesses operate without borrowing any money at all, and even more borrow
less than the amount the owners have personally invested.
The reason
for this is that running a business is a risky endeavor. Creditors
refuse to lend to a business if the owners do not have a substantial amount
of their own money invested in it, and the rates of interest businesses have
to pay, especially small businesses, are generally fairly high. As a
result, business owners often find it more profitable to reinvest their profits in
their business
by paying off their debts as soon as possible than to continue to borrow,
and the
leverage ratio of most businesses—that is, their total debt divided by
their equity capital—is relatively small.
[5.1]
The situation
is much different for a bank. As was
noted in Chapter 4, banks are in the business of borrowing from
one group of people and lending to another group of people.
That's what banks do. They make a profit from the difference between the costs of the
funds they borrow in the form of deposits (and during the Nineteenth Century
in the form of the banknotes they printed as well) and the revenues they receive from
the loans they make to businesses and private individuals. So long as the
costs of the funds they borrow are less than the revenues they receive from
their loans they can increase their profits by both borrowing and lending
more money. What's more, something magical happens when banks lend money.
If you have
$1,000 in cash and decide to become a bank, when you lend your $1,000 to
someone the chances are that whoever borrowed the money is going to spend
it. When the $1,000 you lent is spent the person who receives the money in
exchange for whatever is purchased now has your $1,000. He or she has
but three choices
as to what to do with it: spend it, just hold on to it, or
redeposit it in a bank. If the choice is to redeposit it in your bank that
means you are able to borrow your $1,000 back from the person who deposits
it. As a result your deposits will increase by $1,000 and you get the
cash back.
Even if your
$1,000 is redeposited in another bank, whatever bank it is redeposited in
will be able to borrow your $1,000 back from the person who deposits it and
will be able to increase its cash by the $1,000 that you lent. Thus, even
though you lose the cash, some other bank will eventually gains the cash unless
the non-bank public decides to hold more cash outside the banking system and
the cash is not redeposited in a bank.
This is where
the magic comes in because what this means is that whenever a bank makes a
loan to one of its customers, unless the non-bank public decides to hold
all of the newly lent cash outside the banking system, the banking
system as a whole does not lose all of the cash that was lent: To the
extent it
is redeposited in the
bank that made the loan that bank gets some of the cash back, and to the
extent it is redeposited in some other bank that bank gets some of
the cash. In either case the
amount of cash in the banking system as a whole does not fall by the amount
of the loan.
What does
change is the amount of money that the banking system is able to borrow from
its depositors. This amount increases by the portion of the loan that is redeposited in the banking system as deposits in the system increase by this
amount. In other words, unless the non-bank public decides to hold all
of the newly lent cash outside the banking system, whenever a bank makes a
loan it increases the amount of money the banking system as a whole is able
to borrow from the non-bank public by the amount of the loan that is redeposited in
the banking system. No other industry can increase the amount of money
it can borrow by increasing the amount of money it lends. It's magic!
The fact that
the banking system increases the amount it can borrow when it increases the
amount it lends has very important implications with regard to the stability
of the financial system. If you were the only bank in a small town during
the nineteenth century when you started your bank with $1,000 to lend, and
if every time you made a loan all of the proceeds of that loan were
subsequently redeposited in your bank, your deposits would grow to $10,000
after you had made ten $1,000 loans while your cash and equity capital would
remain at $1,000.
If we ignore
the other assets and liabilities of your bank, your financial position would
look like Figure 5.1 where your bank’s assets are listed on the left side of
the table in this figure, and your liabilities and net worth are listed on
the right side of this table.
Figure 5.1: Your Financial Situation after Lending $10,000.
|
Assets |
Liabilities & Net Worth |
Cash Reserves |
$1,000 |
Deposits |
$10,000 |
Loans |
$10,000 |
Net Worth |
$1,000 |
Total |
$11,000 |
Total |
$11,000 |
The fact that your deposits have grown
to $10,000 after you have made ten $1,000 loans while your cash and equity
remains at $1,000 in this situation means the leverage of your bank (your
total debt divided by your net worth) increases from zero when you had
no debt in the form of deposits to 10 when your deposits grew to $10,000.[5.2]
This is a very
profitable position for you to be in so long as it cost you less to manage your deposits
than you make from your loans. If, for example, you can lend at 5% and it
cost you 3% to manage your deposits, before your deposits grew you could
make only $50 a year by lending out your $1,000 worth of capital. After you
lend your $1,000 ten times and your deposits grew to $10,000 you would then
be making $200 a year on your $1,000 investment in your bank—you would be
taking in $500 on the $10,000 you had lent at 5% and it would cost you $300
(3% of $10,000 worth of deposits) to manage your $10,000 worth of deposits.
Thus, instead of only making a 5% return on your $1,000 worth of equity capital you would be
making a 20% return on that capital.
Leverage is a
beautiful thing for a bank when it comes to making money. If you were able
to grow your deposits in this way to $30,000 by making $30,000 worth of
loans that were redeposited in your bank, your financial situation would
look like Figure 5.2. Your leverage ratio would be 30 to 1, and you
would be able to make $600 ($30,000x.05 - $30,000x.03 = $600). This would
yield you 60% annual return on your $1,000 investment! Even if it cost you as much
as 4% to manage your deposits you would still be able to make $300 in this
situation and earn a 30% return on your investment.
Figure 5.2:
Your Financial Situation After Lending $30,000.
|
Assets |
Liabilities & Net Worth |
Cash Reserves |
$1,000 |
Deposits |
$30,000 |
Loans |
$30,000 |
Net Worth |
$1,000 |
Total |
$31,000 |
Total |
$31,000 |
While leverage
can be a money making machine for banks, it also poses two serious risks. The
first comes from the fact that the use of leverage increases the liquidity
problem of banks. In the above example, you are only able to achieve 30 to
1 leverage because people are willing to lend you money by depositing it in
your bank. You have borrowed $30,000 from your depositors but only have
$1,000 worth of cash on hand as a reserve to meet the needs of your
depositors for currency. If your depositors take currency out of their
deposits faster than you take in currency from the repayment of your $30,000
worth of loans, your reserves of cash will fall. Unless you can find
an alternative way to raise cash in this situation—say, by borrowing from
other banks or selling some of the asset you own for cash—you are going to be in
trouble when you run out of cash since your depositors tend to get
upset if you don't have the cash when they try to withdraw money from their
accounts.
The second
risk comes from the fact that the use of leverage increases your risk of
becoming insolvent. If your bank is leveraged at 30 to 1, a 3.3% fall in
the value of your assets—say, because some of your debtors go bankrupt or
abscond with the money—would wipe out your entire equity because when your
equity is leveraged 30 to 1 the value of your equity is less than 3.3% of the
value of your assets. The value of your assets would fall below the
value of your liabilities, in this situation, and you would then be insolvent. As was noted above, in
an unregulated banking system with no deposit insurance no one wants to keep
money in an insolvent bank. Even a rumor of your bank's insolvency could
start a run and drive you out of business irrespective of your cash reserves
or solvency before the run began, and, in the face of a run, as soon as you run out of cash you
will be forced to close your doors.
It should be
noted that the liquidity and solvency problems of banks are distinct problems. The
liquidity problem has to do with having enough cash on hand to meet your day
to day obligations. The solvency problem has to do with having assets
of sufficient value to cover your debts. If in the above example your debtors absconded
with 3.4% your loans, your financial situation would look like Figure 5.3. Your loans would
now be worth only $28,980 (.966x$30,000)
which means that when we add this to your $1,000 worth of cash the value of
your assets would be $29,980 while your liabilities in the form of deposits
would be $30,000. You would be insolvent because your liabilities
exceed your assets by $20, and you would not be able to pay off all of your
depositors if you were forced into bankruptcy even though you still have $1,000 in cash to
service your deposits.
Figure 5.3: Your Financial
Situation after a 3.4% Loss.
|
Assets |
Liabilities & Net Worth |
Cash Reserves |
$1,000 |
Deposits |
$30,000 |
Loans |
$28,980 |
Net Worth |
$1,000 |
Total |
$29,980
|
Total |
$29,980 |
By the same
token, if your debtors had not absconded but instead your depositors decided
to withdraw $1,000 from their accounts you would be in trouble even though your
solvency hadn't changed. In this situation, your financial situation would
look like Figure 5.4. You would still have $30,000 worth of loans even though
you lost all of your cash, but since you now have only $29,000 worth of
debts in the form of deposits this leaves you with the same net worth of
$1,000 that you had before your deposits and cash fell by $1,000. But you
would have no cash on hand to meet the demands of your depositors. If
someone tries to take money out of their deposit you don't have the cash to
give to them even though you still have $1,000 in net worth.
Figure 5.4:
Your Financial Situation after a $1,000 Withdrawal.
|
Assets |
Liabilities & Net Worth |
Cash Reserves |
$0 |
Deposits |
$29,000 |
Loans |
$30,000 |
Net Worth |
$1,000 |
Total |
$30,000 |
Total |
$30,000 |
Finally, it
should be noted that the ability of banks to increase the amount they can
borrow by increasing the amount they lend is not unlimited. It depends
crucially on the willingness of the non-bank public to keep their cash in
banks. An expansion of bank loans is generally accompanied by an increase
in economic activity that increases the need for the non-bank public to hold
currency outside of banks to finance their day to day transactions. As a
result, it is unlikely that all of the money lent will be redeposited in a
bank.
If, for
example, you started your small town bank with $1,000 cash and only 96% of
your loans were redeposited in your bank you would not be able to leverage
you capital 30 to 1 since 4% of the cash you lent would remain outside your
bank as the currency held by the non-bank public increased. Thus, by the
time you made $25,000 worth of loans your deposits would have increased by
$24,000, and you would be out of cash. Your financial situation would look
like Figure 5.5.
Figure
5.5: Your Financial
Situation with a 96% Redeposit Rate.
|
Assets |
Liabilities & Net Worth |
Cash Reserves |
$0 |
Deposits |
$24,000 |
Loans |
$25,000 |
Net Worth |
$1,000 |
Total |
$25,000 |
Total |
$25,000 |
At this point you would have no more cash to lend.
Thus, the maximum leverage you could obtain would be 24 to 1 in this
situation, but even this is not obtainable. If you did leverage
yourself this far you would have no cash reserves to meet the demands of
your depositors in the event one of them wished to make a withdrawal.
To play it safe you would have to keep some cash on hand to meet this
contingency.
If you chose
to keep cash reserves equal to, say, 5% of your deposits to protect yourself from
unexpected withdrawals you could then only lend $11,364 before your deposits
rose to $10,909 and your cash fell by $455 (4% of your $11,364 worth of
loans) to $545 (5% of your $10,909 worth of deposits). At that point your
financial situation would look like Figure 5.6.
Figure 5.6:
Your Financial Situation with a 96% Redeposit Rate and 5% Reserves. |
Assets |
Liabilities &
Net Worth |
Cash Reserves |
$545
|
Deposits |
$10,909
|
Loans |
$11,364
|
Net Worth |
$1,000
|
Total |
$11,909
|
Total |
$11,909
|
You would have to stop lending in order to
maintain your cash reserves at 5% of your deposits and would, by choice, be
limiting your leverage to a ratio of 10.909 to 1.
Thus, during
the nineteenth century the banking business was a continual balancing act
between expanding leverage in order to increase profits while maintaining
cash and equity reserves to deal with the liquidity and solvency problems
that this expansion inevitably entails. This balancing act was made
even more difficult by virtue of the fact that when times were prosperous
and money was being made hand over fist, the temptation to allow cash
reserves to fall and to increase leverage was for many banks irresistible.
This was particularly so when people had confidence in the banking system
and kept their money in the banks.
Since, in
this situation, deposits expand automatically as banks expand their loans,
banks automatically receive the cash they need to further expand their loans
and, hence, their leverage. If banks did not make a determined effort
to expand their cash and equity as their deposits were expanding during
prosperous times their cash reserves as a percentage of their deposits would
automatically fall and their leverage would automatically increase as well.
It is not until the crisis came and the non-bank public lost confidence in
the system and began to withdraw their cash that banks would be forced to
face the inevitable liquidity and solvency problems they had created for
themselves.
By virtue of
the term structure of their assets and liabilities—that is, the fact that
banks borrow short term and lend long term—and the ease with which banks can
expand their leverage during prosperous times, the financial stability of
banks is much more tenuous than that of an ordinary business.
Unfortunately, there was
no mechanism within the National Banking System to deal with the tenuous
nature of the financial stability of banks. As a result, even though the
National Banking System was able to provide a sound and stable currency, it was unable
to provide a sound and stable financial system.
One of the
reasons for this failing was that there were only two options available to a bank within this
system when it needed cash to meet the demands of its depositors: It
could either borrow
cash from other institutions or to sell whatever asset it owned that it
could find a market for. While an individual bank could obtain cash in this
way, when the non-bank public wished to increase the currency held outside
the banking system, an individual bank could only obtaining the cash in this
way either by borrowing from some other bank or by selling something to
someone who paid with cash drawn from a deposit in some other bank. There
was no mechanism within the National Banking System by which the banking system as a whole
could increase the amount of cash available to the system in a situation where the non-bank
public wished to increase the amount of cash it held outside the
banking system. This led to a serious problem.
During the
normal course of economic activity there were seasonal changes in the demand
for currency on the part of the non-bank public. When the demand for
currency increased, say during the spring when crops were planted and
especially during the fall when additional currency was needed to
pay seasonal workers during the harvest and to purchase the crops from farmers, currency would flow
out of the banks. This would place a strain on the cash available to banks
to meet the needs of their depositors and would cause a tightening of the
market for bank loans as banks were forced to pay out cash to their
depositors as their customers paid off their loans rather than being able to
relend the cash they received in this way.
As currency
flowed out of the banks to meet seasonal demands, banks were forced to cut
back on their loans and interest rates would rise. The pressure on the
banks for cash would thus be transmitted to those who relied on the banks
for credit. Potential borrowers who were unable to get new loans and
debtors who were unable to renew their existing loans at acceptable rates of
interest would be forced to cut
back their economic activity. At the same time, debtors who could not renew
their existing loans would be forced to sell the collateral underlying these
loans or to sell other assets they owned in order to meet their obligations
to the banks. These forced sales of assets, in turn, caused a general fall
in asset prices throughout the system which strained the system even further
as debtors found it more difficult to meet their obligations to the banks in
the face of falling asset prices. If this strain became particularly severe
it would cause some debtors to default which would threaten the solvency of
their banks and in some instances lead to bank failures.
Bank failures
inevitably shook the confidence of the public and created the possibility of
a financial crisis through a run on the system. Once a run began, there was no mechanism within the National Banking System by which it
could be contained since there was no way to replenish the cash that a
panicked public took out of the banks. When a bank ran out of cash
it would
be forced to shut down whether it was solvent or not, and if the panic was
sufficiently widespread the system would simply implode as the entire system
was forced to suspend payments of cash to depositors. The end result
was a
massive disruption in economic output and employment with extreme hardship
throughout the country.
The
instability caused by the rigidity of the supply of currency within the
National Banking System became clear as the nineteenth century wore on and
the country went through the financial crises of
1873,
1893, and
1907. The experiences of these crises eventually led to the creation of
the
Federal Reserve System
in 1913.
Endnote
[5.1]
Leverage is sometimes defined as the ratio of total assets (rather than
total debt) divided by equity. Since the fundament equation of double
entry bookkeeping (E = A - L) implies that the assets over equity ratio
(A/E = L/E + 1) is always
one greater than the liabilities over equity ratio, the two ratios measure
the same thing, and the choice between them is, for the most part, arbitrary.
[5.2] I have simplified this example of a
nineteenth century bank by ignoring the way in which banknotes printed by
the bank fit into the operation of the bank and the role played by gold in a
banking system encumbered by the rules of the gold standard that existed at
the time. These are important to a faithful understanding of how the
nineteenth century banking system functioned, but they are ignored here to
simplify the exposition in order to highlight those aspects of the
nineteenth century system that pertain directly to our modern system.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 6: The Federal Reserve and Financial Regulation
George H. Blackford ©
2009, last updated 5/1/2014
The Federal Reserve System (commonly referred to as "the Fed") was created
in response to the crisis of 1907 in an attempt to deal with what was
perceived at the time to be the central problem of the National Banking
System, namely, the inability of this system to deal with seasonal changes
in the demand for currency without placing a strain on banks and their
ability to make loans. This problem was dealt with by creating the Federal
Reserve System as a
central bank—that
is, a bank in which other banks can open deposits and from which other banks
can borrow money—and by giving the Federal Reserve the power to print its
own currency. At the same time, all other banks were prohibited from
printing currency. (Bernanke)
The Federal Reserve thus became the
lender of last resort within the banking system, willing
and—given its ability to print money—able to lend cash to other banks to
meet their needs. It was believed that in addition to the
ability to meet the seasonal needs of banks for cash, the Fed would also be
able to eliminate financial crises by lending cash to sound banks during
times of financial stress while allowing unsound banks to go out of business
in an orderly fashion.
The mechanism by which the Federal Reserve functions within the financial
system, and by which the Federal Reserve derives its power, is quite simple
in principle and can be summarized as follows:
-
The Federal
Reserve
determines the amount of currency that is available to the economy.
-
The Federal
Reserve also
sets the
reserve requirement ratio, that is, the fraction of deposits that
banks must hold in the form of reserves, where reserves consist of either
the currency banks have in their vaults (vault cash) or in their deposit
at the Federal Reserve.
-
The non-bank
public is free to determine how much of the currency that the Federal
Reserve makes available to the
economy is held outside of banks and how much is deposited in banks to
serve as reserves against deposits.
-
Banks are then
allowed to expand their loans and deposits (in the manner explained in Chapter 5) until they cannot make
additional loans without violating their reserve requirements.[6.1]
Within this system, banks are limited in their ability to expand the amount
they can borrow from their depositors as they expand the amount they lend by
1) the amount of currency the Fed makes available to the economic system, 2)
the amount of this currency the non-bank public is willing to leave in
banks, and 3) the reserve requirement ratio set by the Fed. As is
demonstrated below, the cornerstone of this system is the Federal
Reserve’s ability to determine the amount of currency that is available to
the economic system.
The amount of currency that is available to the economic system is referred
to as
high-powered money, where High-Powered Money is the sum of
currency in circulation (that is, currency in the hands of the non-bank
public) plus the reserves held by banks, either in the form of vault cash or
as deposits at the Federal Reserve. High-Powered Money is also
referred to as the
monetary base as it is the foundation on which the
monetary system, indeed, the entire financial system rests.
There are two ways in which the Federal Reserve can
control the amount of High-Powered Money, hence, the amount of currency
available to society.
The first is by making or retiring loans to banks. The Federal Reserve
makes and retires loans to banks through what is referred to as the
discount window where the rate of interest charged for these loans is
referred to as the
discount rate. All loans made by the Federal Reserve through the
discount window must be fully backed by collateral supplied by the borrowing
banks, and these loans are made at a discount to the face value of the
collateral offered by the borrowing bank. Hence, the terms discount window
and discount rate. (FRB)
When the Federal Reserve makes a loan to a bank it does so by simply
crediting the reserve deposit of that bank at the Federal Reserve by the
amount of the loan. As a result, the reserve component of High-Powered
Money is increased directly by the amount of the loan. By the same token,
when the Federal Reserve retires a loan previously made to a bank, the bank
pays off that loan by deducting the amount of the loan from its reserve
deposit at the Federal Reserve. As a result, the reserve component of
High-Powered Money is decreased directly by the amount of the loan that is
repaid.
The way in which a $1,000 loan by the Fed to a commercial bank affects the financial
situation of both the Fed and the Banking system and, thus, changes the
amount of currency available to the economic system is illustrated in
Figure 6.1. When the Fed credits the amount of this loan to the
reserve deposit of the borrowing bank, this transaction increases the Fed’s asset Loans
to Banks and its liability Reserve Deposits held by banks by the
amount of the loan, $1,000. At the same time, it increases the banking
system’s asset Reserve Deposits and its liability Loans from Fed
by the same amount.
Figure 6.1: A $1,000 Loan by the
Fed to a Bank.
|
Federal Reserve |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Loans to Banks |
+$1,000 |
Reserve Deposits
|
+$1,000 |
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserve Deposits |
+$1,000 |
Bank Deposits |
+$10,000 |
The fact that the reserve deposits in the banking system have increased by
$1,000 as a result of this loan means that High-Powered Money—the sum of
currency in circulation and reserve deposits—has increased
by this amount, and since banks can withdraw an additional $1,000 worth of currency from their reserve
account at the Federal Reserve after this transaction it means that the amount of currency
available to the system has increased by $1,000.
This process, of course, works in reverse when the loan is paid back by the
bank. The Fed’s asset Loans to Banks and its liability Reserve
Deposits will fall by the amount of the repayment as the bank repays the
loan by allowing the Fed to deduct the amount of the repayment from the
bank's reserve deposit. At the same time, the banking system’s asset
Reserve Deposits and its liability Loans from Fed will fall by
the same amount. Thus, all of the pluses in Figure 6.1 become
minuses.
The fact that the reserves in the banking system must decrease by the amount
of the repayment means that High-Powered Money will fall by this amount as
well, and there will be $1,000 less currency available to the economic
system than there was before the repayment took place since banks will now
be able to withdraw $1,000 less currency from their reserve accounts than they could before
the loan was made.
The second way in which the Federal Reserve can control the amount of
High-Powered Money is by buying or selling something. While it doesn’t matter
what the Federal Reserve buys or sells, when it comes to controlling the
amount of High-Powered Money the Federal Reserve generally restricts itself
to buying or selling
government securities. The decisions of the Fed to buy or sell
government securities are made by the Federal Reserve’s
Open Market Committee and are referred to as the Federal Reserve’s
open market operations. (FRB)
When the Federal Reserve buys a government security, the institution that
sells the security receives a check written on the Federal Reserve for the
amount paid for the security. In the normal course of events, the check
will be deposited in a bank, and, in turn, the bank will redeposit the check
in its reserve account at the Federal Reserve. As a result, the reserve
component of High-Powered Money will increase by the amount of the check
written on the Federal Reserve to purchase the government security.
Figure 6.2 illustrates the situation where the Fed purchases a
$1,000 government security from a member of the non-bank public. This
transaction increases the Fed’s asset Government Securities by the amount of the purchase, $1,000.
When the member of the non-bank public deposits the check it received for
the security in its bank account, the banking system’s liability Bank
Deposits increase by the amount of the check. When the bank deposits
the $1,000 check in its reserve account the banking system’s asset Reserves
increases by the same amount as will the Fed's liability Reserve Deposits.
Figure
6.2: A $1,000 Purchase of Government Security by the Fed. |
Federal Reserve |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Gov. Securities |
+$1,000 |
Reserve Deposits
|
+$1,000 |
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserve Deposits |
+$1,000 |
Bank Deposits |
+$1,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-Bank Public |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Bank Deposits |
+$1,000 |
Bank Loans |
+$1,000 |
Gov. Securities |
-$1,000 |
|
|
The only change that has occurred in the financial situation of the non-bank
public at this point is there has been an exchange of one kind of
asset for another—Government Securities held by the non-bank public
have gone down while Bank Deposits held by the non-bank public have
gone up by the same amount, $1,000. But the fact that the reserves in
the banking system have increased by $1,000 as a result of this purchase by
the Fed means that High-Powered Money has increased by this amount, and
there is now $1,000 more currency available to the economic system than
there was before this purchase took place.
By the same token, when the Federal Reserve sells a government security it
will receive a check written on a commercial bank for the amount of the
sale. The Federal Reserve will then deduct the amount of that check from
the reserve deposit of the bank on which the check is written, and the
reserve component of High-Powered Money will decrease by the amount of the
check. The bank, in turn, will deduct the amount of the check from the
account on which the check was written. As a result, all of the signs in
Figure 6.2 will be reversed, and the amount of High-Powered Money,
that is, the amount of currency available to the economic system, will be
decreased accordingly.
Thus, when the Fed wants to increase the amount of currency available to the
economy it can either increase the amount it lends to banks or it can
purchase government securities. When the Fed wants to decrease the amount
of currency available to the economy it can either reduce the amount it
lends to banks or it can sell government securities.
The ability of the Federal Reserve to control the amount of currency that is
available to the economic system provided a mechanism by which the seasonal demand for currency problem that plagued
the National Banking System could be
eliminated. After
the Federal Reserve came into being, banks were no longer forced to contract
their lending as currency flowed out of the banks in response to seasonal
changes in the demand for currency. Instead
they could borrow from the Fed or the Fed could purchase government
securities from the public in order to replenish the reserves that were lost
as the currency flowed out of the banks, for example, during spring planting
or the fall harvest. By the same token, when the
planting or harvest was over and the currency flowed back into the banks the Fed could
absorb the excess currency as the loans it had made were repaid and as it
sold the government securities it had purchased to meet the currency drain
from banks during the planting or harvest seasons.
It is important to note, however, that when the Federal Reserve changes the
amount of High-Powered Money in this way it can lead to changes in the
financial system that go beyond the changes indicated in Figure 6.1 and
Figure 6.2 above. The Federal Reserve is not simply a passive
agent that responds to the seasonal changes in the demand for currency by
the non-bank public. The Fed can change the amount of High-Powered
Money
through its lending and open market operations in any way it chooses whether
currency is flowing into or out of banks or not. As a result, the Federal
Reserve has the power to affect the ability of the banking system to make
loans. This gives the Federal Reserve the power to affect the credit
conditions in the economic system irrespective of the seasonal demands for currency
by the non-bank public.
Consider the situation depicted in Figure 6.2 where the Fed has purchased a $1,000 government security
from a member of the non-bank public and thereby increased the amount of
deposits and reserves in the banking system by $1,000. Now assume that the
reserve requirement ratio is 10% and the banking system is fully loaned up
before this transaction takes place—that is, that the actual reserves held
by banks are equal to the reserves they are required to hold as determined
by the size of their deposits and the reserve requirement ratio.
Since the reserve requirement ratio is 10% and this transaction increased
deposits by $1,000 the reserves banks are required to hold have increase by
$100. At the same time, this transaction also increases the reserves that banks
actually have by
$1,000. As a result, there is $900 in
excess reserves in the banking system ($1,000 increase in actual
reserves minus the $100 increase in required reserves) after this
transaction takes place that did not exist before this transaction took
place. These excess reserves represent cash banks hold in excess of what
they are required to hold—cash that can be lent to and borrowed
back from the non-bank public as loans and deposits grow in the banking
system in manner discussed
in Chapter
5.
As banks make loans to and borrow the money back from the non-bank public the
loans and deposits in the banking system can grow until there are
no longer excess reserves in the banking system. If there are no leakages
of currency out of the banking system as this process of expansion takes
place, the system will eventually reach the point depicted in Figure 6.3 where Bank Deposits increase by $10,000
and bank loans by an additional $9,000.
Figure 6.3: Secondary Effects of a $1,000 Purchase by
the Fed. |
Federal Reserve |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Gov. Securities |
+$1,000 |
Reserve Deposits
|
+$1,000 |
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserve Deposits |
+$1,000 |
Bank Deposits |
+$10,000 |
Bank Loans |
+$9,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-Bank Public |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Bank Deposits |
+$10,000 |
Bank Loans |
+$10,000 |
Gov. Securities |
-$1,000 |
|
|
At
this point the process of expansion must come to an end as required reserves
will have increased by $1,000 (10% of the $10,000 increase in deposits), and
there will no longer be excess reserves in the system. At the same
time, the non-bank public will have increased the deposits it owns by
an additional $9,000 and will have gone $9,000 deeper in debt to the
banks. And all of this has taken place as a result of 1) the
Federal Reserve purchasing a $1,000 government Security, 2) the banking
systems willingness to lend its excess reserves, and 3) the non-bank public's willingness to deposit its excess cash
in banking system.
This process works in reverse, of course, if the Federal Reserve sells a
$1,000 government security. Reserves and deposits would
fall by $1,000, and banks would find themselves with a $900 deficiency in
reserves. Banks would then be forced to reduce their outstanding loans by $9,000
as the non-bank public paid off their debts to the banks and bank deposits
would fall by an additional $9,000. All of the signs in Figure 6.3 would be reversed and there would no longer be a
deficiency of reserves in the system.
The same kinds of results would be obtained if the Federal Reserve had
increased its loans to banks by $1,000 in this situation instead of
purchasing a government security. The only difference would be that the
loan would not have directly increased deposits by $1,000, and the non-bank
public would not have sold a government security. The entire $1,000 increase in
reserves would be excess reserve, and banks would be able to increase their
loans to the non-bank public by $10,000 instead of only $9,000. The end
result would be as depicted in Figure 6.4.
Figure 6.4:
Secondary Effects of a $1,000 Loan by the Fed.
|
Federal Reserve |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Loans to Banks |
+$1,000 |
Reserve Deposits
|
+$1,000 |
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserve Deposits |
+$1,000 |
Bank Deposits |
+$10,000 |
Bank Loans |
+$10,000 |
Loans from Fed |
+$1,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-Bank Public |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Bank Deposits |
+$10,000 |
Bank Loans |
+$10,000 |
Again, if the Fed had reduced its loans to banks by $1,000 instead of
increased its loans by this amount all of the signs in Figure 6.4
would be reversed.
While the Federal Reserve was able to solve the seasonal demand for currency
problem that had plagued the National Banking System, it was not able to
solve the financial crisis problem that it was hoped it would solve. The
inadequacy of the Federal Reserve in this regard became painfully obvious as
the economy worked its way through the Roaring Twenties and into the Great
Depression of the 1930s.
As was noted in
Chapter 4, the 1920s began with a minor recession in 1920-21, and then a speculative
bubble in the real estate market began in 1921 and burst in 1926. (White)
This real estate bubble was superseded by a speculative bubble in the stock
market which began in 1926 and burst in October of
1929. As real estate and stock prices fell the economy went into a
recession, asset prices fell, debtors defaulted on their loans, and a
banking crisis began in the fall of 1930 that didn't reach its climax until
1933 when some 5,190 banks went under in that year alone.
As this drama unfolded it became impossible for the
Federal Reserve to resolve the situation by simply providing cash to sound banks in
order to save them while allowing unsound banks to go under.
Even though the Fed was able to
deal with the liquidity problems of banks in meeting the demands of
their depositors during the crisis, it was powerless when it came to
dealing with the solvency problems of banks that developed during the
crisis.
The problem was not that sound banks needed cash to meet
their depositor’s demands for currency. The problem was that the
forced sale of assets throughout the system caused asset prices to fall,
which, in turn, caused the value of the collateral underlying bank loans to
fall below the value of the loans that had been made. This drove
otherwise sound banks into insolvency, and banks became unsound faster than
they could be saved. The result was the
downward spiral described in Chapter 4 that led to
the Great Depression of the 1930s. (Fisher
Keynes
Kindleberger)
The experience of the 1920s also revealed a number of serious deficiencies
in the way the Federal Reserve was organized. Because of the inherent
mistrust of government in the United States at the time the Federal Reserve
was founded, there was a determined effort to decentralize power within the
Federal Reserve System. Toward this end, the Federal Reserve was created as
a voluntary, quasi private institution owned by the member banks, that is,
by the banks that choose to join the Federal Reserve System. Instead of
creating a single bank, the country was broken up into twelve banking
districts, each of which was given its own Federal Reserve Bank. Each
Federal Reserve Bank was governed by a nine member board of directors, six
of which were elected by the member banks in its district and the remaining
three were appointed by a seven member Federal Reserve Board that was
established to oversee the system as a whole. The Secretary of the Treasury
and Comptroller of the Currency served on the Federal Reserve Board ex
officio and the remaining five members were appointed by the President and
confirmed by the Senate. This arrangement insured that the individual
Federal Reserve banks would be dominated by the member banks rather than by
the federal government.
In addition, even though the government appointed Federal Reserve Board was
established to oversee the system as a whole, the lines of authority and
responsibility between the board and the district banks were not clearly
drawn. As a result, there was no central authority within the system, and
it was impossible for the Federal Reserve to pursue a unified or coherent
national policy in the absence of a consensus since each of the twelve
Federal Reserve district banks were free to follow their own lending and open market
policies irrespective of the policies of the other district banks or those of the
Federal Reserve Board. (Meltzer)
To make things worse, there were few provisions in the original Federal Reserve
Act that allowed the Federal Reserve to regulate or control the kinds of
behavior on the part of financial institutions that inevitably lead to
financial crises. The focus of the act was on providing an elastic
currency within the context of a decentralized system rather than on
regulating or controlling the behavior of financial institutions as such.
All of these factors combined to make it impossible for the Federal Reserve
to curb the speculative behavior in the real estate and stock markets that led to the Crash of 1929 and, in fact,
made it virtually inevitable that the Fed would finance the increase in debt that occurred during the 1920s that ultimately lead the
country through a downward spiral of defaults and into the Great Depression
of the 1930s. (Fisher
Keynes
Friedman
Kindleberger Meltzer
Eichengreen
Bernanke)
The problem of financial crises arises from the very
nature of the financial system itself, starting with the fact that the
financial system is, by its very nature, inherently unstable. As was
explained in Chapter 5,
during periods of economic growth and prosperity the temptation to allow
cash reserves to fall and to increase leverage is irresistible for many
financial institutions. In this situation we find that poorly managed
financial institutions, by the very fact that they are poorly managed, tend
to underestimate the risks of economic instability as they see the road to
riches in increasing their leverage and in financing projects that pay the
highest expected rates of return. Those projects inevitably turn out to be the most
speculative projects that are the most at risk from economic instability. To
make matters worse, as was explained in Chapter 4, there are powerful incentives for financial institutions
to finance these projects since huge fortunes can be made by those who
facilitate and are able to take advantage of the speculative bubbles that
are created by this kind of speculative activity.
In addition, while most people are honest, many are not. In an unregulated
or poorly regulated financial system opportunities for fraud abound, and no
other sector of the economy has the potential for illicit gains as does the
financial sector. (Black
Fisher
Phillips) It is no accident that the most notorious fraud of all
time was perpetrated by
Charles Ponzi—the man for whom the Ponzi scheme was named—during
the unregulated era of the Roaring Twenties or that the greatest Ponzi
scheme of all time was perpetrated by
Bernie Madoff during the recent period of deregulation. Nor is
it a coincidence that the frauds of
Charles Keating,
Michael Milken,
Ivan Boesky,
Jeff Skilling,
Ken Lay,
Andy Fastow, and
Bernie Ebbers occurred during this latter period. As these
individuals and countless others have shown, fortunes can be made in the
financial sector by people who fraudulently game the system, and this fraud
is most dangerous when it involves banks. Given the banking system’s
ability to increase the amount it can borrow as it increase the amount it
lends and the fact that a substantial portion of the banking system’s
liabilities, namely its checking accounts, are payable on demand, the
banking system is particularly vulnerable to a run that can bring down the entire
system like a house of cards.
This
danger is particularly acute during prosperous times when highly leveraged,
poorly and fraudulently managed banks can earn more money than moderately
leveraged well managed banks. In this situation poorly/fraudulently managed
banks can offer higher rates of interest to their depositors. This gives
them a short-term competitive advantage in the market for bank deposits. At
the same time, this situation presents a dilemma to the well managed banks.
If they do not follow the lead of the poorly/fraudulently managed banks by
matching the increases in interest on their deposits the well managed banks
will lose deposits to poorly/fraudulently managed banks. What's more, if
they do match these increases they will lose money unless they also abandon
their reluctance to increase their leverage and finance the kinds of riskier
speculative projects being financed by the poorly managed banks. (Black
Fisher
Phillips)
As a result, the very existence of the well managed banks is threatened in
this situation if they fail to follow the lead of the poorly/fraudulently
managed banks.[6.2]
In addition, there are powerful psychological and social pressers that come
to bear on those who try to run a well managed bank in this situation. When
others are making fortunes through what seem to be unsound competitive
practices that threaten your bottom line, it is exceedingly difficult to
risk being wrong on your own in standing up and going against the tide. It
is much easier to follow the crowd and risk going down together. As was
noted by John Maynard Keynes
some seventy-five years ago
A sound banker, alas, is not one who foresees danger and avoids it, but one
who, when he is ruined, is ruined in a conventional way along with his
fellows, so that no one can really blame him. (Keynes)
All of this feeds the speculation that leads to bubbles where prices are bid
up to unsustainable levels and then fall precipitously as the markets
crash. This situation is similar to the effect on competitors when an
ordinary business recklessly cuts prices and bids up the costs of resources,
but the analogy ends here because there are two fundamental differences
between ordinary businesses and banks.
First, unlike an ordinary business, when a poorly or fraudulently managed
bank underestimates the risks of economic instability, leverages itself to
dangerous levels, and increases interest rates on its deposits thereby
inducing its competitors to follow suit it threatens the stability of the
entire financial system. If the bank is a particularly large or important bank, or if a
relatively large number of its competitors are driven out of business, it
can cause depositors to lose confidence in the
system itself, and the ensuing panic can bring down the entire financial system as depositors try to get their money out of the banking system.
Second, no other sector of the economy is as intricately intertwined with
the entire economic system as is the financial sector in which banks play a
central role. When this
sector falters in the wake of a bursting speculative bubble it puts the entire
economic system at risk. We don’t have to imagine a situation in which the
financial difficulties of banks in an unregulated or poorly regulated
financial system can bring down the entire economy. This has proved to be
the inevitable result throughout the history of banking and around the
entire world whenever a banking system has been caught up in this kind of
situation. (Reinhart
Rogoff
Kindleberger
MacKay
Skidelsky
1819
1837
1857
1873
1893
1907
Friedman
Galbraith)
In 1932 the Senate Committee on Banking and Currency set out to investigate
the cause of the developing depression. This investigation became known as
the
Pecora Commission after its chief counsel,
Ferdinand Pecora. Pecora exposed massive levels of fraud, corruption,
conflicts of interest, and incompetence on Wall Street which led to a public
outcry for government regulation of the financial sector. (Moyers
Galbraith) The result was passage of the
Glass-Steagall Act of 1933 which created the
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) and required the separation
of commercial from investment banking and insurance to eliminate conflicts of interests
that had fostered corruption in the markets for securities. In addition,
the
Banking Act of 1935 centralized control of the
Federal Reserve System in the Federal Reserve Board. (Bernanke)
The Federal Reserve Board was also symbolically renamed the
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System in the
Banking Act of
1935, and the Board of Governors was reconstituted as its ex officio members
were replace by members appointed by the president and confirmed by the
Senate.
At the same time, the legal authority to implement Federal Reserve policy
was taken out of the hands of the individual Federal Reserve district banks
and vested in a newly created
Federal Reserve Open Market Committee (FOMC) made up of the seven members of
the Board of Governors and five of the presidents of the individual Federal
Reserve district banks. The five presidents serve on a rotating basis except for the
president of the New York Federal Reserve Bank who, because of the
importance of New York City to the financial system, was given a permanent seat on
the FOMC. In addition, the Fed was given enhanced power to
regulate and control speculative activities within the financial system. It
was given the power to set
margin requirements on loans collateralized by shares of stock, for
example, and to intervene in other financial markets as the need arose.
The point of this legislation was to provide a comprehensive system of
government regulation designed to prevent financial crises before they
began. At the heart of this system was the FDIC insurance of bank deposits designed to prevent runs on banks.
While deposit
insurance may prevent runs it cannot eliminate financial crises
because it does nothing to keep poorly or fraudulently managed banks from
overextending themselves. Toward this end, the kinds of loans banks were
allowed to make were were severely restricted as was the amount of money a bank was
allowed to loan to a single customer.
To prevent poorly/fraudulently managed banks from having a competitive
advantage over well managed banks in competing for deposits, banks were
prohibited from paying interest on demand deposits (i.e., checking
accounts), and the maximum interest rates banks were allowed to pay on time
deposits (i.e., savings accounts) was set by the Fed. These rules were
designed to protect the public and taxpayers (by way of the FDIC) from
reckless and fraudulent behavior on the part of banks. And to make all of
this work, a comprehensive regulatory and supervisory system was put in place
to ensure that banks were following the rules set down by the Fed and not
gaming the system to get around the rules.
A
similar regulatory system was put in place for thrift institutions such as
savings and loan associations via the
Federal Home Loan Bank Act of 1932 which created the
Federal Home Loan Banking System (FHLB) that regulated savings and loan
associations and the
National Housing Act of 1934 which created the
Federal Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation. (FSLIC)
From the 1930s through the 1960s policy makers took a decidedly pragmatic
view of financial regulation in reining in the speculative and fraudulent
urges of the financial sector. Haunted by the specter of the Great
Depression, they strengthened the regulatory system as the need arose. The
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 created the
Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) to regulate investment banks
and the stock exchanges in order to crack down on fraud and corruption in
the securities markets. Publicly traded corporations were required file
disclosure statements with the SEC to make public important information
about their firms subject to both civil and criminal penalties for false or
misleading statements or for important omissions.
Insider trading was also outlawed as were the stock manipulation
practices such as
front running,
disseminating false information, and artificially trading a security to
mislead investors.
The
Maloney Act of 1938 amended the Securities Exchange Act to create
Self Regulating Organizations (SROs) to provide direct oversight of
securities firms under the supervision of the SEC and provided for the
regulation of the
Over-The-Counter (OTC) market for securities. The SEC was also
authorized to impose its own capital requirements on securities firms, and
in 1944 the SEC exempted from its capital rule
any firm whose SRO imposed more comprehensive capital requirements.
In 1940 Congress passed the
Investment Company and
Investment Advisers Acts which brought mutual funds under the purview of
federal regulation, and in 1956 the
Bank Holding Company Act was passed restricting
the actions of bank holding companies. The
International Banking and
Financial Institutions Regulatory and Interest Rate Control Acts were
passed in 1978 to bring foreign banks within the federal regulatory
framework and to establish the limits and reporting requirements for bank
insider transactions. (RiskGlossary)
This regulation was designed to break the boom and bust cycle in the
financial sector of the economy—which inevitably led to a boom and bust
cycle in the economy as a whole—by prohibiting the kinds of reckless and
irresponsible speculative and fraudulent practices that inevitably lead to
insolvency on the part of poorly and fraudulently managed banks and drove
many responsibly managed banks out of business and the system into crises. What's more, these measures actually worked for
over fifty years to accomplish this end. Unfortunately, things began to
change in the 1970s and 1980s as attitudes toward government regulation of
the economic system began to change.
[6.1]
While this mechanism is quite simple in principle, it is somewhat more
complicated in practice. The Federal Reserve System is a voluntary
organization, and not all banks are members of the system. Prior to
1980, the Fed only set the reserve requirement for member banks, that is,
for banks that chose to become members of the Federal Reserve System.
Reserve requirements for nonmember banks were set by the states in which the
nonmember banks were chartered. In addition, there are different
reserve requirements for different kinds of deposits, e.g., time deposits (savings
accounts) have lower reserve requirement ratios than demand deposits (checking
accounts). What's
more, the amount of currency banks held in their vaults (i.e., vault cash)
was not considered to be part of reserves from 1917 to 1959. To simplify the
exposition in what follows these considerations are ignored and it is
assumed there is only one reserve requirement ratio that applies to all
deposits and that vault cash is part of reserves. See
Feinman for a history of the way reserves and reserve requirements were
determined from the nineteenth century through the early 1990s.
[6.2]
The nature of the problem here was succinctly put by Charles Prince, former
CEO of Citigroup, in his
infamous and much maligned comment in the
Financial Times: "When the music stops, in terms of liquidity, things
will be complicated. But as long as the music is playing, you’ve got to get
up and dance. We’re still dancing.” (See
Reuters)
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 7:
Rise of the Shadow Banking System
George H. Blackford ©
2009, last updated 5/1/2014
As memories of the Great Depression faded, an
antigovernment movement began to take hold in the United States led by a
group of people who possessed an abiding faith in the efficacy of free
markets to solve all economic problems. This movement became the foundation
of the
Conservative Movement in the 1960s and, in turn, provided the
ideological foundation of the Republican Party in the 1970s. Their mantra
of lower taxes, less government, and deregulation combined with
disdain for government has dominated the political debate ever since. These
ideas were in the forefront of the
Reagan Revolution that began with the election of Ronald Reagan in 1980,
and, as was noted in Chapter 4, they were embraced by the Democratic Party in the 1990s.
They reached a
crescendo in the 2000s after the Republican Party took control of both the
Whitehouse and Congress in 2000. (Harvey
Frank Amy
Westen
Altemeyer)
The success of the Conservative Movement over
the past thirty years in undermining the regulatory framework setup in
response to the disaster that followed in the wake of the
Crash of 1929 has been phenomenal—not only in passing legislation that
deregulated our financial institutions but in reducing the funding for
regulatory agencies and in fostering a non-enforcement attitude toward
existing regulations as well. At the same time, changes took place in
our financial system that made what was left of our regulatory system in the
early 2000s essentially unworkable.
It was clear in 1980 that thrift institutions
(i.e.,
savings banks and
savings and loan associations) were in serious trouble as a result of
the rise of
Money Market Mutual Funds (short-term
mutual funds with all of the characteristics of a savings account) and
Cash Management Accounts (money market funds that allowed customers to
withdraw their funds by writing a check) in the 1970s. Even though these
funds were uninsured, the high interest rates in the late 1970s caused by
the high rate of inflation during that era allowed money market funds to
invest directly in Treasury securities backed by the full faith and credit
of the federal government as well as in highly rated corporate debt and
still pay a higher rate of interest to investors than was available on the
regulated accounts at banks. Thus, given the high quality of their
investments, money market funds did not have to be insured to compete
directly with the insured deposits of banks, and the resulting loss of
deposits to money market funds put depository institutions in a serious bind.
At the same time there was a second change in
the financial system that was having a negative effect on banks, namely, the
development of the market for
Repurchase Agreements—a collateralized loan agreement wherein the
borrower sells a security to a lender with the understanding that the
borrower will buy it back (i.e., repurchase it) on a specific date at a
higher price, the difference in price being the interest earned by the
seller/lender. (FRBNY
FDIC)
The market for repurchase agreements (and
money market funds to the extent they invested in short-term corporate debt)
competed directly with banks for their short-term loans. This was so
because the existence of an efficient market for
repurchase agreements gave large depositors at banks the choice of
leaving their unused balances in non-interest earning checking accounts or
earning a return on these balances by lending them out for short periods of
time, even as short as overnight, in the repurchase market. Borrowers in
these markets, thus, had a choice of borrowing for short periods of time
either from a bank or from its depositors.
By 1980 it was felt that something had to be
done about money market funds and repurchase agreements—that either these
markets had to be regulated in such a way as to keep them from competing
with banks, or banks had to be deregulated. In the deregulatory spirit of
the times, this led to passage of the
Depository Institutions Deregulation and Monetary Control Act of 1980 (DIDMCA)
which authorized
Negotiable Order of Withdrawal (NOW) and
Automatic Transfer System (ATS) accounts that effectively allowed banks
to pay interest on their checking accounts and write checks on their savings
accounts. At the same time DIDMCA provided a mechanism by which interest
rate ceilings on
time deposits (savings
accounts and
certificates of deposit) would be phased out by 1986, and there was an
expansion in the kinds of loans and investments that thrifts were allowed to make. This act
also increased the insurance on deposits from $40,000 to $100,000. (FDIC)
While this act allowed banks, in effect, to
pay interest on their checking accounts and write checks on their savings
accounts, and, thus, to compete with money market accounts for deposits, it
left the repurchase agreement market completely unregulated and the money
market funds almost so, and it did little to solve the immediate problem of
these institutions drawing off funds from banks, especially thrifts.
Thrifts held long-term assets, mostly mortgages, that paid fixed rates of interest. They could
not increase the interest rates on their deposits to match the
rates offered by money market funds without losing money. At the same
time, when market rates go
up, the value of assets that pay fixed rates of interest go down. Thus, as thrifts lost
deposits to money market funds they were forced to sell off their long-term
assets at a loss to fund the withdrawals of their depositors.
By 1982 thrifts were in serious trouble as a
result of the economic recession and the high interest rates
caused by the anti-inflationary policies of the Fed. In response
the
Garn–St. Germain Depository Institutions Act of 1982 was passed to
further deregulate banks. This act lessened the capital and reserve
requirements of banks; provided mechanisms to assist failing banks rather
than closing them; accelerated the phase out of interest rate ceilings,
and further expanded the kinds of loans and investments thrifts could make so as to allow them to
become more like commercial banks that were fairing much better in the
financial turmoil of the times than were thrifts. (FDIC)
It also allowed banks to offer interest-only, balloon-payment, and
adjustable-rate (ARM) mortgages. In addition, in the years that followed,
the Federal Reserve and the
Comptroller of the Currency (the chief regulator of national banks)
further relaxed the restrictions on the kinds of loans banks could make and
allowed the non-bank
subsidiaries of
bank holding companies to buy and sell securities, such as
derivatives, that they had previously been barred from holding. (FCIC)
It was thought that increasing competition in
the financial sector by allowing thrifts to become more like commercial banks and
allowing thrifts and commercial banks greater flexibility in competing with mutual funds and in the
market for repurchase agreements the system could be made stronger and more
efficient. All that was needed to bring this about was stable or
declining interest rates to relieve the pressure on the solvency of thrifts.
Interest rates did continue to decline as hoped, but, unfortunately, the
deregulatory provisions of these two acts in the hands of the free marketeers of the Reagan Administration led to an unmitigated disaster.
The free-market philosophy of
Reaganomics called for less government intervention in the market place.
The idea was to get the government out of the way and just let the market
sort things out as these institutions competed their way out of the problems
they were in. The result was a reduction in the budgets and staffs of
the regulatory agencies. This led to less examinations and regulatory
supervision at these institutions at a time when the thrift institutions
were in financial difficulty and attempting to expand their operations into
new areas. (FDIC
Black)
As was noted
in
Chapter 1, the result was the
savings and loan crisis that began in the late 1980s—the first financial
crisis to hit the United States since the Crash of 1929. In the end,
some 1,300 savings institutions failed, along with 1,600 banks, a total that, ironically, was greater than the 2,800 institutions newly chartered
under the policy that led to this crisis. In addition, some 300 fraudulently run savings
and loans that were nothing more than
Ponzi schemes failed at the peak of this disaster,
over a thousand individuals associated with the savings and loan debacle
were convicted of felonies, and it
costs the American taxpayer
$130 billion to
clean up the mess. In addition, this
financial crisis was a precursor to the
1990-1991 recession. (Black
FDIC
Krugman
Akerlof
Stewart)
The decision to deregulate the
banking system in the face of the competition from money market funds and
the markets for repurchase agreements in the early 1980s, rather than to expand the
regulatory system to bring these funds and markets under the umbrella of the
existing regulatory system, had profound effects on the financial system that
went far beyond the savings and loan crisis. In understanding these effects
it is instructive to review how financial markets are organized and to
examine the kinds of instruments that are traded in these markets. It is
also necessary to look at the role collateralization plays in today’s
financial system.
The financial system is generally broken down
into two markets: The
capital market which is concerned with long-term financing for periods
of more than a year and the
money market which is concerned with short-term financing for periods
less than a year.
The Capital Market
Stocks,
bonds, and
mortgages are sold in the capital market where
Stocks are certificates
of ownership of a corporation that give the holder a say in the management
of the corporation and a right to its equity and profits. More simply put,
the stock holders are the owners of the corporation.
A
bond is a financial instrument that defines
the terms on which the issuer—a government or a corporation—agrees to borrow
money. A bond generally has 1) a face value that defines how much the
issuer (borrower) will pay the holder (lender) when the bond matures, 2) a
maturity date that defines when the issuer will pay the holder the face
value of the bond, and 3) an amount of interest and the terms, usually
quarterly or biannually, on which interest will be paid to the holder of the
bond.
Bonds may or may not be backed by
collateral. If a bond is backed by collateral it is a
collateralized bond and the bondholder has a right to the collateral in
the event the issuer defaults, that is, fails to live up to the terms of the
bond. If a bond is not backed by collateral it is an uncollateralized
bond. In the event of a bankruptcy the holder of an uncollateralized bond
has a claim against whatever is left over after the collateralized creditors
have claimed their collateral. Stock holders, being the owners of the
corporation, are entitled to whatever is left, if anything, after all of the
creditors are paid.
A
mortgage loan is essentially a
collateralized bond where the collateral is real estate owned by the issuer
of the mortgage.
The Money Market
There are a number of financial
instruments—generally referred as "paper"—that are bought and sold in the
money market, the most important being:
-
Brokered
Certificates of Deposit which are fixed term time deposits issued by
banks and sold by brokers such as
Merrill Lynch.
-
Repurchase
Agreements
which are collateralized loan agreements wherein, as was noted above, the borrower sells a
security to a lender with the understanding that the borrower will buy it
back (i.e., repurchase it) on a specific date at a higher price, the
difference in price being the interest earned by the lender. If the
borrower defaults the lender can keep or sell the security.
-
Commercial
Paper which are promissory notes (i.e., IOUs) that may or may
not be collateralized, issued by corporations with strong credit ratings.
If
the borrower defaults the lender has a right to the collateral if the paper
is collateralized. Otherwise the lender is a lesser creditor in the event of
bankruptcy.
-
Bankers'
Acceptances which are a promise of a bank to pay a specified
amount of money to the holder at a specified time and are generally used in
international trade as a way to guarantee payment by a third party upon
delivery;
-
Treasury Bills which are short-term government bonds with a maturity
date less than a year.
-
Federal
Funds which are the borrowing and lending of reserves between
banks.
Before the development of markets for
collateralized financial instruments, most long-term financing was obtained
in the bond market by issuing uncollateralized bonds or through the mortgage
market by obtaining a mortgage loan directly from a bank or an insurance
company. By the same token, most short-term financing was obtained by
borrowing directly from a bank.
As a result, virtually all financing was
obtained in highly regulated markets from lenders who had a powerful
incentive to examine carefully the credit worthiness of the borrower. In the
case of uncollateralized bonds and unsecured loans, if the borrower
defaulted and filed for bankruptcy the lender would get only what was left
after the secured creditors claimed their collateral. In the case of
mortgage loans, the lender would get the property secured by the mortgage,
but there were costs involved, and if the value of the property fell the
mortgagee stood to lose. In addition, the SEC, Fed, FDIC, and state banking
and insurance agencies provided stability to these markets by overseeing
them to prevent, as much as possible, recklessness and fraud on the part of
borrowers and lenders.
With the rise of
collateralized financial instruments the structure of the financial markets
changed—at first gradually in the 1970s and 1980s and then explosively in
the 1990s and 2000s.
Before the development of
these instruments relatively few borrowers had access to the money market
other than through a bank because lenders were unwilling to lend in this
market to any but the most credit worthy borrowers. The reason was the
lenders in this market were forced to take a close look at the
creditworthiness of the borrower before they made a loan since they were
unsecured creditors and at risk of a serious loss if the borrower defaulted.
Only banks had the kind of personal contact with their borrowers to
effectively evaluate the creditworthiness of most borrowers.
When the loan was collateralized the focus
shifted from the creditworthiness of the borrower to the quality of the
collateral since the fact that the loan was collateralized meant the
potential loss to the lender in the event of a default was reduced by the
value of the collateral underlying the loan. The development of
collateralized financial instruments gave lenders a greater feeling of
confidence in making short-term loans to borrowers they had shunned in the
past because it was much easier, or so it seemed, to evaluate the value of
the collateral underlying these loans than to evaluate the creditworthiness of a
borrower that the lender did not know personally. This allowed borrowers to
have access to the short-term money market that had never had access to this
market before, and it allowed them to finance their operations in ways not
available to them before.
For example, before the development of the
market for collateralized commercial paper
finance companies had to go to the capital market or a bank to borrow in
order to relend to its customers. With the development of the market for
collateralized commercial paper these companies had the option of setting up
a company referred to as
Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV) for the specific purpose of providing a
conduit to secure financing in the
Asset-backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) market. They did this by selling
their loan contracts to the SPV (Special Purpose Vehicle) which, in turn,
put these assets in a trust pledged as collateral against the commercial
paper issued by SPV. The SPV's commercial paper could then be sold in the
ABCP market and the proceeds used to pay the
finance company for the loan contracts. What's more, the finance companies
discovered that the shorter the term of the collateralized commercial paper
the SPV issued, the lower the interest they had to pay. This meant they had
to roll over their debt more often—that is, issue new paper to pay
off their old paper as it came due—but they could make more money by
financing their operations by going to the money market in this way than by
going to banks or the capital market.
Not only did finance companies find they could
increase their profits by financing their operations in the money market,
private investment companies—better known as
hedge funds—also found that they could increase their profits by
going to the money market as well. Before the advent of the market for
repurchase agreements, hedge funds were limited in their investments by
their owners' funds and whatever funds they could obtain in the capital
market through the sale of uncollateralized bonds and what they could borrow
from banks. With the market for repurchase agreements they found they
could fund their operations by entering into repurchase agreements for the
assets they purchased, and, in so doing, they could borrow more than they
were previously able to borrow and at lower rates of interest—again, the
shorter the term of borrowed funds, the lower the interest they had to pay.
This meant they also would have to roll over
their debt more often, but, again, they could make more money by financing
their operations this way than by going to banks or the capital market.
In addition to finance companies and hedge
funds,
investment banks such as
Bear Stearns,
bank holding companies such as
Citigroup, and non financial companies such as
Enron and
Global Crossing found it profitable to create their own conduits to the
short-term money market to fund their operations. These conduits took the
form of SPVs that had two things in common with the examples given above: The first is that they made it possible to take
advantage of the money market to secure short-term financing for long-term
assets. The second is that since SPVs are not publicly traded companies and
are not banks, they are outside the purview of the SEC and bank regulators.
This second point is particularly relevant to bank holding companies and
investment banks because they were allowed to structure their conduits in
such a way as to take their long-term assets and the mechanism by which
these assets were financed off their books and thereby avoid the scrutiny of
their regulators. It was also particularly relevant to companies like Enron
and Global Crossing, and for the same reason except it was the scrutiny of
their creditors and stockholders these companies were able to avoid.
Money market funds, hedge funds, finance
companies, investment banks, and bank holding companies are part of what is
referred to as the
Shadow Banking System because they operate in the same way banks
operate in that they use short-term liabilities to fund long-term assets
and they operate in the shadow of the regulatory system, so to speak, since
they are less regulated that depository institutions and the SPVs they
sponsored were beyond the reach of the financial regulators. Since these
institutions were less regulated than depository institutions, and there was no
regulatory agency that oversees the SPVs that these institutions sponsor,
the only limitation on the amount of leverage they and their SPVs can attain is the
margin requirement placed on them by their creditors. This requirement
is referred to as the
haircut in financial circles, and it is the difference between the value
of a loan and the value of the collateral put up to secure the loan. The
margin (haircut) is generally expressed as a percentage of the collateral: A
5% margin means that the lender is willing to loan 95% of the value of the
collateral. (Perotti)
The margin requirement limits the amount of
leverage the borrower can obtain from a loan in that unless the borrower is
able to fund the margin through some source of unsecured borrowing, the only
way the margin can be financed is through the borrower's equity. If, for
example, the margin is 20% the lender will only lend 80% of the value of the
collateral underlying the loan. Since the other 20% of the collateral's
value must be financed through the borrower's equity (assuming the borrower
cannot obtain unsecured credit elsewhere) this limits the
leverage created by the loan to 4 to 1. (80%/20%) By the same token, if the
margin is 3% the leverage of the loan will be 32 to 1. (97%/3%)
The margin requirement also determines the
extent to which the shadow banking system is, in effect, able to finance the
amount of money it can borrow as a result of the amount of money it lends.
This is so because when a shadow bank purchases a security for $1,000 it is,
in effect, lending that $1,000. The margin determines the amount of that
$1,000 the non-shadow banks are willing to lent back to the shadow banking
system—the smaller the margin, the larger the amount the non-shadow bank
institutions will be willing to lend back and the larger the amount of
borrowing the shadow banking system will be able to finance as a result of
its own lending.
The process by which shadow banks increase the
amount they can borrow by increasing the amount they lend is somewhat
different than the way this is accomplished by ordinary banks, but the end
result is the same. When a non-shadow bank makes a loan it does not know
how much of the loan the non-bank public will return to the banking system
through an increase in deposits and how much will leave the banking system
(the margin) through an increase in currency in circulation. In addition,
there is no reason to expect that the proceeds of the loan will be spent and
redeposited in the bank that made the loan. It is most likely to be
redeposited in some other bank. The basic difference with a shadow bank is
that a shadow bank negotiates the amount that will be lent back before it
makes the loan, and this amount is, in effect, lent directly back to the shadow bank
that makes the loan.
In order to
appreciate the way shadow banks fit into the financial system, consider a
situation in which there is $100 billion in high-powered money in the
economy, $80 billion of which is held as currency in circulation and $20
billion is held as reserves in the banking system. If the reserve and
capital requirements are 10% and there is $20 billion worth of equity in the
banking system, the $20 billion worth of reserves can be lent and
redeposited in banks10 times until there are $200 billion worth of loans and
deposits in the banking system in the manner indicated in Figure 7.1.[7.1]
Figure 7.1:
Loans and Deposits in Commercial Banks.
|
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserves |
$20 |
Deposits |
$200 |
Loans |
$200 |
Net Worth |
$20 |
10% reserve and capital requirements
Loans financed through short-term borrowing = $200 |
be able to expand their deposits by expanding their
loans. The leverage in the banking system that comes from bank
deposits will be10 to 1 ($200/$20) in this situation, and there will be $200
billion of relatively long-term loans financed by $200 billion worth of
short-term deposits.
Now assume a
shadow banking system exists that has $10 billion worth of equity and that
shadow banks are able to borrow at a 5% margin through the use of repurchase
agreements. This means the shadow banks can expand the amount of money they
are able to lend through the purchase of securities to $200 billion by borrowing $190
billion. This situation is depicted in Figure 7.2.
Figure 7.2:
Loans, Deposits, and Repurchase Agreements.
|
Commercial Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserves |
$20 |
Deposits |
$200 |
Loans |
$200 |
Net Worth |
$20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Securities |
$200 |
Repurchase Agreements
|
$190 |
|
|
Net Worth |
$20 |
10% reserve and capital requirements, 5% margin
Long-term assets financed through short-term borrowing = $390
Short-term Leverage: Banks =10, Shadow Banks = 19, System = 13 |
The amount of
high-powered money in the system is unchanged by the introduction of a
shadow banking system, and the amount of currency in circulation, deposits,
and bank loans are unchanged as well, but the total amount of loans
financed through short-term borrowing has increased from $200 billion to
$390 billion as a result of the additional $190 billion of borrowing.
In addition the leverage in the system that is created by short-term
financing has increased from 10 to 1 to 13 to 1 ($390/$30) as a
result of the 19 to 1 ($190/$10) leverage in the shadow banking system.
Similarly, if
the shadow banks can borrow at a 3 1/3% margin the situation will be as in
Figure 7.3 where the shadow banks will be able to increase their
holdings of securities to $300 billion. The total amount of lending in the
system that is financed by short-term financing will be $490 billion, and
the leverage created by this kind of financing will be 16 to 1 ($490/$30) as
a result of the 29 to 1 ($290/$10) leverage in the shadow banking system.
Figure
7.3: Loans, Deposits, and Repurchase Agreements.
|
Commercial Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserves
|
$20 |
Deposits |
$200 |
Loans |
$200 |
Net Worth |
$20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Securities |
$300 |
Repurchase Agreements
|
$290 |
|
|
Net Worth |
$10 |
10% reserve and capital requirement, 3 1/3% margin
Long-term assets financed through short-term borrowing = $490
Short-term Leverage: Banks =10, Shadow Banks = 29, System = 16
|
Finally, it
should be noted that if shadow banks are able to obtain an additional $10
billion of capital by way of unsecured loans the shadow banks will be able
to expand their loans by an additional $300 billion as a result of this
additional capital as in Figure 7.4. The total amount of loans financed through short-term
borrowing and unsecured loans will increase to $780 billion; the leverage of
the shadow banks will increase to 49 to 1 ($490/$10), and total leverage in
the system created by short-term and unsecured financing will increase to 23
to 1 ($690/$30).
Figure
7.4: Loans, Deposits, and Repurchase Agreements
with Unsecured Credit.
|
Commercial Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Reserves
|
$20 |
Deposits |
$200 |
Loans |
$200 |
Net Worth |
$20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow Banks |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Securities |
$500 |
Repurchase Agreements
|
$480 |
|
|
Unsecured Loans
|
$10 |
|
|
Net Worth |
$10 |
10% reserve and capital requirement, 3 1/3% margin
Long-term assets financed through short-term borrowing = $490
Short-term Leverage: Banks =10, Shadow Banks = 29, System = 16
|
It is worth noting that a 2% decrease in asset prices
would wipe out the net worth of the shadow banking system in this situation,
and a 4% decrease would wipe out the net worth of the entire financial
system.
At this point,
the threat the shadow banks pose to the financial system and, indeed, to the
economic system as a whole should be obvious. Shadow banks finance their
operations in the same way banks finance their operations, and shadow banks
are subject to the same kinds liquidity and solvency problems that banks are
subject to. They are also
subject to the same kinds of temptations to expand their leverage and to
fund the same kinds of speculative activities that have wrought such havoc
with the economic system throughout the history of banking.
At the same
time, shadow banks function outside the financial regulatory system.
Their short-term creditors are not insured by the FDIC. They cannot borrow from
the Federal Reserve, and, as a result, they are extremely vulnerable to the
kind of irrational panic that leads to a run. There is no lender of last
resort that can meet their needs in the midst of a crisis. The only way they
can meet the demands of their creditors in the face of a run is by selling
their assets, and if they are forced to sell their assets in the midst of a
crisis the prices of their assets are susceptible to the same kind of
downward spiral the assets of Nineteenth Century banks were susceptible
to—the kind of downward spiral that followed the Crash of 1929 and led to
the Great Depression of the 1930s.
In addition,
shadow banks are not constrained by the amount of high-powered money in the
economy. They have no use for currency, either in the form of vault cash or
as a deposit at the Federal Reserve, and the amount of high-powered money in
the economy does not constrain the amount of long-term lending they can
finance through short-term borrowing. As is indicated in the examples
illustrated in Figure 7.1 through Figure 7.4 above, shadow banks can expand their lending even
when reserves, deposits, and currency in circulation are fixed.
The only constraint on their lending is their equity, the amount of
unsecured credit they are able to obtain, and the margin imposed by their
creditors on repurchase agreements.
This would not
be much of a problem if these institutions were relatively small and played
a minor role in the financial system, but, as was noted above, and as is
indicated in Figure 7.5, the growth of shadow banks was explosive in the 1990s
and 2000s.
The shadow banking system was, in fact, significantly larger than the
traditional banking system by 2007 when the financial system began to
breakdown. The asset-backed commercial paper issued by these institutions
amounted to some $2.2 trillion in 2007, and the amount of money shadow banks financed overnight with repurchase agreements stood at $2.5
trillion. The assets held by hedge funds had grown to $1.8 trillion, and the
assets held by investment banks had grown to $4 trillion—a major portion of
which was financed through repurchase agreements. These numbers are to be
compared to the total value of all of the assets held by the entire
traditional banking
system in 2007 which stood at $10 trillion. (Geithner)
As is indicated in Figure 7.5, Shadow banks held well over $12 trillion
dollars worth of assets in 2007.
Source:
Financial Crisis Inquiry Report.
Far from being
relatively small and playing a minor role in the financial system in 2007, shadow banks
were huge and played a major role in this system. Shadow banks were the
major borrower in the market for repurchase agreements, and the lenders in
this market were pension funds, money market funds, mutual funds, large
corporations, banks, insurance companies, local governments, and any other
large institution that had excess cash in the bank on which it wanted to earn a
return for a few days or weeks or even just overnight. Shadow banks
owed money to literally everyone when the
housing market reached its peak in 2006 and the system began to unravel in
2007. Anyone vested in a pension plan or who owned a mutual fund, a
money market account, an insurance policy, or stock in a large corporation
or bank was owed money by shadow banks when
the
run on the system began in the summer of 2007.
Endnote
[7.1] It should be
noted reserve and capital requirements are not the same thing, and there is
no reason the two requirements should be equal in the real world. A 10%
capital requirement means that banks must have equity equal to at least 10%
of their assets. A 10% reserve requirement means that banks must have
reserves equal to at least 10% of their deposits. Capital requirements
limit assets and are designed to enhance the solvency of banks. Reserve
requirements limit deposits (a liability) and are designed to minimize the
liquidity problem of banks. In addition, just as there are different
reserve requirements for different kinds of deposits, there are different
capital requirement for different kinds of assets.
The only reason it is assumed in this
hypothetical example (and in the examples that follow) that the reserve and capital requirements are equal is to simplify the exposition in order to
bring out the basic principles involved. See
Feinman for a discussion of how reserve requirements are determined.
The determination of capital requirements is explained in the
2002 Rule promulgated on November 29, 2001 by the
OCC,
FRS,
FDIC, and
OTS.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter
8: Securitization, Derivatives, and Leverage
George H. Blackford ©
2009, last updated 5/1/2014
Securitization is a process by which
illiquid assets—that is, assets that cannot be easily sold and, hence,
converted into cash in a timely manner without a significant reduction in
price—are converted into
liquid assets that can be quickly sold and converted into cash without a
significant reduction in price. We touched on the basics of
securitization in Chapter
7 in our
discussion of the way
finance companies were able to gain access to the
money market by setting up a
Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV) to secure financing in the
Asset-backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) market. In so doing they were able to convert their illiquid assets (the loans made to
their customers) into liquid assets (the ABCP issued by the SPV) that were
easily sold in the money market.
As was indicated in Chapter
7, the
basic mechanism by which securitization is accomplished is fairly simple:
-
The originator of the securitization process creates a Special
Purpose Vehicle (SPV) by forming a corporation (generally "off
shore" in some country such as in the
Cayman Islands to avoid regulation and taxes) for the purpose of
purchasing the assets to be securitized. The originator of this process is
referred to as the sponsor of the SPV.
-
The sponsor sells the
assets to be securitized to the SPV.
-
The SPV places these
assets in a trust pledging the revenue from the assets as collateral for the
securities issued by the SPV. These securities are referred to as
Asset-backed Securities (ABSs) and are either collateralized bonds or
collateralized money market paper depending on whether their term to maturity is more than
or less than a year.
-
The proceeds from the sale of the securities issued by the SPV are used to
pay the sponsor for the assets it sold to the SPV.
Virtually all illiquid assets that generate an income stream have been
securitized in this way since the 1980s including such things as automobile
loans, credit card debt, accounts receivables, student loans, and
residential and commercial mortgages, but of particular interest to us here
is the securitization of mortgages.
Before 1938, home mortgages were highly illiquid assets, the reason being it
is very difficult for a third party to judge the quality of a mortgage.
When a bank originates a mortgage it has a very good idea of the
creditworthiness of the borrower, the quality of the real estate that is the
collateral for the mortgage, and the characteristics of the neighborhood in
which the real estate is located. The further one gets from the bank that
originated the mortgage the less one knows about these things. As a result,
the secondary market for mortgages—that is, the market in which existing
mortgages are bought and sold—tended to be very local which made it difficult
for people in smaller communities to obtain mortgages for the purpose of
purchasing homes.
In 1938 the
Federal National Mortgage Association (Fannie Mae) was created as a
government agency to facilitate home ownership by providing a secondary
market for government insured mortgages. In 1968 Fannie Mae was privatized
as a
Government Sponsored Enterprise (GSE), and in 1970 the
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (Freddie Mac) was chartered as a
GSE to provide a secondary market for non-government insured mortgages, and
Fannie Mae was given this mission as well. In the meantime the
Government National Mortgage Association (Ginnie Mae) was created as a
government agency to replace Fannie Mae in the market for federally insured
mortgages. Ginnie Mae is a government owned corporation within the
Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD), whereas, Fannie Mae
and Freddie Mac are private corporations that were created by the government
and then sold to the private sector.
The GSEs and Ginnie Mae worked closely with mortgage originators, mostly
banks and thrifts (i.e.,
savings banks and
savings and loan associations), to maintain and improve
underwriting standards (i.e., the standards by which loans are made) and were
very successful in providing a nationwide mortgage market by purchasing
mortgages from originators that met their underwriting requirements. This,
in turn, greatly facilitated home ownership throughout the country.
Originally the GSEs financed their operations by selling uncollateralized
bonds in the
capital market to obtain the funds necessary to purchase mortgages from
their originators, but in the 1970s they began securitizing the mortgages
they purchased by sponsoring
Special Purpose Vehicle and having their SPVs
issue bonds collateralized by the revenues generated from the mortgages they
had purchased.
The GSEs guaranteed the mortgages they sold to the SPVs they sponsored, and
the bonds issued by their SPVs are referred to as agency
Mortgage-Backed Securities or agency MBSs.
The GSEs dominated the secondary mortgage market through the 1990s, but
in the 1980s private companies began securitizing mortgages as well. The bonds
issued by the SPVs sponsored by private companies are referred to as
private-label
Mortgage-Backed Securities or private-label MBSs. Private
securitizers—mostly
investment banks,
depository institutions, and
mortgage banks—did not guarantee the mortgages they sold to
their SPVs, and, as a result, private securitizers had to offer
credit enhancements to minimize the interest rates they would have to
pay on the MBSs they issued.
One method of credit enhancement was to
over collateralize the MBSs they issued so that the face value of
the MBSs the SPV issued was below the face value of the mortgages held as
collateral for their MBSs. A second method was to provide an
excess spread on the rate of interest received from the mortgages
over the rate of interest paid on the MBSs so the amount of money taken in
from the mortgages that collateralized their MBSs exceeded the amount the
SPV was obligated to pay to bondholders. However, the most important of
these enhancements was
subordination whereby the MBSs issued by the privately sponsored
SPVs were structured in a hierarchy of tranches (a French word
meaning slices) such that those MBSs in a lower tranche were subordinate to
those in a higher tranche.
The way subordination works is that the MBSs issued by the SPV are broken
down into
senior tranches which have first claim to the income
received from the mortgages held by the SPV,
junior tranches (also called
mezzanine tranches) which have a claim to this income only
after the MBSs in the senior tranches have been paid, and
equity tranches (also called
residual tranches) which are paid only after the MBSs in the
senior and junior tranches have been paid. This structure gives the MBSs in
the senior and junior tranches protection against default on the mortgages
held by the SPV in that the equity tranche has to be completely wiped out by
mortgage defaults on the underlying mortgages before the income and
principal payments available to service senior and junior tranches will be
affected, and it gives even more protection to the MBSs in the senior trance
as both the equity and junior tranches have to be wiped out before the
income available to service the senior tranche will be affected.
The way in which MBSs are structured is illustrated in Figure
8.1 which shows the structure of the
CMLTI 206-NC2
offering sponsored by Citigroup in 2006.
Figure 8.1:
Structure of the CMLTI 2006-NC2 MBS Offering. |
Tranches |
Amount* |
Rating |
% of Total |
Cumulative % |
Senior
Investment
Grade |
$737.0 |
AAA |
78.0% |
78.0% |
Junior
Investment
Grade |
$97.5 |
AA |
10.3% |
88.3% |
$43.6 |
A |
4.6% |
92.9% |
$30.2 |
BBB |
3.1% |
96.0% |
Junior Non- Investment
Grade |
$24.6 |
BB |
2.6% |
98.6% |
Equity |
$13.3 |
Not Rated |
1.4% |
100% |
Total |
$946.2 |
|
100% |
|
Source:
Financial Crisis Inquire Report,
Security Exchange Commission.
*millions of dollars
This offering was backed by 4,499 mortgages with a principal value or $947
million, and was described as a “typical deal” in the
final report of the
Financial Crisis Inquire Commission. As is
shown in this figure, 78% of the MBSs in this offering were
investment grade securities in the Senior
Investment Grade tranche that were rated
AAA by the
rating agency
Standard & Poor’s. Another 18% were in the
Junior
Investment
Grade
tranches that were rated BBB or above, but less than
AAA, which brought the total of the investment grade securities in this
offering to 96%. The 2.4% of the offering in the
Junior
Non-Investment Grade tranches that received a BB rating or below held a
junk
bond
status, and the Equity tranches made up 1.4% of the offering.[8.1]
By structuring their
offerings in this way, the sponsors of private-label Mortgage-Backed
Securities were able to compete with the GSEs even though the sponsors of
the private-label MBSs did not guarantee the mortgages that backed their
MBSs. As a result, private-label MBSs began to increase their share of
the Mortgage-Backed Securities market dramatically in the 2000s, but there
was a catch: Virtually all of the demand was for the highest rated
securities in the offerings, and there was relatively little demand for
those that were lower rated. (FCIC
Smith) This led to a problem.
For securitization to
work, all of the tranches in an offering must be sold. Otherwise, there’s
not enough money to purchase the collateral needed to make the offering
viable. When the lower rated securities can’t be sold elsewhere, the
sponsor of the offering is forced to purchase them. This limits the ability
of the sponsoring institution to sponsor new offerings since its purchases
from its previous offerings must be financed. The ability to finance these
purchases is limited by capital requirements in the case of a regulated
institution such as an investment bank, or by margin requirements in the
case of an unregulated institution such as a hedge fund. When the
sponsoring institutions reach their funding limits, they can no longer
sponsor new MBS offerings. To solve this problem the sponsors of
Mortgage-Backed Securities turned to alchemy.
Collateralized Debt Obligations
(CDOs) are created in the same way Mortgage-Backed Securities are created
and are divided into subordinate tranches with the equity and junior
tranches being paid only after the senior tranches are paid, and the equity
tranches being paid only after the senior and junior tranches are paid just
as MBSs are structured. In
addition, CDO offerings were rated similarly by the rating agencies with 95%
or so of the offering rated investment grade (BBB or higher) and as much as
80% of the offering in the senior, investment-grade tranches receiving a
triple-A rating.
The fundamental
difference between Collateralized Debt Obligations and Mortgage-Backed
Securities is in the nature of the collateral. While MBSs are backed only
by mortgages, CDOs use a variety of debt obligations for collateral—bonds,
loans, and other
Asset-backed Securities
(ABSs)—rather than a single kind of financial instrument. (FCIC)
Until the 2000s, CDOs
were a relatively obscure financial product confined to a relatively small
market, but in the early 2000s the CDO market simply exploded. From 2003 to
2006 it increased more than seven fold as it went from $30 billion to $225
billion in just three years. In the process, CDOs transformed the mortgage
market by increasing the demand for MBSs in the lower rated tranches. In
2004, CDOs were the dominate buyer of BBB-rated MBSs, and in 2005 they
purchased virtually all of the BBB tranches of these securities. Between
2003 and 2007 over $4 trillion Mortgage-Backed Securities were created and
some $700 billion of CDOs that contained lower rated tranches of MBSs as
collateral were created as well. (FCIC)
The alchemy involved in
this process should be apparent. By taking the lower rated MBSs and using
them as collateral for CDOs, the sponsors of the SPVs that offered these
CDOs for sale were able to convert as much as 80% of the BBB or BB rated MBSs
held as collateral in their SPVs into triple-A rated securities in the
form of AAA rated CDOs. They were, indeed, able to make a silk purse out of
a sow’s ear—or so it seemed—and the alchemy didn’t end there. CDOs were
often structured with the lower rated tranches of other CDOs as part of
their collateral. CDOs with 80% or more of their collateral in the form of
lower rated tranches of other CDOs were referred to as CDOs squared, and by
this sleight of hand the sponsors of the SPVs were able to convert more than
60% of the lower rated CDO tranches held in their portfolio of collateral
into triple-A rated CDOs. (FCIC)
Collateralized Debt Obligations fueled the mortgage market as it expanded in
the mid 2000s in that CDOs allowed the sponsors of MBSs to keep the lower
rated tranches of the MBSs that they couldn’t sell otherwise off their
books. This freed up capital and, thus, allowed them to expand the creation
of MBSs beyond what they would have been able to if the CDO market had not
existed.
Leverage is a term used to describe methods by which investors can enhance
their return on equity capital. The most common kind of leverage is the kind
discussed above and in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 and again in Chapter 9, namely, borrowing money to increase the amount to invest.
This kind of leverage is referred to as
balance sheet
or debt leverage where the amount of
leverage is measured by the debt to equity ratio—that is, by the value of
the amount borrowed by the investor divided by the value of the equity owned
by the investor. There is another kind of leverage that can be used to
increase the return on equity capital, namely, that which is obtained through the
use of
derivatives. Derivatives are contracts that derive their value from
some underlying asset or collection of assets. They are used either to
provide a
hedge against a potential loss or to
speculate on future events.
Perhaps, the simplest derivative to understand is an
option contract. An option contract is a financial instrument that gives the holder
of the contract the right, but not an obligation, to either buy or sell,
depending on the kind of option, an asset at a specified price
during a specified period of time. An option to purchase an asset
is a
call option. An option to sell an asset is a
put option. While an option does not obligate the holder of the
option in any way, if the holder of the option chooses to exercise the
option during the specified time period the
writer of the option is obligated to sell, in the case of a call
option, or to purchase, in the case of a put option, the asset
being optioned at the specified price.
For example, if you purchase a 30-day option to purchase 100 shares of IBM
stock at $100/share—a 30-day call option for 100 shares of IBM stock at
$100/share—this gives you the right to purchase 100 shares of IBM stock for
$100/share at any time during the next 30 days. At the same time, it
obligates the writer of the option to sell 100 shares of IBM stock to
you at $100/share at any time you choose during the next 30 days.
If you purchase a 30-day option to sell 100 shares of IBM stock for $100/share at any time during the next 30 days—a 30-day put option for 100 shares
of IBM stock at $100/share—this gives you the right to sell 100 shares of
IBM stock at $100/share at any time during the next 30 days. At the same time it
obligates the writer of the option to purchase 100 shares of IBM stock from
you at $100/share at any time you choose during the next 30 days.
If you own 100 shares of IBM stock that is worth $100/share you can use an
option to hedge the risk of the value of your stock falling over the next
six months by purchasing a 6-month put option that gives you the right to
sell 100 shares of IBM stock at $100/share at any time during the next six
months. Having purchased such an option, if the price of IBM stock should
fall to, say, $50/share you would be protected from that loss. Your $5,000
loss in the value of your stock would be exactly offset by the $5,000 gain
in the value of your option that gives you the right to sell your 100 shares
of IBM stock at $100/share. Your only loss would be the price you had to
pay for the option.
You can also use options to speculate on the price of IBM stock even if you
don’t own the stock. Suppose you believe that IBM stock is going to double
in value over the next six months. You can take advantage of this
expectation either by purchasing IBM stock directly or by purchasing a
6-month call option for IBM stock. If the price of IBM stock is $100/share
it will cost you $10,000 to purchase 100 shares of stock. If you purchase
the stock and are right about the price of IBM doubling over the next six
months, the price of your stock will increase to $200/share, your 100 shares
of IBM stock will be worth $20,000, and you will make a $10,000 profit.
Alternatively, if the price of a 6-month call option to purchase IBM stock
for $100/share is $10/share, that same $10,000 you have to invest could be
used to purchase an option that would give you the right to purchase 1,000
shares of IBM stock for $100/share. If the price of IBM stock were to
double the value of your option would increase from the $10,000 that you
paid for it to $100,000 since your option gives you the right to purchase
$200,000 worth of IBM stock for just $100,000. As a result, you would be
able to make a $90,000 profit ($200,000 - $100,000 -$10,000) by investing
your $10,000 in the option as opposed to a $10,000 profit by investing in
the stock. Thus, purchasing the option allows you to leverage your $10,000
investment by increasing your profits 9 times what you would be able to make
by buying the stock directly.
Just as debt leverage increases your risk of loss as it increases
your potential profit, the same is true for derivative leverage. Even
though your potential loss is limited to $10,000 whichever investment your
chose to make in the above example, if you chose to invest in an option you
will lose the entire $10,000 if the price of IBM fails to increase above
$100. You will not lose your entire $10,000 investment if you chose to
purchase IBM stock directly unless the price of IBM stock goes to zero.
Historically, derivatives in the
form of
futures contracts—an agreement to buy or sell something at a specific
date and price in the future—have been around for over a hundred
and fifty years, and just as with options contracts, futures contracts can
be used to hedge against a potential loss or to speculate on changes in
prices.
To see how a
futures contract can be used to hedge against a potential loss, consider the
plight of a farmer who knows approximately what it will cost to plant a
particular crop in the spring and how much product he will have available to
sell when it is harvested, but has no way of knowing what the price of that crop
will be when he brings it to market. If he plants the wrong crop he will
lose money if the price at harvest time is below his costs of production.
One way he can hedge against this possibility is by entering into a contract
in the spring with a miller to sell his crop in the fall at an agreed upon price. By entering into
this kind of contract both the farmer and the miller are
able to protect themselves against adverse changes in prices when crops are
brought to market in the fall.
As was
noted, futures contracts can also be used to speculate on changes in
prices. If the price of wheat is $2/bushel in May and you think it will be
$4/bushel in the September you can take advantage of this situation by
buying wheat today, storing it until September and selling it in September
at whatever the price turns out to be. If your expectation is
correct and the price in September is $4/bushel you will be able to make a
profit of $2/bushel on each bushel of wheat you purchase and store, less the
cost of storing the wheat from June to September. If it costs you $1/bushel
to store the wheat your net profit will be $1/bushel.
Now suppose
that you can enter into a futures contract to purchase wheat at $3/bushel in
September, a price that is equal to the price of wheat today plus the cost
of storing wheat that exists today until September. If you enter into this
contract and your expectation is correct and the price in September is
$4/bushel you will make the same profit of $1/bushel when you purchase the
wheat in September at $3/bushel and resell it at $4/bushel, less, of course,
the cost of the commission to the broker who arranged the contract.
There are, however, a number of important differences.
To begin
with, when you purchase a futures contract you don't have to actually buy
any wheat in order to make a profit. As the price
of wheat approaches $4/bushel in September, the value of your contract will
approach $1/bushel since that’s the profit you can make on it when it comes
due. As a result, when your contract comes due in September you will be
able to sell your contract to someone who actually wants to buy wheat or to
someone who has contracted to sell wheat and wants to close out his or her
contract to sell by buying an offsetting contract to buy without having to
actually come up with the wheat needed to fulfill his or her contract to sell.
This makes speculating through futures contracts much less time consuming
and less of a bother than actually purchasing and storing the commodity involved.
Second, it
you wish to purchase, say, 10,000 bushels of wheat to speculate on the price
of wheat in this situation you will have to come up with $20,000 to purchase
the wheat and an additional $10,000 to store the wheat until September for a
total of $30,000. If the price of wheat is $2/bushel in May and
you can purchase a futures contract to purchase 10,000 bushels of wheat at
$3/bushel or less in September (the price in May plus the cost of storing
the wheat until September) there is no reason for you to actually purchase
the wheat since you will make at at least as much profit or more if you
purchase the futures contract that commits you to purchase the wheat in
September for $3/bushel as you will if you purchase the wheat at $2/bushel
in May and store it until September.
In addition,
you will have to come up with much less cash to purchase the futures
contract than you will have to come up with to purchase the wheat. When you
purchase a futures contract you only have to come up with the commission
paid to the broker and enough collateral to convince the counterparty to
your contract that you will, in fact, live up to your end of the contract.
The collateral posted on a futures contract is referred to as the margin,
and it can be as little as 10% or even as low as 5% of the value of the
wheat covered by the contract. That means that instead of having to
come up with $30,000 to purchase and store 10,000 bushels of wheat you can
place the same bet on the price of wheat in September by coming up with only
$3,000 (ignoring the broker's commission which I will do from now on to
simplify the exposition) if the margin is 10% or only $1,500 if the margin
is 5%.
The
potential leverage here should be obvious. If you have $30,000 to
invest in this speculative endeavor you have the option of using that
$30,000 to purchase 10,000 bushels of wheat and storing it, or at a 10%
margin you can use your $30,000 as collateral for 10 futures contracts that
commit you to purchase 10,000 bushels of wheat each. If you are right
and the price of wheat is $4/bushel in September you will make a $10,000
profit on the 10,000 bushels of wheat you purchased with your $30,000 if you
chose the first option, and you will make a $100,000 profit on the 100,000
bushels of wheat you have committed yourself to purchase with your $30,000
if you chose the second option. In other words, you can leverage your
investment tenfold by purchasing the futures contracts at a 10% margin.
If the margin is 5% you can leverage your investment twentyfold by
purchasing 20 contracts that commit you to purchase 200,000
bushels of wheat.
Finally, it
should be obvious that the ability to purchase futures contracts not
only leverages you profits, it leverages your risk as well. If you
purchase the wheat in the above example, and the price falls to $1/bushel
instead or increasing to $4/bushel as you had expected, you will lose the
$10,000 you spent on storage and an additional $10,000 when you are stuck
with 10,000 bushels of wheat you bought at $2/bushel that can now only be
sold at $1/bushel. This 67% loss on your investment may sound grim,
but if you had instead purchased 10 futures contracts on a 10% margin that
committed you to purchase 100,000 bushels of wheat at $3/bushel and you can
only sell that wheat for $1/bushel on its due date you are out $200,000.
That's a 667% loss on your investment. If you had purchased 20
contracts on a 5% margin your loss would be $400,000 on your $30,000
investment. That's more than 13 times the amount you had planned to
invest in the first place!
This brings us to a very important point: When derivatives are used to
hedge against a risk of potential loss the risk that is hedged is
transferred from one party of the derivative contract to the other.
There is no increase in risk in the system as a whole, and there even may be
a reduction in risk in the system as a whole if the risk is transferred from
an individual or institution that is less able to cope with the potential
loss to an individual or institution that is better able to cope with the
potential loss. As a result, using derivatives to hedge against a
potential loss can have the effect of increasing the stability of the
economic system as a whole. This is not the case when derivatives are
used for pure speculation.
When derivatives are used for pure speculation where neither party is
hedging against a risk of potential loss, both parties to the contract
assume risk that they otherwise would not have assumed. There is no
transfer of risk, and the total risk of potential loss in the system
increases. This should be clear from the example above. When you
purchase an option on 100 shares of IBM stock you do not own from a writer
who is not hedging against a potential loss there is no transfer of risk.
Both you and the option writer are taking on risks of loss that you would not
otherwise have. The same is true in the futures market when neither
party is hedging against a potential loss.
The fact that speculators add to the
liquidity of the market and thereby enhance the ability of other
participants to hedge does not negate the fact that pure
speculation increases the risk in the system as a whole and, as a result,
reduces the stability of the system as a whole.
While in theory, pure
speculation is a
zero-sum game where the losses of one party are equal to the gains by
another and all that occurs as a result of speculation is a transfer of
wealth from one group of individuals to another, in practice this is not
necessarily the case and often is, in fact, not the case. This theory
ignores the possibility of default on the part of those who speculate and
the damage that can be done to those who are directly and indirectly affected
by the speculative bubbles that are created as a result of speculation.
When speculative bubbles burst, the inability of those affected to meet
their contractual obligations can have a cascading effect that brings the
entire economic system to its knees. The history of this being so goes
back at least 800 years. (Kindleberger
MacKay
Graeber) The recognition of this problem led to the establishment
of exchanges and clearinghouses. These are institutions that were designed to minimize
the risk of default and also to minimize the risk of manipulation and fraud
within the market.
The markets for
options, futures, and many other derivatives have become highly efficient as these contracts have been
standardized and are widely traded on
exchanges where an exchange is simply a central meeting place where
trading takes place. The importance of an exchange is that it provides
a place where trading is in the open, and all of the participants
in the market can see the quantities bought and sold and the prices at which
trades are made. This kind of openness, or what is referred to as
transparency in the market, is designed to minimize fraud and the ability of traders to manipulate prices.
In addition,
the
risk of default on derivative contracts has been minimized through the
establishment of
clearinghouses whereby the contracts agreed upon between individuals at
the exchange are cleared through a separate corporation, and that
corporation—the clearing house—becomes the counterparty to the buyers and
sellers in the contracts that are agreed upon in the exchange. The way an
exchange and clearinghouse work to minimize the creation of speculative
bubbles and risk of default for those derivatives that are traded through an
exchange with a clearinghouse can be seen by examining the way a futures
contract comes into being.
If you wish to
enter into a contract to buy (or sell) wheat or some other commodity at some
point in the future you go to your broker and place an order. Your broker submits your order to
the exchange where all of the offers to buy and sell are submitted by the
brokers that are members of that exchange. The brokers’ traders on the
floor of the exchange match the offers to buy with the offers to sell
where the prices at which the commodities are to be bought and sold in the
future are determined through an auction process among the traders.
At the end
of each trading day the contracts that have been agreed upon are
submitted to the clearinghouse to be cleared, and the cash
transactions between the brokers and the clearinghouse are settled. The outstanding contracts held by each broker's clients are then revalued in accordance with the prices set
during the day, and each broker is required pay any balance its
clients may have accumulated in order to maintain the margin required on
their contracts to the clearinghouse as a result of the day’s
trading. Once the trades of the day have been reconciled, and the
margin requirements have been met by the members of the exchange, the
contracts between the clients of the brokers are dissolved, and the clearing house becomes the
counterparty to each of the contracts the clients have entered into.
Your broker then delivers to you your contract with the clearinghouse that you sought
to enter into.
The
efficiency of this system arises from the fact that all of the participants
in the market are policed by the brokers, by the exchange, by the clearing
house, and the entire process is regulated by the government. All
transactions are executed publicly on the floor of the exchange, available for all to see, and changes in the values of the outstanding
contracts are reconciled each day in order to maintain the collateral each
broker must deposit with the clearinghouse as determined by the margin
requirement on the contracts its clients have with the clearinghouse.
You are
legally responsible to your broker to perform on your contract and your
broker is legally responsible for your performance to the clearinghouse as
well. That means that if you default on your contract your broker is
responsible to make that contract good to the clearinghouse, and if your
broker defaults to the clearinghouse, the clearinghouse is on the hook to
make that contract good to whomever made it with you. That protects
the original counterparty to your contract from default on your part, and it
also protects you from default on the part of the original counterparty to
your contract since the counterparty’s broker is responsible for the
contract his client made with you as is the clearinghouse.
The only
situation in which your contract will not be honored is if the clearinghouse
were to default. This is clearly a possibility, but the fact that a) the
changes in the values of all outstanding contracts between brokers and the
clearinghouse must be reconciled each day, b) each broker is required to
maintain the margin on its clients contracts with the clearinghouse as the
values of its clients contracts fluctuate each day, c) clients are required
to maintain the margin on their contracts with their brokers as the value of
the contracts fluctuate each day, and c) the fact that the behavior of all
of the participants in the market is strictly regulated by the government
minimizes this possibility.
Trading in derivative contracts has been regulated by
the government, in one way or another, since the
1880s, and trading in commodities options was banned altogether
in
1936. The government sets the margin
requirement that must be maintained against your account with your broker as
well as against your broker’s account with the clearinghouse, as it does for
all the clients and brokers in the system, in order to assure that each
client will be able to make good to his or her broker and each broker will
be able to make good to the clearinghouse on a daily basis any losses that
may be realized. In addition, fraudulent, misleading, manipulative, and
reckless or unsafe practices that threaten the solvency of the clearinghouse
are prohibited and enforced through government regulations and regulators.
Even though derivatives have been around for a very long
time, the way in which they have been used has changed dramatically over the
past forty years. Prior to the 1970s, futures contracts were used for
commodities and, as has been noted, options trading in commodities was outlawed.
In the 1970s futures contracts for financial assets were introduced, and the
ban on option trading in commodities was lifted in 1981. Option trading
was
subsequently extended to include financial assets and foreign exchange as
well as commodities, and new kinds of options and futures contracts were
created—contracts based on indices of commodity and financial asset prices
as opposed to those based on individual commodities and financial assets.
At the same time, much of the trading in derivatives has moved from the
exchange/clearinghouse environment to the
over-the-counter market where contracts are not standardized and are
made directly between individuals and institutions without the protection of
a clearinghouse, with very little government regulation, and with very
little if any transparency. In
addition, an entirely new category of derivative came into being, the
swap, whereby contracts were devised that allowed income streams
generated by assets to be exchanged in domestic as well as in foreign
currencies, and in 1997 the
Credit Default Swap was born.
A
Credit Default Swap (CDS) is a kind of insurance contract wherein the
seller of a CDS agrees to compensate the buyer against the consequence of an
adverse credit event such as the issuer of a bond defaulting on its interest
or principal payment. The buyer pays the seller a quarterly or biannual
premium for the protection provided by the seller where the protection
generally consists of an agreed upon, lump-sum payment from the seller to
the buyer should the credit event (e.g., default) occur.
The market for Credit Default Swaps came into being in the late 1990s, and
this market played a crucial role in the mortgage market in the 2000s. In
particular, it played a crucial role in the markets for Mortgage Backed
Securities and Collateralized Debt Obligations since CDSs made MBSs and CDOs more attractive to those who sought protection against
the risk of these kinds of bonds defaulting. Regulated institutions such as
banks, for example, could reduce their capital requirements by purchasing
credit default protection against the MBSs and CDOs they held, and hedge
funds and other financial institutions could use CDSs to
hedge positions that involved MBSs, CDOs, or other forms of Asset Backed
Securities.
Insurance is generally subject to government regulations that force
insurance companies to maintain reserves commensurate with their obligations
to policy holders. Government regulations also outlaw insurance policies
being issued to people who do not have an
insurable interest in what is being insured and, in particular, they bar
people from obtaining insurance on property they do not own. In addition,
people are generally not allowed to insure property for more than the
damages they will incurred if the property is lost or damaged. But even
though CDSs are a kind of insurance, the
Commodity Futures Modernization Act (CFMA) passed in 2000 explicitly
blocked regulation of the market for Credit Default Swaps. This made it
possible for financial institutions to purchase and sell Credit Default
Swaps to insure debt
instruments that were not owned by the purchaser, to purchase and sell
multiple CDS contracts against these same instruments, and for financial
institutions to sell CDS insurance contracts without setting aside
reserves. It also made
synthetic CDOs possible.
A
Synthetic CDO is created and structured in the same way a MBS or an ordinary
CDO is created and structured, but there are a number of important
differences. The first is that the Special Purpose Vehicles that create
synthetic CDOs sell Credit Default Swaps and hold safe securities (such as
government bonds) as collateral instead of actual mortgages or MBSs. The
way this works is the sponsor of a synthetic CDO incorporates a SPV
and puts together a list of MBSs for which the sponsor wishes to sell
default protection. The SPV then sells Credit Default Swaps to those who
are willing to pay a premium for default protection on the listed
securities.
The SPV then structures an offering of synthetic CDO
tranches similar to the structure of the MBS offering shown in Figure 8.1
with the same kind of subordinated payout to the investors in the synthetic
CDO securities that is used in the payout structure of ordinary CDOs and
MBSs. The proceeds from the sale of the synthetic CDOs are, in turn,
invested in safe securities. These safe securities become the collateral
held by the SPV. The interest payments received from these securities
combined with the premium payments received from the CDS contracts sold by
the SPV provide the funds needed to make the interest and principal payments on the
synthetic CDOs purchased by investors.
This brings us to the second way in which synthetic CDOs differ from
ordinary CDOs. There are two kinds of investors in a synthetic CDO. The
first is the fully-funded investor described above. Fully-funded investors
are required to put up 100% of the money they are putting at risk. They
actually lend money to the SPV in order to receive interest payments on the
CDOs they purchase. This money is used to purchase the safe assets
that the SPV uses as collateral. The second kind of investor is the unfunded investor.
Unfunded investors are not required to put money up
front and do not lend money to the SPV. Instead, unfunded investors, in
effect, sell credit-default protection to the SPV—protection that
insures payment to those who purchased Credit Default Swaps from the
SPV. All other investors are subordinate to the unfunded investors in a
synthetic CDO offering, which means, of course, that all other investors in
a synthetic CDO get paid after the unfunded investors get paid. This
adds another level of subordination to the tranche structure of the
synthetic CDOs, namely, what is referred to as the Super-Senior tranche that
is sold to unfunded investors.[8.2]
The way in which synthetic CDOs are structured is
illustrated in Figure 8.2 which shows the structure of the
ABACUS 2004-2 offering sponsored by Goldman Sachs
in 2004. In spite of the obvious differences between Figure 8.2 and
Figure 8.1, they are very much the same in that 87% of the synthetic
CDOs in Figure 8.2 are rated AAA or are subordinated above the
triple-A tranches compared to 78% of the MBSs in Figure 8.1, and only
5% are rated less than investment grade in Figure 8.2 compared to 4%
in Figure 8.1.
Figure 8.2: Structure of the
ABACUS 2004-2
Synthetic CDO Offering. |
Tranches |
Amount* |
Rating |
% of Total |
Cumulative % |
Super Senior
Unfunded |
$850.0 |
Not Rated |
85.0% |
85.0% |
Senior
Fully Funded
Investment
Grade |
$20.0 |
AAA |
2.0% |
87.0% |
Junior
Fully Funded
Investment
Grade |
$40.0 |
AA |
4.0% |
91.0% |
$30.0 |
A |
3.0% |
94.0% |
$10.0 |
BBB |
1.0% |
95.0% |
Equity |
$50.0 |
Not Rated |
5.0% |
100% |
Total |
$1,000.0 |
|
100% |
|
Source:
Financial Crisis Inquire Commission.
*millions of dollars
In terms of the payout from the investment, there is no difference between a
synthetic CDO that sells CDSs and holds safe securities for
collateral and an ordinary CDO that holds the actual MBSs that underlie the
CDSs sold by the synthetic CDOs. If there are no defaults in the
underlying MBSs the CDO investors will all get paid whether the CDO is
synthetic or not. If some of the underlying MBSs default, some of the safe
securities will have to be sold to pay off the CDSs that insured those
MBSs. In this situation, some of the investors who purchased the lower
tranches of the synthetic CDOs will not get paid, but the same would be true if
those investors had invested in the lower tranches of an ordinary CDO that
actually held the MBSs that defaulted. It makes no difference from the
perspective of the payout to the investor what form the CDO takes. In
either case, the amount the investor gets paid or loses is the same.
There is, however, a fundamental difference between
investing in a synthetic CDO and investing in an ordinary CDO in terms of
the kind of investment being made. Investors who purchase ordinary CDOs are
investing in the mortgage business. The money they are investing is used to
purchase mortgages—albeit, indirectly by way of financing the tranches of
the CDOs that are used to purchase MBSs that are used to purchase mortgages.
Investors who purchase synthetic CDOs are investing in
the insurance business, not the mortgage business. The money they are
investing is used to insure the debt instruments that underlie the CDSs sold
by the SPV not to
purchase mortgages. In addition, the collateral held by the SPV is not put
up by the borrower, it is put up by the lender, and it is not held to
protect those who lend by purchasing the synthetic CDOs. It is held to
protect those who purchase the Credit Default Swaps that are sold by the
SPV.
Not only were the fully funded investors in synthetic CDOs investing in the insurance
business, they were investing in the insurance business in an unregulated market.
There were no government regulations that prevent those who were buying the
MBS insurance offered by the SPV from being the very same people that selected
the MBSs being insured. The conflict of interest here should be obvious,
especially since the people who purchased the insurance and selected the
MBSs to be insured did not
have to own the MBSs they had selected. They had nothing to lose if the
MBSs they selected to insure went bad, and they receive a huge payout if these
MBSs did in fact go bad.
Initially, the institutions that sold Credit Default Swaps were pretty much
limited to AIG and a few
monocline insurance companies such as
MBIA and
Ambac, but with the invention of the synthetic CDO the major players in
the MBS and CDO markets such as
J. P. Morgan and
Goldman Sacks were able to secure credit protection from an ever
increasing number of investors through the sale of the fully-funded,
synthetic CDOs. All that was required to sell a fully-funded synthetic CDO
was to find a buyer who 1) had enough money to make the purchase, 2) who sought
the safety the investment-grade rating of these bonds seemed to provide,
and 3) who was unable to understand exactly what it was that was being
purchased. Investment-grade, fully-funded, synthetic CDOs were sold
to banks, pension funds, endowment funds, hedge funds, mutual funds,
insurance companies, and municipal governments throughout the country and
all over the world. Virtually any entity that met the above criteria was
fair game to those who sold these securities. (FCIC
WSFC)
Finally, as is clear from the way in which the synthetic CDOs were
structured, those who bought the unfunded, super-senior tranches were given
added protection from loss by the fully-funded tranches since the
fully-funded tranches were subordinated to the super-senior tranches and took
the first losses. This was particularly appealing to many of the
institutions that sponsored synthetic CDOs since these institutions did not have to put up
cash to purchase the Super Senior tranches they had created and could receive
income from these tranches without having to set aside capital to support them.
As a result, many of the super-senior tranches of the synthetic CDOs ended
up on the books of the financial institutions that sponsored these CDOs,
much to their regret when the crisis came. In
other words, these institutions assumed the risk of selling credit-default
protection to the SPV, a practice that proved disastrous in the fall of 2008. (FCIC
WSFC)
Shadow Banks,
Derivatives, and Systemic Risk
The
systemic risk the shadow banking system posed—that is, the
threat to the financial and economic systems as a whole—especially when
combined with an unregulated insurance market and derivatives markets that
were not only unregulated but operated without exchanges or clearinghouses, should have been
obvious to anyone with a reasonable understanding of the history of the
financial system, but ideological blindness inspired by an almost religious
faith in free markets made it impossible for policy makers and elected officials
to take this risk seriously. When this blindness was combined with the fact
that the vast majority of elected officials knew virtually nothing about the
history of the financial system, the stage was set for a catastrophe of epic
proportions.
The irony is that the first run
on a shadow bank occurred ten years before the entire shadow banking system
collapsed in the fall of 2008 when a run on the hedge fund
Long-term Capital Management in 1998 nearly caused a worldwide financial
meltdown.
This run literally terrified policy makers and the entire financial
community at the time, and, yet, as we will see, nothing was done to curb the
excesses of the shadow banking system or to regulate the over-the-counter
derivatives markets in the wake of this near catastrophe.
Endnotes
[8.1]The ratings, AAA, BBB, etc., represent the
rating agencies estimate of the probability of default for the security
being rated based on the historical performance of securities that have held
that particular rating in the past. The ten year time horizon for the
historical performance of Moody’s ratings from 1970-2010 is given in
following table from Moody’s
Confidence Intervals for Corporate Default Rates:
[8.2] The Super Senior tranches were only sold to
the most creditworthy institutions with triple-A credit ratings such as to
AIG and a few
monocline insurance companies such as
MBIA and
Ambac—institutions that turned out, in the end, to be not so creditworthy,
largely by virtue of the fact
that they invested in the super
senior tranches of the synthetic CDOs.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter
9: LTCM and the Panic of 1998
George H. Blackford ©
2009, last updated 5/1/2014
The story of
Long Term Capital Management (LTCM)
has been told by
Roger Lowenstein in his captivating
book
When Genius Failed,
but for those who have not had a chance to read this book I will, with a few
embellishments, summarize it here.
LTCM was a hedge fund started 1994 by
John Meriwether, a legendary trader who made a fortune for himself and
Solomon Brothers in the 1980s. (Lewis
NYT) The fund was a limited partnership where the senior partners were
Meriwether along with
Myron Scholes and
Robert Merton, both of whom were to receive the Nobel Prize in Economics
1997;
David Mullins, a former vice chairman of the
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve;
Eric Rosenfeld, a former professor from Harvard's Business School;
Greg Hawkins, a campaign manager for Bill Clinton in the 1980s;
Victor Haghani, a former managing director at Solomon Brothers;
William Kasker, a former professor from Harvard's Business School; and
Larry Hilibrand along with a number of other former traders from Solomon
Brothers.
This was a group of financial rock stars that claimed six
Ph.D.s from
MIT among their ranks and another from
the University of Chicago. Wall Street was awed by their intellectual prowess
and the depth of their financial expertise. They were the Dream Team of Wall
Street when they began LTCM, but the saga of LTCM lasted only four years and
ended as just another study in how the Best and the Brightest can lose their
way.
The partners raised capital by investing $50 million of their own money
and soliciting an additional $1.25 billion from a group of investors for a
total of $1.3 billion in equity capital—at the time, the largest amount ever
raised by a startup company. Their equity grew to $7 billion by the end of
1997, and, over time, they managed to borrow over $125 billion in the money
market, mostly through six month repurchase agreements. (Rosenfeld)
This gave LTCM an investment portfolio of over $130 billion to work with.
For the first two years LTCM earned a 40 percent rate of return on their
equity and in 1997 they earned 27 percent.
The success of this company was spectacular—the stuff
legends are made of. At the end of 1997 LTCM paid back $2.7 billion of its
capital to its investors so the partners could increase their returns. This
brought its equity capital down to $4.3 billion.
Fall of Long Term Capital Management
In April 1998 LTCM's fortunes turned. By August 16, LTCM
had lost $800 million, and their equity had fallen to $3.5 billion. Then on
August 17, Russia devalued its currency and defaulted on its treasury's debt.
The Russian default panicked investors all over the world
and led to a flight to
quality, which means invertors attempted to
abandon more risky assets such as speculative stocks and bonds and purchase
less risky assets such as cash and Treasury securities. This led to turmoil
in the world's financial markets as the prices of the assets investors wanted
to sell fell. These were the very asset held by LTCM. The following Monday,
LTCM lost $553 million in the markets, and their equity shrank to $2.9
billion. They continued to lose money through the end of the month as the Dow
dropped 357 points on August 27 and then fell an additional 512 points as the
market crashed on August 31.
By the beginning of September, LTCM'S equity had fallen to
$2.28 billion—a staggering 44 percent loss during the month of August and a 52
percent loss from the beginning of the year—LTCM was rapidly approaching
insolvency. What's worse, LTCM was having liquidity problems as well. Even
though most of its financing was by way of relatively long-term six month
repurchase agreements, it still had to roll over one sixth of this financing
each month, and this was becoming more difficult. Creditors were demanding
more favorable terms, and when on September 10 LTCM's clearing fund at Bear
Sterns briefly dropped below its contractual minimum, Bear insisted that LTCM's
partners open their books to reassure Bear that they would be able to meet
their obligations in the future. If LTCM became insolvent or defaulted on a
single payment all of its loans would come due. It would then be forced into
bankruptcy as its creditors scrambled to seize their collateral. In addition,
by September 10 LTCM's equity had fallen below $2 billion, and it was clear
that to avoid insolvency it would have to raise capital either through
investors or by taking in new partners. This required that LTCM open its
books to potential investors or new partners as well as to Bear Sterns.
LTCM had always been a secretive company.
It's partners had never
opened its books to anyone, not even to its investors or largest creditors.
Now the partners had no choice. They would be out of business instantly
if Bear refused to clear their trades, and they estimated they would have to
raise least $2 billion in capital to survive. There was no way they could
raise that kind of money without opening their books to someone. After
attempting to raise the funds from a number of individuals such as Warren
Buffet, George Soros, Michael Dell, and a Saudi prince LTCM contacted Goldman
Sacks to assist with their fundraising and—in the strictest of confidence, of
course—on Monday, September 14 opened its books to Goldman Sacks.
As LTCM opened its books and news of
the
tenuous nature of its solvency spread
around Wall Street, LTCM's situation worsened. On Monday, September 14, the day LTCM
opened its books to Goldman Sacks, LTCM lost $55 million. On Tuesday, $87 million more, and then on Wednesday, September 16 it lost an
additional $122 million for a total of $264 million. That was fifteen
percent of their capital lost in just three days!
The problem was that LTCM was a
behemoth—four times the size of the next largest hedge fund. (GAO)
It was obvious to everyone that if LTCM were driven into bankruptcy its assets
would have to be liquidated. Since LTCM was so large, liquidating its assets
would cause the prices of its assets to fall. Anyone that owned the same
assets as LTCM would lose money if they still owned them in the event LTCM
went under. This provided a powerful incentive for other institutions to sell
their holdings of these assets before LTCM was forced to sell its holdings.
Even worse, it was also obvious it would be possible to profit from LTCM's
demise by trading against it, that is, by taking positions in the market that
would make money if LTCM was forced to liquidate its portfolio. Both of these
activities caused the prices of LTCM's assets to fall even faster than they
otherwise would have. As a result,
no one wanted to invest in, or be in debt
to LTCM, and just about everyone who could was trying to make money off of
their demise.
By September 16, the partner's equity had
fallen to $1.5 billion, and the situation was becoming desperate. The
partners estimated it would now take $4 billion in additional capital to save
the company—twice what they thought it would take just three days before.
At that point LTCM decided it would be best to brief the Federal Reserve on
their situation. A call was made and a meeting was set for following
Sunday, September 20.
Bailout of Long Term Capital Management
LTCM was not the only institution losing money during this
period that found itself in serious financial difficulties. Most of the other
hedge funds lost money as well and many folded. Investment banks, which by
then were making money from the same kinds of investment strategies as LTCM,
had financial problems as well, as did commercial banks and bank holding
companies, but none of these other institutions had LTCM's problems.
Commercial banks had deposit insurance to protect them from a run and access
to the Fed to provide them with cash. Investment banks had sources of income
other than their investment portfolios that were sufficient to tide them
through. LTCM was not a bank; it had no insured source of funds and could not
borrow from the Fed. The only source of funds available to it was its
investment portfolio and the money market. (PWG)
But what made LTCM unique was the size of its portfolio.
LTCM's portfolio was well over $100 billion on September
20, 1998. In addition, as the representatives of the Federal Reserve looked
at LTCM's books they discovered LTCM had huge positions in
derivatives which, as is explained in the
Chapter 8, are financial instruments such as an
option that have no intrinsic value in themselves but, rather, derive
their value from the value of underlying assets. They are contracts between
two parties, each of which is a
counterparty to the other, and LTCM had entered into over 60
thousand derivative contracts with some 75 different institutions. The
notional value of the assets underlying these contracts was well over $1.5
trillion! (GAO)
This amounted to some five percent of the entire world market. In addition,
LTCM financed most of its $100 billion in assets with some 40 thousand
repurchase agreements which had counterparties as well. To make things worse,
LTCM's investments and derivative commitments—and the counterparties on the
other side of these contracts—were in markets all over the world: in Great
Britain, Denmark, Sweden, Switzerland, Germany, France, Italy, Spain, the
Netherlands, Belgium, and Russia; in New Zealand, Hong Kong China, Taiwan,
Thailand, Malaysia, and the Philippines; and in Brazil, Argentina, Mexico, and
Venezuela.
It was clear that if LTCM were to fail it would seriously
disrupt the world's financial markets. Not only did LTCM's seventeen largest
creditors—banks such as Merrill Lynch, Morgan Stanley Dean Witter, Goldman
Sachs, Salomon Smith Barney—stand to lose as much as $5 billion directly if LTCM were
forced into bankruptcy, if LTCM was forced to liquidate its portfolio its
collateralized creditors would be forced to claim and sell their collateral,
and their derivative counterparties would be forced to scrambled to protect
themselves from the vulnerable positions they found themselves in as a result
of LTCM's default on over a trillion dollars worth of derivatives. This kind
of chaos in the financial market would undoubtedly cause asset prices to
spiral downward all over the world and where and when they would stop
falling no one could
know. It was feared that such an event would cause a worldwide recession, and
that an effort should be made to keep this from happening. The question was
what?
It was not at all clear that anything could be done to save
LTCM. Investors and speculators all over the world were trading
against LTCM making the situation worse by the day, and given its liquidity
problem and the rate at which it was losing equity, it was unlikely LTCM
could remain solvent for another week or liquid enough to avoid defaulting on
one of its obligations and being driven into bankruptcy. It would be
impossible to find outside investors willing to invest $4 billion in LTCM
under these circumstances. At the same time LTCM's portfolio was so large and
so complicated that any an attempt to liquidate it in an orderly way would
cause a panic. The only option that seemed even feasible was to get LTCM's
major creditors together to see if they could find a way to raise the $4
billion in capital necessary to save LTCM. But there was no guarantee that
even this would solve the problem.
Even though LTCM's major creditors, mostly large Wall
Street banks, had the most to lose, at least directly, if LTCM went bankrupt,
it was not at all likely they would be willing to put up the $4 billion in
capital necessary to keep LTCM afloat. After all, that would be throwing good
money after bad, and that's not how Wall Street bankers got to be Wall Street
bankers. Their basic instinct would be to force LTCM into bankruptcy and feed
on its carcass. Nevertheless, by Tuesday the situation seemed desperate
enough to make this straw worth grasping. LTCM had lost $553 million on
Monday, September 21—an amount equal to its entire loss for the month of
August—and by the end of the trading day on Tuesday it had lost $152 million
more. Its equity capital now stood at $773 million. Given the
circumstances, it was felt that at least an effort should be made to see if
LTCM's creditors would bail it out, and an emergency meeting of LTCM's 16
largest creditors was scheduled for 8:00 that evening to take place at the
Federal Reserve Bank in New York City.
At the meeting a plan was presented by which a consortium
of the 16 banks present would attempt to save LTCM by investing $250
million each in order to raise the $4 billion needed to end the run
on LTCM. Everyone agreed that the situation was serious, but there was
little agreement on anything else. Some wanted to just let LTCM go down
and take their chances, but no one could be certain the collapse of LTCM
wouldn't take them down with it, and most were terrified by the prospect.
Most of the bankers wanted to savage the
LTCM's partners by taking over the company and leaving them with nothing, but
there was no way the bankers could do this without forcing LTCM into
bankruptcy. In the absence of a default on the part of LTCM, each
partner would have to agree to the terms of a takeover. The partners had
nothing to lose if they refused a takeover that left them with nothing so
there was no reason for them to agree to it, and a default was what the
bankers were trying to avoid.
Most of the bankers also wanted to fire the
partners as well, but this also was problematic. LTCM's portfolio was so
large and so complicated it would be very difficult for an outsider to
understand it let alone manage it. No one understood this portfolio
better than the partners, and in the event of a takeover the partners would
have to manage it. By 11:00 only four banks were willing to commit to
joining the consortium, and the meeting was adjourned until 10:00 the
following morning.
On Wednesday morning the gathering was
increased to include the president of the New York Stock Exchange and the
executives of five British, Swiss, and French banks. In addition, the
representatives of a German bank attended by way of a speakerphone. The
meeting was at times acrimonious, and at a number of points the negotiations
nearly collapsed, but by the end of the trading day LTCM had lost another $218
million and its equity capital had fallen to $555 million.
Gradually the bankers began to realize that
this was the last chance they would have to deal with this problem, and an
agreement on the terms of a takeover began to emerge. In the end it was
agreed that a consortium of 14 banks would invest $3.65 billion in LTCM in
exchange for 90 percent of the firm's equity. The partners would retain
10 percent of the equity and would run the firm under the supervision of the
consortium. At 5:15 a phone call was placed to the partners to see if
they would agree to these terms with the details to be worked out before the
deal was to close on Monday, September 28. The partners agreed, and
shortly after 7:00 the agreement was announced to the press.
While an agreement had been reached in principle, there was
no agreement where the devil lies—the details had yet to be worked out.
On Friday, 70 lawyers representing the 14 members of the consortium converged
on Merrill Lynch to write the terms of the contract on a deal that had to be
closed in three days—the kind of deal that usually took months. In spite
of the pandemonium, after a marathon session they came up with a draft.
In the meantime, LTCM lost another $155 million on Friday, and its equity
capital fell to $400 million.
When the partners read the contract early Saturday morning,
they were furious. As far as they were concerned there was nothing in it for
them. Later that morning the partners met at a prestigious Midtown law firm
to negotiate with the consortium to finalize the contract, and another
marathon session began—this time 140 lawyers showed up to argue on behave of
their clients. Throughout Saturday and Sunday the negotiations continued.
Ironically, even if a contract acceptable to all parties were obtained, there
was no guarantee it would be put into effect.
One of the conditions insisted on by the consortium was
that all of LTCM's creditors sign a waiver relinquishing their right to
immediate repayment of their loans to LTCM. Republic Bank, Nomura Securities,
Credit Lyonnais, and Italy's foreign exchange office refused to sign. It
wasn't until 5:30 on Monday afternoon that the problem of the holdouts was
solved, all of the waivers that were coming in were in, and all of the
disputes among the principles were resolved so that the deal to take over LTCM
for $3.65 billion by the consortium of 14 banks could be closed.
The 14 banks that took control of LTCM were: Chase
Manhattan Corporation; Goldman Sachs; Merrill Lynch; J.P. Morgan; Morgan
Stanley Dean Witter; Salomon Smith Barney; Credit Suisse First Boston Company;
Barclays; Deutsche Bank; UBS; Bankers Trust Corporation; Société Generale;
Paribas; and Lehman Brothers. (GAO)
In the meantime, LTCM had another bad day. By the time the
deal was closed its capital had fallen to $340 million. It lost an additional
$750 million through the first half of October, then the markets rebounded, and
by the end of October LTCM had stabilized. Within a year the fund was able to
pay back the consortium, and by the end of 2000 LTCM had been systematically
liquidated without any of the dire financial and economic consequences that
were feared if LTCM had been forced into bankruptcy.
How could the financial geniuses of LTCM bring the
financial world to the brink of collapse? The answer is as old as finance
itself. As with poorly managed banks throughout the history of finance,
LTCM's partners underestimated the risk of economic instability and over
extended themselves by borrowing more than their equity capital could support
in a crisis. When times were prosperous they managed to
leverage their equity as much as 30 to 1. In so doing they took a risk
that a financial crisis could wipe them out, but they thought that was
extremely unlikely and, at the same time, for the first three years they made
a fabulous amount of money.
When the crisis came and asset prices began to fall—just as
in the banking world of the nineteenth century—there was no way they could
sell their assets and maintain their solvency, and no one was willing to lend
to them. They were caught in a modern day bank run in a nineteenth
century
financial environment, and there was nothing they could do to save
themselves. Even the fact that they had borrowed for a relatively long time
period, using six month repurchase agreements, was not enough to save them.
As a result, the Fed was forced to orchestrate a takeover by a consortium of
banks to head off a financial meltdown that threatened a worldwide economic
crisis in its wake. That's all there was too it. As I said, it's a story as
old as finance itself.
It is worth emphasizing that the geniuses at LTCM did not create a financial
crisis that nearly caused a meltdown of the entire world's financial system
because they were dumb. They knew the limitations of their models and that
some unpredictable event could cause an economic catastrophe that could
drive them into bankruptcy. They didn't think it would happen, but
they knew it could happen. They
leveraged their equity in a way that ultimately led to their downfall in
spite of the risk they knew they were taking for a very simple reason: There
is no other way they could have made the enormous amount of money they were
able to make in the first three years of their existence without leveraging
their equity in this way.
In other words, they took a chance that fortuitously threatened the
financial system of the entire world because they thought it was
worth it for them to take that risk. What it would mean for the rest
of the world if they failed disastrously never entered their minds, at least
not until the very end when it was too late to do anything about it except
look for a way out of the mess they had created. What's more, there is no
reason for them to have thought about what would happen to the rest of the
world if they failed disastrously. No one ever got rich thinking about that
sort of thing. That sort of thing is left to philosophers and is beyond the purview of free-market capitalist.
It is also important to emphasize a second reason why they leveraged their
capital in that way: They leveraged their capital 30 to 1 because they
could. There was no one there to stop them from doing what they thought
was best for them—not the government and not their creditors—irrespective of
the danger their actions posed for the rest of the world. The financial
markets they operated in were unregulated. There was no law or regulation
to prevent them from doing what they did, and the regulators at the time had
a
Panglossian faith in the efficacy of free markets to create the best of
all possible economic worlds. As for their creditors, they just wanted a
piece of the action. They made fortunes of their own doing business with
LTCM during the prosperous years, and they too thought it was worth it for
them to take the risks they were taking when they lent to LTCM at
ridiculously low margins.
With no one there to stop them why shouldn't LTCM have taken that risk?
Think about it for a moment. For the first three years of LTCM's existence
they made over $5 billion. That works out to over $5 million a day! On
some days they would lose $20 million but on others they would make $40
million. Why shouldn't they take the risk for that kind of money? After
all they couldn't have made that kind of money if they hadn't taken the
risk. Think of the rush it must have given them to be the master of the
financial universe as they raked in all that cash. Wouldn't you take that
risk for that kind of excitement?
If you answer no, you are probably one of those ordinary people who keep
their money in a savings account and invest your retirement savings in a
conservatively run IRA. If you had been at LTCM you would have restrained
your leverage to 5 or 10 to 1 and would have been happy earning as little as
$1 million a day instead of $5 million a day. You probably don't buy lottery tickets either or get
excited at the prospect of a weekend in Vegas trying out a new way of
counting cards at a blackjack table. In other words, you are no John
Meriwether.
John Meriwether would probably not waste his time purchasing lottery tickets, but there can be no doubt that if he had the
option of starting up another LTCM and doing it all over again he would
start up another LTCM and do it all over again. Not only would he do it all
over again, he did. On October 22, 2009 the Financial Times reported that
Meriwether had embarked on this third hedge fund (JM
Advisors Management) after his second fund (JWM
Partners which he began less than two years after the LTCM debacle) went
bust in the 2008 financial crisis. And the world is full of John
Meriwethers.
Some people are movers and shakers. They are the people who get things done
and are prepared to assume the risks necessary to get things done. When
they are successful in the military they are called heroes. When successful
in business some are called Captains of Industry, others are called Robber
Barons, and some are called both Captains of Industry and Robber Barons at
the same time by different groups of people. They are also called
entrepreneurs by economists, and they are not the geniuses who invent a better mousetrap
that frees the world from mice. They are the geniuses who find a better way
to produce that mousetrap and distribute it throughout the market so that it
is available to each of us to wage our own personal war against mice. Rather
than invent better mouse traps they assume the risk
necessary to create a better mousetrap industry. Entrepreneurs are
essential to economic growth and prosperity in a market economy. They make
it happen.
Entrepreneurs include the likes of
Andrew Carnegie,
John D. Rockefeller,
Henry Ford,
Thomas Edison,
J. P. Morgan, and more recently
Steve Jobs,
Steve Wozniak, and
Bill Gates. But acknowledging the grand accomplishments of these great
men doesn't mean they should be allowed to play by their own rules in free
and unregulated markets. After all, among their ranks we also find the likes
of
Charles Ponzi,
Bernie Madoff,
Charles Keating,
Michael Milken,
Ivan Boesky,
Jeff Skilling,
Ken Lay,
Andy Fastow, and
Bernie Ebbers as well as
John Meriwether,
Jimmy Cayne,
Richard Fuld,
Franklin Raines,
Daniel Mudd,
Richard Syron,
Martin J. Sullivan,
Robert Levin,
Chuck Prince,
Sandy Weill,
Robert Rubin,
and countless others who were in charge of our
financial system during the era of cowboy finance in unregulated markets
that preceded the near collapse of the world's financial system in the fall of
2008.
Contrary to the propaganda of the
Conservative Movement, there is no reason
to believe unregulated free markets must work to the advantage of
society as a whole if people are allowed to seek their own advantage in the
market place or even that they will work in this way.
(Smith
MacKay
George
Marx
Veblen
Sinclair
Roosevelt
Haywood
Jones
Fisher
Josephson
Keynes
Polanyi
Schumpeter
Boyer
Galbraith
Musgrave
Harrington
Carson
Nader
Domhoff
Kindleberger
Cody
Minsky
Stewart
Black
Zinn
Stiglitz
Phillips
Kuttner
Morris
Taleb
Bogle
Harvey
Dowd
Galbraith
Baker
Stiglitz
Klein
Reinhart
Fox
Johnson
Amy
Sachs
Smith
Eichengreen
Rodrik
Skidelsky
Graeber)
There are innumerable ways in which markets can fail to accomplish this end,
and this is particularly so when it comes to financial markets.
Sooner or later an unregulated financial market will
always fail to accomplish this end because it is inevitable that when
fortunes can be made in a market by taking extraordinary risks, the market
will always find people who are willing to take those risks. No matter
how noble or ignoble, honest or dishonest, wise or foolish, simplistic or
sophisticated that risk might be, there is always someone out there willing
to take it if there is a chance to make a fortune by taking it. This
is especially so when the risk takers are able to take those risks with
other peoples' money! What's more, if there is enough money involved
the risk takers will corrupt the entire system if they are allowed to do so.
And there are no other markets where fortunes can be made as easily and as
quickly by taking extraordinary risks as in the financial markets.
It has been demonstrated time and again that if participants in
these markets
see an opportunity to make a personal fortune by leveraging themselves to
the hilt and are given the opportunity to do so, they will do so. It has
also been demonstrated time and again that when they are allowed to do this
during prosperous times the financial system inevitably gets overextended
and sooner or later a crisis inevitably develops that threatens the economic
system as a whole. The problem is that
when the great men of finance overextend themselves it is not only their own
economic fortunes that are at risk. It is the entire economic system that is
at risk along with the wellbeing of all of the people who depend on the
smooth functioning of that system for their survival.
No one, but no one, should be allowed to put
the economic system at risk for their own personal gain, and most certainly
not in the name of Free Market Capitalism or any other ideological
abstraction. That was the lesson learned by the generation that lived
through the Great Depression of the 1930s when they took on the free
marketeers and created the comprehensive system of financial regulation that
served us so well until we began to dismantle it in the 1970s. It is
the lesson that should have been reinforced in the minds of the generation
that witnessed the savings and loan crisis of the 1980s which in addition to
threatening the stability of the economic system cost the American taxpayer
$130 billion. And
it is also the lesson that should have been reinforced in the wake of the
LTCM crisis which seriously threatened the entire world economy.
Unfortunately, that is not how things turned out.
In response to the LTCM crisis the
President's Working Group on Financial Markets was tasked with examining
the circumstances surrounding the LTCM crisis. This working group was
created by an executive order of Ronald Reagan ten years earlier on March
18, 1988 and is made up of the Secretary of the Treasury and the
chairpersons of the
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve, the
Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), and the
Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC). The individuals who held
these posts in 1998 were
Robert Rubin,
Alan Greenspan,
Arthur Levitt, and
Brooksley Born, respectively. The Working Group's report—Hedge
Funds, Leverage, and the Lessons of Long-term Capital Management—was submitted to Congress on April 28, 1999.
It was clear from their report that the working group understood most of the
factors that entered into the collapse of LTCM and that these factors posed
a threat to the system as a whole. They understood that "excessive leverage
in the financial system" was a serious problem and "that excessive leverage
can greatly magnify the negative effects of any event or series of events on
the financial system as a whole." They saw that in the face of excessive
leverage "problems at one financial institution could be transmitted to
other institutions, and potentially pose risks to the financial system."
(PWG)
They also saw that the problem was not limited to hedge funds, but that
other "financial institutions, including some banks and securities firms,
are larger, and generally more highly leveraged, than hedge funds" and,
consequently, posed the same problem posed by LTCM. In support of this they
noted that at the end of 1998 LTCM's leverage ratio stood at 28 to 1 while
"the five largest investment banks' average leverage ratio was 27 to 1."
The working group also seemed to be aware of the way in which "[h]edge funds
obtain economic leverage . . . through the use of . . . derivative
contracts" and that this kind of
economic leverage can pose the
possibility of systemic risk as well as the
balance sheet leverage
(debt to equity ratio) we
have been talking about so far. They saw all of this, and, yet, given
the ideological blindness of all but one member of this group,
Brooksley Born, it was
impossible for this group to recommend that hedge funds and the rest of the
shadow banking system be brought under the regulatory umbrella of the
federal government. (PWG)
The struggle between the convictions of the Working Group's conservative
members regarding the efficacy of markets and the reality of the LTCM
crisis—a reality that was undoubtedly pointed out to them at every turn by Brooksley Born and the professional staff of the various government agencies
that participated in the discussion—is evident in the compromise embodied in
the recommendations put forth in the Working Group's report:
Market history indicates that even painful lessons recede
from memory with time. Some of the risks of excessive leverage and risk
taking can threaten the market as a whole, and even market participants not
directly involved in imprudently extending credit can be affected.
Therefore, the Working Group sees the need for the
following measures:
-
more frequent and meaningful information
on hedge funds should be made public;
-
public companies,
including financial institutions, should publicly disclose additional
information about their material financial exposures to significantly
leveraged institutions, including hedge funds;
-
financial institutions should enhance
their practices for counterparty risk management;
-
regulators should encourage improvements
in the risk management systems of regulated entities;
-
regulators should promote the development
of more risk-sensitive but prudent approaches to capital adequacy;
-
regulators need expanded risk assessment
authority for the unregulated affiliates of broker-dealers and futures
commission merchants;19
-
the Congress should enact the provisions
proposed by the President’s Working Group to support financial contract
netting in the United States; and
-
regulators should consider stronger
incentives to encourage off-shore centers to comply with international
standards. (PWG)
It is clear from this set of recommendations that instead of looking at the
real problem—namely, that the shadow banking system
has been allowed to come into being in such a way that it is outside the
regulatory system put in place to prevent financial crises—the Conservative
members of this group were looking at the details of the LTCM crisis and
attempting to find causes for this crisis that could be fixed without having
to regulate the shadow banks. Judging from the recommendations listed
above, they came up with four:
-
Decision makers did not have enough information to make an
accurate assessment as to the degree of risk associated with lending to
LTCM. Hence, recommendations 1 and 2 of the report calling for more
frequent and detailed information from hedge funds and that this
information be made public.
-
Risk management was inadequate on the part of LTCM and its
counterparties leading up to the crisis. Hence, recommendation 3, 4, and
5 that institutions and regulators promote better approaches to capital
adequacy.
-
The bankruptcy laws were inadequate to deal with repurchase
agreements and derivative contracts making it very difficult to
efficiently liquidate a company such as LTCM in the event of bankruptcy.
Hence, recommendation 7 to provide for contract netting in the United
States.
(PWG)
-
The lax regulatory standards in off-shore centers
encouraged American companies to register in these centers to avoid the
American regulatory system. Hence, recommendation 8 that regulators
consider stronger measures to encourage these centers to comply with
international standards.
The only recommendation in this report that related to the shadow banking
system is 6 which expanded the authority of SEC and CFTC to unregulated
affiliates of regulated institutions for the purposes of examining their
operations. If broadly interpreted this would give the SEC and CFTC the
authority over virtually all the shadow banks for the purpose of examining
their operations though not the power to regulate them. This recommendation
was undoubtedly insisted on by Chairperson Born of the CFTC in accordance
with a much stronger recommendation put forth by the CFTC a few months
earlier in a
concept
release that had been blocked at the time by the conservative
members of the Working Group. (Frontline)
Footnote 19 (which refers to footnote 23 in the report) at the end of
recommendation 6 emphasized Greenspan's objection to this recommendation for
the record:
On the
issue of expanding risk assessment for the unregulated affiliates of
broker-dealers and FCMs, Chairman Greenspan of the Federal Reserve Board
declines to endorse the recommendation but, in this instance, defers to
the judgment of those with supervisory responsibility.
While the Working Group did not recommend bringing the shadow banking system
under the umbrella of federal regulation they did state:
Although the Working Group is not making additional recommendations at
this time, if further evidence emerges that indirect regulation of
currently unregulated market participants is not working effectively to
constrain leverage, there are several matters that could be given further
consideration to address concerns about leverage.
The "matters that could be given further consideration" included:
-
Consolidated supervision of broker-dealers and their
currently unregulated affiliates, including enterprise-wide capital
standards. . . .
-
Direct regulation of hedge funds. . . .
-
Direct regulation of derivatives dealers unaffiliated with
a federally regulated entity.
It is evident throughout the report that the conservative members of the
Working Group were struggling to find a way to not regulate the shadow
banks. Their task was not an easy one. They had to explain why
their faith in the efficacy of free markets to provide the discipline
necessary to avoid serious financial crises was justified.
At the same time they had to explain why the financial crisis caused by LTCM
was so serious the Federal Reserve was forced to intervene in the market to
resolve the situation. In searching for a way out of this conundrum
they found that the traders in the market didn't behave in the way they were
supposed to behave in that they made mistakes, did not have enough
information to make informed decisions, and their risk management was
inadequate. They also found the bankruptcy laws were inadequate to
allow for a timely resolution of LTCM through bankruptcy and that off-shore
centers were not living up to international standards.
In other words, it wasn't the market that failed. It was the actors
in the market that failed. The traders in the market weren’t behaving
the way they were supposed to behave when it came to managing risk.
The government hadn't provided adequate bankruptcy laws, and those pesky
off-shore centers were mucking up the works.
Thus, to keep this sort of
thing from happening again the Working Group recommended the traders in
markets be educated as to how they were supposed to manage risk and that
they be provided with enough information to enable them to manage risk
properly. It then recommended the bankruptcy laws be changed and something
be done about the off-shore centers. And just to drive the point home they
noted that if the actors didn't clean up their act the Working Group would
consider direct regulation sometime in the future. This is bizarre!
You would think they were dealing with children who got caught with their
hands in a cookie jar.
The actors in the LTCM drama made over $5 million a day as they rode
roughshod over the world's financial system and threatened the economic
stability of the entire world. LTCM's counterparties made fortunes in their
dealings with LTCM as well. Who in their right mind could possibly believe
that information, education, fixing the bankruptcy laws, and threatening to
consider regulation if the financial community doesn't behave are the kinds
of things that would have stopped LTCM's partners and their counterparties
from doing what they did or would somehow keep others from doing the same
thing in the future?
The
Government Accounting Office (GAO) was also tasked with examining
the circumstances surrounding the LTCM crisis. Unlike the President's
Working Group which is made up of political appointees, the GAO (which was
subsequently renamed the General Accountability Office in 2006) is an
independent, nonpartisan agency within the federal government. The
president of the GAO is the
Comptroller General of the United States and is appointed for a 15 year
term by the president from a list of candidates proposed by congress. It
was created 1921, and its mission statement is as follows:
Our
Mission
is to support the Congress in meeting its constitutional responsibilities
and to help improve the performance and ensure the accountability of the
federal government for the benefit of the American people. We provide
Congress with timely information that is objective, fact-based,
nonpartisan, nonideological, fair, and balanced.
The professionals at the GAO were not hindered by ideological blinders when
they took a look at the LTCM crisis. Their report entitled
LONG-TERM CAPITAL MANAGEMENT Regulators Need to Focus Greater Attention on
Systemic Risk and released in October 1999 went right to the core of the
matter. After observing that
-
The LTCM case illustrated
that market discipline can break down and showed that potential systemic
risk can be posed not only by a cascade of major firm failures, but also
by leveraged trading positions. . . .
-
[A]s shown by the
inability of regulators to identify the extent of firms’ activities with
LTCM, the traditional focus of oversight on credit exposures is not
sufficient to monitor the provision of leverage to trading counterparties.
. . .
-
Changes in markets that
have blurred the traditional lines of market participants’ activities will
continue to create risks that cross institutions and markets, thus making
the need for effective coordination even more critical.
-
Gaps in SEC’s and CFTC’s
regulatory authority impede their ability to observe and assess activities
in securities and futures firms’ affiliates that might give rise to
systemic risk. . . . [I]mprovements in examination focus and in
information gathered may give bank regulators a better opportunity to
identify future problems that might pose systemic risk. Without similar
authority over the consolidated activities of securities and futures
firms, SEC and CFTC cannot contribute effectively to regulatory oversight
of potential systemic risk, because a large and growing proportion of
those firms’ risk taking is in their unregulated affiliates.
-
The President’s Working
Group has recommended granting new authority for SEC and CFTC over the
affiliates. However, the new authority would not grant capital-setting or
enforcement authority and would not involve the type of examination of
their risk activities and management that would allow a thorough
assessment of potential systemic risk. . . .
The GAO then made two succinct and to the point recommendations:
-
We recommend that the Secretary of the Treasury and the Chairmen of the
Federal Reserve, SEC, and CFTC, in conjunction with other relevant
financial regulators, develop better ways to coordinate the assessment of
risks that cross traditional regulatory and industry boundaries.
-
In an effort to identify and prevent potential future crises, Congress
should consider providing SEC and CFTC with the authority to regulate the
activities of securities and futures firms’ affiliates similar to that
provided the Federal Reserve with respect to bank holding companies. If
this authority is provided, it should generally include the authority to
examine, set capital standards, and take enforcement actions. . . .
The GAO not only supported the position Brooksley Born had put forth in the
original CFTC
concept
release, it had gone far beyond it, but given the ideological
proclivities of the Republican Congress and Clinton Administration there was
little hope that legislative action would be taken on the GAO's
recommendations.
Instead of the increased regulation of the financial markets called for in
GAO's report, Congress passed the
Financial Services Modernization Act (FSMA)
on November 4, 1999 which was signed into law by President Clinton on
November 12. This act further deregulated the financial system by repealing
those portions of the
Glass-Steagall Act of 1933 that prevented commercial bank holding
companies from becoming conglomerates that are able to provide both
commercial and
investment
banking services as
well as insurance and brokerage services.
By the end of the year it was clear that Brooksley Born was not going to be
reappointed as chairperson of the CFTC, and she was effectively driven from
office on January 19, 1999. (Frontline)
Congress passed the
Commodity Futures Modernization Act (CFMA) on December 14, 2000 which
Clinton signed into law on December 21. This act explicitly prevented both
the CFTC and state gambling regulators from regulating the derivatives
markets which Brooksley Born had fought so valiantly to bring within the
regulatory fold.
When on December 12, 2000 the Republican dominated Supreme Court appointed
George W. Bush President of the United States it meant that on January 21,
2001 the Republican Party—with its mantra of lower taxes, less
government, and deregulated markets along with its distain for
government—would gain control of all three branches of the American
government for the first time since 1954. At this point there was no hope of curbing the era of
deregulated finance that began in the Nixon administration with the
abandonment of the
Bretton Woods Agreement and was honed to perfection
during the Clinton years. Instead, what followed were three
changes in regulatory rules that made
it possible for the major depository institutions and investment banks to leverage
the financing of their assets to such an extent that the
coming downturn would wipe out their equity and drive most of them into insolvency:
The first
liberalized the rules that allowed financial institutions to set up Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) to secure financing in the
Asset-backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) and Repurchase Agreement markets. (JPR)
The
second allowed banks to hold less capital reserves against highly rated
investment assets—AAA-rated Asset Backed Securities such as MBSs and
Collateralized Debt Obligations (CDOs), for example—than against ordinary loans.
(JPR)
The
third allowed the major banks to set their own capital requirements as
determined by their in-house risk assessment models. (NYT)
As we will see in Chapter 10, these
regulatory rule changes
following the 2000 takeover of the federal government by the Republicans, combined with the passage of
FSMA and
CFMA
at the end of the Clinton administration, set the stage for the worst
economic catastrophe since the Great Depression.
If truth be told, however, it probably wouldn't have mattered who won the
2000 election.
Even if a Democrat had been elected to the Presidency, Republicans still would have controlled
Congress. And even if the Democrats had been able to take over Congress as well as the Presidency
there is no reason to believe it would have made a
difference.
While a majority of the congressional Democrats opposed
FSMA (House
Senate) and probably would have opposed
CFMA if there had been a
separate vote on this bill rather than having been included in an omnibus
emergency approbations bill, the Republicans were virtually unanimous in
their support of these two bills and a Democratic president signed them into
law. Thus, even if the Democrats had taken
over both Congress and the Presidency in 2000 we would have been in the position
we were in during the first two years of the Obama administration where the united opposition of the Republicans joined by a
number of "moderate" Democrats would have been able to stop any attempt to repeal
FSMA and CFMA or to pass legislation that would regulate the shadow banking
system. And given the shift of the leadership of the Democratic Party
during the 1990s toward the belief in the magical powers of deregulation, there
is no reason to believe the changes in regulatory rules that followed the 2000
election would have been avoided if the Democrats had won rather than the
Republicans.
Given the ideological temperament of the times, it would have taken a miracle to
avoid the economic train wreck that was about to take place.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 10: The
Crash of 2008
George H. Blackford © 2009,
last updated 5/1/2014
As
was noted in Chapter 3,
the financial system is generally secure so long as non-federal debt is backed
by profitable investments or by incomes that are generated from profitable
investments. Even then, a non-federal debt equal to
318%
of GDP—the point it had reached in 2007 as the financial system began to founder
and before output began to fall—the transfer of income from debtor to creditor
can be problematic. Even a 3% average interest rate would require 9.5% of
GDP to be transferred when non-federal debt equals 318% of GDP and a 5% rate
would require that 15.9% be transferred. That means an average interest rate of
5% on the $46 trillion non-federal debt that existed in 2007 would require a
$2.3 trillion transfer out of a gross income of $14 trillion. This is
comparable to the $2.7 trillion spent by the entire federal government in 2007.
This kind of transfer places a strain on the system even in the best of times.
The problem was, of course, that the non-federal debt
created following the collapse of the
dotcom and
telecom bubbles
in 2000 was not backed by profitable investments or by incomes derived from
profitable investments. Instead we find that the
subprime mortgage fraud
led to a situation in which there were $10 trillion worth of mortgages at the
heart of
the $46
trillion non-federal debt that existed in 2008—mortgages
on properties the prices of which had been inflated by the housing bubble the
subprime mortgage fraud had helped to create. As a result, all mortgages
were at risk, not just subprime mortgages, and as the fallout from the
housing bubble’s bursting spread throughout the financial system
the default rate on prime mortgages followed the
upward trend of the default rate on subprime mortgages. To make matters
worse, the worst of the worst of these mortgages were bundled in Mortgage Backed Securities (MBSs) and distributed to hapless investors all over the
world. (FCIC
WSFC
NYU)
At the same time, the anti-regulation fervor of the times,
combined with the freewheeling, cowboy finance this fervor had engendered led
to the unrestricted creation of hundreds of trillions of dollars of
over-the-counter
derivatives that turned the financial system into a
worldwide casino. Speculators were able to use these derivatives to wager
unfathomable amounts of money on the future outcomes of economic events without
the benefit of an exchange or clearinghouse
to inform or protect the public or to defend the system against the cascading
effects of defaults. In the process they not only placed the solvency of
themselves and their counterparties at risk, they placed the solvency of the
entire financial system at risk as well. (FCIC)
The lack of regulation in the over-the-counter derivatives
markets was particularly acute when it came to the market for Credit Default Swaps
(CDSs) which allowed multiple parties to obtain multiple contracts to insure
assets that they did not own against default. This meant that the losses
caused by a default on an asset that was insured multiple times would be
multiplied by the number of times the asset was insured with the complicating
factor of the possibility of default on the part of the writers of the CDSs that
insured the asset.
When the crisis began, deposit insurance was sufficient to
prevent a run on depository institutions, but this did not prevent a run on the
rest of the system. As we saw in Chapter 7,
much of the financial system had been taken over by shadow banks—financial
institutions that operated like banks in holding long-term assets financed by
short-term liabilities—that were, for the most part, outside the preview of the
financial regulatory system with very little restriction on their leverage.
And the
shadow banking system had become significantly larger than the traditional
banking system by the time the financial system began to breakdown: Shadow
banks held well over $12
trillion dollars worth of assets in 2007 whereas the
total value of all of the assets held by the regulated banking system in that
year stood at $10 trillion. Shadow banks were extremely vulnerable to a run when the
crisis began since, unlike depository institutions, shadow banks had no insured
source of funds or lender-of-last-resort protection. (Perotti)
As we saw in
Chapter 5 and Chapter 6,
financial institutions that hold long-term assets financed by short-term
liabilities are particularly vulnerable to financial panics that lead to
economic catastrophes because, in the midst of a panic, their short-term funding
dries up faster than their long-term assets mature. As a result, financial
institutions that use this kind of funding without an insured source of funds or
lender-of-last-resort protection can find
themselves in a situation where in order to meet their short-term obligations
they are forced to dump their long-term assets on the market. This
distress selling of assets can, in turn, cause a fall in asset prices throughout
the system which threatens the solvency of all institutions that hold long-term
assets. The fall in asset prices can also make it impossible for some to
meet their short-term obligations, particularly when leverage is high, and it
forces default on short-term debts. This, in turn, reinforces the panic. (Perotti)
We also saw in
Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 how
leverage tends to increase in an unregulated financial system. Leverage
was, in fact, dangerously high at the beginning of the current crisis, even
among those institutions that fell within what was left of our regulatory
system. As was noted in
Chapter 9, three changes in regulatory rules in the
early to mid 2000s made it possible for both depository institutions and
investment banks to leverage the financing of their assets to such an extent
that the coming downturn would wipe out their equity and drive them into
insolvency:
The first liberalized the
rules that allowed financial institutions to set up Special
Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) to secure financing in the
Asset-backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) and Repurchase Agreement markets. (JPR)
The second allowed banks to hold less capital reserves
against highly rated investment assets—AAA-rated Asset Backed Securities such as
MBSs and Collateralized Debt Obligations (CDOs), for example—than against
ordinary loans. (JPR)
The third allowed the major banks to set their own capital
requirements as determined by their in-house risk assessment models. (NYT)
The effects of these rule changes were disastrous.
By transferring long-term assets off their books to
Special Purpose Vehicles, banks were able to use their
SPVs to finance their operations by using the transferred assets as collateral for
the
Asset-backed Commercial Paper or repurchase agreements issued or undertaken by their SPVs.
Since the SPVs were outside the regulatory purview of the government, the SPVs
were able to leverage the financing of their assets far beyond what the banks
would have been legally able to do if they had kept the assets on their books.
Reducing the capital requirements of those banks that held
triple-A rated assets and allowing investment banks to determine their own
capital requirements not only led to a situation where 50% of all AAA-rated
Asset Backed Securities remained within the financial system, either held directly
on the books of banks or in their off-the-books SPV conduits, it led to a
situation where these assets were financed at a much higher leverage
than would have otherwise been possible. (FCIC
WSFC
NYU)
As a result, by 2007 the five largest investment
banks—Bear Stearns, Goldman Sachs, Lehman Brothers, Merrill Lynch, and Morgan
Stanley—had leveraged their capital 40 to 1, and, as we saw in
Chapter 5, this means that a mere 2.5% fall in the
value of their assets would wipe out their entire equity. At the same
time, the two GSEs, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, had leveraged their capital 75
to1 meaning that a mere 1.4% fall in the value of their assets would drive them
into insolvency. (FCIC)
This kind of leverage placed the solvency of the entire financial system at risk
when the crisis came as the assets created and held within that system began to
lose their value.
The fact that 1) many of the assets held by banks were
held off their books, 2) the leverage of banks and shadow banks had been allowed
to grow beyond any sense of reason, and 3) there existed over
$600 trillion
worth of over-the-counter derivatives that had been allowed to come into being
in an unregulated market without the protections provided by an exchange or clearinghouse
created a situation in which no one knew what institutions were at risk or which
would survive as the prime rate went from 4.3% in 2004 to 6.2% in 2005 to 8.0%
in 2006 and remained at 8% into 2007.
To make matters worse, as was noted in
Chapter 4, the rise of the
failed nineteenth-century
ideology of Laissez-faire/free-market Capitalism that led to
the deregulation of our financial system was not an exclusively American
phenomenon. It had been promulgated all over the world by institutions
such as the
International Monetary Fund in the name of the now
infamous
Washington
Consensus. The result was not only financial
deregulation and a housing bubble in the United States but
in many countries in Europe and
elsewhere around the world. As a result, the
crisis that was about to explode in the American financial system in September
of 2008 was destine to
create a worldwide economic catastrophe.
Subprime mortgages went from 8% of mortgage originations
in 2003 to 20% in 2005, and 70% of these mortgages were
hybrid Adjustable-Rate Mortgages (ARMs) with teaser
rates for the first two or three years that would reset to a higher rate
thereafter. At the same time, many of these mortgages were issued with
little or no documentation and with very high loan to value ratios,
often as high as 100%. The profits made on these mortgages came from the
fees that were charged for originating them, rather than from the interest rates
that were charged on these loans. In addition, these mortgages were, in
general, specifically designed to be refinanced and, thereby, to generate more
fees since those who received these kinds of mortgages would often be unable to
make the larger payments when the interest rates reset if the mortgages were not
refinanced. (FCIC
WSFC
NYU)
Hybrid ARMs with teaser rates were a moneymaking machine
for mortgage originators since each time the mortgage was refinanced new fees
were generated. They also seemed to be a safe bet for the mortgage holder,
so long as housing prices were rising, since, if the mortgagor was unable to
make the payment or refinance the mortgage when the interest rate reset, the
mortgagee would be able to foreclose and take possession of the property in a
rising market. And as we saw in Chapter 1, profits in the financial system were over a
trillion dollars above what they would have been if they had remained at their
2000 level before the housing boom began in earnest.
The problem was that in 2006 housing prices stopped
rising.
Figure 10.1 shows the Case-Shiller home price indices from 1900 through
2013, both in nominal terms and in real terms, that is, after adjusting for
inflation. This figure shows the phenomenal increase in home prices that
occurred during the housing bubble as the rate of housing price increases
accelerated dramatically beginning in 1998. The nominal value of houses
more than doubled from 1998 through 2005 as their real value increased by 80%.
This figure also shows how this market crashed after its peak in the second
quarter of 2006 and prices began to fall.
Source:
Case-Shiller Home
Price Indices.
As a result, many of those with ARMs were not able to
refinance their mortgages or make the payments when the interest rates reset,
and delinquencies and defaults on these mortgages began to rise. The fall
in housing prices also meant that the mortgagee would no longer be able to
foreclose and take possession of the property in a rising market when the
mortgagor could no longer refinance the mortgage loan or make the payment after
the interest rate reset.
By the end of 2006 is was apparent that the party was over
as hundreds of the smaller independent subprime mortgage lenders had gone out of
business along with some that were not so small. (NYU)
In commenting on
Ownit Mortgage Solutions demise on December 7, 2006
Bloomberg noted that
Ownit joins Ameriquest Mortgage Co., Countrywide Financial
Corp., H&R Block Inc.'s Option One, BNC Mortgage Inc. and other lenders in
shutting operations or laying off employees as the U.S. housing market slows.
Delinquencies are rising, home prices are falling and borrowers of
Adjustable-Rate Mortgages are facing higher monthly
payments.
When, on April 2, 2007,
New Century Financial, the second largest subprime
lender in the country, filed for bankruptcy it was clear that the subprime
housing market had come to an end. The seriousness of the situation did
not begin to sink in, however, until the end of June when two of Bear Stearns's
hedge funds began to collapse.
When
Merrill Lynch seized some $800 million worth of collateral
underlying its repurchase agreements with Bear's
High-Grade Structured Credit Fund, Merrill found that
it couldn't sell the collateral it had seized without taking a substantial loss
on its investment. This was, of course, a relatively piddling sum in the
grand scheme of things, but the fact that $800 million worth of collateral could
not be sold at a price that would cover the cost of the loans made under
Merrill's repurchase agreements called into question the viability of the entire
market for repurchase agreements. This marked the beginning of a run on
the shadow banking system that gradually built up steam until it eventually
overwhelmed the traditional banking system of the entire world.
On August 9, 2007 the largest French bank, BNP Paribas,
was forced to suspend redemptions on three of its SPV
conduits to the Asset Backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) market. In response
to this news, ABCP markets began to freeze as investors came to realize that
these markets were collateralized by assets of questionable value. The
lack of government regulation of bank sponsored SPVs made it impossible for
investors to know the extent of the problem or which banks were sound and which
were not. No one knew who to trust as this process worked itself out, and
inter-bank lending began to dry up.
As a result, central banks all over the world were forced
to pump liquidity (High-Powered
Money) into the system. On
August 9, 2007 the European Central Bank (ECB)
injected 95 billion euros into the Euro Zone (EZ) banking system. On
August 10 the Federal Reserve announced it would take
the steps necessary to provide liquidity in the financial markets, and on
August 17 the Fed cut its discount rate by 50
basis points
and announced a change in "the Reserve Banks' usual practices to allow the
provision of term financing for as long as 30 days, renewable by the borrower."
The Fed also broadened the kinds of assets it would accept as collateral for its
loans to depository institutions and continued to cut its discount rate and
expand liquidity throughout the fall as the hundreds of subprime lenders began
to liquidate. On
September 14 the
Chancellor of the
Exchequer announced that the Bank of England would "provide
liquidity support for Northern Rock, the United Kingdom’s fifth-largest mortgage
lender."
On
December 12, as the short-term funding of the SPVs
sponsored by banks evaporated thereby forcing the banks to either extend credit
to their SPVs or take their SPVs assets back onto their books, the Federal
Reserve announced the first of
its special lending facilities to deal with the crisis:
The Federal Reserve Board announces the creation of a
Term Auction Facility (TAF) in which fixed amounts of
term funds will be auctioned to depository institutions against a wide variety
of collateral.
In addition
the Fed announced:
The FOMC authorizes temporary reciprocal currency
arrangements (swap lines) with the European Central Bank (ECB) and the Swiss
National Bank (SNB). The Fed states that it will provide up to $20 billion and
$4 billion to the ECB and SNB, respectively, for up to 6 months. (SLFED)
The
currency swap lines were arranged to provide liquidity
to
foreign financial
institutions that had borrowed short
term in the American money market to finance the
purchase of American Asset Backed Securities (ABSs). Without this support
of foreign institutions by the Federal Reserve those institutions would have
been forced, for lack of dollar funding, to dump their American sponsored ABSs
on the market which would have driven the prices of these assets down.
This, in turn, would have threatened the solvency of American institutions that
held the same kinds of assets.
These actions provided a temporary reprieve for our major
depository institutions, but they did little to assist the investment banks in
their attempts to cope with the crisis. As the run on the investment banks
and their SPVs continued, it eventually reached a climax on
March 14, 2008 when the Federal Reserve announced its
willingness to support a takeover of Bear Stearns by JP Morgan Chase and on
March 24
guaranteed
$29 billion of Bear's asset against loss to JP Morgan
Chase in order to facilitate the takeover.
In the meantime, on
March 16, 2008 the Federal Reserve had announced its
Primary Dealer Credit Facility (PDCF) whereby the Fed
agreed to "extend credit to primary dealers at the primary credit rate against a
broad range of investment grade securities." (FED)
Primary Dealers are those institutions that deal directly with the Federal
Reserve in implementing its open
market policy, and, not coincidently, included all of
the major investment banks that were under siege at the time. This was a
radical departure from traditional Federal Reserve policy. The Federal
Reserve was created to provide liquidity to depository institutions, not
investment banks, and the Fed was only able to create this lending facility
under a little know emergency provision,
Section 13(3) (12 U.S.C. §343),
buried within the
Federal
Reserve Act. Unfortunately, the change in policy
associated with the creation of this facility came too late to save Bear
Stearns.
The Federal Reserve continued to lower its discount rate
and expand its lending facilities to banks throughout the spring and summer of
2008 in the vain hope that these stopgap measures would make it possible to
avoid an economic catastrophe. Unfortunately, this was not to be. (NYT)
The system reached its breaking point in September of 2008
when the federal government was forced to take over
Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac on September 7 and allowed
Lehman Brothers to file for bankruptcy on September 15.
By the time the government took over
Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac on September 7 and allowed
Lehman Brothers to file for bankruptcy on September 15
there were over $600 trillion worth of over-the-counter derivatives outstanding,
and no one knew how many of the issuers and holders of these derivative
contracts would survive or which would go bust and leave their counterparties
holding the bag. Nor did anyone know who would ultimately be on the hook
for the inevitable defaults on the
non-federal debt outstanding—debt that had grown to $47.2 trillion by
2008 with GDP peaking at $14.7 trillion.
Prior to Lehman Brothers' bankruptcy there was some hope
within the financial community that somehow the government would muddle through
and save the system. When Lehman Brothers was allowed to fail those hopes
were dashed, and a panic of epic proportions ensued as financial markets froze
all over the world.
On the day Lehman filed, the
Bank of America announced its intention to purchase Merrill Lynch,
and by the end of the week the two surviving investment banks, Goldman Sachs and
Morgan Stanley, seeing the handwriting on the wall, made arrangements to become
bank holding companies thereby subjecting themselves to Federal Reserve
supervision. At that point
all of the
major investment banks had either gone bust, been
taken over by a depository institution, or had become a depository institution
in the hope that by placing themselves under the protective purview of the
Federal Reserve they would be able to survive the carnage.
The day after Lehman filed, the Fed was forced to
guarantee an
$85
billion loan to American International Group (AIG) to
prevent it from defaulting on some $79 billion worth of Credit Default Swaps
that AIG had sold without setting aside the capital needed in the event the
buyers of these insurance contracts had to be compensated.
That same day the
Reserve Primary Money Fund "broke the buck" (meaning
that value of its assets fell below the value of the money investors had
deposited in the fund) due to its losses on Lehman Brothers commercial paper and
medium-term notes. This set off a run on the $3 trillion Money Market
Mutual Fund (MMMF) industry which is one of the primary purchasers of the
commercial paper used by corporations to obtain financing for inventories and to
meet payrolls. (NYU)
In response, on
September 19 the Federal Reserve announced the
creation of the
Asset-Backed Commercial Paper Money Market Mutual Fund Liquidity Facility
(AMLF), and the
Treasury announced a program to make available $50
billion to guarantee investments in money market mutual funds. Both of
these moves were designed to keep the run on MMMFs from disrupting the flow of
funds to the real sector of the economy.
Within five days of Lehman's filing the situation had
become desperate. On
September 20 the Treasury submitted a proposal to
Congress that would authorize the Treasury to purchase $700 billion worth of
assets from financial institutions in order to get these assets off their books.
The stock markets were thrown into chaos nine days latter when Congress
rejected this proposal. On October 3, a revised
version of the Treasury's proposal was signed into law which authorized the $700
billion the Treasury had requested and created the
Troubled Asset Relief Program
(TARP) to administer the distribution of these funds. Over the following
year and a half some $432 billion of these funds were subsequently used to
recapitalize various financial institutions, provide additional funding for AIG,
and to fund the reorganization of General Motors and Chrysler as they worked
their way through the bankruptcy court. (FCIC)
On
October 7 the Federal Reserve created yet another
funding facility, the
Commercial Paper Funding Facility (CPFF), in order to
further support the commercial paper markets, and on that same day the FDIC
increased deposit insurance coverage to $250,000 per depositor. On the
following day the Fed authorizes an additional $37.8 billion in support of AIG.
On
October 11 the Fed removed its limitations on its currency swap lines with
foreign central banks in a coordinated effort to provide unlimited dollar
funding for foreign financial institutions:
In order to provide broad access to liquidity and
funding to financial institutions, the Bank of England (BoE), the European
Central Bank (ECB), the Federal Reserve, the Bank of Japan, and the Swiss
National Bank (SNB) are jointly announcing further measures to improve
liquidity in short-term U.S. dollar funding markets.
The BoE, ECB, and SNB will conduct tenders of U.S.
dollar funding at 7-day, 28-day, and 84-day maturities at fixed interest rates
for full allotment. Funds will be provided at a fixed interest rate, set in
advance of each operation. Counterparties in these operations will be able to
borrow any amount they wish against the appropriate collateral in each
jurisdiction. Accordingly, sizes of the reciprocal currency arrangements (swap
lines) between the Federal Reserve and the BoE, the ECB, and the SNB will be
increased to accommodate whatever quantity of U.S. dollar funding is
demanded. The Bank of Japan will be considering the introduction of similar
measures.
Central banks will continue to work together and are
prepared to take whatever measures are necessary to provide sufficient
liquidity in short-term funding markets. (FRS)
Then on
October 14
the FDIC increased the protection of FDIC insured institutions "by guaranteeing
newly issued senior unsecured debt of banks, thrifts, and certain holding
companies, and by providing full coverage of non-interest bearing deposit
transaction accounts, regardless of dollar amount." It is undoubtedly
worth noting that this action by the FDIC was taken after all of the
major investment banks that had contributed so greatly to the crisis had become
affiliated with depository institutions and, thus, fell under the purview of the
FDIC.
On
October 21 the Federal Reserve announced the creation
of the
Money Market Investor Funding Facility (MMIFF) to
further strengthen the MMMFs to prevent the cutoff of these funds to the real
sector of the economy, and on
October 28 and
October 29 the Federal Reserve established currency
swap lines with the Reserve Bank of New Zealand along with the central banks of
several Latin American countries.
On November 17
Lincoln National,
Hartford
Financial Services Group, and
Genworth Financial, three large life insurance
companies, announce their plans to purchase depository institutions in order to
qualify for
TARP funding.
And so it went throughout the fall of 2008 and into the
winter, spring, and summer of 2009 as the crisis got worse, and it is worth
noting that, as the crisis got worse, it got worse in a very predictable way:
-
As housing prices fell and delinquencies and defaults on
subprime mortgages rose, the value of subprime MBSs and CDOs plummeted as the
lead began to show through the gild the financial alchemist had used to obtain
triple-A ratings for these assets.
-
The fact that there were $10 trillion worth of mortgages
that had been issued on properties with inflated prices called the value of all
MBSs and mortgage related CDOs into question, not jus subprime MBSs and CDOs.
-
The fact that an economic downturn was virtually
inevitable as the financial markets attempted to sort out the subprime mortgage
mess called the value of all ABSs into question whether they were related to
mortgages or not.
-
As a result, the short-term financing that lacked a
deposit guarantee that banks and
shadow banks were using to finance their holdings of these ABSs began to dry up,
and we were faced with a situation in which financial institutions throughout
the world were about to be forced to dump literally trillions of dollars worth
of ABSs onto the market—ABSs that no one wanted to buy.
-
Given the extraordinarily high level of debt leverage
these institutions had been allowed to accumulate since 2000, combined with the
hundreds of trillions of dollars of over-the-counter derivative contracts
related to these ABSs that had been allowed to come into being during this
period without the protections of an exchange or clearinghouse it was clear that
if the ABSs were dumped on the market the resulting fall in asset prices and
defaults on derivative contracts would have driven an unfathomable number of the
world's financial institutions into insolvency and caused a collapse in the
international financial system.
-
This, in turn, could be expected to have the same kind of
effect on the real economy that it had in the 1930s when the collapse of the
international financial system drove the world's economy into the Great
Depression.
By September 2008 the financial sector of the economy was
in a shambles, but until then the financial crisis had relatively little effect
on the lives of ordinary people. As can be seen in Figure 10.2,
the rate of unemployment had increased gradually from its low of 4.4% of the
labor force in March of 2007 to 6.1% by September 2008 and real GDP had barely
decreased. This changed as the panic began in September of 2008.
Source:
Economic Report of the President, 2014
(B2PDF|XLS),
Bureau of Labor Statistics
The
downward spiral of financial and real sector feedback began with a vengeance
in September 2008 and didn't come to an end until the third quarter of 2009 as
real GDP fell by 5% from the second quarter of 2008 to the second quarter of
2009 and unemployment increased from 6.1% in August 2008 to
10.1% in October
2009. As was noted in Chapter 4, this is the
same kind of the problem we faced in the 1930s. But in spite of the fact
that the financial situation was much worse in the 2000s than it was in the
1930s, the fallout from the current financial crisis has been much less than
the fallout from the crisis that led to the Great Depression
where real GDP fell by
30%
from 1929 through 1933 and
the unemployment rate jumped from
3.2% of the labor force to
24.9%.
The most fundamental difference between today and the 1930s
is that, so far at least, we have been able to minimize the kind of fallout
from the current financial crisis that began in 2007—the
kind of fallout that had such devastating effects on the economy as well as on
the lives of so many people in the 1930s. And it is worth emphasizing
here that
all that has saved us today from the kind of devastation we went through in
the 1930s is Big Government.
This may seem counterintuitive in today’s
world with so much disparaging antigovernment rhetoric out there, but the
simple fact is that there are but three threads by which our economic system
is hanging today that have saved us from the fate our country and the rest of
the world went through in the 1930s, and these threads are there only because
of the size of our federal government.
The first thread by which the economy is
hanging today is the actions taken by the Federal Reserve that kept the
financial system from imploding. By 1) creating lending facilities that
made available hundreds of billions of dollars of funds to markets that were
frozen, 2) undertaking hundreds of billions of dollars of currency swaps with
foreign central banks, and 3) guaranteeing trillions of dollars worth of
assets against default the Federal Reserve (with the help of the FDIC and
Treasury) was able to prevent the disaster that would have taken place had
financial institutions, either foreign or domestic, been forced to dump
trillions of dollars of ABSs and other financial assets onto the market in a
situation where no one wanted to buy those assets.
Through these actions the Federal Reserve
accumulated unprecedented levels of assets on its balance sheet and made
available unprecedented levels of reserves to the financial system throughout
the entire world. The extraordinary nature of the Fed’s actions in this
regard is shown in Figure 10.3 where
Reserve Bank Credit [10.1]
can be seen to increase from $864 billion in August of 2008 to $2.2 trillion
by December of that year—an increase of 155% in just four months.
Source:
Federal Reserve Statistical Release.
Even if you do not understand how the financial system
works, it should be obvious from looking at
Figure 10.3 that something went terribly wrong back in the fall of 2008
and that the actions taken by the Fed at that time were not only unprecedented,
they were truly desperate. The Fed increased Reserve Bank Credit from $842
billion at the beginning of 2008 to $2.2 trillion by the end of that year as the High-Powered Money
increased by some $920 billion. And virtually all of that increase took place in the last four months of 2008.
In the beginning of April, 2014 Reserve Bank Credit stood at $4.2 trillion after
QE2 and
in the midst of
QE3, a second and third round of Federal Reserve expansion. It is
fairly obvious from Figure 10.3 that the financial crisis that reached a climax in 2008 is not
over. This crisis won’t be over until Reserve Bank Credit stabilizes,
presumably somewhere in the one trillion dollar range it started at before the
crisis began.
Without the actions taken on the part of
the Federal Reserve to increase Reserve Bank Credit in 2008 our financial
system most certainly would have collapsed, and the unemployment rate we face
today most certainly would have been far above 10% it reached in 2009. In
addition, because the American dollar serves as the single most important
reserve currency for
international transactions throughout the world, the collapse of our financial
system would have brought down the entire international financial system.
By providing those reserves the Fed has been able to prevent a total collapse
of both the domestic and the international financial systems. As a
result, we have been able to avoid, so far at least, the kinds of consequences
suffered in the 1930s from the collapse of these systems as described in
Chapter 4, namely, a falling money supply combined
with dramatically falling wages and prices that led to the debt-deflation
described by
Irving Fisher in
1932 and
1933.
The situation was much different in 1929
through 1933. While the Fed did increase its lending to banks and
holding of government securities by
66% during this period, it took four
years rather than four months to do so. What’s worse, because of its
ideological faith in the self-correcting nature of free markets, the Federal
Reserve actually allowed Reserve Bank Credit
to fall by
25% leading up to the banking crisis in 1930.
In addition, the Federal Reserve lacked the legal authority to intervene in
the economic system in 1933 that
Section 13(3) (12 U.S.C. §343) of the
Federal
Reserve Act gave the Fed in 2008
as a result of the regulatory legislation enacted after 1933.
To make matters worse, there was no
international reserve currency at the time that could be increased to deal
with the international financial crisis that developed. There was only
gold, and, as a result, the entire
international financial system disintegrated as one country after another was
forced to abandon the system.[10.2]
All of these factors combined to cause the international financial system to
collapse, more than
10,000 banks to go out of
business in the United States along with
129,000 other businesses, the money supply to fall
by
25%, and the economy to
experience a major
deflation which exacerbated the fall in
output, income, and employment from 1929 through 1933. (Fisher
Friedman
Kindleberger
Meltzer
Skidelsky
Bernanke)
The second thread by which our economic
system is hanging today is the size of government relative to the total
economy. Figure 10.4 shows Total
Government Outlays from 1929 through 2013 along with government's
Direct Contribution to GDP as measured in the National Income and Product
accounts.[10.3]
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5)
Total
Government Outlays increased by 22% from 2007 through 2011 during the current crisis
going from $4.5 trillion in 2007 to $5.5 trillion in 2011. This increase was
the result of 1) emergency spending to alleviate the hardship caused by the
economic downturn including
automatic stabilizers, 2) the
Economic Stimulus Act passed on February 13, 2008, and
3) the
American Recovery and Reinvestment Act passed on
February 17, 2009.
These actions helped to save
us today because the resulting increases in government expenditures created income for people.
This had the effect of short-circuiting the vicious downward spiral of
falling income, output, and employment that
wrought such havoc during the
four years from 1929
through 1933 because the government created income
during the current crisis partially offset the fall in incomes in the private sector of
the economy. If the income generated from government expenditures had fallen
along with private sector income during this crisis, the downward spiral that began in 2007
and accelerated dramatically in 2008 and early 2009 would have been, beyond
any doubt, far worse than it actually turned out to be. The stability of
federal government outlays in the face of the economic decline provided a
powerful brake on the economy as it spiraled downward during the fall of 2008
and winter of 2009.
Without this break we most certainly would have experienced a much greater level of
unemployment than the peak of
10.1% we obtained in October 2009
following the financial system’s grinding to a halt in September 2008.
Again, the situation was much different in 1929 through
1933 where the difference is
shown in Figure 10.4 above and Figure 10.5 below.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5
3.2
3.3)
In spite of the fact that Total Government
Outlays increased by 14% from 1929 through 1933 ($8.5 billion to $9.7 billion)
Total Government Outlays were equivalent to only 8.1% of GDP
in 1929 compared to 31.4% of GDP in 2007. Thus, the government's
involvement in the economy was much less in 1929 than it was in 2008, and
government was not in as powerful a position to stabilize the economic system
in 1929.
To make matters worse, because of the
ideological faith of policy makers in the self-correcting nature of markets,
after the banking crisis began in 1930 the government's Direct
Contribution to GDP portion of Total Government Outlays was
actually allowed to fall by 13.6% from 1930 through 1933 ($10.3 billion to
$8.9 billion). Even though the federal government's direct contribution
to GDP remained fairly constant during this period and actually increased
somewhat in 1933, this increase was more than offset by the fall in the state
and local governments' direct contributions to GDP. The result was a
dramatic increase in the rate of unemployment from 8.7% of the labor force in
1930 to 24.9% by 1933 as real GDP fell by 38%. It wasn't until federal
grants in aid to state and local governments began to increase in 1933 that
the fall in state and local governments' direct contribution to GDP came to an
end.
During the current crisis, total
government expenditures increased by 20%
from 2007 through 2010 as federal expenditures increased by 27% and state and local government expenditures by
7%. At the same time, the direct contribution to GDP by the
federal government increased by 24% and, due to a 41% increase in federal
grants in aid to state and local governments, the direct contribution to GDP
by state and local governments increased by 7%. However, the ideological
opposition to this aid in Washington has led to a cutback of federal aid to
state and local governments in recent years and to a concerted effort to
reduce the size of government. As we will see in
Chapter 15,
this does not bode well for the future as it threatens to lead us down the
same path we followed in 1937.
The third thread by which our economy
is hanging today—one that has been essential to keeping us from suffering the
kinds of deprivations and hardships that were so widespread in the 1930s—is
the fact that a major portion of our federal government’s budget is directly
related to social-insurance programs. These programs fall
under the headings of
Social Security,
Medicare,
Health (Medicaid,
health research, and
occupational health and safety), and
Income Security (retirement
and disability benefits for federal employees,
Supplemental Security Income,
unemployment
compensation,
housing assistance, and
food and nutrition assistance) in
the federal budget. In 2010, expenditures in
these categories summed to
$2.1 trillion and comprised
62.2% of the total government outlays.
Not only do these programs provide a
major indirect contribution to GDP through the mechanism of
automatic stabilization, there can be no doubt that the index
of human misery and suffering that exists today as a result of the economic
catastrophe brought on by the fraudulent, irresponsible, and reckless
behavior of our financial institutions and their regulators would have been
immeasurably worse had it not been for these
$2.1 trillion worth of government
social insurance expenditures that did not fall during this catastrophe but
actually went up.
Without the
$706.7 billion spent by the Social
Security Administration, some
54 million people who were receiving
benefits from Social Security in 2010 would not have had these benefits to
fall back on. Without
$820.7 billion spent by the federal
government on Medicare, Medicaid, veterans health benefits, and on other
federal health programs the entire healthcare system in the country would have
collapsed—just as it did in the 1930s—with all of the increased human misery
and suffering that would have entailed. Without the
$622.2 billion spent by the federal
government under the heading of Income Security in the federal budget
countless millions more people would be in dire straits compared to what we
see today.
There was no Social Security in 1929;
no Medicare, Medicaid, or veteran’s health benefits; no
disability insurance
or
unemployment
compensation; no food and nutrition or
housing assistance programs. When the speculators and bankers combined
to bring down the system back then people were left on their own to fend as
best they could, and the result was
suffering and misery far beyond
anything we see today. It was because of the immense personal hardship
and suffering brought on by the depression that the federal government was
forced to step in, and the
Federal Emergency Relief Administration (FERA),
Civilian Conservation Corps (CCC), and the
Public Works Administration (PWA) and
Works Progress Administration (WPA)
came into being in the 1930s. And it was because of the immense personal
hardship and suffering brought on by the depression that the social-insurance programs that are saving us today—unemployment
compensation,
Social Security,
Medicare,
Medicaid, and
food stamps—were
brought into being. (Kennedy)
It is important to recognize, however, that none of the
measures that have been taken so far has come to grips with the fundamental
problem that brought us to where we are today. Even though the fall in
output and employment were reversed in 2009 and 2010, Reserve Bank Credit (Figure
10.3) is nowhere near normal, the
current account deficit had only fallen
to $400 billion by
the end of 2013, and, as can be seen in Figure 10.6, the concentration of
income in 2012 was above that of 2007, at a level comparable to that of 1928,
and above where it was as the economy stagnated through the 1930s.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
As a
result, the absence of another speculative bubble to stimulate the economy
following the collapse of the housing bubble in 2007 has led to an economic
recovery that is far from satisfactory. The extent to which this is so is
illustrated in Figure 10.7 which shows the dramatic increase in the
Labor Force Participation Rate that has occurred since the 1960s and how the
Employment Population Ratio had systematically reacted to changes in the
Unemployment Rate during this period—decreasing
dramatically as the Unemployment Rate increased and increasing
dramatically as the Unemployment Rate decreased[104].
It also shows how this pattern was broken during the current economic crisis.
Source: Bureau of
Labor Statistics, (A-1)
As the Unemployment Rate increased from 4.4% of the
labor force in 2007 to 10.0% in 2009 the Employment Population Ratio fell
from 63.3% of the non-institutionalized working age population to 58.5%, and it
barely budged as the Unemployment Rate fell to 6.7% by 2014. In the
meantime, the Labor Force Participation Rate fell from 66.2% to 63.2% of the
labor force. In the process, the number of people who were not in
the labor force increased by
13 million as the
population increased by
16.6 million.
If the Labor Force Participation Rate had remained
at 66.2% during this period the number of people not in the labor force would
have increased by by only 5.5 million (16.6 x (1 - 0.662)), 7.5 million less
than the increase that actually occurred. This means that not only were there
3.8 million more
people unemployed in 2014 than in 2007, literally millions more who could not
find gainful employment,
many young looking for their first job or displaced older workers who could not
find reemployment, were forced out of the labor force as the Labor Force
Participation Rate fell during this period and the Employment Population
Raito failed to recover from the effects of the recession.
Clearly, the demand for goods and services did not keep up
with population growth as the Unemployment Rate fell from 2007 through
2013. This is the result of the increases in the concentration of income
and current account deficits that have occurred over the past thirty years and
continue to plague us today.
Baring another massive speculative bubble or the kind of massive government intervention in the
economy we saw during World War II, this situation cannot be remedied so
long as the concentration of income and current account deficits continue to
limit the growth of our domestic mass markets.
Conclusion
In spite of
the disastrous results of their policies, free-market ideologues
are still chanting their mantra of
lower taxes, less government, and deregulation—the
same mantra that brought us to where we are today—and
our political leaders are currently in the process of negotiating
how best to cut
government expenditures and “entitlement” programs—the
same expenditures that kept our economy from spiraling into the abyss and the
same programs that allowed us to avoid the wretched squalor and misery we
experienced in the 1930s.
At the same time, the
Dodd-Frank
Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act has
added restrictions on the Federal Reserve’s ability to act in an emergency
situation,
(Bair)
and
Ron Paul has renewed
his
attack on the Federal Reserve as he garners forces in
his crusade to turn Federal Reserve policy into a political football.
Free-market ideologues are doing everything they can to cut the threads by which our economic system is hanging today—the
independence of the Federal Reserve, the size of our government, and our
social-insurance programs. What's more, in this Alice-in-Wonderland world
in which we live there is every reason to believe that—given the strength of
free-market ideologues within the two major political parties—they are going to
be successful in cutting these threads if and when they regain control of the federal
government again.
If we are to understand
the world in which we live we must look at that world as it actually is, not
through the blinders of an ideological view that is
totally out of touch with reality.
When we do this we find it was the
New Deal
institutions of the
Roosevelt,
Truman,
Eisenhower,
Kennedy, and
Johnson
administrations that built the middle class in our country on which our
domestic mass markets so crucially depend, and it is the success of
ideologically blinded conservatives in attacking these institutions that is
destroying our middle class today and, along with it, the domestic mass
markets that provide the foundation on which our economic prosperity depends.
The destruction of our middle
class and domestic mass markets cannot come to good, and failure of the
electorate to insist that the government deal with this problem in a rational
way does not bode well for the future. (Krugman)
At the center of the
political debate in our country is the national debt, the federal budget, and
our social-insurance programs. These are things about which most people have strong
opinions. They are also things about which most
people know very little. In the
next four chapters we will look at the national debt, the federal budget, our
social-insurance programs, and out welfare system in an attempt to sort through
the sophistry endemic in the debate surrounding these entities.
[10.1]
Reserve Bank Credit measures the total contribution of the Federal Reserve
to the amount of
high-powered
money in the system:
Reserve Bank credit: Reserve Bank credit
is the sum of securities held outright, repurchase agreements, term auction
credit, other loans, net portfolio holdings of Commercial Paper Funding Facility
LLC, net portfolio holdings of Maiden Lane LLC, net portfolio holdings of Maiden
Lane II LLC, net portfolio holdings of Maiden Lane III LLC, net portfolio
holdings of TALF LLC, total preferred interests in AIA Aurora LLC and ALICO
Holdings LLC, float, central bank liquidity swaps, and other Federal Reserve
assets. (FRS)
[10.2] Since my
focus is on the current financial crisis, and we are no longer on the gold
standard, I have not
attempted to explain how the gold standard contributed to the financial problems
that led the world into the Great Depression. A summary of the role of
gold can be found in
Bernanke and a comprehensive discussion of this subject in
Eichengreen and
Kindleberger.
[10.3] The
National Income and Product Accounts measure the direct contribution of various
sectors of the economy to the total output produced in the economic system. The
contribution of the government sector is measured by excluding transfer payments
from the total of government outlays. Transfer payments are expenditures
by a government (such as payments to Social Security beneficiaries or for
unemployment compensation) that do not correspond to a good or service that is
currently being produced or purchased by the government. Only those
payments by a government (such as expenditures on education, public
transportation, police protection, or national defense) that correspond to a
good or service that is currently being produced is included in the National
Income and Product Accounts. In 2013, 45% of all government outlays
consisted of transfer payments and 55% corresponded to goods or services that
were currently being produced.
[10.4] The
Employment Population Ratio is defined by the
BLS as "the percent of the
civilian noninstitutional population that is employed" and the Labor Force
Participation Rate as the "labor force as a percent of the civilian
noninstitutional population" where "civilian noninstitutional population"
is defined as "persons 16 years of age and older residing in the 50 States and
the District of Columbia who are not inmates of institutions (for example, penal
and mental facilities, homes for the aged), and who are not on active duty in
the Armed Forces." The difference between these two numbers is the percent
of the civilian noninstitutional population that is unemployed.
The Unemployment Rate is defined as "the number
unemployed as a percent of the labor force" where the unemployed are "Persons
aged 16 years and older who had no employment during the reference week, were
available for work, except for temporary illness, and had made specific efforts
to find employment sometime during the 4-week period ending with the reference
week. Persons who were waiting to be recalled to a job from which they had been
laid off need not have been looking for work to be classified as unemployed."
The labor force "includes all [and only] persons classified as employed or
unemployed." Thus, someone who wants a job but has given up looking for
one is not classified as unemployed in BLS statistics.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 11: History of the National Debt
George H. Blackford © 2010, last updated 5/16/2014
The federal deficit went from
$74 billion in 1980 to $1.4 trillion 2009 while the Gross National Debt went from
$735 billion in 1980 to $16.7 trillion at the end of 2013. These numbers are truly mystifying to those of
us who have never had to worry about a million dollars let alone a billion or
a trillion. The purpose of this
chapter is to put these numbers in perspective and to give them concrete meaning in
terms of the choices we face in dealing with our deficit/debt problems.
We begin with a few basic concepts
and definitions.
The difference between the amount
of money the government takes in from taxes and other sources of revenue (its
receipts) and the amount it pays out in purchases of goods and services and
other kinds of expenditures (its expenditures or outlays) is officially called
the surplus. When the government takes in less than it pays out this
difference is negative, and this negative surplus is the deficit. The
relationships between government receipts, expenditures, and its
surplus/deficits from 1901 through 2013 are shown in Figure 11.1,
both in absolute amounts and as a percent of GDP.[11.1]
Source:
Office of Management and Budget (1.1
1.2),
Historical Statistics of the U.S.
(Ca9-19)
As can be seen in this figure, whenever
the government’s Receipts are greater than its Outlays the Surplus is
positive, and there is no deficit. Similarly, whenever the government’s
Receipts are less than its Outlays the Surplus is
negative, and a deficit results.
Federal surpluses and deficits are related to
the national debt in that when the government takes in less than it pays out
it must borrow the difference (equal to the deficit) to finance its excess
expenditures. As a result, whenever there is a deficit the national debt
increases by (approximately) the amount of the deficit.
Similarly, whenever the government takes in more than it pays out the
resulting surplus is positive and is used to pay off the national debt. Thus,
the national debt decreases by the amount of the surplus.[11.2]
One way of viewing the relationship between the
national debt and the surplus/deficit is to think of the national debt as
being the sum of all the deficits and surpluses the federal government has
experienced since its inception.
Figure 11.2 shows the total federal debt—commonly referred to as the national
debt—from 1940 through 2013, both in terms of absolute dollars and as a percent
of GDP. The federal debt is broken down into two categories:
-
The top line in Figure 11.2 plots the Gross National Debt, which includes all
debt instruments issued by the federal government, including those held by
federal agencies such as the Social Security Administration.
-
The bottom line in Figure 11.2 plots the Net National Debt, which is
equal to gross debt less federal debt instruments held by federal agencies. Net National Debt is the portion of Gross National Debt held by the
public, that is, by private individuals, businesses, financial institutions,
and non-federal governmental institutions and agencies both foreign and
domestic.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (7.1)
At the end of 2013 Gross National Debt stood at
$16.7 trillion and
Net
National Debt at $12.0 trillion. Of the
$4.7 trillion difference,
$2.7
trillion was held by the Social Security Administration in its Old-Age
Survivors and Disability Insurance (OASDI) trust fund with another
$0.3
trillion in its Medicare Hospital Insurance (HI) and Supplementary Medical
Insurance (SMI) trust funds—a total of $3.0 trillion. Most of the
remainder is held in the civil service and military retirement trust funds and
the rest in the combined holdings of all other federal government
agencies. Throughout this chapter the term “national debt” will refer to Net National Debt, unless designated otherwise.
Figure 11.1
is related to Figure 11.2 in that whenever the surplus is positive in
Figure 11.1, the net federal debt shown in the top half of Figure 11.2 decreases by the
amount of the surplus.
Similarly, whenever the surplus is negative yielding a deficit in
Figure 11.1,
the net federal debt shown in Figure 11.2 increases by the amount of
the deficit.[11.3]
The variables in the above figures
are plotted both in terms of absolute values and as percentages of GDP. It
should be obvious from looking at these figures that the absolute values do
not tell us very much about the nature of the problems we are dealing with. Judging by the plots of absolute values it would appear that there was no
national debt or deficit problem during World War II. Just the opposite
was true, of course, as is made clear by the plots of these variables as a
percent of GDP.
In attempting to understand the
federal budget as it relates to the economic system as a whole it is essential that the numbers be examined in relative terms,
that is, in relation to some other variable in the economy. There are a
number of ways this can be done, but, for present purposes, I will use GDP as
the point of reference, and the budget magnitudes will generally be expressed
as a percent of GDP.
GDP—Gross
Domestic Product as it
is officially known—is the total value of all goods and services produced in
the domestic economic system, and as such, it gives us a measure of the size of our
economy. It also represents the total gross income created in the
process producing domestic output in the economic system and is related to the total level of output produced as
well as the total level of labor employed. When output, employment, and income increase GDP
increases as well, and when output, employment, and income decrease GDP decreases.[11.4]
The importance of GDP in
understanding the national debt arises from the fact that the national debt
must be serviced—that is, the government must make both interest and principal
payments on this debt. The ability of the government to service its debt
without having to print money lies
in its power to tax,[11.5]
and since the main sources of the government’s tax revenue are from income and
payroll taxes, the ratio of national debt to GDP gives a rough measure of the
relationship between the government’s debt and the tax base available to
service its debt. In general, increases in this ratio make it more
difficult for the government to service its debt; decreases in this
ratio make it easier for the government to service its debt.
As for the government’s receipts,
outlays, and surplus, just as with the national debt, the ratios of these
entities to GDP give a rough measure of their relationship to the tax base on
which they ultimately depend, and, as such, these ratios play a crucial role in
determining the government’s ability to finance its expenditures. In addition,
changes in GDP have a direct effect on the level of government expenditures as
well as on the level of tax receipts taken in by the government.
It is important to recognize that
changes in the GDP will cause changes in government expenditures and receipts
and, therefore, will also cause changes in the government's surplus or deficit
and, thereby, its debt. An increase in GDP will
automatically increase the amount of money taken in by the government in the
form of income, payroll, and other taxes. At the same time, it will tend to
decrease the level of government expenditures as unemployment compensation,
welfare, food stamps, and other governmental assistance expenditures fall.
By the same token, a fall in GDP will not only cause tax receipts to fall, but
will cause government expenditures to increase as government assistance and
other emergency expenditures increase.
Thus, a change in GDP will
automatically affect the surplus or deficit as it affects government revenues
and expenditures: An increase in GDP will automatically cause a surplus to
increase or a deficit to decrease as tax receipts increase and expenditures
fall; a decrease in GDP will automatically cause a surplus to decrease
or a deficit to increase as tax receipts fall and expenditures increase.
The national debt stood at just
15.8% of GDP in 1929, but as a consequence of the Great Depression it rose to
42.8%
by 1940.[11.6]
Then came the deficits of World War II.
As is
indicated in Figure 11.1, government expenditures during the war were
rather trivial by today’s standards in absolute terms, reaching a mere $92.7
billion in 1945. In relative terms, however, they were huge, amounting to 40.7%
of GDP in 1944. At the same time, the deficit was also huge in relative terms,
26.9%
of GDP in 1943. The same is true of the national debt shown in Figure
11.2
which grew to $271.0 billion for the gross debt and $241.9 billion for net
debt by 1946. This amounted to 118.9% and 106.1% of GDP, respectively.
The United States was saddled with
a huge debt burden at the end of the war as measured by the size of its net
debt relative to GDP, a burden that was systematically reduced over the
following 28 years. There were a few minor setbacks caused by the outbreak of
the
Korean War
in 1950, the
1958 recession,
and the confluence of a number of factors in the 1960s such as the
Kennedy-Johnson tax cuts,
the
escalation of the Vietnam War,
and Johnson’s declaration of
war on poverty
that caused net national debt as a percent of GDP to increase in 1968. Otherwise the fall in this ratio was virtually continuous from 1946 through
1974 as it went from 106.1% of GDP to 23.1%. After 1975, the debt ratio began
to rise again, dramatically in the 1980s, but was brought under control again in the
1990s. Then in the 2000s it began to rise again and, as is apparent in
Figure 11.2, exploded after 2007.
The federal budget was brought
into balance fairly quickly after World War II, achieving a surplus in 1947,
and though there were very few surpluses to follow, the budget was kept in
fairly close balance from 1947 through 1974. As is shown in Figure
11.1,
except for 1959 and 1968, the deficit was never greater than 2% of GDP.
The primary mechanism by which the
budget was brought under control was, as will be shown in
Chapter 12, by cutting
defense expenditures as a percent of GDP as other components of the government
grew. At the same time, much of the wartime tax structure was kept in place:
The top marginal income tax rate ranged from
92%
to 70%
during this period. The top marginal corporate profits tax rate ranged from
53%
to 48%,
and the top marginal estate tax rate was
77%.
This tax structure made it possible for the government to raise the requisite
revenue as the economy adjusted to the war’s end and as government
expenditures grew throughout the 1950s and 1960s.
A secondary factor that
contributed to reducing the debt burden was the policies of the Federal
Reserve and Treasury. The Treasury dominated the Federal Reserve during and
immediately following the war, a situation that continued until the
1951 Federal Reserve-Treasury
Accord
that gave the
Federal Reserve
a certain degree of independence.
(Bernanke)
The Treasury’s low interest rate policy preceding the Accord led to a
substantial increase in the supply of money. This, in turn, led to an
effective annual rate of inflation of 5.6% from 1945 through 1951, and a 38.7%
increase in the general level of prices was the result.[11.7]
In the presence of a relatively
balanced budget, the inflation that resulted from the Treasury’s low interest
rate policy contributed greatly to reducing the burden of the debt. Low
interest rates made it possible for the Treasury to refinance its debt at
minimal costs while the inflation increased GDP relative to the debt. The
effect was to cause the net debt to GDP ratio to fall from 106.1% in 1945 to
65.5% in 1951. This 38.3% (40.6 percentage point) decrease
in the debt to GDP
ratio was accomplished in spite of the fact that the real output of goods and
services produced during that period increased by only 4.3%[11.8]
and the actual debt fell by only 11.4%.
The rate of inflation was brought
under control after the Accord, and the effective annual rate of inflation was
a modest 1.9% from 1952 through 1967, yet the debt to GDP ratio continued to
fall throughout this period even though the government continued to experience
deficits in its budget. The reason is that the production or goods and
services increased dramatically.
From 1952 through 1967 the output
of goods and services produced increased at an effective annual rate of 3.4%. This led to a 76.3% increase in total output by 1967, which combined with the
1.9% effective annual rate of inflation and the resulting 32.3% increase in
prices, increased the nominal value of GDP by 134.3%. With a relatively
balanced budget, the federal debt increased by only 24.2%. The result was a
further fall in the debt to GDP ratio from 65.5% in 1951 to 31.8% by 1967.
Thus, by 1967 the ratio of debt to GDP was below that of 1940, and the debt
burden created by World War II had been completely eliminated along with half
of the burden created by the Great Depression.[11.9]
The
Kennedy-Johnson tax cuts
combined with the escalation of the Vietnam War led to a deficit equal to 2.9%
of GDP in 1968 that was converted into an 0.3% surplus in 1969 after the 1968
Revenue and Expenditure Control
Act imposed a 10%
income tax surcharge on individuals and corporations—the last surplus we were
to see in the federal budget until 1998. The budget remained relatively
balanced through 1974, and the debt ratio continued to fall with only a slight
rise when the surcharge expired in 1970.
The period from
1965 through 1984 is what Alan Meltzer has called
The Great Inflation. As was noted above, from 1952 through 1967 the
effective annual rate of inflation was 1.9%. From 1967 through 1982 it was
6.6% and from 1975 through 1981 it was 7.7%. Unlike the 1945-1951 inflation,
this inflation contributed relatively little to reducing the debt burden.
The 1973
Arab oil embargo
with its concomitant quadrupling of the price of oil
caused the economy to falter. The resulting
1973-1975 recession
with its increase in unemployment equal to
3.6%
of the labor force caused the deficit to increase in 1975 to 3.4% of GDP and
to 4.4% of GDP in 1976 as the debt to GDP ratio increased from 23.1% in 1974 to 27.1%
by 1977. This ratio then fell somewhat by 1981 and stood at 25.5% in at
the end of that year.
The reason the inflation of the
1970s had relatively little effect on reducing the debt burden is that
inflation can increase GDP relative to the debt only if inflation increases
GDP sufficiently to offset the rate at which the deficit increases the debt. That didn’t happen in the 1970s.
In fact, the effect of the inflation on the deficit made the deficit worse
than it otherwise would have been, especially in the aftermath of the
inflation.
Changes in prices have the effect
of transferring purchasing power—that is, wealth—between borrowers and
lenders. When prices rise over the period of a loan the money that is lent can
purchase more goods and services than the money that is paid back. As a
result, inflation has the effect of transferring wealth from lenders to
borrowers. Similarly, when prices decrease over the period of a loan
the money that is lent can purchase fewer goods and services than the money
that is paid back. As a result, deflation has the effect of transferring
wealth from borrowers to lenders.
These transfers of wealth make the
rate of interest at which people are willing to borrow or lend depend
crucially on what they expect to happen to prices. Borrowers are less willing
to borrow at high interest rates when they expect prices to fall and
anticipate a loss in wealth from falling prices than when they expect prices
to rise and anticipate a gain in wealth from increasing prices. The opposite
is true for lenders. Lenders are more willing to lend at low interest rates
when they expect prices to fall and anticipate a gain in wealth from falling
prices than when they expect prices to increase and anticipation a loss in
wealth from increasing prices. As a result, inflationary expectations
tend to lead to high interest rates, and deflationary expectations tend to
lead to low interest rates.
No one expected the inflation that
followed World War II. The greatest fear at the time was of recession and
falling prices as had been the case at the end of previous wars. World War II
broke that pattern, and before anyone realized it the lack of inflationary
expectations on the part of borrowers and lenders made it possible for the
Federal Reserve to maintain low interest rates during the inflation of 1945
through 1951. As a result, the Treasury was able to finance its deficits
and rollover[11.10]
its debt without adding significantly to the
deficit.
This was not the case during the
Great Inflation with inflationary expectations rising throughout the period
and remaining high into the 1990s. The effect of these rising and high
expectations on interest rates can be seen in Figure 11.3 which shows the
interest rates on various Treasury securities from 1941
through 2012.
Source:
Economic Report of the President, 2012 (B73PDF|XLS),
Office of Management and Budget.
(3.1)
The spike in interest rates from
1979 through 1982 was obviously caused by the tight monetary policy of the
Federal Reserve during that period, but interest rates remained high from 1975
through 1990 even when the Fed’s monetary policy was not tight. From 1975
through 1990, federal deficits had to be financed and the debt rolled over at
long-term interest rates above 7% and short-term rates above 4% and often
above 6%.
The effect of having to rollover the debt at these
exceptionally high interest rates is also shown in Figure 11.3 by the dramatic increase in interest paid by the federal government on the
national debt as a percent of GDP from 1975 through 1995.
The national debt rose
dramatically following 1980, reaching a peak as a percent of GDP of 47.8% in
1993. This dramatic increase in debt was precipitated by the
-
economic
recession of 1981-1982
where unemployment increased by
3.8%
of the labor force,
-
the
1981 Reagan tax
cuts
which led to a substantial loss in federal tax revenue, and
-
an
increase in national defense expenditures from
4.8%
of GDP in 1980 to
5.9%
in 1987 during Reagan’s
anti-Soviet defense buildup.
This increase in federal debt
relative to GDP was
eventually brought under control by 1995, in spite of the
1990-1991 recession
that increased unemployment by
2.2%
of the labor force. Net debt then fell as a percent of GDP from 1995 through
2000 as a result of
-
payroll tax
increases that began in 1984,
-
the
Clinton tax increases
in 1993 along with
eight other tax increases
that were enacted following the 1981 tax cuts,
-
cuts in government
expenditures from 1994 through 2000, mostly in defense, and
-
a dramatic increase
in employment as the unemployment rate fell from
7.5% in 1992 to
4.0% in 2000.
By 2001, net federal debt stood at
$3.3 trillion, which was just 31.4% of GDP compared to the peak of 47.8% it
had reached in 1993. Then came the
-
2001 recession where unemployment increased by
2.0% of the labor force,
-
the
2001-2003 Bush II tax cuts which led to a substantial loss in federal
tax revenue,
-
an
increase in defense expenditures that accompanied the expansion of the war
in Afghanistan into Iraq,
-
the
bursting of the housing bubble in 2007 and the Great Crash of 2008 that led
to the 2007-2009 recession where unemployment increased by
5.0% of the labor force,
-
Bush II's
$152 Billion
Economic Stimulus Act passed on February 13, 2008 to mitigate the effects
of the economic downturn,
-
Bush II's
$700 billion
Troubled Asset Relief Program (TARP) passed on October 3 to bail out our
financial institutions in the midst of the 2008 financial panic, and
-
Obama's $800 billion
American Recovery and Reinvestment Act passed on February 17, 2009 to
mitigate the effects of the financial crisis,
The net federal debt went from
31.4% of GDP in 2001 to 35.1% by 2007 as a result of the 2001 recession
and 2001-2003 tax cuts. It then jumped to 39.3% of GDP in 2008, 52.3% in
2009, and had risen to 72.1% by the end of 2013. as a result of the financial crisis, ensuing
depression,
and the efforts made to stabilize the economy following the crisis. The debt itself went from
$5.0 trillion in 2007 to $12.0 trillion in 2013 as a result of the recession
and the government’s attempts to minimize its severity—a 140% increase in
just 5 years. At the same time the budget went from a $236.2 billion surplus
in 2000 to a $160.7 billion deficit in 2007, to a $458.6 billion deficit in
2008, a $1.4 trillion deficit in 2009, a $1.3 trillion deficit in 2010, and a
$1.1 trillion deficit in 2012.
By the end of 2013 the deficit had fallen to $679.5 billion..
It is apparent in looking at the history of the national debt that the primary
sources of this debt are:
-
increases in defense expenditures associated with war.
-
economic downturns associated with recessions and depressions, and
-
cutting taxes in the face of rising government expenditures.
These conclusions will be reinforced when we look at the history of the federal
budget in
Chapter 12.
This Appendix elaborates on of some of the
more technical aspects of measuring total output and the average price level.
It also examines the relationship between changes in GDP, productivity, and
employment.
GDP is the total value of
goods and serves produced in the domestic economy. This value is determined by
multiplying the prices of goods and services produced by the quantities
produced and summing to get their total value. This means that GDP will change
when the prices of goods and services change even if the quantities
produced do not change.
The levels of output and employment are
related to the quantities of goods and services produced, not their values as
such, and if we want a measure of total output that is related to employment
and production we must adjust the nominal or money value of GDP for
changes in prices. This is normally done by choosing the prices that
exist at a particular point in time and using those prices to measure the
value of the output of goods and serves produced at other points in time in
order to make the measures comparable in terms of the quantities produced.
When the value of GDP is measured in this way
the result is referred to as
real GDP or GDP in constant prices, base year prices, or in
base year dollars. Since real GDP is measured by holding prices
constant, changes in real GDP can occur only if quantities change.
Hence, real GDP gives us a way to measure changes in the sum of all the
quantities of output produced.
Nominal GDP and real GDP measured in 2005 prices
are plotted in
Figure 11.4
from 1901 through 2010 using data from the
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Ca9-19)
for the years 1901 through 1928 and from the
Bureau of Economic Analysis
(1.1.5)
for the years 1929 through 2010. The values of nominal and real GDP
in
Figure 11.4 are, of course, the same
in 2005 since that is the base year from which the prices were obtained.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis.
(1.1.5)
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Ca9-19)
The nominal values of GDP are below the real
values as measured in 2005 prices in the years preceding 2005 because prices
in those years were, on average, lower than they were in 2005. As a result,
the nominal values of GDP measured in current prices—that is, in prices
that existed at the time—in those years overestimate the differences in the
total quantity of output produced relative to that produced in 2005. Similarly, the nominal values of GDP are above the real values in the years
following 2005 because prices in those years were, on average, higher than
they were in 2005. As a result, the nominal values of GDP in those years
underestimate the differences in total quantity of output produced relative to
that produced in 2005.
The year to year rates of change in real GDP
are also plotted in
Figure 11.4.
These rates of change give us a measure of the rate at which aggregate output
(i.e., total output) changed
from year to year.
Finally, it is worth noting that what we are
doing here is adding apples and oranges, which everybody knows, you can't do.
But, of course, you can add apples and oranges if you have a common unit of
measurement, such as ponds or bushels. It is important to note, however,
that when you do this you don't end up with either apples or oranges, but,
rather, ponds or bushels of fruit, and the sum tells us nothing at all about
the kind of fruit that is included in the result.
In measuring the total output within the
economy, the common unit of measurement is the monetary unit, dollars, and the
result of summing the various outputs of goods and services produced as
measured in dollars is the total value of output produce: the 'real' value if
prices are held constant over time or the current value if the prices that are
current at the time are used. In either case, the sum tells us nothing
at all about the composition of the total or how the composition changes over
time. This apples and oranges problem is intrinsic in all aggregate
measures (measures arrived at by adding to obtain a total) of disparate
economic variables.
Since the difference between the value of
nominal GDP and real GDP in each year is caused by the differences between
current year prices and the prices that existed in the base year (2005 inFigure 11.4)
if we divide nominal GDP by real GDP and multiply by 100 the result is a price
index that expresses the weighted average (weighted by current year quantities
produced) of current year prices to base year
prices as a percent of base year prices. This index is called the
implicit GDP deflator.
A measure of the rate of inflation can be obtained from this index by
calculating its year to year percentage changes.
The implicit GDP deflator in 2005 prices is
plotted from 1900 through 2013 in
Figure 11.5
using the GDP deflator implicit in the
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Ca9-19)
for the years 1900 through 1928 and the series published by the
Bureau of Economic Analysis
(1.2.4.)
for the years 1929 through 2013. The year to year percentages changes in this
index that give the rate of inflation for each year in terms of the average
price level as defined by the implicit GDP deflator are also plotted in this
figure.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis.
(1.1.5)
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Ca9-19)
We can use real GDP as a measure of the
output of goods and services produced in the economy, and by taking the year
to year percentage change in this measure we can calculate the rate at
which total output increases or decreases in each year. These rates are
plotted in the bottom graph in
Figure 11.4.
They are important because the level of employment over time depends, in part,
on the level of output. In general, an increase in output is associated
with an increase in employment and a decrease in output is associated with a
decrease in employment. However, the level of employment not only depends
on the quantity of output produced, it also depends on the way in which output
is produced.
The reason is that the amounts and kinds of
tools and equipment and the ways things are done tend to increase and improve
over time. These increases in the capital stock and improvements in technology
tend to increase productivity which means they increase the amount of output a
given number of workers can produce during a given amount of time. As a
result, in order to maintain a given level of employment, real GDP must
increase over time at the rate productivity increases. By the same token,
in order to increase the level of employment, real GDP must increase at a rate
that is greater than the rate at which productivity increases.
The
Bureau of Labor Statistics’
productivity index of output per hour is plotted in
Figure 11.6
from 1960 through 2008 along with
the percentage changes in this index. The percentage changes in this index give the year to year rates at
which productivity changed during each year. From 1960 through 2010 this index
increased from 35.8 to 111.1—an increase of 210.3% which implies an effective
annual rate of increase equal to 2.3%. This means that, over the past 50 years,
real GDP had to increase, on average, by 2.3% per year just to maintain the
level of employment that existed in 1960. It also means that during these 50 years it was necessary
for output to grow, on average, by 2.3% plus the rate at which the labor
force grew in order to keep the labor force fully employed.
Source:
Economic Report of the President, 2013. (B49PDF|XLS)
[11.1] The
Office of Management and Budget (OMB's) GDP data correspond to the
federal government's fiscal year rather than the calendar year. Unfortunately,
the OMB does not provide fiscal year estimates for years before 1930. I use the OMB's estimates for
fiscal year GDP throughout this paper, except for the years before 1930. For the years before 1930 I use the mean of the current and
previous calendar years' GDP from the
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Ca9-19)
to estimate the fiscal year value of GDP. Using this methodology
with the data from the Historical Statistics yields results that are identical,
except for rounding error, to the fiscal year estimates of GDP given by the OMB for 1930
through 1947.
[11.2]
This
relationship is not exact in that the government can borrow money it doesn’t
spend, thereby increasing the amount of cash it holds rather than pay down
debt, and it can spend money in
excess of its revenue without borrowing by reducing its holdings of cash. The
government can also affect its cash/debt holdings by buying and selling assets that
are, by definition, not included in its expenditures or revenue. See the
Bureau of Economic Analysis's
Table 3.2.
[11.3]
See footnote 2
above.
[11.4]
Some of the
more technical concepts relating to GDP, employment, output, and income are
explained in the Appendix on Output, Prices, and Productivity at the end of this chapter.
[11.5]
The federal government also has the ability service its debt
by printing money. The important of this fact is examined in
Chapter 15. In the final analysis, however, it is
the ability of the government to finance itself through taxes that makes
economic stability possible, not the government's ability to print money.
Attempting to finance the government by printing money without collecting the
taxes needed to stabilize the monetary system inevitably leads to an increase
in debt relative to GDP, hyperinflation, and a breakdown of the exchange
system in the economy.
[11.6]
The series on
national debt published by OMB in
Table 7.1 only goes back to 1940. The 1929 debt to GDP ratio reported
above is calculated from
Table B-1 and
Table B-59 in the
1965 Economic Report of the President
and is not strictly comparable to values published by the OMB and used
throughout the rest of this paper. Aside from the calendar year/fiscal
year difference discussed in footnote 1, the estimates of GDP have been
refined since 1965, and the accounting conventions used to define and measure
net and gross national debt have been refined as well. Neither number is
the same today as it was in 1965. The 1940 debt ratio calculated from
the GDP and Public debt at end of year values published in the 1965 ERP is
42.2% rather than the 43.6% published by the OMB today and reported above.
[11.7] These effective annual rates of inflation, as
well as those that follow, are calculated from the 2005 base year GDP
(chained) Price Index published by OMB in
Table 10.1. The effective annual rates used
throughout this paper are calculated from the compound interest formula:
Pn = P0 x ∏(1 + r)i,
where
i = 0, 1, 2,. . .,n,
P0 is the starting principle,
Pn
is the ending principle, and
r is the effective annual rate.
This formula assumes annual rather than continuous compounding.
[11.8] This value was computed by deflating
OMB’s fiscal year GDP in
Table 10.1 by the 2005 base year GDP
(chained) Price Index in this table and calculating the percentage change in
the resulting real value of GDP measured in 2005 prices from 1945 through
1951. Changes in output will be measured in this way in what follows.
[11.9]
The debt ratio
fell below the 1940 level in 1962.
[11.10]
Approximately
one third of the national debt is in the form of Treasury bills that mature in
less than one year and one half is in the form of Treasury notes that mature
in less than ten years. (B87PDF-XLS) When there is a deficit in the federal budget, the
debt obligations of the government must be paid when they come due by the
government issuing new debt instruments in order to obtain the cash necessary
to pay off the old debt instruments—that is, the Treasury
must rollover its debt.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 12:
History of the Federal Budget
George H. Blackford © 2010, last updated 5/4/2014
It is very difficult, if not
impossible, to understand how the federal budget got to where it is today
without examining how our country has
changed since 1929. The Crash of 1929, the economic catastrophe of the
Great
Depression, the devastation of
World War II,
and the
Cold War
that followed had profound effects on the American psyche. We are not
the same country we were in 1929, and this is particularly so when it comes to how we view
government. (Kennedy)
As was noted in Chapter 4
and Chapter 5, prior to 1929,
most of our political leaders and much of the American public
had an unbridled
faith in the magical powers of free-market capitalism. The catastrophe of the
Great Depression shook that faith and changed us from a country that saw the
primary role of government as serving the needs of the
plutocracy
to a country
that sees the primary role of government as serving the needs of ordinary
people. This led to the federal government sponsoring social-insurance programs such as
Social Security,
Unemployment Compensation,
the
Farm Program,
Aid to Dependent Children,
Medicare,
Medicaid,
and
Supplemental Security Income
that did not exist at the federal level before the Great Depression.
(Kennedy)
In addition, before 1929 we were
an isolationist country, reluctant to intervene in the domestic affairs of
other countries except, of course, in Latin America. The devastation of World
War II, combined with the Cold War that followed, shook our faith in
isolationism and changed us from an isolationist country focused on Latin
America into one willing to intervene in the domestic affairs of countries throughout the world.
This led to a tremendous emphasis on national defense following World War II
and to a peacetime military far beyond anything we had experienced previously.
(Kennedy)
These two factors—the loss of
faith in free-market capitalism brought on by the Great Depression and our national interventionist policies
brought on by World War II and the ensuing Cold War—have
had profound effects on the nature of our federal government, and, in
particular, on the size of its budget.
The dramatic effect the Great
Depression, World War II, and the Cold War had on the size of the federal
budget can be seen in Figure 12.1 which plots total government outlays as
a percent of GDP from 1901 through 2013.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget
(1.1
10.1),Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Ca9-19)
[12.1]
As is shown
in this figure, since the end of the Korean War (1953) the federal government
has been 5 to 8 time larger than it was back in 1929.
Federal
government outlays were 3.1% of GDP in 1929. Then came the Great
Depression of the 1930s. By 1941 total outlays had increased to 11.7% of
GDP. Next came the dramatic increases in government outlays from 1942
through 1947 during World War II and the subsequent occupation of the Axis
countries following the war. Total outlays fell to 11.3% of GDP by 1948
as we demobilized from the war. This was below the 1941 level, but still
more than three times the size of the federal government relative to the
economy that existed in 1929. Then came the Cold War.
The Cold War began in earnest on June 27, 1948 when the
Soviet Union cut all
surface traffic to West Berlin. This
led to the Berlin
Airlift and the
European Recovery Act—commonly referred to as the Marshall Plan—was
enacted
later that year. That same year the Soviet Union detonated
its first nuclear bomb, and the Communists drove the Nationalists from the
mainland in China. The
Korean War began on
June 25,1950
when North Korean troops crossed the border with South Korea, and the first
U.S ground combat troops arrived in Korea on
July 1st
of that year. By the time that war had ended in 1953 federal
government outlays had increased to 19.9% of GDP—a 75% increase over
1948—and the federal government was never to see its prewar low again.
From the end of the Korean War through 2008, the federal government fluctuated between the 1956 low of 16.1% of GDP and a 1983 high of 22.8%.
By 2000, the size of the federal
budget had fallen to 17.6% of GDP—23% below its 1983 high, 17% below where the federal
government was in 1980,
and comparable in size to the government in the early 1960s before the Viet
Nam defense buildup that began in 1965.
After the military
buildup for the Iraq and Afghan wars and before the crash in 2008, the budget
was back to 19% of GDP but still 17% below what it was in 1983, 10% below
where it was in 1980. Then came the Crash of 2008, after which the budget
grew to a high of 24.4% of GDP by 2009 as a result of the ensuing economic crisis and
then fell back to 20.8% by 2013 which was about where it was in 1980.
But in looking at the history of this
period, it is clear that out interventionist policies were not the only
factors that contributed to the increase in the federal budget following the
Great Depression and World War II. As can be seen
in
Figure 12.2, which gives
a breakdown or the federal budget by Superfunction from 1940 through 2013, the
rise in social-insurance programs (Human Resources) also played a
dramatic role in this increase.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (3.1
10.1)
It is clear
from this figure that while Defense dominated the federal budget during
and immediately following World War II, Human Resources
have played a dominant role in the federal budget following the end of the
Korean War in 1953.
Figure 12.3
plots defense expenditures as a percent of GDP and of the federal budget from 1940 through 2013.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget.
(3.1
10.1)
The role
that defense expenditures played in increasing the size of the federal
government after World War II is clearly indicated in this figure.
National Defense stood at 1.7% of GDP and 17.5% of the budget in 1940 before the war.
After reaching 37% of GDP% and 89% of the budget during the war it had fallen back to
3.5% of GDP and 30.6% of the budget by 1948. By the end of the Korean
War defense expenditures were back up to 13.8% of GDP and 69.4% of the budget.
National Defense then gradually declined to 7.1% and 42.8% by 1965.
Then came Vietnam.
National
Defense reached a peak
during the Vietnam War in 1968 at 9.1% of GDP and 46.0% of the budget and
then declined gradually
through the era of
Détente,
reaching a low of 4.5% of GDP and 23.1% of the budget in 1979. Then came
the
Reagan anti-Soviet defense buildup
which increased defense expenditures to 6.0% of
GDP and 27.6% of the budget by 1986. Defense expenditure
gradually fell relative to the economy and the budget following 1986 until they reached a post World War II low of
2.9% of GDP
and 16.4% of the budget
in 2001. Defense expenditures then rose again following the
9/11 attack in response to the
Afghanistan and
Iraq wars
reaching a peak in 2010 at 4.7% of GDP and 20.1% of the budget. By 2013
Defense stood a 3.8% of GDP and 18.3% of the budget.
Outlays for Nation Defense in 2013
were substantially below their levels during the Cold War era, but were
about where they stood in the early 1990s at the end of the Cold War. They were also more than
twice the 1.7% of GDP they were in 1940 before World War II and greater as
a percent of GDP than the entire federal budget in 1929.
While
dominating the federal budget in the early post World War II years, the
importance of National Defense has declined dramatically over the past 60 years both as a percent of GDP and of the
federal budget. As a result, this component of the budget
shares
relatively little responsibility for the 15% to 18% of GDP increase in
government outlays since 1929—as little as 2% or 3% of GDP. But as defense
expenditures
declined over the past 60 years, the social-insurance programs that grew out
of the
New Deal expanded. This tradeoff is quite obvious in Figure
12.2
as indicated by the dramatic decrease in the Defense component of the budget and the dramatic increase in the
Human Resources component in this figure.
As was noted
above, the
Human Resources category of the federal budget is where the our
social-insurance programs are to be found. The largest component in this
category, as broken down in the official statistics, is Social Security
followed by Income Security, Medicare, Health,
Veterans Benefits, and Education & Social Services. Income
Security includes such things as
General retirement and disability insurance,
Federal employee retirement and disability, Unemployment compensation,
Housing assistance,
and Food and nutrition assistance.
The programs that fall under the heading of Human Resources in the
federal budget are examined in detail in Chapter 13 and Chapter 14 below, but
a breakdown of this category of the federal budget by its major components is
given in Figure
12.4.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget.
(3.1
10.1)
There are three things worth
noting about the Human Resources category of the budget:
-
The
Social Security and Income Security programs that begun during the
New Deal grew systematically
until they reached their maturity in the 1980s. These components of Human Resources then leveled off at roughly 4.5% and 3% of GDP, respectively,
as they grew to roughly 22% and 15% of the budget. (The
spike in Income Security following 2007 is clearly the result of the recession that began in that
year.) These two items in the budget are expected to increase gradually until
2035 as the baby boomers retire and then decrease somewhat from then on.
-
Veterans Benefits and Education & Social Services are a relatively insignificant portion of this
category of the budget, and of the budget itself. Each comprises less than 1%
of GDP and less than 5% of the budget. In addition, both of these items have been cut substantially since
1980, and there is no reason to believe that much can be gained from further
cuts in these components of the budget in dealing with the deficit/debt
problem.
-
While both
Social Security and Income Security peaked in 1980 and had fallen
by 2007, both the Medicare and Health components of the budget
have trended upward since 1965 and there is little indication that this trend
will not continue in the future. Even though Social Security and
Income Security are the largest single components of Human Resource
today, they have been less than the sum of Medicare and Health
since 2004. While Social Security and Income Security are both
expected to increase in the future, the increases in these two components is
predictable in a way that the increases in Medicare and Health
are not.
Social
Security increased by 1.7% of GDP from 1965 through 2007 and is expected
to increase by an additional 2.0% by 2035. The sum of Medicare and
Health increased by 4.6% of GDP over the same period, and there is no way
of knowing what will happen to this sum in the future. It is the rise in
healthcare costs that presents the greatest challenge in the future when it
comes to managing the federal budget, not Social Security or Income
Security.
Net Interest is interest paid by the federal
government net of the interest paid within the government. In other words, it
is the interest paid on the Net National Debt. Net Interest is
plotted in Figure 12.5.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget.
(3.1
10.1)
This category increased dramatically in the 1980s.
It reached a peak in 1991 at 3.2% of GDP and 14.7% of the budget—dramatically
above its 1959 post-war low of 1.1% of GDP and 6.3% of the budget—and subsequently
fell to a low of 1.3% of GDP and 7.0% of the budget in 2004 prior to the crash
in 2008 and was at 1.3% of GDP and 6.4% of the budget in 2013.
A breakdown
of the Physical Resources category of the federal budget is given in
Figure 12.6. This category consists of Transportation, Natural
Resources and Environment, Energy, Commerce and Housing Credit,
and Community and Regional Development.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget.
(3.1
10.1)
None of the
items in the Physical Resources portion of the budget have exceeded 1%
of GDP since 1950 except Commerce & Housing (which includes the FDIC
and other federal depository insurance programs) and only Transportation
has exceeded 3% of the budget in the past 60 years. Aside from the fact that
these programs take up a rather insignificant portion of the federal budget
and play a vital role in the
functioning of our economic system, all of these
programs have been cut substantially since 1980, and there is no
reason to believe that much can be gained from further cuts in these
components of the budget in dealing with the deficit.
Finally, we get to
All Other
Government Functions. A breakdown of this category is presented in
Figure 12.7. It includes International Affairs, Science and Technology,
Agriculture, Administration of Justice, General Government,
and Undistributed Offsetting Receipts.[12.2]
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (3.1
10.1)
Even though
these functions of the federal government
play a vital role in the
functioning of our society and of our economic system, each of these functions represents
a very small part of GDP and of the federal budget. Since 1990, none have exceeded 0.4%
of GDP or 2% of the budget and most hover around 0.2% of GDP and 1% of the
budget.
International Affairs,[12.3]
Agriculture, Science and Technology,
and General Government
have all been cut substantially since 1980. Only Administration of Justice
has increased since 1980 and has, in fact, increased fivefold since 1950 as a
percent of our economy—mostly as a result of the war on drugs that began in
the Nixon administration and has been fought ever so valiantly at ever
greater expense since then.
Next we look at the revenue side
of the budget. Figure 12.8 shows the total federal revenue as a Percent
of GDP from 1901 through 2013.[12.4]
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (1.1
10.1)
Bureau of Economic Analysis. (1.1.5)
The dramatic effect the Great
Depression, World War II, and the Cold War had on the size of the federal
government can be seen in this figure as well as in the plot of federal
outlays in Figure 12.1. Total federal revenue stood at 3.8% of GDP in 1929. Then came the Great
Depression of the 1930s, and by 1941 total revenue had increased to 7.5% of
GDP. After the dramatic increase to 20.5% during the war, it receded to a post
war low of 14.1% of GDP in 1950—a level that was never to be seen again.
After 1950, total federal revenue reached a high of 19.9% of GDP in 2000 and a
low of 14.6% in 2009.
Figure 12.9
gives a breakdown of the various sources of federal revenue from 1934 through
2013.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget.
(2.3
10.1)
It is clear from this figure not
only that the level of federal revenue has increased dramatically since 1934,
but that the way in which the federal government is financed has changed
dramatically as well.
Prior to World War II, the largest
source of federal revenue was federal
excise taxes. During the war,
personal and corporate income taxes took center stage. In 1934, Personal Income Tax receipts
were 14.2% of total federal revenues. In 1950 they were 40%—only 5 percentage
points below
the World War II peak of 45.%. They then fluctuated between 41% and 47% of total
revenues until
1969—hitting a low of 41.3% of revenues in 1967 after the
Kennedy-Johnson tax cut
and rebounding to 46.7% in1969 in response to the 10% surcharge
passed in 1968. In 1970, Personal Income Tax receipts rose to 46.9% of total receipts.
Personal Income Tax receipts then declined
to a low of 43.9% of revenue by 1975 as the income tax surcharge expired in 1970
and as a result of the 1973-1975 recession. Receipts from this source began to
rise again in 1977 as we pulled out of the recession and as the rampant
inflation of the late 1970s moved people into higher tax brackets. It
reached a peak of 8.6% of GDP and 48% of total revenues during the 1981-1982
recession and before the
1982
Reagan tax cuts. This feat was accomplished
in spite of the fact that
6 of the 9 major tax bills
enacted between 1968 and 1981 reduced federal revenue.
The Reagan tax cuts lowered
Personal Income Tax receipts from 47.7% of
total revenue in 1981 to 44.8% by 1984. They stood at 43.2% in 1995. In that year the economy was growing quite
rapidly and the 1993 Clinton tax increases—along with the
8 other tax bills enacted since
1982 that increase federal revenues—were
beginning to take hold.
Personal Income Tax receipts continued to rise after the Clinton tax
increase until they hit an all time high of 9.5% of GDP in 2000 and 49.9% of
federal revenues in 2001.
Then came the 2001-2002 recession
and the
2001-2003 Bush Tax Cuts. As a result, revenue from this source fell
to 6.3% of GDP by 2004 and to 43.0% of federal revenues. Income tax receipts climbed back up to
45.3% of federal revenues in
2007, in spite of the Bush tax cuts, as the economy recovered from the
recession and the housing boom and profits in the financial sector reached
their peak. Then the housing bubble burst, and the economy imploded. By 2010 income tax receipts were at their lowest level since 1950—5.8% of GDP
and 41.6% of total federal receipts.
By 2013 the
revenue from the personal income tax had reached 7.9% of GDP and 47.4% of
total receipts primarily as a result of the spending cuts and the rescission
of portions of the
2001-2003 Bush Tax Cuts
mandated by the
Budget Control Act of 2011.
Corporate
Income Tax receipts were less than 1% of GDP in 1934
and amounted to 12.3% of total federal revenue. They then rose to 5.9%
of GDP and 32.1% of federal revenue by 1952 and declined to 2.0% of GDP and
10.2% of revenue by 2000. In 2013 Corporate
Income Tax receipts were 1.7% of GDP and 9.9% of total federal revenue. As we will see in
Chapter 17, the loss of revenue from this source has had a detrimental
effect on the economy.
Payroll
Tax receipts have increased
consistently since 1934 as the Social Security
Systems matured. They reached a
peak in 2001 at 6.4% of GDP.
As is
clear from Figure 12.9, payroll taxes have played a major role in
financing the increase in the federal budget since 1934 going from virtually
nothing in that year to a high of 42.3% of total federal revenue in 20049. Not only have payroll
taxes financed Social Security’s retirement and disability
and Medicare’s Part
A programs from their inception since 1984, payroll taxes have contributed
some $3.0 trillion to the federal government’s general fund as the
Social Security Administration
built up the
OASDI
and Medicare trust funds by this
amount. The significance of this buildup is examined in
Chapter 17.
Excise taxes are taxes on specific
goods or services, such as taxes on tobacco, alcohol, and gasoline. Their
importance in funding the federal government has declined steadily since the
1930s when they comprised 2.2% of GDP and 45.8% of total receipts in 1934. In
2013 they amounted to only 0.5% of GDP and 3.0% of federal revenue.
Other sources of federal revenue
have been relatively insignificant since the 1930s. They consist of such
things as the Estate and Gift Taxes, Customs Duties, and Federal Reserve
Earnings. At their peak during the past seventy years their sum has barely
exceeded 1% of GDP, and they have provided approximately 5% of total federal
revenue since 1960. They stood at 0.87% of GDP in 2000, before the Bush tax
cuts. They were down to 0.59% by 2005. Because of the enhanced earnings that
have resulted from the
extraordinary actions
taken by the Federal Reserve during the current crisis, the total of all other
sources of federal revenue reached 0.92% of GDP in 2013, and amounted to 5.5%
of federal revenues in that year. A breakdown of this
category from 1940 through 2013 is plotted in Figure 12.10.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget.
(2.5
10.1)
The expenditure and revenue sides
of the budget from 1940 through 2013 are summarized in Figure 12.11.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget.
(3.1
2.1
10.1)
It is clear from the graphs
in this figure that the major components on the expenditure side of the budget
today lie in the Human Resources category of the budget—Social Security,
Income Security, Health, and Medicare.
It is also clear from the graphs
in this figure that the primary mechanisms by which the increase in the
Human Resources category of the budget has been financed over the past 60 years is
through decreasing expenditures for National Defense and increasing payroll taxes as a
percent of GDP. This decrease in National Defense and increase in payroll
taxes was used to finance a reduction in the Corporate Tax
and all other taxes collected by
the federal government as well. The reduction of taxes on corporations
has been especially dramatic in this regard.
Finally, it is clear from
Figure 12.11 that if we are to have less government the place we must cut
the budget is in Human Resources and
possibly Defense. Virtually everything else has been cut to the
bone since 1980. In fact, by 1913, All Other Outlays relative to the size of the economy
(3.1% of GDP) was below where it had been at any point during the previous
seventy-three years.
This has occurred in spite of obvious need for growth in the Transportation,
Natural Resources and Environment, Energy, Commerce and Housing Credit,
Community and
Regional Development, International Affairs, Science and Technology,
Agriculture, Administration of Justice,
and General Government
functions of the federal government as our population has grown and become
more urbanized, our role in the world has become more complicated, and and our
economic system has faltered as a result of the government's inability to
perform the basic functions that it
must perform in these areas if we are to prosper.
As was noted above, the Human Resources portion
of the budget is made up of the social-insurance programs that have grown out of
Roosevelt's New Deal.
Given the importance of these
programs in the current debate over debt reduction and the size of government, it
is worth looking at the history of our social-insurance programs in detail.
We will do this in the next two chapters.
Appendix
on the Federal Budget in 2013
Table 12.1 gives the expenditures
in each functional and subfunctional category in
the
Office of Management and Budget’s
Table 3.2—Outlays by Function and Subfunction along with the percent of GDP and of the
outlays allocated to each category in 2013.
Table 12.1:
Breakdown of Federal Budget by Function and Subfunction, 2013.
OMB's Table 3.2—OUTLAYS BY FUNCTION AND SUBFUNCTION: 2013 |
Function and Subfunction
(Billions of
Dollars) |
Billions of Dollars |
Percent of GDP |
Percent of Budget |
050 National Defense: |
633.4 |
3.81% |
18.33% |
051 Department of Defense-Military: |
607.8 |
3.66% |
17.59% |
Military Personnel |
150.8 |
0.91% |
4.37% |
Operation and Maintenance |
259.7 |
1.56% |
7.52% |
Procurement |
114.9 |
0.69% |
3.33% |
Research, Development, Test, and Evaluation |
66.9 |
0.40% |
1.94% |
Military Construction |
12.3 |
0.07% |
0.36% |
Family Housing |
1.8 |
0.01% |
0.05% |
Other |
1.4 |
0.01% |
0.04% |
053 Atomic energy defense activities |
17.6 |
0.11% |
0.51% |
054 Defense-related activities: |
8.0 |
0.05% |
0.23% |
150 International Affairs: |
46.4 |
0.28% |
1.34% |
151 International development and humanitarian
assistance |
22.8 |
0.14% |
0.66% |
152 International security assistance |
9.9 |
0.06% |
0.29% |
153 Conduct of foreign affairs |
13.0 |
0.08% |
0.38% |
154 Foreign information and exchange activities |
1.5 |
0.01% |
0.04% |
155 International financial programs |
-0.8 |
-0.01% |
-0.02% |
250 General Science, Space, and Technology: |
28.9 |
0.17% |
0.84% |
251 General science and basic research |
12.5 |
0.08% |
0.36% |
252 Space flight, research, and supporting activities |
16.4 |
0.10% |
0.48% |
270 Energy: |
11.0 |
0.07% |
0.32% |
271 Energy supply |
9.0 |
0.05% |
0.26% |
272 Energy conservation |
1.2 |
0.01% |
0.04% |
274 Emergency energy preparedness |
0.2 |
0.00% |
0.01% |
276 Energy information, policy, and regulation |
0.5 |
0.00% |
0.02% |
300 Natural Resources and Environment: |
38.1 |
0.23% |
1.10% |
301 Water resources |
7.7 |
0.05% |
0.22% |
302 Conservation and land management |
10.7 |
0.06% |
0.31% |
303 Recreational resources |
3.5 |
0.02% |
0.10% |
304 Pollution control and abatement |
9.6 |
0.06% |
0.28% |
306 Other natural resources |
6.6 |
0.04% |
0.19% |
350 Agriculture: |
29.5 |
0.18% |
0.85% |
351 Farm income stabilization |
25.0 |
0.15% |
0.73% |
352 Agricultural research and services |
4.4 |
0.03% |
0.13% |
370 Commerce and Housing Credit: |
-83.2 |
-0.50% |
-2.41% |
371 Mortgage credit |
-87.9 |
-0.53% |
-2.54% |
372 Postal service |
-1.8 |
-0.01% |
-0.05% |
373 Deposit insurance |
4.3 |
0.03% |
0.12% |
376 Other advancement of commerce |
2.2 |
0.01% |
0.06% |
400 Transportation: |
91.7 |
0.55% |
2.65% |
401 Ground transportation |
60.0 |
0.36% |
1.74% |
402 Air transportation |
21.5 |
0.13% |
0.62% |
403 Water transportation |
9.8 |
0.06% |
0.28% |
407 Other transportation |
0.4 |
0.00% |
0.01% |
450 Community and Regional Development: |
32.3 |
0.19% |
0.94% |
451 Community development |
7.8 |
0.05% |
0.23% |
452 Area and regional development |
1.5 |
0.01% |
0.04% |
453 Disaster relief and insurance |
23.0 |
0.14% |
0.67% |
500 Education, Training, Employment, and Social
Services: |
72.8 |
0.44% |
2.11% |
501 Elementary, secondary, and vocational education |
42.4 |
0.26% |
1.23% |
502 Higher education |
-0.5 |
0.00% |
-0.02% |
503 Research and general education aids |
3.7 |
0.02% |
0.11% |
504 Training and employment |
7.3 |
0.04% |
0.21% |
505 Other labor services |
1.9 |
0.01% |
0.05% |
506 Social services |
18.1 |
0.11% |
0.52% |
550 Health: |
358.3 |
2.16% |
10.37% |
551 Health care services |
321.8 |
1.94% |
9.32% |
552 Health research and training |
32.9 |
0.20% |
0.95% |
554 Consumer and occupational health and safety |
3.6 |
0.02% |
0.10% |
570 Medicare: |
497.8 |
3.00% |
14.41% |
600 Income Security: |
536.5 |
3.23% |
15.53% |
601 General retirement and disability insurance |
7.0 |
0.04% |
0.20% |
602 Federal employee retirement and disability |
131.7 |
0.79% |
3.81% |
603 Unemployment compensation |
70.7 |
0.43% |
2.05% |
604 Housing assistance |
46.7 |
0.28% |
1.35% |
605 Food and nutrition assistance |
109.7 |
0.66% |
3.18% |
609 Other income security |
170.7 |
1.03% |
4.94% |
650 Social Security: |
813.6 |
4.90% |
23.55% |
700 Veterans Benefits and Services: |
138.9 |
0.84% |
4.02% |
701 Income security for veterans |
65.9 |
0.40% |
1.91% |
702 Veterans education, training, and rehabilitation |
12.9 |
0.08% |
0.37% |
703 Hospital and medical care for veterans |
52.5 |
0.32% |
1.52% |
704 Veterans housing |
1.3 |
0.01% |
0.04% |
705 Other veterans benefits and services |
6.3 |
0.04% |
0.18% |
750 Administration of Justice: |
52.6 |
0.32% |
1.52% |
751 Federal law enforcement activities |
27.3 |
0.16% |
0.79% |
752 Federal litigative and judicial activities |
14.6 |
0.09% |
0.42% |
753 Federal correctional activities |
6.9 |
0.04% |
0.20% |
754 Criminal justice assistance |
3.8 |
0.02% |
0.11% |
800 General Government: |
27.8 |
0.17% |
0.80% |
801 Legislative functions |
3.7 |
0.02% |
0.11% |
802 Executive direction and management |
0.5 |
0.00% |
0.01% |
803 Central fiscal operations |
12.1 |
0.07% |
0.35% |
804 General property and records management |
0.0 |
0.00% |
0.00% |
805 Central personnel management |
0.4 |
0.00% |
0.01% |
806 General purpose fiscal assistance |
7.9 |
0.05% |
0.23% |
808 Other general government |
6.0 |
0.04% |
0.17% |
809 Deductions for offsetting receipts |
-2.7 |
-0.02% |
-0.08% |
900 Net Interest: |
220.9 |
1.33% |
6.39% |
950 Undistributed Offsetting Receipts: |
-92.8 |
-0.56% |
-2.69% |
Total outlays |
3,454.6 |
20.79% |
100.00% |
Source:
Office of Management and Budget (3.2
10.1)
Footnotes
[12.1] See
Chapter 11, footnote 1 for an explanation of
the construction of this graph.
[12.2]
The federal government takes in money
other than through taxes in the form of fees and other payments. These
payments often arise from businesslike transactions with the public (fees
collected by the FDIC for deposit insurance, for example) and are referred
to as offsetting receipts in the federal budget. In most cases
they are assigned to the specific functional category in which they arise,
and are treated as a negative expenditure within that functional category
rather than as a source of revenue or a receipt that is available to the rest
of the government.
As a result, the outlays that appear in the individual functional categories
of the budget indicate the governmental resources allocated to that category
net of the resources received in that category through market mechanisms.
There are some sources of non-tax receipts that do not
arise from businesslike transactions with the government (payments
by Federal agencies to employee retirement funds, for example) or that do
arise from businesslike transactions with the government but are so large
that they would distort the functional totals if they were assigned to the
functional category in which they arise (payments on federal oil and gas
leases, for example). These payments are not assigned to a particular
functional category in the budget, and are referred to as undistributed
offsetting receipts. They represent funds that are available to
the general fund to be distributed throughout the budget. As a result,
these funds are treated as a negative outlay in the federal budget, rather
than as a revenue, and these negative outlays are added in as a separate
item in order to arrive at total outlays. (See:
UNDISTRIBUTED OFFSETTING RECEIPTS.)
Undistributed offsetting receipts reached
a high of 1.1% of GDP and 6.2% of the budget in 1974 and a low of 0.4% of
GDP and 1.1% of the budget in 1999 through 2002. This category of the
budget has averaged 0.7% of GDP and 3.3% of the budget since 1970 and stood
at 0.6% of GDP and 2.7% of the budget in 2013.
[12.3] It is, perhaps, worth noting that
less than half of the
International Affairs
budget is devoted to humanitarian foreign aid. The rest funds the
operations of our foreign embassies and provides for military and law
enforcement assistance to foreign governments. A breakdown of
the federal budget by Function and Subfunction
in 2013 (OMB's
Table 3.2—Outlays by Function and Subfunction: 1962–2019) along with the percent of GDP and of the federal budget that each
program represented in that year is given in the Appendix on the Federal
Budget in 2013
at the end of this chapter.
[12.4] See footnote 2
above.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 13: Human Resources and Social Insurance
George H. Blackford © 2010, last updated 5/4/2014
As we saw in Chapter 12, the largest increase in the
federal budget over the past sixty years has been in the area of Human Resources.
This category went from 33.4% of the budget and 5.1% of GDP in 1950 to 64.4%
of the budget and 12.3% of GDP in 2007.[13.1]
The great
bulk of the expenditures in this category fund our social-insurance
programs. These are the programs—the largest of which are Social Security
and Medicare—that
grew out of
Franklin
D. Roosevelt’s New Deal.
Social Security and
Medicare,
as well as many other programs provided by the federal government, are
insurance programs in that they provide protection against the possibility
of becoming indigent as a result of a devastating loss that may or may not
occur. Social
Security,
for example, provides insurance against the possibility of not being able to
save enough to provide for one's retirement, the loss of one's savings as a
result of poor investment choices, outliving one's savings, or the inability
to earn a living as a result of becoming disabled or through the premature
death of a working parent or spouse. Medicare
provides insurance against the possibility of becoming uninsurable due to
poor health in one's elder years and the inability to meet one's healthcare
needs out of savings.
These are
social-insurance programs in that they pool the risk across all or
most members of society by including all or most members of society in the
payment and benefit structure they offer. In addition, they provide the
kind of insurance that
cannot be provided by private insurance companies in
that there exists no market mechanism by which these kinds of risk can be efficiently or
effectively pooled within the economic system in the absence of
government intervention.
Most of
the expenditures in the
Human Resources
category
of the budget are included in the
Office of Management and Budget’s
Table 11.3—Outlays for Payments for Individuals.
The expenditures
in 2007 for each program in this table that had a budget in excess of $500
thousand in 2007 are listed in Table 13.1 along with the percent of GDP and of the federal budget that each program represented
in that year.[13.2]
Table
13.1:
Federal Payments for Individuals, 2007.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget (10.1
11.3)
The totals in for each of
the major categories in this table are plotted in
Figure 13.1 for the years 1940 through 2013, both as a percent of GDP
and as a percent of the federal budget. In this figure, Total is
Total, payments for individuals from
OMB's Table 11.3; Retirement is the sum of
Total, Social Security and railroad retirement and
Total, Federal employees retirement and insurance;
Unemployment is
Unemployment Assistance; Medical is
Total, Medical care;
Student Aid is
Total, Assistance to students; Housing is
Housing assistance; Food is
Total, Food and nutrition assistance;
Public Assistance is
Total, Public assistance and related programs; and Other is the sum of all
federal payments for individuals in
OMB's Table 11.3
not included elsewhere.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
Figure 13.1 shows the extent to which
the
Human Resources has been dominated by federal healthcare and
retirement programs. Retirement and Medical
in Figure 13.1 went from 5.5% and 1.0% of the budget in 1940 to 27% and
25% of the budget in 2007. At the same time, Public Assistance,
Food, Unemployment, Housing,
Student Aid, and Other each remained at less than 6% of the
budget during the entire period. In terms of GDP, Retirement and
Medical grew to become 5.1% and 4.8% of the economy,
respectively, by 2007 while none of the other programs in
OMB's Table 11.3 exceeded 2% of the economy during
that period.
Not only does Figure
13.1 show the
extent to which
Human Resources has been dominated by federal healthcare and
retirement programs, it also shows that rising healthcare cost is the main
engine by which
Human-Resources expenditures have been driven up
since the 1960s. While there was a significant increase in the
cost of federal retirement programs since 1965 (by 7.2% of the budget
and 1.8% of GDP) and the cost of federal public assistance programs has
increased somewhat since then (by 0.7% of the budget and 0.2% of GDP), the
cost of federal healthcare programs has increased by 23.5% of the budget and
4.5% of GDP since since 1965.
When we examine the data in
Figure 13.1 we
find that 41% of the increase in the total costs of the programs listed
in Table 13.1 since 1965
can be attributed to the increase in the cost of federal healthcare
programs, 42% to the increase in the cost of federal retirement programs,
and only 17% by the increases in the cost of all other programs
listed in Table 13.1 combined.
The fundamental nature of this increase can be
seen by examining the costs of the individual programs contained in each of the
categories plotted in Figure 13.1.
Healthcare in
Figure 13.1 is the sum of the twelve items that fall under the
heading
Medical care. The contribution of each
program to the total healthcare cost of the federal government are displayed
in Figure 13.2 by combining
Medicare’s
hospital insurance and
supplementary medical insurance programs into the single variable
Medicare and comparing the total cost of
Medicare and
Medicaid (Medicare + Medicaid) to the cost of these programs
separately. The total cost of all other federal healthcare programs are
combined in Other. These aggregates are plotted in Figure
13.2
along with
Total, Medical care (Total) from
OMB's Table 11.3.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
It should be clear from
Figure 13.2 that
the fundamental problem with rising healthcare costs in the federal budget
lies in the
Medicare and
Medicaid programs. While all other federal healthcare programs barely
changed from 1965 through 2007—going from 1.28% of the budget to 2.08% and
from .22% of GDP to .40%—Medicare
went from a nonexistent program to 15.94% of the budget and 3.04% of
GDP while
Medicaid, which was virtually nonexistent in 1965,
went from 0.21% of the budget and 0.04% of GDP to 7.0% of the budget in
2007 and 1.33% of GDP. Together,
Medicare and
Medicaid made up 22.9% of the budget and 4.37% of GDP
in 2007.
Retirement in
Figure 13.1 is the sum of seven items in the
OMB's Table 11.3. These items are displayed in
Figure 13.3 by
combining
Social security: old age and survivors insurance (OASI) and
Social security: disability insurance (SSDI) programs in the single variable
Social Security and comparing this aggregate (which is often referred to
by the acronym
OASDI) with the
Military retirement and
Veterans service-connected compensation
programs (which are combined in the single variable Military & Veterans) and
the
Civil service retirement and
disability program (Civil Service) from the
OMB's Table 11.3.
Railroad retirement (excl. social security)
is combined with
Other (All Other) in this figure.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
It is clear from
Figure 13.3 that the
Railroad retirement (excl. social security) and
Other retirement programs in
OMB's Table 11.3 play an insignificant role in either the budget or the
economy as Other amounted to only 0.31% of the budget in 2007 and
0.06% of the economy. The
Military and
Civil service retirement programs, on the other hand, play a
somewhat more significant role at 2.73% and 2.23% of the budget and 0.52%
and 0.42% of the economy, respectively, in 2007.[13.3] The major player in this
segment of the budget is clearly Social Security which went from
virtual nonexistence in 1940 to 21.3% of the budget in 2007
and 4.1% of the economy.
It is worth emphasizing, however, that even
though there was a rather dramatic increase in Social Security from
1940 until it peaked at 4.8% of GDP in 1983, Social Security has
been fairly stable relative to GDP since the 1970s and was at the same level
relative to the economy in 2007 (4.6% of GDP) that it was in 1976.
At the same time
it must be noted that
OASDI is expected to increase relative to the economy as the baby
boomers retire reaching a peak of
6% of GDP in 2036. This is 1% of GDP above its 5% peak in 1983. This poses a problem, but this problem is
relatively minor and fundamentally different from the
problem posed by the rising cost of healthcare in the federal budget.
As we will see in Chapter
16, the problems posed by the baby boomers
retiring can be managed by the Social Security System without the need for a
wholesale restructuring of the system. The same cannot be said for the
problems faced by the federal healthcare system.
Food in Figure
13.1 is the sum of
four items that fall under the heading
Food and nutrition assistance in the OMB’s
OMB's Table 11.3. Federal expenditures on each of these programs
along with their total are plotted in Figure 13.4 from 1940 through 2013
where
Child nutrition and
special milk programs is labeled School Lunch,
Supplemental feeding programs (WIC
and
CSFP) is labeled WIC,
SNAP (formerly
Food stamps) (including
Puerto Rico) is labeled Food Stamps, and
Commodity donations and other is labeled
Other.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
It is worth noting that in plotting
expenditures in the
Food and nutrition assistance portion of the federal
budget in Figure 13.4, and in the
figures to follow,
there is a change in scale relative to the scale employed in the previous
graphs where expenditures in the
Medical care:,
Social security and railroad retirement:, and
Federal
employees retirement and insurance: portions of the budget were
plotted. Expenditures on
Food and nutrition assistance and the rest of the
items in the federal budget to be considered below are almost a full order of magnitude
below healthcare and retirement expenditures in the federal budget.
As is indicated in
Figure 13.4, while
expenditures on
Total, Food and nutrition assistance (Total)
didn't even exist in
OMB's Table 11.3 prior to 1947, this category of
the federal budget increased
dramatically during the 1973-1975 recession—increasing from 0.49% of the
budget in 1970 and 0.09% of the economy to 2.14% of the budget and 0.44% of
the economy by 1976—and has remained fairly high ever since. Expenditures
in this category peaked at 2.47% of the budget and 0.49% of the economy in
1995 then declined to 1.81% of the budget and 0.32% of the economy by 2000. They then increased gradually until the crisis hit in 2008.
By 2013 expenditures on federal food programs had reached an all time
high—3.2% of the federal budget and 0.66% of the economy.
The largest of the federal food programs is the
SNAP (formerly
Food stamps)
including Puerto Rico) (Food Stamps) program which went from
virtually nothing in 1965 (0.03% of the budget, 0.00% of GDP) to 1.28% of
the budget and 0.24% of GDP in 2007. At the same time,
Child nutrition and
special milk programs (School Lunch) went from 0.22% of
the budget and 0.04% of GDP to 0.48% of the budget and 0.09% of GDP
by 2007; the
Supplemental feeding programs (WIC
and
CSFP) which didn’t come into being until 1976 increased to 0.19% of
the budget and 0.04% of GDP by 2007, and
Commodity donations and other began at 0.22% of the budget in 1972 and
0.04% of GDP and fell to 0.04% of the budget and 0.01% of GDP by 2007.
The seemingly dramatic 1.7 and 0.34 percentage point increases in
Total, Food and nutrition assistance programs shown in
Figure 13.4 pale in comparison to the corresponding 15.94 and
3.04 percentage point increases in
Medicare, the 6.76 and 1.29 percentage point increases in
Medicaid, and the 6.84 and the 1.65 percentage point increases
in
Social Security shown in Figure 13.2 and
Figure 13.3.
Public Assistance
in Figure 13.1 is the sum of eight items in the
OMB's Table 11.3. These items, along with
Total, Public assistance and related programs (Total),
are plotted in Figure 13.5 where SSI denotes the
Supplemental security income program, TANF
denotes the
Family support payments to States and TANF
program, EITC denotes the
Earned income tax credit, CTC (Child Tax
Credit) denotes the
Payment where child credit exceeds tax liability program,
Daycare denotes the
Payments to States for daycare
assistance, Foster Care denotes the
Payments to states—Foster Care/Adoption Assist,
and VNSCP denotes the
Veterans non-service connected pensions.
Expenditures on the
Low income home energy assistance
program in Table 13.1 is included in the Other variable in
Figure 13.4 along with
Other public assistance.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
There were only two public assistance programs
listed in
OMB's Table 11.3 that existed in 1973:
Family support payments to States and TANF (TANF) and
Veterans non-service connected pensions (VNSCP).
Public assistance programs began to
multiply in the 1970s starting with the
Supplemental security income program (SSI) in 1974, the
Earned income tax credit (EITC) and
Low income home energy assistance
in 1977,
Payments to states—Foster Care/Adoption Assist (Foster
Care) in 1981,
Payments to States for daycare
assistance (Daycare) in 1993, and
Payment where child credit exceeds tax liability (CTC) in
1999.
The largest of the
Public assistance and related programs in the
1960s,
Family support payments to States and TANF, peaked in 1972 at 2.84% of
the budget and 0.54% of GDP and then gradually decreased to 0.59% of the
budget by 2007 and 0.15% of GDP. This fall reflects the creation of the
Supplemental security income program (SSI) and
Earned income tax credit (EITC) programs which received some of
the funding that had previously gone to the
Family Support program.
In spite of the proliferation of public
assistance programs, it must be noted that the growth in
Total, Public assistance and related programs has
been relatively modest, increasing from 3.93% of the budget in 1965 and
0.65% of GDP to just 4.63% of the budget and 0.88% of GDP in 2007. These 0.70
and 0.23 percentage point increases in expenditures also pale in comparison to the corresponding 15.94 and
3.04 percentage point increases in
Medicare, the 6.76 and 1.29 percentage point increases in
Medicaid, and the 6.84 and the 1.65 percentage point increases
in
Social Security shown in Figure 13.2 and
Figure 13.3.
Unemployment compensation is a single
item
in OMB’s
OMB's Table 11.3. The expenditures on this program are plotted in
Figure 13.6, both as a percent of the budget and as a percent of GDP.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
Unsurprisingly, expenditures on this program follow the level of
economic activity—peaking in response to economic downturns and falling as
the economy recovers. It has tended to average somewhat less than 2% of the
federal budget and less than 0.44% of the economy during normal times.
It reached a peak of 4.99% of the budget and 1.07% of the economy in 1976
and peaked again in 2010 at 4.58% of the budget and 1.07% of GDP.
Unemployment Assistance fell to 1.9% of the budget and 0.41% of
GDP In 2013.
Of the nine programs left to be examined in
OMB's Table 11.3, only two are of significant magnitude to be
considered separately:
Total, Assistance to students and
Housing assistance. Expenditures on these two programs are
plotted in Figure 13.7 as Student Aid and Housing,
respectively. The remaining seven programs are included in All Other Programs in this figure.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
Student Aid increased dramatically
following World War II as a result of the
GI Bill,
reaching an astonishing 10.7% of the budget and 1.5% of GDP in 1948.
It then decreased sharply through 1953, then gradually until it began to
increase again in 1965. From 1965 through 1976 it went from 0.04% of the budget and 0.01% of GDP to
2.12% of the budget and 0.44% of GDP. It declined sharply in the late
1970s and then gradually in the 1980s and 1990s to reach a low of 0.54% of
the budget and 0.10% of GDP in 2001. Student Aid jumped to
1.95% of the budget and 0.38% of GDP by 2006 but fell to only 1.13% of the
budget and 0.22% of GDP in 2007.
At the same time,
Housing assistance increased gradually from 1965 through
1995—from 0.19% of the budget and 0.03% of GDP to 1.69% of the budget and
0.38% of GDP. It then fell to 1.21% of the budget and 0.23% of GDP by
2007. All Other Programs went from 0.60% of the budget in 1965 and
0.10% of GDP to 0.21% of the budget and 0.04% of GDP in 2007.
Yet again we find that these changes pale in comparison to the corresponding 15.94 and
3.04 percentage point increases in
Medicare, the 6.76 and 1.29 percentage point increases in
Medicaid, and the 6.84 and the 1.65 percentage point increases
in
Social Security shown in Figure 13.2 and
Figure 13.3.
Figure 13.8
provides a summary of the
Human Resources
programs contained in
OMB's Table 11.3 where in this figure
Total Outlays is the sum of all federal government expenditures as given by the
OMB's
Table 3.2,
Payments for Individuals,
Retirement, Medical, and Medical +
Retirement are as given by the totals of the corresponding items in the OMB’s
OMB's Table 11.3, and Other Pay for Individuals
is the sum of all payments for individuals less expenditures for
medical and retirement.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
This figure clearly shows the extent to
which the dramatic increase in the Human Resources component of the federal budget has been
dominated by the increase in Retirement + Medical since the early
1950s as
Social Security began to grow and especially since
1965 when
Medicare, and
Medicaid came into existence. Fully 89% of the 153% increase in
Pay for Individuals as a percent of the economy from 1965 through 2007 can be attributed to the increase in Retirement + Medical, and
only 11% of that increase can be attributed to all other payments for
individuals combined.
When we break down the increase in
Retirement + Medical over this period we find that 29% of the increase
in Retirement + Medical from 1965 through 2007 came from the increase
in Retirement, and 71% of the increase came from the increase in Medical. These numbers
suggest that that rising costs of federal retirement and medical programs
present equally daunting problems for the federal budget, but a closer look
at Figure 13.8 indicates that this is not the case.
Retirement increased dramatically
from 1965 through 1974 and then stabilized as a percent of the budget and of
GDP. As a result, in 2007 Retirement was at about the same
level it was during the 1970s. This does not mean that federal
retirement, specifically,
Social Security, poses no problems. As was noted above,
Social Security’s OASDI’S obligations are expected to increase relative
to the economy as the baby boomers retire reaching a peak of
6% of GDP in 2036 at 1% of GDP above its peak in 1983. This poses a
problem, but as we will see in Chapter
16, this problem can be managed by the
Social Security System
without the need for a wholesale restructuring of the system. The same
cannot be said for
the problems faced by the federal healthcare system.
Unlike Retirement,
Medical has increased almost continuously since 1965 from 0.25% of GDP
in 1965 to 4.51% in 2007. When we break down this increase we find that
67.3% of the increase in Medical came from the increase in
Medicare and 28.6% came from the increase in
Medicaid. The other 4.1% came from all other federal healthcare
programs combined. What is particularly disturbing about this increase is
the increase after 1980 when the
Medicare and
Medicaid programs reached their maturity, and particularly in the
1990s. Federal healthcare costs have more than doubled relative to GDP
since 1980. Clearly, it is the ability to control healthcare
costs that poses the most serious challenge to our
social-insurance system.
Finally, it is worth
noting that Other Pay for Individuals has remained a relatively
stable 10% of the budget and 2% of GDP since the 1970s. It is in
Other Pay for Individuals that our non-medical welfare programs are to
be found. Given the degree of misinformation that dominates today's
debate over our welfare system, it is worth taking a detailed look at the
nature of the programs that provide the foundation for this system.
Chapter 14: Welfare, Tax Expenditures, and Redistribution
Appendix
on Payments for Individuals in 2013
Table 13.2 gives the expenditures
in
the
Office of Management and Budget’s
Table 11.3—Outlays for Payments for Individuals for each program in this table
in 2013 along with the percent of GDP and of the federal budget that each program represented
in that year.
Table 13.2: Federal Payments for Individuals, 2013.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
Endnotes
[13.1]
2007 is taken as the year for comparison here, and
will be used below, because it is the year before the current financial
crisis began to take its toll on the federal budget and the economy.
Comparable numbers for 2013 are given in Table 13.2 in the Appendix
on Payments for Individuals in 2013 at the end of this chapter.
[13.2] Those items
in
OMB's Table 11.3 that were less than $500 thousand in 2007
are included in the totals and subtotals in this table as well as in the
graphs and numbers given below.
[13.3] It should be that programs
that fall under the heading
Federal employees retirement and insurance
in
Table 11.3 provide employee benefits comparable to
the pension and disability benefits of private employers. They
are a part of the federal government's employee compensation package, just
as comparable employee benefits are part a private firm's employee
compensation package. The same is true of the medical programs for
veterans that are included in
Table 11.3. As a result, these items are
generally considered to be employee compensation rather than social
insurance, and the figures in
Table 11.3 over state federal expenditures on
social insurance to the extent they include expenditures on employee
compensation.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 14: Welfare, Tax Expenditures, and
Redistribution
George H. Blackford © 2010, last updated 5/16/2014
There is no separate
account for welfare in the federal budget. As a result, there is no official
definition of a welfare program. One way to identify a welfare program is to
simply assume that all social-insurance programs are welfare.
While some
people think this way, people in general see most social-insurance
programs as insurance, not welfare, and reject the idea that programs such
as
Social Security and
Medicare
are welfare. They view these programs as programs they pay for through
payroll taxes, and since they pay for them, they do not consider them to be
welfare.
This leads to a problem
in defining any social-insurance program as welfare in that all
social-insurance programs are paid for through taxes—even those programs that do
not have a specific tax associated with them. Since these programs
provide insurance throughout an individuals lifetime, not just at a
particular point in time, almost everyone pays the
taxes that support social-insurance programs at some point in their lives.
Even those individuals who do not pay taxes while they are receiving
benefits from a social-insurance program either paid the taxes that
supported the program from which they are receiving benefits before they
began receiving benefits, or they will eventually end up paying those taxes
at some point in the future after they no longer in need of the program. Only those who are
seriously disabled or otherwise unable to earn an income throughout their
entire life find themselves being able to take advantage of social insurance
without having to eventually pay the taxes that support social-insurance
programs, and, even then, the family members of those individuals generally
pay the taxes that support social-insurance programs.
Then there is the
argument that those programs in which the recipients benefit by more than
they pay in should be considered welfare. This is clearly a fallacious
argument.
Accepting this
argument makes all insurance welfare, private insurance as well as social
insurance. The point of insurance is to provide protection against the
possibility of catastrophic loss by spreading the risk among the insured.
Insurance makes it possible to trade the uncertainty associated with the
possibility of a catastrophic loss for the certainty of a smaller loss
associated with the cost of the insurance. As a result, those who benefit
from any kind of insurance always take out more than they pay in. Those who benefit from fire insurance,
for example,
when their houses burn down obviously benefit by more than
they paid in. That's the way insurance works. It is because insurance makes
it possible for people who are faced with a catastrophic loss to benefit by
more than they pay in that insurance exists in the first place.
A more
common way to
draw the distinction between welfare and non-welfare social-insurance is to assume those programs that are
means tested—that is, that provide
benefits only to the poor that are specifically designed to benefit the less
fortunate within our society—are considered to be welfare in spite of the
fact that the beneficiaries pay the taxes that support these programs either
before or after they receive the benefits from them.
Social Security,
Medicare,
and unemployment compensation, for example, are not welfare programs under
this definition since the benefits of Social Security and Medicare are not
means tested and
available to those who qualify whether they be rich or poor as are the
benefits of unemployment compensation.
At the same time, there are a number of
social-insurance programs that are means tested, the benefits of which are
available only to the indigent or otherwise poor and are specifically
designed to transfer income from those who are better off within society to
those who are less well off. These are the programs we will examine in this
chapter, namely, means-tested programs that provide either cash or non-cash
benefits.
The federal programs that
are means tested in the
Office of Management and Budget’s
Table 11.3—Outlays for Payments for Individuals
are listed in Table 14.1 along with the percentages of GDP and of the
federal budget each program represented in 2007.
Table
14.1: Federal Welfare Programs and Expenditures, 2007.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
10.1)
* Billions of Dollars
Total
expenditures on these programs (Total) are plotted in Figure 14.1
from 1940 through 2013 along with a breakdown of these expenditures on the
basis of whether they provide cash (Cash) or non-cash (Non-Cash)
assistance.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
As is indicated in this
figure, total welfare expenditures grew gradually from 1952 through1965 and
then began to grow dramatically, increasing from 4.7% of the budget and
0.78% of GDP in 1965 to 16.3% of the budget and 3.1% of GDP in 2007. When we
examine the breakdown between cash-payment and non-cash assistance we find
that virtually all of the increase in welfare expenditures since 1967 has
come about through an increase in non-cash benefits, and that there has been
relatively little increase in cash-payment welfare since the early 1960s.
Six of the many
means-tested, federal programs listed in Table 14.1 above provide
direct cash assistance to low income individuals or families:
Supplemental security income program (SSI),
Family support payments to States and TANF (TANF),
Earned income tax credit (EITC),
Payment where child credit exceeds tax liability (CTC,
i.e., the
Child Tax Credit),
Payments to States—Foster Care/Adoption Assist. (Foster
Care/Adoption), and
Veterans non-service connected pensions (VNSCP). The rest of the programs in Table
14.1 are non-cash assistance programs that provide or pay for specific,
in kind benefits such as food, housing, medical care, daycare, etc.
Expenditures on each of the cash-payment programs are plotted from 1940
through 2012 in Figure 14.2.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
As is shown in this
figure, Total expenditures on cash-welfare programs varied between
2.4% and 4% of the budget and between 0.54% and 0.8% of GDP from 1950 through
1990 and amounted to some 4.3% of the budget and 0.83% of GDP in 2007. The increase in
cash-welfare programs that took place during the 1990s reflects a
fundamental change that took place in our welfare system with the expansion of the
Earned income tax credit (EITC) program
that was created in 1976,
the
welfare reform legislation of 1996, and the introduction of the
Payment where child credit exceeds tax liability (CTC)
program in 1999.
Prior to 1977, the amount
of money a cash-welfare welfare recipient earned through employment was
subtracted from the amount of assistance he or she received. This created a
situation in which there was no incentive for the recipient to accept a job
that paid less than his or her cash-welfare benefits since accepting such a
job would not increase the recipient's income. This situation was changed
with the introduction of the
Earned income and
Child Tax Credits combined with the replacement of the
Aid to Dependent Children program with
TANF. Since the benefits of
TANF are tied to the
willingness of the recipient to find work, and the
Earned income and
Child Tax Credits are
refundable (that is, are paid to the recipient
even if the recipient owes no taxes so long as he or she is employed) the
effect of these changes is to encourage cash-welfare recipients to
seek employment since the benefits of
TANF and the
Earned income and
Child Tax Credit programs are only available to those who are employed
or who are participating in an employment training program.
The way in which these
welfare reforms have affected the cash-welfare payments by the federal
government can be seen in Figure 14.3 where in this figure: Cash
Welfare is the total of all cash-welfare payments made by the federal
government; Refundable Credits is the amount of money spent by the
federal government on the
Earned income and
Child Tax Credit programs, and Less Refundable Credits is the
amount of money spent by the federal government on cash-welfare programs
other than refundable tax credits.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
As can be
seen in this figure, by 2007 almost half (46%) of all federal cash-payment
expenditures took the form of refundable tax credits, and even though total
cash-welfare expenditures had increased by 15% as a fraction of the budget
and 6% as a fraction of GDP since 1976, the amount of federal
cash-welfare expenditures that were not tied directly to work through
refundable tax credits had fallen by 34% as a fraction of the budget and by
39% as a fraction of GDP by 2007. It is also worth noting that an
additional 18% of cash-payment expenditures were made through the
Family support payments to States and TANF (TANF)
program which has a
work
requirement associated with it. That means that 64% of all
cash-assistance expenditures in 2007 were made through programs designed to encourage
work and to assist the working poor.
When we look at the
expenditures on the individual cash-assistance programs in 2007 we find that
-
1.4% of the federal budget and 0.27% of GDP went to
the
Earned income tax credit (EITC) program
to “provide
an incentive to work.”
-
1.2% of the federal budget and 0.23% of GDP went to
the
Supplemental security income program (SSI)
to “help
the aged, blind, and disabled who have little or no income by providing
cash to meet basic needs for food, clothing, and shelter.”
-
0.77% of the federal budget and 0.15% of GDP went to
the
Family support payments to States and TANF (TANF)
program to “help
move recipients into work and turn welfare into a program of temporary
assistance.”
-
0.59% of the federal budget and 0.11% of GDP went to
the
Payment where child credit exceeds tax liability
(CTC) program to aid lower and
middle-income families with children.
-
0.24% of the federal budget and 0.05% of GDP went to
Payments to States—Foster Care/Adoption Assist. (Foster
Care) program to aid low income families who provide foster
care for and adopt children.
-
0.12% of the federal budget and 0.02% of GDP went to
the
Veterans non-service connected pensions (VNSCP)
program to aid “wartime
Veterans who have limited or no income and who are age 65 or older, or
under 65 and are permanently and totally disabled or a patient in a
nursing home, or are receiving Social Security disability payments.”
As was noted above, all
but the six programs plotted in Figure 14.2 are non-cash assistance
programs. Here we are talking about
Children's health insurance,
Medicaid,
Indian health,
Health resources and services,
Substance abuse and mental health services,
Student assistance—Department of Education and other,
Housing assistance,
SNAP (formerly
Food stamps) (including
Puerto Rico),
Child nutrition
and
special milk programs,
Supplemental feeding programs (WIC
and
CSFP),
Low income home energy assistance,
Payments to States for daycare assistance, and
Other public assistance in Table 14.1.[14.1]
Expenditures on these
programs are plotted from 1940 through 2012 in Figure 14.4 where in
this figure: Total is the sum of all federal expenditures on non-cash
assistance programs listed above; Medicaid is all expenditures on
Medicaid; Student Aid is expenditures on
Student assistance—Department of Education and other;
Housing is the expenditures under the heading
Housing assistance; Food is all
Food and nutrition assistance expenditures, and
Other is the sum of the total expenditures on all of the rest of
the non-cash assistance programs listed in Table 14.1
combined.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.2
10.1)
It is clear from this
figure that the total of non-cash assistance programs have increased
dramatically since the 1960s, going from 0.7% of the budget and 0.12% of
the economy in 1965 to 11.9% of the budget and 2.3% of the economy in 2007.
It is also clear from this figure that the reason non-cash assistance
programs dominate our welfare system is that the
Medicaid program amounted to 6.99% of the budget
in 2007 and 1.33% of the economy and, thus, accounted for 43% of all welfare
expenditures in 2007 and 58% of all expenditures on non-cash assistance
programs. None of the other non-cash assistance programs exceeded 2% of the
budget or 0.4% of the economy in 2007. Only 39% of the 11.9% of the federal
budget that was devoted to non-cash assistance programs in 2007 went to
non-medical welfare programs, and most of the individual non-medical,
non-cash programs took up less that 0.25% of the economy.
When we look at the
expenditures on the individual programs in 2007, we find that
-
7.0% of the budget and 1.33% of GDP went to
Medicaid,
-
2.0% of the budget and 0.38% of the GDP went to
Food and nutrition assistance programs,
-
1.2% of the budget and 0.23% of the GDP went to
Housing assistance programs,
-
1.0% of the budget and 0.19% of the GDP went to
Student assistance—Department of Education and other
programs, and
-
all
of the other non-cash assistance programs combined were 0.75% of
the federal budget and 0.14% of the economy.
What about
Medicaid? Where did the 7% of the federal
budget and 1.3% of gross income earned in 2007 that went to
Medicaid go?
The distribution of
Medicaid benefits is
given in the
Census Bureau’s
Table 151. Medicaid—Beneficiaries and Payments: 2000 to 2009.
Since the data for 2007 is not available in the
Census Bureau’s
Table 151, the distribution of
Medicaid benefits from this table for 2008 are
presented in Table 14.2.
Table
14.2
Medicaid Beneficiaries, 2008 |
Beneficiaries |
Total (thousands) |
Percent of Total |
Expenditures (millions of
$) |
Percent of Expenditures |
Age 65 and over |
4,147 |
7.1 |
61,131 |
20.6 |
Blind/Disabled |
8,694 |
14.8 |
129,040 |
43.5 |
Children |
27,111 |
46.1 |
51,200 |
17.2 |
Adults |
12,903 |
22.0 |
37,185 |
12.5 |
Foster care children |
960 |
1.6 |
5,936 |
2.0 |
Unknown |
4,912 |
8.4 |
11,825 |
4.0 |
BCCA WOMEN
|
44 |
0.1 |
513 |
0.2 |
Total |
58,771 |
100.0 |
296,830 |
100.0 |
Source:
Census Bureau (151)
Table 14.2 shows
that 76% of the known beneficiaries of the
Medicaid program in
2008 were either poor Children, Blind/Disabled individuals, or
indigent elderly adults Age 65 and over, and over 87% of
Medicaid’s expenditures that were classified went
to these individuals. Of the 58.8 million
Medicaid beneficiaries, only 22% were identified
as indigent adults who were not blind/disabled or under age 65, and only 13%
of
Medicaid’s
benefits went to these adults. In other words, less than 1% of the
federal budget was spent on Medicaid benefits that went to recipients
identified as adults who were not blind/disabled or under age 65.
Entitlement's programs are programs that
guarantee, by law, specified benefits to anyone who qualifies for the
benefits offered by the program. As was noted above,
Means-tested programs are designed to provide
economic assistance to the indigent and otherwise poor within our society.
Since the benefits of means-tested entitlement programs are available only
to low income individuals and families they are, by assumption, a form of
welfare.
At the
same time, an entitlement program may or may not be means-tested and,
therefore, may or may not be a form of welfare.
Social Security, for example, is an entitlement
program that is not a welfare program since its benefits are guaranteed by
law to anyone who qualifies for those benefits irrespective of income or
wealth, whereas
Supplemental Security Income (SSI) is an
entitlement program that is a welfare program since its benefits are
guaranteed by law only to those who are “aged,
blind, [or] disabled who have little or no income.”
The
following list of the federal, means-tested entitlement programs can be
found in the Section Notes of the
Fiscal Year 2013 Historical Tables Budget of the U.S. Government:
• Special milk program
• SNAP (formerly the Food
Stamp Program)
• Child Nutrition Programs
• Grants to States for
Medicaid
• Children’s Health
Insurance Program
• Child Enrollment
Contingency Fund
• Payments to States for
Child Support Enforcement and Family Support Programs
• Temporary Assistance for
Needy Families
• Payment Where Adoption
Credit Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Payments to States for
Foster Care and Adoption Assistance
• Child Care Entitlement
to States
• Payment Where Recovery
Rebate Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Payment Where Earned
Income Credit Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Payment Where Saver’s
Credit Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Health insurance
supplement to earned income credit
• Payment Where Child
Credit Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Payment Where Credit to
Aid First-Time Homebuyers Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Payment Where American
Opportunity Credit Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Payment Where Making
Work Pay Credit Exceeds Liability for Tax
• Supplemental Security
Income Program (SSI)
• Housing Trust Fund
• Veterans’ Pensions
benefits
• Refundable Premium
Assistance Tax Credit
• Reduced Cost Sharing for
Individuals Enrolling in Qualified Health Plans
Figure 14.5 shows the relationship between means-tested entitlement
expenditures (Means-Tested Entitlements) and total welfare
expenditures (Total Welfare) from 1965 through 2013. While it is
clear from this figure that welfare spending is dominated by entitlements in
the federal budget—83% of all welfare spending was through entitlements in
2007—the extent to which this is so has varied over the years from a high of
95% federal welfare expenditures in 1964 to a low of 73% in 1986.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (8.1
10.1
11.3)
Figure 14.5 also
shows how the sum of means-tested entitlement programs has grown from 1965 through 2013—from
0.73% of the economy and 4.40% of the federal budget in 1965 to 2.56% of the
economy and 13.4% of the federal budget by 2007.
The real story of
entitlement programs, however, is told in Figure 14.6 which
shows what the growth of means-tested entitlements and welfare
expenditures look like with
and without
Medicaid and refundable tax credits included in the total, and the way in
which means-tested entitlements have grown compared to the two
largest entitlement programs, Social
Security and
Medicare.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (8.1
11.3
10.1)
It is clear from
Figure 14.6 that, just as
Medicaid dominates the non-cash assistance welfare
programs in Figure 14.4, it dominates the means-tested entitlement
programs as well.
Medicaid was enacted into law in 1965, and by 2007
it accounted for 34% of all government expenditures on means-tested entitlements. Whereas expenditures on non-Medicaid,
means-tested entitlements (Means-Tested Entitlements less Medicaid)
increased by 77% as a percent of the economy over that 42 year period,
because of
Medicaid, the sum of all means-tested entitlements
(Means-Tested Entitlements) increased by 250%. Means-Tested
Entitlements less Medicaid & Tax Credits increased only 22% over
this
same period.
In other words,
almost all of the growth in means-tested entitlements from 1965 through
2007 was in the
Medicaid program combined with a significant
increase in refundable tax credits and a relatively minor increase in
non-Medicaid, non-tax-credit entitlements.
Figure 14.6 also
makes it possible to compare the growth of means-tested entitlements from
1965 through 2013 with the sum of the two largest non-means-tested
entitlement programs—Social
Security and
Medicare (Social Security plus Medicare). While means-tested entitlements were growing from 4.4% of the budget and
0.73% of the economy in 1965 to 13.4% of the budget and 2.56% of the economy
by 2007, the non-means-tested
Social Security and
Medicare entitlement programs were growing from 15.5% of the
budget and 2.65% of the economy to 37.2% of the budget and 7.09% of the
economy. This is, of course, no surprise since we saw in
Chapter 13 that
Social Security stood at 21.3% of the budget in
2007 and 4.05% of the economy and that
Medicare was at 15.9% of the budget and 3.04% of
the economy in that year.
Finally, Figure 14.6
shows how the welfare reforms of the 1970s and 1990s have affected
entitlements in that Means-Tested Entitlements less Medicaid & Tax
Credits shows that non-medical, non-tax-credit entitlement expenditures
went from 5.7% of the budget and 1.22% of the economy in 1976 to 4.5% of the
budget and 0.88% of the economy in 2007, a decrease of 21% and 28%,
respectively.
As we have seen, 4.3% of
the federal budget and 0.83% of GDP went to cash-payment welfare programs in
2007, and an additional 11.8% of the budget and 2.3% of GDP went to non-cash
welfare programs. These programs are specifically designed to redistribute
income from those who are better off within our society to those who are
less fortunate. It is important to recognize, however, that welfare programs
are not the only way the federal government redistributes income. It also
redistributes income through its power to tax.
According to the
Joint Committee on Taxation
there were
over 200 provisions in the federal tax code in 2007 that
provided "a special exclusion, exemption, or deduction from gross income or
which provide a special credit, a preferential rate of tax, or a deferral of
tax liability." Such provisions, which are generally referred to as
tax breaks or loopholes, are “designed
to encourage certain kinds of behavior by taxpayers or to aid taxpayers in
special circumstances . . . [and] may, in effect, be viewed as
spending programs channeled through the tax system.” Since the benefits of
these "spending programs channeled through the tax system" are guaranteed by law to all who qualify they
are, in fact,
entitlement programs.
Tax-expenditure
entitlement programs play an important role in redistributing income from
the general taxpayer to various income groups within our
society.
Tax Expenditures and the Redistribution
of Income
The
Joint Committee estimated that the total of federal tax-expenditures
came to more than
$1,035 billion in 2007 and
that
approximately
10% of the benefits of these tax-expenditures went to corporations or other businesses and
90% to individuals. These estimates
(which are examined in detail in the
Appendix at the end of this chapter) are, in effect, gross estimates in that they only consider
how a particular tax expenditure benefits taxpayers directly without
considering how eliminating that expenditure will interact with other tax
expenditures that affect taxpayers. Nor do they take into
consideration how these interactions will affect taxpayers when
groups of tax expenditures are eliminated.
Leonard Burman,
Eric Toder, and
Christopher Geissler at the
Tax Policy Center of the Urban Institute
and Brookings
Institution have examined these interaction effects for the 90% of tax expenditures that benefited individuals and have provided estimates of
the way in which tax expenditures affect the after-tax income of various
income groups. These estimates for six major categories of tax expenditures (Exclusions,
Above-line deductions,
Itemized Deductions,
Refundable Credits,
Non-Refundable Credits, and the special treatment of
Capital
Gains/Dividends)
are summarized in Table 14.3.
Table 14.3: Tax Expenditures as a Percentage of
After-Tax Income, 2007. |
Program |
Quintile |
Top 1% |
All |
1st |
2nd |
3rd |
4th |
5th |
|
0.54 |
2.99 |
3.79 |
3.68 |
4.74 |
2.9 |
4.19 |
|
0.01 |
0.06 |
0.09 |
0.11 |
0.08 |
0.06 |
0.08 |
|
0.02 |
0.11 |
0.38 |
1.09 |
2.91 |
3.24 |
1.97 |
|
5.49 |
5.00 |
2.20 |
0.99 |
0.25 |
0.00 |
1.14 |
|
0.05 |
0.28 |
0.33 |
0.23 |
0.06 |
0.00 |
0.14 |
|
0.00 |
0.01 |
0.04 |
0.12 |
2.11 |
5.87 |
1.26 |
Total |
6.52 |
8.16 |
6.76 |
6.79 |
11.36 |
13.53 |
9.57 |
Source:
Burman, Toder, and Geissler. |
This table shows the
extent to which after-tax income in each quintile (20%) and the top 1% of the income distribution would be reduced—after
adjusting for the interactions between tax expenditures within each category—if
each of the six categories of tax expenditures were eliminated as well as if
all tax-expenditures were eliminated.
Table 14.3 makes
it possible to calculate the average and total benefits received by each
income group from each category of tax expenditure in this table as well as
the benefits received by each income group from all tax expenditures
combined.
Tax
Expenditures verses Welfare
In examining Table 14.3 it is apparent that the bulk of the redistribution
of income brought about by tax expenditures is from the general taxpayer to the top of the income distribution. The extent to
which this is so can be seen in Table 14.4 which shows the average
and total benefits received by each income group from all tax expenditures.[14.2]
It is clear from this table that tax expenditures definitely do not
have the effect of redistributing income from the general taxpayer to the
poor, but rather, have the effect of redistributing income from the
general taxpayer to the top of the income distribution. In terms of real
money, the $22,527 Average Benefit from all tax expenditures that
went to the top 20% of the income distribution in 2007 was almost 20 times
greater than the $1,154 Average Benefit that went to the bottom 20%
and 6 times greater than the $3,738 Average Benefit that went to
the middle 20%.
By the same token, the $178,555 Average Benefit that went to
the Top 1% was 155 times greater than the $1,154 Average Benefit
that went to the bottom 20%, 48 times greater than the $3,738 Average
Benefit that went to the middle 20%, and almost 8 times greater than
the $22,527 Average Benefit that went to the top 20% which, of
course, includes the Top 1%. When we exclude the Top 1%
from the top 20% we find that the Average Benefit of the remaining
19% of the income distribution (80%-99%) was only $14,315 in 2007.[14.3]
This is less than 1/12 of the Average Benefit of the Top 1%
and is only 3.8 and 12.5 times the Average Benefit of the middle
and bottom quintiles, respectively, compared to the 48 and 155 ratios for
the Top 1% relative to these quintiles.
More important, however, is the fact that when we compare the
absolute magnitude of the Total Benefit received by the various
income groups in 2007 we find that the $517.0 billion that went to the top
20% of the income distribution was $73.9 billion greater than the entire
$444.7
billion the federal government spent on welfare in that year, and of
particular interest is the $204.9 billion of Total Benefit that
went to the Top 1%.
The $204.9 billion that went to the Top 1% of the income
distribution in 2007—enough to provide an average benefit of $178,555 for
each member of the Top 1% in that year—was almost six times the
$34.9 billion the federal government spent in 2007 on
Food Stamps to provide "nutrition
assistance to millions of . . . low income individuals and families" with an average benefit of less than
$1,200/year. It was over six times the
$32.8 billion spent in 2007 on
Supplemental Security Income (SSI) to aid “the
aged, blind, and disabled who have little or no income . . . to meet basic
needs for food, clothing, and shelter”
with its average benefit of
$5,244.72/year. And it was almost ten times the
$21.1 billion the federal government spent in 2007 on
Temporary Assistance to Needy Families to “help
move recipients into work and turn welfare into a program of temporary
assistance” with its average benefit of less than $10,000/year.
In fact, the $204.9 billion in tax-expenditure Total Benefits that
went to the Top 1% of the income distribution in 2007 that provided
an Average Benefit of $178,555 for members of the Top 1% of
the income distribution in 2007 was more than enough to pay for all of the
above welfare programs combined plus the
$33.0 billion that went
to
Housing assistance
in 2007, the $27.5 billion
that went to
Student Aid,
the $13.0 billion that
went to
Child
nutrition
and
special
milk programs,
the $6.6 billion
that went to the
Payments to States—Foster Care/Adoption Assist
program, the $6.0 billion that went to the
Children's health insurance program, the $5.3
billion that went to the
Supplemental feeding programs (WIC
and
CSFP), the $5.1 billion that went to
Payments to States for daycare assistance,
the $3.4 billion that
went to
Veterans
non-service connected pensions,
the $3.2 billion that went to
Substance abuse and mental
health services,
the $3.3 billion that went to
Indian
health,
and the $2.5 billion that went to the
Low income home energy assistance program with $5.4 billion left over in change.
In other words, the
$204.9 billion the Top 1% of the income
distribution saved in taxes as a result of the tax-expenditure entitlement
benefits that are built into the tax code—benefits that produced an
average government subsidy of $178,555 to the members of the Top 1%
of the income distribution in 2007—was enough to fund all of the federal
government's welfare programs except
Medicaid
and that portion of the
Refundable Credits program the federal
government actually spent on refunds.
What's more, the $312.1 billion in tax-expenditure entitlements that went
to the rest of the 19% of the income distribution in the 5th Quintile
that provided an Average Benefit of $14,315 to members of the
80%-99% income group was enough to pay for the
$190 billion the federal
government spent on
Medicaid in 2007 plus the $54.5
billion the federal government actually spent on
Refundable Credits with
$67.5 billion to spare. This $67.5 billion in itself would have been
enough to provide an average benefit of $2,945 to each member of richest
quintile of the income distribution. This is not only more than twice the
$1,153 Average Benefit received by the poorest quintile from all
tax expenditures in 2007, it is also more than twice the
$1,200 average benefit the federal
government paid out in
Food Stamps in 2007 to provide
"nutrition
assistance to millions of . . . low income individuals and families."
It is also instructive to
examine the individual categories of tax expenditures summarized in
Table 14.3.
Exclusions refers to various forms of income
(e.g., scholarships, fellowship grants, welfare benefits, employee fringe
benefits, interest on municipal bonds, capital gains transferred at death)
that do not have to be reported to the Internal Revenue Service.
Exclusions are excluded from
gross income.
The average and total benefits
received by each income group from
Exclusions in 2007 that are implied by
Table 14.3 are shown in Table 14.5.
This table shows the way in which
Exclusions, the largest category of tax expenditures, redistribute income
from the general taxpayer to the various income groups within society.
Here we find that only $2.2 billion of the $357.7 billion of Total
Benefit from
Exclusions
(less than 1%) went to the poorest quintile (1st Quintile) with an
Average Benefit of $96 while some $215.7 billion (60%) went to the
richest quintile (5th Quintile) with an Average Benefit of
$9,399.
If we break down the richest quintile we find that 20% ($43.9 billion) of
the $215.7 billion worth of Total Benefit that went to the top 20% of
the income distribution, in fact, went to the Top 1% with an average
benefit of $38,271.
The largest beneficiary of the
Exclusions tax-expenditure entitlements in terms of Average Benefit is
clearly the Top 1% of the income distribution which exceeded the
next highest Average Benefit, $7,880 received by the top
80%-99%, by $30,391.
When we compare the bottom 40% (1st Quintile + 2nd
Quintile) of the income distribution with top 40% (4th Quintile
+ 5th Quintile) we find that the bottom 40% received 8% ($28.3
billion) of the $357.7 billion of Total Benefit from
Exclusions while the top 40% received more
than 79% ($281.4 billion) of these benefits, the difference being $253.1
billion. This $253.1 billion difference was equivalent to 57% of the
total of
$444.7 billion the federal government spent
on welfare in 2007.
Above-Line Deductions are deductions from
gross income (e.g., medical insurance premiums for the self employed and
standard deductions for the blind and elderly) that taxpayers are allowed to
take whether they choose to itemize their deductions or not.
Above-Line Deductions are subtracted from
gross income to arrive at
Adjusted Gross Income.
The average and total
benefits received by each income group from
Above-Line Deductions in 2007 are shown in
Table 14.6.
Above-Line Deductions
is the smallest category of tax expenditures in Table 14.3 with
only $7.3 billion worth of benefits in 2007. This tax-expenditure
entitlement is relatively insignificant, both in terms of the federal
budget and in terms of other tax expenditures. Here we find that
virtually none of the $7.3 billion of Total Benefit from
Above-Line Deductions went to the poorest
quintile with an Average Benefit of only $2 while some $3.6 billion
(50%) went to the richest quintile with an Average Benefit of
$159.
If we break down the richest quintile we find that 25% ($0.9
billion) of the $3.6 billion worth of Total Benefit that went to
the top 20%, in fact, went to the Top 1% with an Average Benefit
of $792.
When we compare the bottom 40% of the income distribution with the top 40%
we find that the bottom 40% received less than 8% ($0.6 billion) of the
$7.3 billion worth of Total Benefit from
Above-Line Deductions while the top 40%
received more than 76% ($5.6 billion) of these benefits, the difference
being $5.0 billion. This $5.6 billion was less than 2% of the total
amount the federal government spent on welfare in 2007.
Itemized
Deductions
Taxpayers can choose between subtracting a fixed
Standard Deduction from their adjusted gross
income in arriving at their taxable income or of listing separately
(itemizing) the individual deductions (e.g., mortgage interest, state and
local taxes, medical expenses, charitable contributions, investment interest
and other investment and financial expenses) they may be eligible for.
The average and total benefits received by each
income group from
Itemized Deductions in 2007 are shown in
Table 14.7.
Itemized Deductions is the second largest
category of tax expenditures. Here we find that only $0.1 billion of the
$157.7 billion of Total Benefit from
Itemized Deductions (less than 1%) went to
the poorest quintile with an Average Benefit of $4 while some
$132.4 billion (84%) went to the richest quintile with an Average
Benefit of $5,771.
If we break down the richest quintile we find that 37% ($49.1
billion) of the $132.4 billion worth of Total Benefit that went to
the top 20%, in fact, went to the Top 1% with an Average Benefit
of $42,758.
The largest beneficiary of the
Itemized Deductions tax-expenditure
entitlement in terms of Average Benefit is clearly the Top 1%
of the income distribution which exceeded the next highest Average
Benefit, $3,824 received by the 80%-99% income group, by
$38,934.
When we compare the bottom 40% of the income distribution with the top 40%
we find that the bottom 40% received less than 1% ($1.0 billion) of the
$157.7 billion of Total Benefit from
Itemized Deductions while the top 40%
received 96% ($151.9 billion) of these benefits, the difference being
$150.8 billion. This $150.8 billion difference was equivalent to 34% of
the
$$444.7 billion the federal government spent
on welfare in 2007.
A tax credit (e.g., the
Adoption Credit
or
Earned
Income Tax Credit)
is an amount that eligible taxpayers are allowed to subtract from their
taxes owed, as determined by their taxable income and the applicable tax
rates, in order to determine the amount of taxes they must actually pay.
A
Non-Refundable Credits
(e.g., the
Adoption Credit)
is a credit the taxpayer is entitled to only up to the amount of taxes
owed. A
Non-Refundable Credits cannot reduce the after-credit taxes paid below zero and,
thereby, lead to a payment from the government.
A
Refundable Credits
(e.g., the
Earned
Income Tax Credit)
is a credit for which the taxpayer is entitled to the full amount of the
credit whether
the credit exceeds the amount of before-credit taxes owed or not. If the
amount of a
Refundable Credits exceeds the before-credit
taxes owed, the taxpayer pays no taxes, and the government must pay
(refund) to the taxpayer the difference between the tax credit and the
before-credit taxes owed.
The average and total benefits received by each income group from
Refundable Credits are shown in Table
14.8.
This table shows the way in which
Refundable Credits, the forth largest
category of tax expenditures, redistributed income from the general
taxpayer to the various income groups within society. Here we find that
$22.3 billion of the $122.9 billion of the Total Benefit from
Refundable Credits (18%) went to the poorest
quintile with an Average Benefit of $972 while only $11.4 billion
(9%) of the benefits of this tax expenditure went to the richest quintile
with an Average Benefit of $496.
If we break down the richest quintile we find that all of the $11.4
billion worth of Total Benefit that went to the top 20% of the
income distribution went to the 80%-99% income group with an Average Benefit of $522. None went to
the Top 1%.
The largest
beneficiary of the
Refundable Credits tax-expenditure
entitlement in terms of Average Benefit is the 2nd Quintile
of the income distribution with an Average Benefit of $1,900. At
the same time, the 3rd Quintile also received a respectable share
of the benefits from this tax-expenditure entitlement with an Average
Benefit of $1,217, and the 4th Quintile and 80%-99%
income group received an Average Benefit equal to 79% ($769) and
51% ($496), respectively, of the $972 Average Benefit received by
the poorest quintile.
When we compare the bottom and top 40% of the income distribution we find
that the bottom 40% received 54% ($65.9 billion) of the $122.9 billion of
Total Benefit from
Refundable Credits while the top 40%
received only 24% ($29.0 billion) of these benefits, the difference being
$36.9 billion. This $36.9 billion was equivalent to 9% of the
$$444.7 billion the federal government spent
on welfare in 2007.[14.4]
Refundable Credits
is the only category of tax expenditure that has the net effect of
redistributing income from the general taxpayer to the bottom 40% of the
income distribution.
Non-Refundable
Credits
The average and total
benefits received by each income group from
Non-Refundable Credits
are shown in Table 14.9.
Non-Refundable Credits
are the second smallest category of tax expenditures with only $13.7
billion in Total Benefit. This category is rather insignificant
compared to the federal budget and the other categories of tax
expenditures. Here we find
that only $0.2 billion of the $13.7 billion of Total Benefit from
Non-Refundable Credits (less than 2%) went to
the poorest quintile with an Average Benefit of $9 while $2.7
billion (20%) went to the richest quintile with an Average Benefit
of $119.
If we break down the richest quintile we find that all of the $2.7
billion worth of Total Benefit that went to the top 20% of the
income distribution went to the 80%-99% income group with an
Average Benefit of $125. None went to the Top 1%.
The largest beneficiary of the
Non-Refundable Credits tax-expenditure
entitlement in terms of Average Benefit is the 3rd Quintile
with an Average Benefit of $182, and the 4rt Quintile ran a
close second with an Average Benefit of $179. At the same time,
the 2nd Quintile and 80%-99% income group received an
Average Benefit equal to 58% ($106) and 69% ($125), respectively, of
the $182 Average Benefit received by the 3rd Quintile.
When we compare the bottom 40% of the income distribution with the top 40%
we find that the bottom 40% received 19% ($2.6 billion) of the $13.7
billion worth of Total Benefit from
Non-Refundable Credits while the top 40%
received 50% ($6.8 billion) of these benefits, the difference being $4.2
billion. This difference was equivalent to 1% of the
$444.7 billion the federal government spent
on welfare in 2007.
Most capital gains were
taxed at a maximum tax rate of 15% in 2007, rather than at the rates that
apply to other forms of taxable income, and
qualified dividends
were taxed at the same rates as capital gains.
The average and total
benefits received by each income group from
Capital Gains/Dividends
are shown in Table 14.10.
This table shows the way in which
Capital
Gains/Dividends,
the third largest category of tax expenditures, redistributed income from
the general taxpayer to the various income groups within society. Here we
find that none of the $98.8 billion of Total Benefit from
Capital
Gains/Dividends
went to the poorest quintile while some $96.0 billion (97%) went to the
richest quintile with an Average Benefit of $4,184.
If we break down the richest quintile we find that 93% ($88.9
billion) of the $96.0 billion worth of Total Benefit that went to
the top 20% of the income distribution, in fact, went to the Top 1%
with an Average Benefit of $77,466. The largest beneficiary of the
Capital
Gains/Dividends
tax-expenditure entitlement in terms of Average Benefit is clearly
the Top 1% of the income distribution which exceeded the next
highest Average Benefit, $327 received by the 80%-99%,
income group by $77,139.
When we compare the bottom 40% of the income distribution with the top 40%
we find that the bottom 40% received less than 1% ($0.1 billion) of the
$95.5 billion of the Total Benefit from
Capital Gains/Dividends went to the bottom
40% while the top 40% received more than 99% ($98.2 billion) of these
benefits, the difference being $98.1 billion. This was equivalent to 22%
of the
$$444.7 billion the federal government spent
on welfare in 2007.
It is worth noting that the $77,466 Average Benefit the
Top 1% received from the single tax-expenditure entitlement
category
Capital
Gains/Dividends
far exceeded the Average Benefit in Table 14.4 from all
tax expenditures for any other income group. The next closest was the
80%-99% income group with a total Average Benefit from all tax
expenditures of $14,315. It is also fairly safe to say that the
$77,466 Average Benefit the Top 1% received from the single
tax-expenditure entitlement category
Capital
Gains/Dividends
far exceeded any cash welfare benefit ever received by anyone on welfare.
The special treatment of
Capital Gains/Dividends in the tax code is
clearly a far more lucrative welfare program for the wealthy than any
welfare program available to the poor.
In its 2007 report,
Estimates of Federal Tax Expenditures for Fiscal Years 2007-2011,
the
Joint Committee on Taxation provided estimates of
all federal tax-expenditure programs that were expected to reduce federal
tax revenue by $50 million or more over the course of five years. Of the 172
programs the committee so identified, the 31 largest are itemized in
Table 14.11 below along with the total expenditure (i.e.,
expected revenue loss) associated with each
program in 2007 and the percentages of the budget and of GDP that the
program's expenditure represented. These are gross tax expenditures in that
they estimate by how much government revenue was reduced as a result of each
program without considering the way in which tax-expenditure programs
interact were a given program or group of programs to be eliminated.
The 31 programs itemized
in Table 14.11 include all of the programs identified by the
Joint Committee on Taxation that were expected to
cost the federal government $5 billion (i.e., 0.18% of the budget or 0.04%
of GDP) or more in 2007 where 2007 has been chosen as the year of comparison
because that was before the current economic crisis began to take its toll
and distort the federal budget. These were the largest tax-expenditure
entitlement programs in the federal budget in 2007, and they accounted for
$912 billion of the $1,035 billion worth of tax expenditures identified by
the committee.
Table 14.11: Major Tax-Expenditure Programs, 2007.
Source:
Joint Committee on Taxes. (1)
The purposes of
tax-expenditure entitlements that fall under the headings of General
Science, Space, and Technology, International affairs and
General Purpose Fiscal Assistance in Table
14.11 are relatively straightforward and are only tangentially related
to the concept of income redistribution. In any event, tax-expenditures on
these programs amounted to some $86.0 billion in 2007, were equivalent to
3.2% of the federal budget, and accounted for some 8.3% of the tax
expenditures identified by the Joint Committee in 2007.
The tax-expenditure
entitlements that are most closely associated with our welfare programs are
to be found under the headings Education and training,
Employment, Social Services,
Housing, Income
Security, Healthcare, and Commerce.
Education
and Training
The programs designed to
promote Education and Training are relatively insignificant. The only
program that exceeded $5 billion in expected forgone revenue in 2007 was the
$6.6 billion that went to
Deduction for charitable contributions to educational institutions.
This amounted to only 0.24% of the budget and 0.05% of GDP in that year,
and, in total, tax expenditures Education and Training amounted to
only $18.7 billion and 0.69% of the budget and 0.13% of GDP.
These programs,
undoubtedly, aid some in the lower income groups.
Employment
Employment fared
somewhat better in the federal tax-expenditure budget with two programs that
exceed $5 billion in 2007:
-
$30
billion that went to
Exclusion of benefits provided under cafeteria plans.
-
$6.6
billion that went to
Exclusion of miscellaneous fringe benefits.
This $36.6 billion of
expected forgone revenue provided a subsidy to those who receive a portion
of their income in the form of in-kind fringe benefits. These programs were
equivalent to 1.34% of the budget and 0.27% of GDP in 2007, and the total
for this category ($42.3 billion) amounted to 1.55% of the budget and 0.31%
of GDP.
Social
Services
Social Services
also had two programs that exceeded $5 billion in the tax-expenditure
budget:
-
$45.0
billion for the
Tax credit for children under age 17.
-
$33.8
billion for
Deduction for charitable contributions other than for education and health.
Here we find the
Tax credit for children under age 17 which
amounted to 1.24% of the federal budget and 0.24% of GDP in 2007, and
Deduction for charitable contributions other than for education and health
which amounted to 1.24% of the federal budget and 0.24% of GDP in 2007. The
sum of these two items under Social Services came to 2.89% of the
budget and 0.57% of GDP in 2007, and the total for this category ($83.1
billion) came to 3.05% of the budget and 0.60% of GDP.
Four programs exceeded $5
billion under the heading Housing in Table 14.11:
-
$73.7
billion for
Deductibility for mortgage interest on owner-occupied residences,
-
$16.8
billion for
Deduction for property taxes on owner-occupied residences,
-
$28.5
billion for
Exclusion of capital gains on sale of principal residence.
-
$5.1
billion for
Tax credit for low-incoming (sic)
housing.
The sum of these four
subsidies ($124.1 billion) amounted to 4.55% of the federal budget and 0.89%
of GDP in 2007, and the total for this category ($131.1) came to 4.80% of
the budget and 0.95% of GDP.
Of these four items, only
the $5.1 billion
Tax credit for low-incoming housing expenditure
(4.1% of the total) is designed to benefit the poor. The rest of these
programs are designed to benefit middle and upper income groups who can
afford to own their own home.
In comparing these
tax-expenditures to the federal
Housing assistance welfare programs we find that
the gross tax-expenditure subsidies in Housing that went to middle
and upper income groups far exceeded the welfare
Housing assistance that went to indigent
individuals and the working poor. In fact they were more than three and a
half times the $32.0 billion
in welfare
Housing assistance expenditures that went to
indigent individuals and the working poor in 2007.
There are also four
programs that exceeded $5 billion under the heading Healthcare in
Table 14.11:
-
$105.7 billion for
Exclusion of employer contributions for health care, health insurance.
premiums, and long-term care insurance premiums.
-
$8.4
billion for
Deduction for medical expenses and long-term care expenses.
-
$7.5
billion for
Exclusion of workers' compensation benefits (medical benefits).
-
$40.9
billion for
Exclusion of Medicare benefits in excess of cost.
These subsidies amounted
to $162.5 billion in 2007 and were equivalent to 5.95% of the budget and
1.17% of GDP, and the total in this category ($176.9 billion) came to 6.48%
of the budget and 1.28% of GDP.
These gross benefits from
the programs accrued mostly to the middle and upper income groups, and while
this $176.9 billion federal entitlement subsidy
in Healthcare is somewhat less, it is of the same order of magnitude
as the federal healthcare subsidy provided by the federal
Medicaid program which amounted to
$190.6 billion and was
equal to 6.99% of the budget
and 1.37% of GDP in 2007.
Next we come to Income
Security which contains five programs that exceed $5 billion in forgone
revenue by the federal government:
-
$108.6 billion for
Net exclusion of pension contributions and earnings: Employer plans.
-
$15.5
billion for
Individual retirement plans.
-
$8.8
billion for
Plans covering partners and sole proprietors (sometimes referred to as
"Keogh plans").
-
$5.5
billion for
Exclusion of untaxed social security and railroad retirement benefits.
-
$44.7
billion for
Earned income credit (EIC).
Here we find the
Earned income tax credit (Earned
income credit (EIC) which amounted to some $44.7
billion in 2007, 1.64% of the budget, and 0.32% of GDP. This program is
specifically designed to benefit lower income groups.
The fourth program under
the Income Security heading in Table
14.11,
Exclusion of untaxed social security and railroad retirement benefits,
is relatively insignificant at only $5.5 billion, but the other three
programs that fall under the
Income Security heading are significant,
especially when they are combined.
Net exclusion of pension contributions and earnings: Employer plans,
Individual retirement plans, and
Plans covering partners and sole proprietors (sometimes referred to as
"Keogh plans") all subsidize various forms of
private pension plans. The cost of these three subsidies summed to $132.9
billion in 2007, and they were equivalent to 4.87% of the federal budget and
0.95% of the GDP in that year.
When we compare the
$132.9 billion paid out through these three tax expenditure entitlement
programs—which
mostly benefited middle and upper-income individuals—to
the cash welfare payments from the
Supplemental Security Income (SSI) program that
went to “the
aged, blind, and disabled who have little or no income . . . to meet basic
needs for food, clothing, and shelter” in 2007 we
find that these three programs provided benefits that were four times the
$32.8 billion in benefits
paid out by SSI. In fact, these three tax-expenditure entitlement subsidies
provided a benefit to middle and upper income groups that was greater than
the entire $123.5 billion federal
cash-payment welfare budget in 2007.
Finally, we get to the
last major heading in Table 14.11 that has yet to be examined:
Commerce. Six tax-expenditure programs
exceeding $5 billion in tax expenditures fell under this heading in 2007:
-
$127.1 billion for
Reduced rates of tax on dividends and long-term capital gains.
-
$51.9
billion for
Exclusion of capital gains at death.
-
$28.6
billion for
Exclusion of investment income on life insurance and annuity contracts.
-
$5.6
billion for
Deduction for income attributable to domestic production activities.
-
$5.5
billion for
Carryover basis of capital gains on gifts.
-
$5.1
billion for
Deferral of gain on non-dealer installment sales.
These six programs
amounted to $223.8 billion in 2007 and would appear to have little purpose
in the tax code other than to benefit middle and upper-income groups within
our society. They were equivalent to 8.20% of the budget and 1.61% of GDP in
2007, and the total in this category ($250.9 billion) came to 9.19% of the
budget and 1.81% of GDP.
This $250.9 billion
tax-expenditure entitlement subsidy to the middle and upper-income groups
within our society amounted to $47.6 billion more that the
$203.3 billion the
federal government paid out in medical benefits to the indigent and working
poor in 2007 and was actually $11.1 billion greater
than the entire $239.8 billion the federal
government spent on all federal non-medical welfare programs in that year.
Appendix on Welfare in 2013
Table 13.2 gives the
welfare expenditures
in
the
Office of Management and Budget’s
Table 11.3—Outlays for Payments for Individuals for each program in 2012 along with the percent of GDP and of the federal budget that each program represented
in that year.
Table
14.12: Federal Welfare Programs and Expenditures, 2013.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
10.1)
[14.1]
The extent to which
Other public assistance programs should be
included in cash-payment or non-cash-welfare programs is not clear. This
item is arbitrarily included in non-cash-payment programs for present
purposes, but it is important to realize that these programs represented
only 0.01% of the budget in 2007 and, thus, represent little more than
rounding error in the numbers that follow or those that have been discussed
above.
[14.2] The Average Benefit in
this table is obtained by multiplying the
Tax Expenditures as a Percentage of After-Tax Income
for Total in Table 14.3 (i.e., the Benefit / After-Tax Income column in
Table 14.4 is obtained from the line for
Total
in Table 14.3) by the Average
After-Tax Income that is provided by the
Congressional Budget Office
for each income group. The Total Benefit in Table 14.4 is
calculated by multiplying the number of households in each group as provided
by the
Census
Bureau
by the Average Benefit of each income group.
[14.3] The 80%-99% income group is
not contained in Table 14.3, but the Total Benefit received
by this income group is easily calculated by subtracting the Total
Benefit received by the Top 1% from those received by the 5th
Quintile. The Number of Households in this group is give by
difference between the number of households in the 5th Quintile and
Top 1%, and the Average Benefit is given by the ratio of
Total Benefit and the Number of Households in this group. Since
the average income of the 5th Quintile (Y5) is equal to
the Total Income in this quintile divided by the Number of households
in each quintile (N), the average income of this quintile is given by:
(1) Y5 = [Y19x(19/20)N + Y1x(N/20)]
/ N,
where Y19 and Y1 are the average
incomes of the 80%-99% and Top 1% income groups,
respectively. Thus, the Average Income of the 80%-99% income
group is given by:
(2) Y19 = (Y5 - Y1/20)
x ( 20/19).
It should also be
noted that the Excel spreadsheet by which all of the calculations in this
note have been made can be downloaded by
clicking on this link.
[14.4] It should be noted that there is a
bit of double counting here. The $122.9
billion of the Total
Benefit from the
Refundable Credits
includes the refunded portion of this tax expenditure which amounted to
over
$54.5 billion in 2007. The refunded portion of this tax expenditure was an actual expenditure in
the federal budget in 2007 and is included in the total of
$444.7 billion
the federal government spent on welfare in that year.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 15:
Federal Versus Non-Federal Debt
George H. Blackford © 2012, last updated 5/16/2014
This
chapter examines the fundamental difference between federal debt and non-federal
debt and the lessons that should have been learned from the 1930s with regard to
the importance of this difference as it relates to economic policy and the
stability of the economic system.
There is
a fundamental difference between federal debt and non-federal debt that
arises from the fact that the federal government has the legal right to
print money. Since the federal government can print money there is no
reason to believe it will ever be unable to service its
debt since it can always print the money it needs if it has to. Non-federal
debtors cannot print money. They must service their debts out of
income or through the sale of assets and, as a result, are always at risk of
being unable to meet their financial obligations.
The fact
that the federal government has the power to print money does not mean we do
not have to worry about federal debt or that “deficits
don’t matter”
as was the mantra of the Bush II administration. It matters a lot just how
those deficits are created and how they are financed, but the fact that the federal
government has the power to print money means that the federal debt problem
is a much easier problem to deal with than the non-federal debt problem.
It also means that the federal government has the power to mitigate the
overall debt problem we face through the judicious management of its budget
in a way that non-federal debtors do not.
When the
federal government borrows and uses the proceeds to finance an increase in
expenditures for goods and services in the face of an economic downturn it
increases spending in the economy directly and thereby directly increases
the demand for goods and services.
The same
is true when the government borrows in this situation to increase transfer
payments (such as increased payments for agricultural subsidies,
unemployment compensation, or aid to municipalities) or to finance tax cuts
that created the need to borrow in the first place, though here the effect
on the demands for goods and services is less certain in that these effects
are indirect. They can have an effect on the demands for goods and
services only to the extent that those who received the transfer payments or
tax cuts increase their spending as a result. There is, of course, no
guarantee this will occur.
Deficits
that occur during an economic downturn that help to maintain or increase
expenditures on education, scientific research, public health systems,
police and fire protection, bridges, highways, and other forms of public
transportation all have the direct effect of stimulating the economy.
Even expenditures that arise from increases in the kinds of transfer
payments embodied in food stamps, unemployment compensation, school lunch
programs, Medicaid, and other kinds of social welfare programs that tend to
increase during an economic downturn help to stimulate the economy since
most of these transfers go to people who live hand to mouth, and, therefore,
are more or less forced to spend.
In
addition, most, if not all of these kinds of expenditures, whether direct
expenditures or social welfare transfers, have the added benefit of making
it possible to improve productivity in the future by improving our public
infrastructure and warding off the malnutrition and other health problems
that are the inevitable consequence of people becoming destitute in the wake
of an economic downturn. Thus, running a deficit to finance these
kinds of expenditures and transfer payments during an economic downturn adds
stability to the system and has the potential to help the economy grow and,
thereby, to reduce the burden of servicing the debt that deficits create.
By the
same token, deficits that occur during prosperous times or that are created
in the midst of an economic downturn by giving tax cuts and increasing
transfer payments to the ultra wealthy who, in turn, use the proceeds to buy
the bonds needed to finance the deficits created by the transfers and tax cuts in the
first place do not stimulate the economy and do not have the added benefit
of having the potential to improve productivity in the future. They simply
increase the transfer burden from debtors (i.e., taxpayers) to creditors as
they distort the allocation of resources within the system with a dead loss
to the society as a whole. In addition, this kind of fiscal
irresponsibility on the part of the government has the potential to create
chaos within the economic system.
Even
though there is no default risk to federal debt, when federal debt grows
faster than the GDP it increases the burden of transfers from debtors to
creditors which can lead to serious problems, especially if the debt is
foreign owned. In addition, there is a huge risk of inflation as the
federal debt grows if it reaches the point where the government cannot raise
the money to service its debt through taxes or borrowing and is forced to
print money. The resulting inflation can have the effect of increasing
interest rates and, thereby, making the transfer problem worse as it weakens
our position in international markets. If severe enough,
hyperinflation
can lead to a total collapse of the monetary system as creditors refuse to
enter into contracts of any sort that are written in terms of the domestic
currency.
Thus, the
ability of the federal government to print money is not a blank check that
allows the federal government to do whatever it chooses. It only gives the
federal government a degree of flexibility in managing its affairs that no
other entity within the economic system has, but the federal budget must be
managed responsibly if catastrophe is to be avoided. This does not mean
that the budget should always be balanced or that federal debt should be
paid off as quickly as possible. As we will see, attempting to do so
can have disastrous consequences.
What it
does mean, however, is that during an economic downturn the deficit and debt
must be increased in such a way as to maximize the economic stimulus while,
at the same time, alleviating human misery and building up our public
infrastructure as much as possible in order to minimize the economic decline
and increase our ability to produce in the future. It also means
eliminating unproductive or wasteful programs and expenditures during
prosperous times and increasing taxes to pay for the government programs and
expenditures that are essential to our economic and social wellbeing.
Not
managing the budget in this way and, in particular, not increasing taxes to
pay for the government programs and expenditures that are essential to our
economic and social wellbeing while giving tax cuts to those who have no
need to spend the proceeds during an economic downturn is courting disaster.
(Stiglitz
Klein
Johnson Crotty
Bhagwati
Philips
Galbraith
Morris
Reinhart
Kindleberger
Smith
Eichengreen
Rodrik
Krugman)
In spite
of the fact that 80% of our total debt is non-federal debt, there has
been an extraordinary amount of concern since 2008 over the growing national
debt. This concern is dangerously misplaced. It is the
$47 trillion of non-federal debt that existed at the end of 2013 that we should be
most concerned about, not the $12 trillion federal debt. The most serious
problem we face today is the fact that the non-federal debt stood at 278% of
GDP in 2013. As was noted in Chapter 3,
a ratio of this magnitude places a huge transfer burden on the
financial system, a burden that places the entire economic system at
risk.
The fundamental problem faced by non-federal debtors is that they must
service their debts out of income. When they cannot service their debts out
of income
they must refinance their debts when they come due, and, failing that,
they are forced to sell assets. If they lack the assets to sell, their only
option is to default.
As was explained in
Chapter 5, and elaborated on in Chapter 6 and Chapter 10, the forced selling of assets and
defaults on non-federal debt leads to falling asset prices that threaten the
solvency of those financial institutions that hold similar kinds of assets,
not just the creditors of those who sell assets or default on their debts.
Since all of the major financial institutions hold similar kinds of assets,
a non-federal debt ratio as high as 278% of GDP poses a threat to the entire
financial system in that it imposes such a transfer burden on debtors that
even a minor shock to the system, such as an increase in interest rates or a
slowdown in the rate of growth of GDP, has the potential to initiate a wave
of distress selling and defaults that puts the entire financial system at
risk. This is, of course, what was in the process of happening in 2007
through the summer of 2009.
The increase in interest rates from
2005 through 2007 led to a fall in housing prices and increasing defaults in the mortgage market which, in turn, led to the
downturn in economic activity we experienced from the fall of 2007 through
the summer or 2009. This left financial institutions in a precarious
situation as they struggled to get as many risky assets off their books as possible for fear of being forced into insolvency should the
economic situation get worse. At the same time, debtors found it more
difficult to refinance their debts, and many financial institutions were
forced to refinance existing loans in order to avoid having to take a loss
on those loans. As a result, the financial intermediation process
broke down as debtors found it more difficult to meet their financial
obligations; financial institutions began to fail, and those that survived refused to make new loans and
resisted refinancing existing loans. It took the heroic actions of the Federal
Reserve and tremulous actions of the federal government examined in
Chapter 10 to keep the system form collapsing.
It should
be obvious that if the federal government had attempted to balance its
budget by cutting its expenditures in this situation the result would
have been an even further fall in the economy. This would have
decreased the amount of spending which would have forced an even greater number of
non-federal debtors to liquidate assets or default on their
financial obligations in a situation in which the entire financial system
was on the verge of collapse.
It should also be obvious that
it is going to be virtually impossible for financial institutions to
intermediate between borrowers and lenders in such a way as to allow the
economy to recover from this crisis in a reasonable amount of time without
further government stimulus since the only way financial intermediation can
do this is by increasing debt, and it is virtually
impossible for financial intermediation to increase debt with a non-federal
debt ratio of 278% in the
absence of massive investment opportunities, real or imagined, to justify
this increase.
Given the experiences we have
had with imaginary investment opportunities
over the past thirty years and the disastrous consequences that have
followed, it is unlikely we will be able to rely on another stock market or
real estate bubble to provide yet another temporary solution to this
problem. And since the real investment opportunities needed to accomplish
this are wanting, we are not likely to be able to get out of the hole we
have dug ourselves into through yet another massive increase in debt.
At the same time, there is no
reason to think we can solve this problem by purging the system of debt by
balancing the federal budget and forcing debtors to default through
conservative monetary and fiscal policy. That certainly didn’t work in
the 1930s.
Figure 15.1
shows the relationship between GDP and total, non-federal, and federal debt
from 1929 through 1941. It also shows what happened when the system was
allowed to purge itself of debt from 1929 through 1933 by forcing debtors to
liquidate their assets or default.
Source:
Historical Statistics of the U.S. (Cj870), Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5).
As non-federal debt fell from $175
billion in 1929 to $144 billion in 1933, GDP fell from $105 billion to $57
billion. Thus, in the process of purging $31 billion worth of
non-federal debt from the system GDP fell by $47 billion.
The end result was an 18% fall in
non-federal debt accompanied by an 45% fall in GDP as the ratio of non-federal debt to GDP went from 168%
of GDP to 252% of GDP. In the meantime, over
10,000 banks failed along with
129,000 other businesses; the unemployment rate soared to
25%
of the
labor force, and
12
million people found themselves unemployed by the time this purging of debt
came to an end.
This was the legacy of Andrew Melon's
infamous advice
to
Herbert Hoover:
. . . liquidate labor, liquidate stocks, liquidate farmers,
liquidate real estate… it will purge the rottenness out of the system. High
costs of living and high living will come down. People will work harder, live
a more moral life. Values will be adjusted, and enterprising people will pick
up from less competent people. (Hoover)
The purging of debt from 1929
through 1933 led us into the depths of the Great Depression, and it is
instructive to examine just how we got there.
Figure 15.2 shows the gross domestic product
deflator along with the money supply,
High-Powered Money,
and
member bank reserves from 1929 through 1941.[15.1]
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis, (1.1.6A), Economic Report of the
President 1960 (D40
D42).
As is
shown in this figure, the
demand for currency outside of banks was unchanged in 1929 and 1930 as
currency in circulation remained at $3.6 billion in both of those years.
It then increased by $900 billion in 1931 as the banking crisis that began
in October of 1930 took
hold and increased by an additional $200 million in 1932. By 1933
currency in circulation stood at $4.8 billion and had increased by a total
of $1.2 billion since 1930.
This 33%
increase in demand for currency outside of banks was met by an increase in
High-Powered Money that followed a similar pattern as the increase in the
demand for currency, but with a lag: High-Powered Money remained
unchanged at $6.0 billion in 1929 and 1930, increased by $844 million in
1931, actually fell by $9 million in the midst of the crisis in 1931 as
member-bank reserves fell by $200 million, and then increased by $329
million as the total increased to $7.1 billion in 1933.
This
lag in the creation of High-Powered Money on the part of the Federal
Reserve, combined with the overall timidity of its response to the crisis,
allowed member-bank reserves to fall by $265 million from 1930 through 1932
as banks struggled to maintain their solvency in the face of falling asset
prices brought on by the stock market crash and the economic downturn that
followed.
As a result, the money supply
began to fall in 1930 as banks
tried to improve their financial situation by refusing to make new loans or to
renew existing loans in an attempt to hang on to their reserves. In
the process, currency plus all deposits fell by 22% from 1929 through 1933
(from $54.7 billion to $42.6 billion) while currency plus demand deposits
fell by 25% (from $26.4 billion to $19.8 billion).
In turn, the process by which
this contraction of the money supply took place—banks refusing to make new
loans or to renew existing loans—had a devastating effect on prices as
business were forced to mark down their inventories and sell them off at a
loss. It also had a devastating effect on wages as employers found it
impossible to maintain the level of wages they had previously been able to
pay as the prices at which they were able to sell the output they produced
fell.
The deflation that resulted from
1929 through 1933 as the Federal Reserve sat back and
allowed the system to purge its debt is clearly shown in
Figure 15.2 by the 26%
fall in the GDP deflator
from 119 in 1929 to 88 in 1933.
Figure 15.3 shows the
total outlays, receipts, and surpluses of the federal government from 1929
through 1941 along with the rate of unemployment and the output of goods and
services as given by real GDP measured in
1937
prices.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis, (3.2
1.1.6A),
Economic Report of the President, 1967
(B20).
As is shown in this figure,
federal government expenditures gradually
increased from 2.8% of GDP in 1929 to 6.5% in 1933 as actual expenditures
increased from $2.9 billion to $3.7 billion and tax receipts fell from $3.7
billion to $2.6 billion. In the process the budget
went from a $800 million surplus to a $1.1 billion deficit.
In the meantime, real GDP
measured in 1937 prices fell from $88.2 billion to $65.0 billion, a 26.3% decrease in the output of goods and services
produced. When this fall in output was combined with 25% fall in prices
shown in
Figure 15.2
it brought about the 46% fall in GDP shown in
Figure 15.1. Thus, while
non-federal debt decreased by $31.2 billion during this period, this
decrease was partially offset by a $7.8 billion increase in federal debt as
tax revenues fell and emergency spending increased. At the same time,
GDP fell from $104 billion in 1929 to $56 billion in 1933 as the total debt
ratio exploded from 183% to 295% of GDP and, as was noted above, the non-federal debt ratio
increased from 168% to 252% of GDP.
In the end, a net $23 billion of
debt was purged from the system by forcing debtors to liquidate their assets
or to default on their debts, a reduction equal to 22% of the total in 1929.
In the
process of purging this debt, the total debt to GDP ratio—and along with it, the burden of servicing the
remaining debt—went through the roof as this ratio increased by 111
percentage points to 283% of GDP and the non-federal debt ratio increase by
the 84 percentage points to 252% of GDP as gross income (i.e., nominal GDP) fell by 45%
and output (i.e., real GDP) by 26%. And it is worth emphasizing again
that along the way over
10,000
banks failed along with
129,000 other businesses; the unemployment rate soared to
25% of the labor
force, and
12 million
people found themselves unemployed by the time this purging of debt came to
an end.
It
wasn’t until after the Federal Reserve allowed High-Powered
Money to increase dramatically following 1933 (Figure
15.2) in a way that allowed banks to increase
their excess reserves dramatically—from virtually zero ($60 million) in 1931
to $770 million in 1933 to $1.8 billion in 1934 and to $3.0 billion
in1935—that the purging of debt came to an end. And it wasn’t until after
government expenditures had increased to 10.7% of GDP ($6.6 billion) and the
government’s budget had gone from a surplus equal to 0.7% of GDP in 1929 to
a deficit (negative surplus) of 5.9% of GDP ($3.6 billion) in 1934 (Figure
15.3) that debt
stopped falling and the rate of unemployment began to fall as GDP began to
increase (Figure 15.1).
In other words, the debt problem
that was created in the 1920s and was allowed to cripple the economy from
1929 through 1933 was not resolved by forcing debt to be purged from the
system through conservative monetary and fiscal policies. It was resolved
through the active participation
of the Federal Reserve in providing the excess reserves needed by the
banking system to end the implosion of the financial system that took place
from 1929 through 1933, and through the active participation of the federal
government to stimulate the economy through an increase in government
expenditures that increased the demand for goods and services and made it
possible for the economic system to grow.
Even then it took the
1933 bank holiday
in which all the banks were forced to close and then reopened with a
deposit guarantee on the part of the federal government
before the carnage caused by the
downward spiral of debt, GDP, and employment was brought to an end.
It is also worth noting that the deleveraging in the economy that took place as the total debt ratio went
from 295% of GDP in 1933 to 163% by 1941 took place through an increase in
GDP, not through a decrease in debt. Total debt increased from
$168 billion in 1933 to $211 billion in 1941 while non-federal debt
increased from $144 billion to $155. At the same time GDP went from
$57 billion to $129 billion. (Figure
15.1) Clearly,
it was the increase in GDP that was facilitated by the increase in
government expenditures and expansionary monetary policy that led to the decrease in the debt ratio following
1933, not a fall in debt.
Yet another important lesson to
be learned from the 1930s, that has particular relevance today, is the results
of the change in government policy following 1936 as federal government
attempted to balance its budget by cutting its expenditures and the Federal
Reserve increased reserve requirements
in an attempt to eliminate the excess reserves in the banking system.
As the federal expenditures and
excess reserves began to fall from 1936 through 1938 (Figure
15.2
and
Figure 15.3) the increase
in output ended and GDP began to fall again as the rate of unemployment and the
debt ratios began to rise. In other words, when the federal
government cut its expenditures in 1936 through 1938 and the Federal Reserve
tried to eliminate the excess reserves in the banking system during this
period, the economic recovery ended and the economy slipped back into a
recession. The economic system did not recover from this shock until the
federal government and Federal Reserve reversed their policies and
government expenditures and excess reserves began to increase again after
1938.
The government’s attempt to
return to conservative monetary and fiscal policy in 1936 managed to
reduce the excess reserves in the banking system by 68% in 1937 and to
nearly balance
the federal budget in 1938, but at the cost of a jump in unemployment from
15.6% of the labor force in 1937 to
18.1%
in 1938
as the output of goods and services fell by 3.5%, and the federal debt to GDP ratio went from 42.7 in 1937 to 46.2 in 1939. It
is exceedingly difficult to explain just how the benefits gained, whatever
them may have been, from this
exercise in conservative monetary and fiscal policy justified these costs.
There are at least three fundamental lessons that should have been learned
from our experiences during the Great Depression.
The first lesson that should
have been learned from the 1930s is that implementing a conservative
monetary and fiscal policies that forces non-federal
debt to be purged from the system by forcing debtors to liquidate their
assets and default on their financial obligations in the face of an economic
downturn is not a good idea. Such policies drove the system into a downward spiral
from 1929 through 1933 that didn’t come to an end until after those policies
came to an end.
The importance of this lesson is
reinforced by the fact that when these self-defeating policies were resumed
following 1936 the economic recovery that their abandonment had begun came
to an end. The economy again faltered in the wake of these policy
changes and began yet another downward
spiral that didn’t come to an end until these policies were abandoned for a
second time.
A Timid Response Does Not Work
The second lesson that should
have been learned from the 1930s is that a timid response on the part of the
government to increase reserves and government expenditures in the face of
a financial crisis is not enough. This lesson should
have been made clear by the fact that the unemployment
rate never fell below
14%
during the Great Depression and the unemployment problem was not completely
overcome until the federal government began to mobilize for World
II. It was only after the ideas of a conservative monetary policy and
budget balancing fiscal policy were abandoned and the government began to
prepare for World War
II that government expenditures and High-Powered Money expanded enough
Finally, one of the most
important lessons that should have been learned from the 1930s, and one that has particular
relevance today, is that in bringing about the recovery from the downward
spiral of income, output, and employment in the 1930s the federal government
did not resort to squandering its resources on worthless tax cuts and
transfers to the upper echelons of the society who were able to use the
proceeds to purchase the government bonds needed to finance the tax cuts and
transfers.
The increases in government
expenditures following 1933 were funded, in part, by
at least nine significant tax increases that took place during the Great
Depression, starting with the
Revenue Act of 1932 which
took effect in 1933. (Romer) In so
doing the federal government was able to maximize the stimulus effect of its
increases in expenditures in the most fiscally responsible way as it
partially financed its increases in expenditures by taxing those who were unwilling
to spend. This minimized the negative effect of tax increases on spending
while, at the same time, mitigated the effect of the increases in government
expenditures on the national debt. As can be seen in
Figure 15.1,
the federal debt ratio had stabilized quite dramatically by
1935 in spite of the increase in government expenditures and the resulting
deficits in the federal budget.
As a result of the tax increases
that took place during the 1930s, the federal debt ratio stood at 42% of GDP in
1937, just as it had in 1933, in spite of the oversize deficits that had
occurred over the preceding four years as those deficits managed to
facilitate a 40% increase in output and a 36% reduction in the rate of
unemployment. The federal government would not have been able to accomplish
this kind of stability in the ratio of its budget to GDP had it not been for
the kind of fiscal responsibility provided by the tax increases embodied in
the revenue acts of the 1930s.
By 2008
total domestic debt stood a 364% of GDP, non-federal debt stood at 321%, and
federal debt was 43% of GDP. The top 1% of the income distribution claimed
17.7% of total income, and the current account deficit was at 4.6% of GDP. This situation proved to be unsustainable, and there has been very little
improvement since 2008. While our current account balance fell to 2.7% of
GDP by 2013 and non-federal
debt fell by 43 percentage points to 278%, the total debt ratio fell by only
13 percentage points to 351% of GDP. As can be seen
from Figure 15.4, these debt numbers are comparable to those at the
depths of the Great Depression.
Source:
Federal Reserve (L1),
Historical Statistics of the U.S.
(Cj870
Ca9-19),
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5).[15.2]
In
comparing today with 1933, only the unemployment rate is better—7.4% of the
labor force in 2013 versus
24.9% in 1933—but even this is a mixed blessing. It took four years to reduce the debt ratio by 100 percentage points
following 1933, and, as was indicated above, the primary mechanism by which
this was accomplished was by putting people back to work as the rate of
unemployment fell from
24.9% of the labor force in 1933 to
14.3% by 1937. This, in turn, was accomplished through monetary and fiscal policy
as the Federal Reserve allowed High-Powered Money to increase in a way that allowed
banks to increase their excess reserves and the federal government to increase
both
its taxes and expenditures. In the process, GDP increased by 63% output
by 44% and prices by 10% as the federal debt ratio
stabilized. With an unemployment rate of
only
7.4%
in 2013 we are not going to be able to reduce the debt ratio by decreasing
the rate of unemployment by 10 percentage points as we did in the 1930s
without a significant increase in the labor force participation rate which
has fallen by 3.7
percentages points since 2000.
Figure
15.5
shows how
the Federal Reserve and federal government have responded to the current
crisis. It is clear from this figure that the Federal Reserve has learned
the lessons of the 1930s as those lessons pertain to monetary policy in that
the Fed dramatically increased the amount of High-Powered Money needed to
meet the demands of banks for excess reserves in the midst of this crisis. This figure also indicates that the federal government also learned some
of the lessons of the 1930s with regard to fiscal policy in that the federal
government allowed its expenditures to increase without attempting to
balance its budget, at least this was its initial response. As a
result, we have been able to avoid the kind of carnage the economic system
went through during the first four years of the Great Depression. At
the same time, it is clear that many of the lessons of the 1930s have not
been learned.
Source:
Bureau of Economic Analysis (1.1.5
3.2
3.3)
As can be
seen very clearly in Figure 15.4, a massive deleveraging took place from 1933 through
1941 as total debt as a percent of GDP fell from 295% to 163%. During that
same eight year period the federal debt burden remained relatively unchanged
as it went from 42.5% to 43.5% of GDP in spite
of the fact that the federal government ran substantial deficits in all but
one of those eight years.
When we
look at what has happened from 2008 through 2013 we find that, while monetary
and fiscal policy were effective in halting the downward spiral of the
economic system in 2009, they have done relatively little toward deleveraging the
system. The 43 percentage point fall in non-federal debt is relatively
small compared to the
non-federal debt ratio of 278% in 2013, and the total debt ratio has fallen
by only 13 percentage points since 2008. At the same time, the 31 percentage point increase in the federal debt
ratio from 43% to 74% of GDP in Figure 15.4
is disturbing. The federal debt ratio has not
stabilized the way it did during the expansion of the 1930s.
As was
noted above, the expansion of government expenditures following 1933 took place in conjunction with a number of
tax increases that made it possible to stabilize the federal budget
as the economy expanded along with federal expenditures. The
importance of increasing taxes in stabilizing the budget as government
expenditures increase in this situation is one lesson that has not been
learned from the 1930s.
A second
lesson that has not been learned from the 1930s is that while the increase
in government expenditures that followed 1933 was sufficient to reverse the
downward spiral of the economy and to bring about a substantial deleveraging
of the system, it was not sufficient to solve the unemployment problem. The rate of unemployment remained above
14% of the labor force from 1931
through 1940, and it was not until 1942, the first year in which the country
began to mobilize in earnest for World War II, that the unemployment rate fell below
5%
for the first time since 1929. As federal expenditures went from 8.9% of
GDP in 1940 to 11.0% in 1941 to 20.3% in 1942 the rate of unemployment went
from
14.6% to 9.9% to 4.7%, respectively. At the same time the federal
deficit went from 3.0% of GDP to 4.1% then to 14.2%. This is what
solved the unemployment problem of the Great Depression—a
massive
government intervention in the economic system, though, clearly, the
intervention of World War II was more massive than was necessary to solve
this problem.
When we
compare Figure 15.3 with Figure 15.5 we see a pattern that
seems to want to repeat itself. Federal government outlays were
actually allowed to fall in 2010, just as they were allowed to fall in 1933,
and they barely increased in 2011 through 2013. As a result, there was only an
1.9
percentage point drop in the rate of unemployment from 2009 to 2013, and
because of the leveling off of government expenditures after the
American Recovery and Reinvestment Act was allowed
to run its course,
the rate of unemployment was still at
7.7% of the
labor force in February of 2013 as the
labor force
participation rate fell 3.2 percentage points, and millions of
discouraged workers left the labor force.
The third
lesson that has not been learned from the experience of the 1930s and the
thirty years that followed is that
the concentration of income at the top of the income distribution was
incompatible with the mass-production technologies that served the domestic
markets. As has been noted, in spite of the increase in output and
employment that followed the government intervention in the economic system
that began in 1933, the rate of unemployment failed to fall below
14%.
As we saw in Chapter 3, this
intervention was not enough to provide the mass markets needed to take full
advantage of the productive capacity of the mass-production technologies
embedded in our economy given the 15%
concentration of income in the top 1% of the income distribution that
existed in the 1930s.
As can be seen in Figure 15.6, this level of
income concentration prevailed in the early 1920s as well, and, as we have
seen, proved incapable of providing the mass markets required to produce
full employment in the 1920s in the absence of speculative bubbles and an increase in debt. In spite
of the increase in output and employment that followed the government
intervention in the economic system that began in 1933, there were no
speculative bubbles or increases in debt to bolster the economy, and the
rate of unemployment failed to fall below
14% throughout the
1930s.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
It wasn’t
until the government literally
took over the economic system in 1942 and purchased the potential output
that could not be sold to the private sector, given the distribution of
income, that the unemployment problem
was solved as the system was brought to full capacity. And it wasn’t until
after the non-federal debt ratio and the level of income concentration fell
during the war—and as the income concentration continued to fall after the
war—that the domestic mass markets needed to sustain mass production
were able to grow at the pace needed to maintain full employment in the
absence of speculative bubbles and dramatic increases in total debt.
Finally, it is worth emphasizing that the dramatic deleveraging of
non-federal debt that took place from 143% of GDP in 1940 to 67% in 1945
took place within an environment in which total government expenditures
had increased to
36% of GDP by 1945 and the rationing of consumer goods and
strict controls on investment expenditures gave households and firms little
choice but to pay down their debts as their incomes increased dramatically
during the war. This feat was not accomplished through the magical
powers of free markets to bring balance back into the economy through the
liquidation of households and firms—the
kind of liquidation that took place from 1929 through 1933 that drove the
economy into the Great Depression of the 1930s.
World War II was hardly an optimal solution to the problems caused by the
concentration of income and the overwhelming burden of debt created by the
fraudulent, reckless, and irresponsible behavior of those in charge of our
financial institutions in the 1920s. It should be obvious that it
would have been better to have accomplished the same ends through a somewhat
less massive government intervention in the economy to build up our public
infrastructure by providing massive improvements in our transportation,
public utility, and educational systems than by producing massive quantities
of war materials.
All of these things should be
obvious, yet, none of these lessons have been learned by the free-market
ideologues whose only vision for the future is lower
taxes, less government, deregulation, and paying off the national debt.
Endnotes
[15.1]
High-Powered Money is estimated in Figure 15.2
by the sum of Total, Member-bank reserves from the
Economic Report of the
President 1960's Table
D-42
and Currency outside banks
from Table
D-40.
This sum underestimates the actual value of High-Powered Money in existence
at the time by the amount of currency held in the vaults of banks since, as was noted in
Chapter 6, vault cash was not considered to
be part of reserves from 1917 until
1959. (Feinman)
[15.2]
See the
Appendix on Measuring Debt
at the end of
Chapter 3
for an explanation of the way in which the data from
the Historical
Statistics of the U.S.,
Federal
Reserve Flow of Funds Accounts, and
Bureau of Economic Analysis are used in this
figure.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 16:
Managing the Federal Budget
George H. Blackford © 2013, last updated 5/16/2014
It is fairly safe to say that the vast majority of the
American people do not wish to cut Social Security or Medicare or those social-insurance programs that
provide for the less fortunate among us. (Krugman)
By the same token, it is reasonable to assume that the vast majority of the American people also want quality
public education; effective
public health programs;
safe streets and neighborhoods; a clean and
safe environment; safe
food,
drugs, and
other consumer products;
safe working conditions;
protection from predators who would
fraudulently take advantage of them;
fair and just
legal and
criminal justice systems; efficient public
roads and highways; an effective national defense; and a
stable, growing economy that is not plagued by cycles of booms and busts brought on by
epidemics of recklessness and fraud in our financial system
that drive our country and people deeper and deeper into debt and lead to the
kind of economic catastrophe we are in the midst of today.
(Amy)
These are the kinds of things that only
government can provide, but, unfortunately, there is a problem:
For government to provide these things they must be paid for, and as
we saw in Chapter 11, for much of the past thirty years
we have failed to do so as is indicated by the way in which federal debt has increased relative to GDP
since 1980. As we will see in Chapter 17, this problem is particularly
challenging in light of the strain on the federal budget expected to
occur as the baby
boomers retire and expenditures on Social Security and Medicare increase. This chapter examines the nature of the choices
involved in coming to grips with this problem.
Many people believe we can reduce the federal
budget by a significant amount, by 10%, for example, without cutting defense or Social Security or Medicare
and without
decimating those programs that
make up our social safety net simply by cutting the rest of the government.
At the same time, there are those at the other end of the political spectrum
who believe all we have to do to solve our fiscal problems is cut
defense. What do we find when we look at the actual numbers in the
federal budget?
Figure 16.1 is
constructed from the
OMB's
Table 3.1—Outlays by Superfunction and Function.
This figure plots a breakdown of the actual expenditures of the
federal government in terms of its three largest categories
(Superfunctions) from 1940 through 2012—Defense, Human Resources,
and Net Interest—plus
All Other Outlays which is calculated by subtracting the sum of the the
three largest categories from Total Outlays.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (3.1
10.1)
The first thing we see when we look at the graphs in this figure,
just as we saw when we looked at similar graphs in Figure 13.2, is
that even though the size of the federal budget has changed very little relative to
the economy since the 1950s, the Human Resources component of the budget—those
programs that make up our social-insurance system including Social Security,
Medicare, and those programs that
provide for the less fortunate among us—has
grown dramatically. It has gone from less than 20% of the
budget in the early 1950s to more than 60% in the 2000s. At the same time, Defense
has decreased just as dramatically, going from over 60% of
the budget to around 20%.
Meanwhile the third largest category, Net Interest, reached a high of 15.4% of the budget in 1996, and it stood at 8.7% of the budget in
2007 (the year before the federal budget was distorted by the financial panic in
2008 and the economic crisis that followed).
When we look at the rest of
the government we find that All Other Outlays
has gone from a high of 23.0% of the budget in 1950 to a low of 5.2% in 1954
(and 2010),
and it stood at 6.7% in 2007.
Human Resources in Figure 16.1 is broken
down in Figure 16.2. This figure is constructed from the
OMB's
Table 11.3—Outlays for Payments for Individuals and breaks down
the
Human Resources portion of the budget into four components:
The first, Retirement/Disability, is the sum of all federal
expenditures on retirement and disability programs listed in
Table 11.3. The second,
Healthcare, is the sum of all federal expenditures on healthcare
listed in
Table 11.3. The third,
Other Payments for Individuals,
is the sum of all federal expenditures on all payments-for-individual programs
listed in
Table 11.3 that are not medical or
retirement/disability programs. The final component,
Other Human
Resources, is the total of all government expenditures on all other Human
Resources programs and is constructed by subtracting the sum of the
other three components in Figure 16.2 from Human Resources in
Figure 16.1.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.1
10.1)
When we look at the breakdown in Human Resources
in Figure 16.2 we find that, while there were significant increases in all
the graphs in this figure from 1965 through 1975, only Healthcare
continued to rise after 1975. Healthcare grew almost continuously, from virtually nothing in 1965 to the point
where it rivaled Retirement/Disability as the largest component of
Human Resources in 2009. This graph makes it clear that rising
healthcare expenditures is the most challenging problem in the federal budget.
Healthcare is rapidly becoming the largest component of Human
Resources which, in turn, is the largest component in the total budget.
What do we find when we look for savings in each of the
separate categories in these two figures?
Net Interest in Figure 16.1 must be paid when it
comes due, so nothing can be saved there.
As for
All Other Outlays in Figure 16.1,
this category is constructed by subtracting
the sum of Defense, Human Resources, and Net Interest from
Total Outlays. It
shows us how much the federal government spent on everything else the
government does.
All Other Outlays
consists of such things as expenditures on
Energy,
Natural Resources and Environment,
Transportation,
Community and Regional Development,
International Affairs,
General Science,
Space, Technology,
Agriculture,
Administration of Justice,
General Government,
and
everything else the federal government does.
It is obvious—or at least it should be
obvious to anyone who looks at
the actual expenditures of the federal government in this category plotted
in
Figure 16.1—that there is no reason
to believe we can save a substantial amount of money by cutting All Other Outlays
without substantially inhibiting the government's ability to function. The expenditures on programs in this category have already been cut by
over 50% relative to the economy since 1980, and even if we were to eliminate all of these expenditures completely—which,
of course, we can't do and still have a functioning government—we would succeed in reducing
the size of the federal budget by less than 7%.
As for Defense, It is
apparent from Figure 16.1 that there may be room to make additional cuts in the area of
Defense. After all, in 2007, Defense was barely below where it stood
in 1980 (20.2% versus 22.7% of the budget and 4.9% versus 3.9% of GDP) when we were still waging the Cold War against the Soviet Union.
With the end of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan there may be room to
maneuver here. Just the same, there is no reason to
believe we can solve all of our
fiscal problems simply by cutting Defense. Even if we were to cut
Defense in half—which
few people would be willing to do—it would only reduce the total federal budget by
about 10%.
Thus, if we are serious about
saving as much as 10% of our total federal taxes, unless we are willing to cut
Defense by 50%, we
must look to Human Resources.
That's where the money is, and it's also where Social Security and Medicare are,
as well as the other social-insurance programs that make up our social safety net. The
question is: Does it really make sense to think we can save
a lot of money by cutting Human Resources
without cutting Social
Security or Medicare and without cutting other programs that make up our social safety net?
Human Resources
It is clear from
Figure 16.2
that
Retirement/Disability
and Healthcare combined dominate Human
Resources as they accounted for some 84% of all Human Resources
expenditures in 2007. This would suggest that if we are to find ways to make
substantial cuts in Human Resources we should
begin by looking at Retirement/Disability and Healthcare.
Table 16.1 shows all of the federal programs listed in the
OMB's
Table 11.3 that are included in Retirement/Disability
in Figure 16.2 along with the amount spent on
each program in 2007, the percent of GDP each program consumed in that year, and
the percent of the federal budget each program consumed as well.
Table 16.1: Expenditures Included in Retirement/Disability, 2007.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.1
10.1)
It is clear from this table that Retirement/Disability
is dominated by Social Security in that fully 76% of the total in 2007 went to
Social Security where 20%
went to civil service, military, and railroad retirement/disability programs,
and 4% went to the
Supplemental Security Income
(SSI) program. It is equally clear from this table that there is no way to
make substantial cuts in this portion of Human Resources without cutting Social
Security. After all, military, civil servants, railroad employees, and
other government employees are
just as entitled to their retirement/disability benefits as are Social Security recipients.
This leaves
the SSI program which
was only 4% of Human Resource expenditures in 2007 and 1.2% of the entire federal
budget. Aside from the fact that SSI was only 1.2% of the budget in 2007
and 0.23% of our gross income, as we saw in
Chapter 14,
SSI is
the primary social safety-net program that provides for indigent disabled and
indigent elderly individuals who are either not eligible for Social Security or
whose benefits fall below a subsistence level. Not only would substantial cuts in this
program save virtually nothing, they would tear a hole in our social safety net.
What about Healthcare?
Table 16.2 shows all of the federal
programs listed in the
OMB's
Table 11.3 that are included in Healthcare
along with the amount spent on each in 2007, the
percent of GDP each program consumed in that year, and the percent of the
federal budget each program consumed as well.
Table 16.2: Expenditures Included in Healthcare, 2007.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.1
10.1)
Here we are looking at 25% of the budget. It is clear
from this table that Medicare and Medicaid dominate Healthcare in that these two programs accounted for
over 90% of Healthcare expenditures in 2007 with Medicare
accounting for 70% of that 90%. What about the 20% of this 90% that went
to Medicaid?
Medicaid represented 7% of the federal budget and 1.3% of our gross income
in
2007 and, again, as we saw in Chapter 14,
Medicaid lies at the very core of our social safety net. According to the
Census
Bureau's Table 151. Medicaid—Beneficiaries and Payments: 2000 to 2009, some
75% of Medicaid's beneficiaries were either poor Children, indigent
blind/disabled individuals, or indigent, elderly adults age 65 and over, and over
85% of Medicaid's expenditures went to these
individuals. It would appear that there is very little room to cut here
without causing a great deal of hardship and misery through the denial of
medical services to poor children
or indigent blind/disabled or indigent elderly adults.
That leaves the remaining 10% of the Human Resources budget that went to
the other programs listed in Table 16.2. Here we are
talking about 2% of the entire federal budget and 0.4% of our gross income in
2007. Of that 10%, 67.2%
went to veterans (Hospital and medical care
for veterans
and
Uniformed Services retiree
health care fund), 10.6% to
Children's health
insurance, and 5.8% went to
Indian health. Of
the remaining 16.6%, 63.1% went to
Health resources and
services (a program that is designed to meet the healthcare
needs in mostly rural underserved areas), 34.0% went to
Substance abuse and mental
health services (a program
that is severely under funded given the extent of the substance abuse problem in
our country), and 2.9% went to Other federal healthcare programs.
Veterans certainly have as much right to their medical benefits as Medicare
recipients, so there is no reason to think we can or should cut veterans'
medical benefits without cutting Medicare as well, and the rest of these programs play an important role in our social
safety net. In addition, since the rest of these programs took up only 0.69% of the entire
federal budget in 2007 and 0.13% of our gross income there is virtually nothing to be saved
by eliminating these
programs.
The leaves but two categories in Figure 16.2 to examine:
Other Payments for Individuals and Other Human Resources.
Other Payments for Individuals includes the expenditures on
all of the federal programs in the
OMB's
Table 11.3 that are not medical or retirement/disability programs.
The items included in this category
along with the amount spent on each in 2007, the
percent of GDP each program consumed in that year, and the percent of the
federal budget each program consumed
are given in
Table 16.3.
Table 16.3: Non-Medical and Non-Retirement/Disability
Programs, 2007.
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (11.3
3.1
10.1)
The first thing that jumps out from this table is that, in spite of the abundance
of programs, we are talking about only slightly more than 9% of the entire
federal budget here and less than 2% of our gross income.
While there were no programs that dominated this
category, the ten largest items in Table 16.3 are arranged from largest to
smallest and listed in Table 16.4. These ten items accounted for 93% of the total
expenditures in the Other Payments for Individuals category in 2007.
Table 16.4: Ten Largest Items in Other Payments for Individuals, 2007.
As we saw in Chapter 14,
the ten programs listed in Table 16.4 are
the backbone of our social safety net. We're talking about the
Earned income and
Child Tax Credits
(22% of Total:
Other
Payments for Individuals
in Table 16.3) that are designed to encourage work and assist
the working poor who pay over 14% of their
earned
income in payroll taxes. About
Food Stamps,
Child nutrition,
Special milk, and
Supplemental Feeding program
(22%) that assist the poor in feeding themselves and their children.
About
Student Aid
(13%),
Unemployment Compensation
(26%), and about
Foster Care and Adoption
(2.6%). And we're talking
about only 9% of the entire federal budget in all of the programs in
Other Payments for Individuals
combined and less than 2%
of our gross income.
There is is no reason to think that we can obtain a great deal of
savings by making substantial cuts in this portion of the budget
without dismantling our social safety net and causing a great deal of
hardship and misery. The money just
isn't in these programs, and it's through these programs—combined with
Medicaid and SSI—that our war against hardship and misery is waged.
This leaves only Other Human Resources in the
Human Resources portion of the budget. Other Human Resources is the total of government
expenditures on all Human Resources programs that are not included in
the other categories in Figure 16.2. This residual can be disposed of rather quickly. It
represented only 2.8% of the budget in 2007 and less than 1% of our gross income, and, aside from the fact that 2.8%
of the budget is insignificant in the grand scheme of things, as is shown in
Figure 16.2, this portion of the budget has already been cut by
almost 50%
since 1980. There is no reason to believe that substantial additional cuts can be found
here.
There are widespread complaints about waste, fraud, and abuse in
the federal budget, and there is always reason to strive for improvement in this
area. At the same time, there is little reason to believe our efforts in
this regard can have much of an effect on the size of the budget. Waste,
fraud, and abuse just aren't that important in the grand scheme of things when
it comes to the size of the budget.
As was noted above, Defense in
Figure 16.1 is barely below where it stood in 1980s when we were still waging the Cold
War against the Soviet Union.
It
may be reasonable to assume that through realigning our budget priorities away
from the military threats we faced twenty-five or thirty years ago and toward
those we face today it may be possible to eliminate some waste in the defense
budget as we demobilize from the Iraq and Afghanistan wars. It was also noted above, however, that in order to cut the
total budget by 10% in this way we would have to cut Defense by 50%,
and virtually no one is willing to cut the defense budget by this amount.
And then there’s Healthcare.
According to the
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) and
Central Intelligence Agency World Factbook, we
not only spent more per person and as a percent of GDP on healthcare in 2010
than any other country in the world, and we spent more than twice as much per person
as the average of the other OECD countries ($8,233
compared to $3,153)
and almost twice as much as a percent of our gross
income (17.6%
compared to 9.4%). And, yet, we ranked
24th among the 34 OECD
countries in terms of life expectancy (51st
among all countries) and
28th among these 34 countries
in terms of infant mortality (50th among all countries).[16.1]
In other words, even though we spend more on healthcare than any
other country in the world, and spend twice the average of what the other OECD
countries spend, we benefit less from our expenditures than most of the OECD
countries benefit from theirs in that their people live longer than we do,
they are healthier than we are, and
the rate at which their children die in infancy is less than the rate at which
out children die in infancy. (OECD
OECD Charts NYT
IOM JAMA1
JAMA2) There is obviously something wrong here!
Both private and public healthcare costs in the United States have increased dramatically over
the past twenty years, and even though the
Affordable
Care Act promises to improve the health of our
population by increasing the availability of healthcare,
there is little reason to believe this act will lead to substantial savings to
taxpayers in the absence of a
public
option. It is either a public option or some other kind of
single-payer
mechanism that makes it possible for healthcare costs to be controlled in
those countries that have better health statistics than we do, and there is
little reason to believe we will be able to control our healthcare costs,
and, at the same time, maintain the health of our population
until we implement a similar system at home.
It is also worth noting that, even though cleaning up our healthcare mess by
adopting a public option or implementing some other kind of single-payer
mechanism will undoubtedly save taxpayers money, it will not necessarily
reduce the size of the federal budget or lead to lower taxes as the
availability of healthcare is expanded within the population.
Depending on the kind of single-payer option implemented, the savings to
taxpayers could be accomplished through a net savings in the combined private
and public costs of healthcare as private healthcare costs fall by more than
public healthcare costs go up.
Defense and Healthcare made up 45% of the federal budget in 2007,
and, as has been indicated, there may be room for significant reductions in waste in these areas through
1) realigning our defense priorities as
we demobilize in response to the end of the
wars in Iraq and Afghanistan and
2) making our healthcare system more efficient by implementing a
single-payer system. At the same time, there is no reason to believe we can reduce the total
federal budget significantly by simply eliminating specific instances of
waste, fraud, and abuse in these portions of the budget in spite of the fact
that, on rare occasions, these instances run into the hundreds of
millions or even billions of dollars. (Coburn
Sanders
MFCU
NYT)
The
fundamental problem with Defense is to be found in bad policy decisions
that misalign our budget priorities, and the fundamental problem with Healthcare is our over-reliance on a private,
corporate-oriented,
multiple-payer, third-party,
fee-for-service payment system that makes it impossible to produce optimal
healthcare outcomes at a reasonable cost. Specific instances of
waste, fraud, and abuse are trivial in comparison to the systemic problems in Defense and Healthcare. The numbers just don't add up.
Even if we can find specific instances that cost the government as much as a million dollars
or more, we can't cut the federal budget by as much
as 10% by saving as little as one million dollars at at time. The
federal budget was
$3,455 billion in 2013.
Ten percent of that is $345.5 billion.
That's 345,500 millions! That means that in order
to reduce the budget by 10% one million dollars at a time we would have to
find 345,500 instances in which one million dollars worth of waste, fraud, or
abuse occurs.
We can’t even count to
345,500 let alone find
345,500 ways in which the
federal government squanders one million dollars on an annual basis. Even
trying to cut the budget by as little as 1% in this way would require finding
34,505
such instances.
When we look at the way the federal budget is actually spent in the real world, these
numbers become even more problematic.
Retirement/Disability, Healthcare, and Other Payments for Individuals
make up over 60% of the budget. While there may be some inefficiencies
in the administration of the programs in these categories of the budget, administrative costs are relatively
insignificant compared to the benefits these programs pay out. Medicare's
administrative costs, for example, are as little as
2% of the benefits it pays out and Social Security's
as little as
1%. Medicare and
Social Security alone took up 37% of the total budget in 2007, and even if we were to
eliminate all of their administrative costs it would reduce the total budget
by less than 1% (0.02 x 0.37 = 0.0074).
This means that in
order to find significant amounts of waste, fraud, and abuse in this 60% of
the budget we have to look at the tens of millions of beneficiaries whose
benefits average in the thousands of dollars.
Now we are talking about the need to find millions of instances of waste,
fraud, and abuse in the thousands of dollars range, not just hundreds of
thousands in the millions of dollars range.
There is no way we can
expect to do this without expanding the size of the federal bureaucracy, and
since it costs money to expand the federal bureaucracy, there is no guarantee
we will be able to reduce the budget at all by doing this even if by doing this we are able to
eliminate all of the waste, fraud, and abuse that may exist among the
tens of millions of beneficiaries these programs serve. It may even cost more to
expand the bureaucracy than can be saved. (Lindert)
This is especially so in light of the fact that there doesn't seem to be any
reason to believe that waste, fraud, and abuse is very widespread among these
beneficiaries in the first place.
The nature of this problem can be seen
by examining
a report published by the
Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis in which it estimated that some $3.3
billion worth of fraudulent unemployment compensation claims were paid in
2011. That works out to 3.06% of the total $108 billion worth of claims
that were paid out in 2007 in a program that had 3.7
million beneficiaries in that year. The point is that we
can't simply eliminate this $3.3 billion worth of fraudulent unemployment
compensation claims by waving a wand or by increasing the amount of money we
spend to investigate those few who are actually committing this fraud, 88,000
of which were collecting benefits while working part time and being paid under the table. We have to investigate all of the 3.7 million
beneficiaries in order to find those few, and this can't be done without
paying people to do it.
Since the $108 billion in unemployment
compensation claims amounted to only 3.00% of the $3,603 billion federal
budget in 2011, and only 3.06% of this 3.00% of the federal budget was
wasted in specific instances of fraud in 2011, that works out to 0.09% of
the entire federal budget that was wasted in fraudulently collected
unemployment claims in 2011 (0.0306 x 0.03 = 0.000917).
This means that even if we are
successful in eliminating all of the $3.3 billion in fraudulent
unemployment compensation claims in the system, the most we can save by
doing this is less than 0.09% of the total budget, and if it costs us more
than $3.3 billion to expand the bureaucracy in order to eliminate this
0.09% of the total budget it will actually cost us more to eliminate this fraud than we can
save. It also means that if we were to find similar rates of fraud
(3.05%) in the rest of the
60% of the budget
taken up by
Retirement/Disability, Healthcare, and Other Payments for Individuals, the
most we can save by eliminating this fraud is 1.8% of the total budget (0.0305 x .60 = 0.0183), and if it costs us more than $108 billion (0.0305 x 3,5237 =
107.8785)
to expand the bureaucracy in order to
do this, it will cost us more than we can save.
This doesn't mean we shouldn't try to
eliminate waste, fraud, and abuse in this portion of the budget wherever
and whenever we can. It only means we should not expect to be able
to save $108 billion or reduce the federal budget by as much as 1.8% as a
result of our efforts to do so.
As for the rest of the budget, there is no reason to believe
significant savings can be found there either. We have already discussed Defense—fraud
or no fraud,
virtually no one is willing to cut defense by a sufficient amount
to make a significant difference in the size of the total budget—and, as was noted above, Net Interest
must be paid when it comes due so nothing can be saved there. As was
also noted above, All Other Outlays in Figure 16.2
has already been cut by almost 50% since 1980 and Other Human Resources in
Figure
16.3 by more than 50%. The programs in these last two categories
take up less than 10% of the total budget, and since they have been cut so
dramatically over the past thirty years, there is no reason to think we can
save a substantial amount by cutting this 10% of the budget even further.
That's all there is in the rest of the budget! Defense, Net Interest,
and All Other Outlays in Figure
16.2
plus Retirement/Disability, Healthcare, Other Payments for Individuals,
and Other Human Resources in and Figure
16.3
make up the entire federal budget. Everything in the budget on which the federal government
spends money is included in one or another of these seven categories.
Finally, I would note a headline that
recently appeared in Bloomberg News,
Millionaires Got $80 Million in Jobless Aid in Recession, that further highlights
the nature of the problem faced by those who think our
fiscal problems can be solved by eliminating specific instances of waste, fraud, and abuse
in the federal budget. According to the author,
Frank Bass:
The $80 million represents less than 0.01 percent of
this year’s $845 billion projected
deficit. Yet the
unemployment aid to millionaire households underscores the lack of
means-testing in some federal aid programs . . .. The aid also is a
reminder of the difficulty of reining in spending.
The fact is, some 35% of that $80 million was
recouped in income taxes on those benefits, only $52 million was kept by
the recipients, and that $52 million is not only less than 0.01% of the $845
billion projected deficit (52/845,000 = 0.0000615), it is less than 0.002% of the
$3,537 billion federal budget in 2012 (52/3,537,000 = 0.0000147).
In addition, it is a mistake
to think we can reduce the budget by even this piddling amount by converting our
unemployment insurance program into a means-tested
welfare program since this ignores the added cost of the increased
bureaucracy it would take to investigate the income status of the millions
of beneficiaries in this program. By simply making unemployment
benefits available to all who pay into the system, irrespective of income,
those bureaucratic costs are avoided, and the efficiently with which
payments can be made to the unemployed is increased dramatically. (Lindert)
But the real
absurdity here is the delusion that this $52 million has something to do
with the $845 billion projected deficit or the
difficulty of reining in spending in a $3,537
billion budget:
What is the point in wasting time and energy
discussing the fate of $52 million within the context of an $845 billion deficit
and a $3,537 billion budget?
That's like worrying about $52 when your total expenses are $3,537,000 and
you are $845,000 in the hole.
Even if
we could reduce the deficit $52 million a day by concerning ourselves with this sort of
nonsense it would take 44.5 years to solve a
$845 billion deficit problem in this way (845,000 / 52 / 365.25 = 44.4901). This is the epitome of
what it means to be
penny wise and
pound foolish.
In
searching for ways to cut the federal budget it is important to understand
that cutting a
small amount from a large portion of the budget or a large amount from a small portion of the budget may yield a lot of money in absolute terms, but it
doesn't yield a lot of money relative to the size of the total budget. It only reduces the
total budget by a small amount. To reduce the total budget by a large amount
we have to cut a large amount from a large portion of the budget. That's just
grade school arithmetic.
When we
look at the actual expenditures in the federal budget over the past forty
years we find that it is not possible to cut a large amount from a large
portion of the budget without cutting defense, Social Security, Medicare, or
the programs that make up our social safety net because that's where the
money is. The rest of the budget has already been cut to the bone since 1980,
and there simply isn't enough money in the rest of the budget to make a
difference even if we cut a large amount from this small portion of the budget.
We also find that
even though there may be substantial savings to be found in realigning our defense priorities
as we demobilize
from
the Iraq and Afghanistan
wars and by reorganizing healthcare into a
single-payer system, there is no reason to believe we would be able to reduce
the size of the total budget by a substantial amount even if we were to
realize these savings. We would have to cut the defense budget in half
in order to reduce the total budget by 10% in this way, something which
virtually no one is willing to do, and,
depending on the kind of single-payer option implemented,
implementing a
single-payer
system in order to improve the efficiency of our healthcare system could
require an
increase the size of the federal budget rather than a decrease.
At the same time, we find that there is
no reason to believe we can reduce the size of the federal budget by
increasing our efforts to target specific instances of waste, fraud, and
abuse. There simply aren't enough specific instances of waste, fraud,
and abuse in the budget that are of sufficient magnitude to make a difference in this regard. At best, all we can hope to do by expanding
our efforts in this area is cut a small
amount from a large portion of the budget, and doing this could actually cost us more to do than we can save
by doing it.
(Lindert)
As was noted above, this does
not mean we should ignore this problem. It only means that we
should not expect to see a substantial reduction in the size of the budget as
a result of our efforts to solve it. Those who think otherwise
have a problem with arithmetic. Their numbers just don't add up.
(Coburn
Sanders
MFCU
NYT
StLuisFed)
Realigning our defense priorities away
from the threats we faced twenty-five or thirty years ago and toward the
threats we face today,
reorganizing healthcare toward a single-payer system, and targeting
specific instances of waste, fraud, and abuse within the budget are the most
efficient, least harmful, and only sensible ways to address the problem of
waste, fraud, and abuse in the federal budget. Attempting to address
this problem by simply cutting the budget—which is what we have been trying to do over the past thirty years—is a recipe for disaster.
When we realign our defense priorities, reorganize our healthcare system, and target
specific instances of waste, fraud, and abuse we affect the lives of relatively
well off or undeserving individuals who can, more or less, take care of
themselves. As a result, we don’t have to worry about increasing malnutrition and
death
rates among poor children or indigent disabled/elderly adults or
about forcing people who can’t find work—for whatever reason—to become
desperate which is what we can expect when we simply cut the funds to those programs
contained in Other Payments for Individuals
in
Figure 3.
We
also don't have to worry about
impairing the government’s ability to
protect the public from
poisonous food,
dangerous drugs,
harmful consumer
products, fraud and predatory practices in our financial system,
unsafe work
environments, potential environmental catastrophes or to maintain our
transportation systems and
educate our population which is what happens when we
arbitrarily cut funds to those programs contained in All
Other Outlays in Figure 16.2. (Amy
Lindert)
A fundamental, real-world truth that has been almost completely ignored in the
otherwise hopelessly irrational debate we have been subjected to over the past
forty years is that there are
certain things that only the government can do. One is provide a
system of national defense.
Another is provide
legal and law enforcement
systems that set and enforce the rules in a fair, efficient, and effective
way. Another is provide the public education and
infrastructure that makes possible such
things as an educated labor force and an efficient
transportation system. Yet
another is to provide a social insurance system that makes possible such
things as
unemployment insurance, efficient healthcare and
retirement
systems, and a welfare system, all of which provide ordinary people some
insurance against the devastation caused by the vagaries of our economic
system. (Amy
Lindert)
It seems to me quite clear that these are all things that the vast majority of
the people want the government to provide for them. This does not mean the
vast majority of the people are moochers who expect the government to take
care of their every need. It means the vast majority of the people realize
that, in the real world, only the government can provide these kinds of
economic goods in a fair, efficient, and effective way. These are not the
kinds of economic goods that can be provided fairly, efficiently, or
effectively by the private sector of the economy.
The response from those who are waging their own private war against
the federal government is that 1) reorganizing our healthcare system to
include a public option is socialism, 2) the world is too dangerous to cut
defense, and
3) we must cut the rest of the budget—especially Social Security and Medicare—because deficits and the national debt are out of
control.
But in the real world, even if we are not willing reorganize our healthcare system or cut defense, solving our deficit and debt problems without
cutting the rest of the budget is not
all that complicated. All we have to do to balance the budget without cutting
defense or our social-insurance programs is increase taxes.
Many people believe that Americans are terribly overtaxed—that we
can't afford the tax increases needed to fund the federal government. This
belief doesn't hold up to even a casual look at the numbers. Table
16.5 shows how the United State's ranking
among the 34 OECD countries has changed since 1980 in terms the percentage of
gross income (GDP) paid in taxes.
Table 16.5: OECD Countries that Pay Less Taxes than We Do
Percent of GDP, 1980-2010.
1980 |
1990 |
2000 |
2005 |
2010 |
USA |
26.4 |
Japan |
28.6 |
Spain |
34.3 |
Portugal |
31.1 |
Portugal |
31.3 |
Australia |
26.2 |
Australia |
28.0 |
Portugal |
30.9 |
Ireland |
30.1 |
Greece |
30.9 |
Japan |
24.8 |
USA |
27.4 |
Australia |
30.4 |
Australia |
30.0 |
Switzerland |
28.1 |
Switzerland |
24.6 |
Portugal |
26.8 |
USA |
29.5 |
Switzerland |
28.1 |
Japan |
27.6 |
Spain |
22.6 |
Greece |
26.4 |
Switzerland |
29.3 |
Japan |
27.3 |
Turkey |
25.7 |
Portugal |
22.2 |
Switzerland |
24.9 |
Japan |
26.6 |
USA |
27.1 |
Australia |
25.6 |
Greece |
21.8 |
Korea |
19.5 |
Turkey |
24.2 |
Turkey |
24.3 |
Korea |
25.1 |
Korea |
17.1 |
Chile |
17.0 |
Korea |
22.6 |
Korea |
24.0 |
USA |
24.8 |
Mexico |
14.8 |
Mexico |
15.8 |
Chile |
18.9 |
Chile |
20.7 |
Chile |
19.6 |
Turkey |
13.3 |
Turkey |
14.9 |
Mexico |
16.9 |
Mexico |
18.1 |
Mexico |
18.8 |
Source:
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development,
Comparative Tables.
We have moved from tenth from the bottom on this list
to third from the bottom over the past thirty years. Among the
advanced countries of the world, only Chile and Mexico paid less in taxes as
a percent of their gross income than we did in 2010. There is no
reason to believe we can't afford the taxes needed to fund Social Security,
Medicare, and the rest of the federal government even if we are not willing
to cut defense or reorganize our healthcare system.
In principle, at least, it is not that
difficult to make the government fiscally sound. This could be
accomplished quite easily by
-
rescinding the
2001-2003 Bush tax cuts,
-
eliminating unwarranted tax deductions and credits, and
especially the special treatment of capital gains and dividends,
-
increasing the top marginal tax rates,
(Fieldhouse
Diamond Sides)
and
-
increasing taxes on corporations.
We had a surplus equal to
2.3% of GDP in 2000 before the
2001-2003 tax cuts. Does it really
make sense to dismantle the federal government and make dramatic cuts in
Social Security and Medicare rather than rescind those cuts? It's
just common sense that if we want to solve our deficit/debt problem and
maintain our social-insurance programs with a functioning government, the
place to begin is by rescinding those tax cuts.
In addition, as we saw in Chapter 14, the special treatment of dividends and capital
gains led to a $118.8 billion subsidy for the top 1% of the income
distribution in 2007—an average government subsidy of $73,903 per household
for the top 1%. There is absolutely no economic, ethical, or moral
justification for this kind of subsidy, especially in the midst of the kind of fiscal crisis we will face in the future
as the baby boomers retire if we don't raise taxes.
Eliminating the special treatment of dividends and,
especially, capital gains, when combined with a substantial increase
in the top marginal tax rate will have the added benefit of reducing the potential gains that can be reaped
from the kinds of fraudulent, reckless, and irresponsible behaviors on the
part of those who run our financial institutions that created the economic
catastrophe we are in the midst of today. This will reduce the
single most powerful incentive that motivates these kinds of behaviors.
It will also have the effect of strengthening our mass markets to the extent it reduces the need to increase taxes on the rest of the income distribution
and, thereby, help to maintain the domestic purchasing power of the vast majority of
the population that is essential to maintaining our domestic mass markets.
(Fieldhouse
Diamond
Sides)
When it comes
to the need to increase taxes on corporations, it is worth emphasizing that
corporations consume government services far beyond those consumed by other
businesses. Corporations dominate our legal and law enforcement
systems where lawsuits brought to settle disputes between corporations or
between corporations and their customers, their employees, or the government
clog up our courts.
Corporations benefit massively from the government’s
providing and enforcing copyright and patent protections and from the limited
liability protection provided to corporations by the government.
Corporations also benefit massively from our public transportation systems and
from the educated workforce our public education systems provide, and a major
reason our defense budget is so large is to protect the foreign interests of
American corporations throughout the world.
There are
reasons why international corporations locate in countries whose governments
provide highly developed legal, law enforcement, transportation, public
education, and national defense systems. (Amy
Lindert) Why should corporations be
given a free ride as ordinary people and
other forms of business organization
are taxed to pay for the government services corporations disproportionately
consume and from which corporations derive such massive economic benefits?
Those who wish
to eliminate the corporate profits tax argue this tax is somehow unfair
because it taxes income twice—once when it is earned by the corporation and a
second time when it is received by stockholders in the form of dividends.
This is a fallacious argument. To begin with, not all profits are paid
out in dividends. More to the point, however, is the fact that
all taxes come out of profits, not just a tax on profits.
A corporation
subject to a 50% corporate profit tax on a $10 million before tax profit
generated from $100 million in sales would have the same after tax profit as a
corporation in the same situation that paid no corporate profit tax but,
instead, paid a 5% sales tax, a $5 million property tax, or a $5 million
dollar tax of any other kind. In any of these situations the corporation
would have the same $5 million after tax profit. Why does it make sense
to consider a corporate profit tax to be a double taxation of income in this
situation but not an alternative tax? There is, of
course, a semantic difference here but not a real difference.
The bottom
line is that the same after tax profit is received by the corporation and
stockholders irrespective of the kind of tax paid. A corporate profits
tax is a cost of doing business, just like any other tax, and the notion
that it somehow unfair because it leads to a double taxation of income and
other taxes do not is nonsense.
The corporate profits tax is actually a less onerous tax
than most since it is paid only when there is a profit. It is not
paid during hard times when there are no profits and funds are scarce, or by
owners of startup companies that have to make investments before they can make
a profit and are forced to take losses as they build their businesses.
Alternative taxes must be paid during hard times and by startup companies
whether there are profits or not. As a result, the corporate profits tax
is a much more business friendly tax than other taxes since it makes it easier
for existing corporations to survive during hard times and for investors to
start new corporations. In this sense, a corporate profits a tax is much
fairer than other taxes.
It is argued that since other countries have lower
corporate taxes, if we don’t cut our taxes corporations will relocate to
countries with lower taxes and we will lose jobs, but this is only a problem
because we allow corporations that locate in countries that serve as tax
havens free access to American courts and markets. Corporations that
locate in tax havens should be forced to pay a compensating tax to the
American government in order to access our courts and markets. Not only
would such a tax save jobs by preventing corporations from relocating, it
would force corporations to pay their fair share for the government services
they demand and on which their very existence depends. It would also help to make it
possible to rebuild and maintain the
public
infrastructure and social capital provided by the government
that is essential to obtaining and maintaining economic prosperity. (Amy)
What's more, failing to tax corporations has ominous implications for the
future.
For the past sixty years, American corporations have
been able to minimize their contribution toward paying for the government
services they consume within the United States by migrating or threatening to migrate from high tax
states to low tax states as they play one state off against another to obtain
lower taxes. This has led to short-term economic benefits to corporations and
to low-tax states as people in the high-tax states that provide better
public services follow the jobs created by corporations
in the low-tax states that provide inferior public services, especially
education. It has also shifted the burden of paying for
government services, especially education, away from those who benefit
from these services the most—people in the low-tax states to which the
corporations and the people who are educated in the high-tax states
migrate—on to the backs of those who benefit from them
the least—the people in the high-tax states who are unable to migrate and who
are loosing their tax base to the low-tax states.
The long-term nature of this effect has been
particularly dramatic in the area of education where the private cost of higher
education has increased to the point where
student debt today is larger than either credit card or automobile debt.
In 1970 the United States led the world in the percent
of young adults with a college degree.
By 2011 we had fallen to 16th place. Instead
of educating our own to meet the needs of corporate America, as corporate
taxes fell and American educational standards lagged behind, American
corporations have begun to
rely on foreigners to fill their ranks in those
jobs that require higher education—especially in math, the sciences, and
engineering—and an ever increasing number of positions at our colleges and
universities are being
filled by foreign students. If this trend is
allowed to continue to its logical conclusion we will evolve into a
society in which only the children of the wealthy are able to afford a quality
education, and the quality and productivity of our labor force will fall.
Forcing countries to compete for corporate favors by
lowering taxes is no different than forcing states to compete in this way, and
there is no reason to expect the results to be different if this drama is
allowed to play itself out on the world stage than they have been as it has played
itself out on the
national stage within the United States over the past sixty years. There
will be economic benefits to corporations and low tax countries in the short
run, but, in the long run, government services will deteriorate throughout the
world, and, in the end, there will be a loss in economic and social wellbeing
for the vast majority of the world’s population. What’s more, we can
expect the losses to be greatest in those countries, such as the United
States, that have the most to lose. (Rodrik)
For thirty-five years following World War II our government made huge
investments in our society. It built our
Interstate Highway System. It made huge investments in our
educational system through such programs as the
GI Bill and
National Defense Education Act as it subsidized the
education of the best and the brightest
among us who, in turn, provided the scientific research that led to the tremendous
advanced in technology we have seen since World War II. It also made
huge investments in our social-insurance system. The end result
of these public investments was a highly educated
and productive labor force, a tremendous increase in our public
infrastructure, and a social environment that made it possible for our
economic system to flourish.
It also made it possible for those who benefited the most from the
socioeconomic environment created by the stability of our government to amass
huge fortunes. If our economic system is to continue to flourish the
government and the social capital that made this possible in the past must be maintained, and it
cannot be maintained if those who benefit the most from our government do not
pay back enough to keep that government functioning to maintain the public
infrastructure and provide the social environment that made their prosperity
possible.
Since 1980 we have lowered taxes on the wealthy and increased taxes on the not
so wealthy as we dismantled our regulatory systems and cut back on other
government programs that serve the common good and promote the general Welfare
within our society. The result has been a growing divisiveness within
our society and economic stagnation for the vast
majority of our population as we have
fallen behind in educating our children, our
public infrastructure has deteriorated, the rate of
increase in
productivity has fallen, and
fraud has run rampant in our
financial system leading to the worst economic disaster since the Great
Depression.
If those who
benefit the most from our economic system do not pay back in taxes enough to
rebuild the
public infrastructure and
social capital they consumed in the process of reaping the
benefits they have gained from our economic system, there is little hope for the
future, and it is important to
note that this does not mean just the top one or
two percent of the income distribution must pay back. It means that everyone
who is capable of making a contribution toward this end must do their part.
(Fieldhouse
Diamond Sides)
If this is
not done we will consume the public resources that were
left for us by previous generations, and in failing to replenish those
resources, we will limit the economic possibilities for future generations.
Rescinding the Bush tax cuts,
treating capital gains and dividends as ordinary income, and increasing the
top marginal tax rates and taxes on corporations would not necessarily give us
a surplus today, but it would at least give us a tax structure that is viable.
If these actions were to be combined with an increase in government expenditures
to rebuild our public infrastructure and enhance the educational opportunities
available to our children, there is every reason to believe it would not only
increase the rate of productivity growth and help to solve our unemployment
problem, it would also stabilize the federal debt relative to GDP as well, just as
similar policies stabilized the
debt relative to GDP in the 1930s. It would also
make it possible to pay for the government services the people demand, such as
Social Security, Medicare, and the rest of our social-insurance system without having to
dismantle that system.
It is the foolish belief that we can have good government and all of the
essential services and benefits that only government can provide without
paying the taxes necessary to provide these services and benefits that has led
us to where we are today. The only way we can have these essential services
and benefits is by strengthening the institutions that provide them, and the
only way we can strengthen those institutions is by raising the taxes needed
to provide
the government services and benefits people demand: quality
public education; effective
public health programs;
safe streets and neighborhoods; a
clean and safe environment; safe
food, drugs, and other
consumer products;
safe working conditions; fair and just
legal and
criminal justice systems; efficient
public roads and highways; an effective
national defense; a viable
social insurance system; and a stable, growing economy that is not plagued
by cycles of booms and busts brought on by epidemics of recklessness and
fraud in our financial system that
drive our country and people deeper and deeper into debt and lead to the
kind of economic catastrophe we find ourselves in the midst
of today. (Amy
Lindert)
[16.1]
The OECD countries that have a shorter life
expectances than we do are: Czech Republic, Mexico,
Poland, Slovakia, Hungary, Estonia, and Turkey. Of these
countries Slovakia, the Czech Republic, and Hungary have lower infant
mortality rates than we do. (OECD
OECD Charts JAMA1
JAMA2)
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 17:
Social Security, Healthcare, and
Taxes
George H. Blackford © 2012
The deficit in the federal budget was 9% of GDP in 2010,
and on December 1 of that year
we were told by
Erskine Bowles
and
Alan Simpson, co-chairs of
the President’s
National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform,
that there was a
$5.4 trillion unfunded mandate in the
Social Security
system that
must be dealt with.
The last time we were told something like
this was back in 1983
when the federal deficit was
6.0% of GDP in the aftermath of the 1981-1982
recession, following the
1981
Reagan tax cuts, and at the beginning of Reagan's
anti Soviet defense buildup. At that time, the Social
Security trust funds were dwindling, and Social Security was in danger of
running out of money. In the midst of that fiscal mess, President Reagan
established the
Greenspan Commission to reform Social Security.
In accordance with the
recommendations of the Greenspan
Commission, Congress agreed to
-
Increase the payroll taxes paid by self
employed individuals.
-
Increase the retirement age from 65 to 67
by 2022.
-
Accelerate previously scheduled payroll
tax increases.
-
Require that 50% of the Social Security
benefits received by higher income beneficiaries be taxed and paid into the
Social Security trust fund.
-
Expand Social Security coverage to
nonprofit and newly hired federal employees.
Congress also made a number of
additional changes that, when combined with previously
scheduled payroll tax and income cap increases, not only dealt with the trust
fund problem, but changed Social Security from a
pay-as-you-go system in which
the money received by current beneficiaries is paid by current workers, to a
partial-advanced-funding system in which the current workers prepaid a portion of
their own retirement, Medicare, disability, and death benefits as they also
paid
for the benefits of the current beneficiaries. (SSA)
As a result, Social Security has had an annual surplus since 1984—a surplus
that increased the Social Security
Old-Age Survivors and Disability Insurance (OASDI) trust fund to $2.6 trillion by 2011 with an additional $0.3 trillion in the
Medicare and supplementary medical insurance trust funds as well.
This $2.9 trillion represents the prepayment of the current
working generations for their own retirement, medical, disability, and death
benefits—payments they made into these trust funds while they fully supported
(paid for) the retirement, medical, disability, and death benefits of the
generations that went before. And what happened to this $2.9 trillion? It
was placed in the safest investment on Earth: United States government bonds
backed by the full faith and credit of the United States of America. Why?
Not only because this is the safest investment on Earth, but because there was
no acceptable alternative way to invest these funds.
If the Social Security Administration were to invest in
non-government securities, it would involve the federal government in the
private securities markets in a massive way. The potential for corruption
with so much money involved was daunting, so much so that virtually no one
thought this was a good idea. At the same time, the idea that these funds be
divided into private accounts and invested in private securities by private
individuals was also deemed unacceptable. This would make them vulnerable to
the vagaries of the private-securities markets, and, as such, would defeat the
central purpose of the Social Security System.
Social Security was created to provide a system of
government guaranteed social insurance that is not dependent on the private-securities markets. It was the lack of such a system following the financial
disaster in 1929 that inspired the Social Security System in the first place.
What's more, the idea that the trust funds should have been invested in
private securities was put to the test in the 2000s. It is only because these
funds were invested in government bonds that they survived the stock market
crash of the early 2000s and the financial crisis of 2008.
The baby boomer retirement problem is explained in
The 2011 Annual Report of the Board of Trustees of the Federal Old-Age and
Survivors Insurance and Federal Disability Insurance Trust Funds.
A concise statement of this problem can be found in the Trustees' message to
the public in the summary of this report:
Social Security expenditures exceeded the program’s
non-interest income in 2010 for the first time since 1983. . . . This deficit
is expected to shrink to about $20 billion for years 2012-2014 as the economy
strengthens. After 2014, cash deficits are expected to grow rapidly as the
number of beneficiaries continues to grow at a substantially faster rate than
the number of covered workers. Through 2022 . . . redemptions will be less
than interest earnings, [and] trust fund balances will continue to grow. After
2022, trust fund assets will be redeemed in amounts that exceed interest
earnings until trust fund reserves are exhausted in 2036 . . . . Thereafter,
tax income would be sufficient to pay only about three-quarters of scheduled
benefits through 2085. (SSA)
The Trustees further explain in this message that
Program costs equaled roughly 4.2 percent of GDP in 2007,
and are projected to increase gradually to 6.2 percent of GDP in 2035 and then
decline to about 6.0 percent of GDP by 2050 and remain at about that level. (SSA)
This is what all of the fuss is about:
-
If we do nothing, the current payroll tax structure and
trust fund is expected to carry the system into 2036 at which point the trust fund
will be exhausted and payroll taxes will cover only 75% of the promised
benefits. At that point either taxes will have to be raised or
benefits cut to make up the difference.
-
The annual costs of Social Security benefits were 4.2% of
GDP in 2007 and are expected to increase to 6.2% in
2035, then decline to 6.0% by 2050 and thereafter. This means that in
order to maintain benefits, the proportion of GDP devoted to Social Security
benefits must increase by 2.0% of GDP (6.2-4.2=2.0) between 2007 and 2035
and decrease thereafter by 0.2% of GDP between 2035 and 2050 for a net
increase of 1.8% of GDP from 2007 through 2050.
Where's the crisis? According to the Trustee’s report, the
Social Security trust fund is expected to continue to increase until 2022, and
Social Security is fully funded until 2036. Social Security benefits must
increase by 2% of GDP by 2035, which would not seem like much of a problem
since the United Sates is one of the wealthiest countries on Earth.
Increasing Social Security benefits by 2% of GDP between now and 2035 should
not be a major problem.
What's more, the trustees assume in their report that over
the next 75 years productivity, as measured by output produced per hour of
labor, will increase in the United States at an annual rate of
1.7%. This is the average rate of productivity growth
for the past forty years, and if productivity continues to grow at this rate
it means, through the magic of compounding, our economy will be 50% (1.017
multiplied by itself 25 times = 1.52) more productive in 2035 than it was in
2010. Even if productivity only grows by the worst case scenario considered
in the trustees’ report,
1.3% a year, we will still be almost 40% (1.013
multiplied by itself 25 times = 1.38) more productive in 2035. Why should we
believe that an increase of Social Security benefits equal to 2% of GDP
between now and 2035 is going to be a crushing burden on society in a world in
which the labor force that produces that GDP will be able to produce 40% to
50% more per hour of work than we do today? (Baker)
It's time to step back, take a deep breath, and remember
what we are talking about here. We are talking about increasing the share of
GDP that is devoted to the payment of Social Security benefits from 4.2% today
to 6.2% by 2035, then a decline in this share to 6.0% by 2050. This is a net
increase of only 2.0% of GDP over the next twenty-five years. At the same time,
productivity is supposed to increase 40% to 50% by 2035. This is the economic
problem posed by the baby boomers' retirement, a problem that most certainly
must be dealt with, but it is not a problem that portends a budget crisis that
will require drastic changes in the Social Security System to solve.
Figure 17.1, which plots federal expenditures as a percent of GDP from
1965 through 2012, should help to put this problem in perspective.
Source:
Source:
Office of Management and Budget. (1.2)
As is indicated in this figure, the average
of federal expenditure as a percent of GDP during the 1980s (22.2%) was 2
percentage points above the average in the 2000s (20.3%). In other
words, an increase in Social Security benefits equal to 2% of GDP by 2035
would be the equivalent of taking us back to where we were in the 1980s in
terms of the federal budget. This would hardly require a dramatic change
in the American way of life, especially since productivity today is
40%
to 50% greater than it was in the 1980s and is expected to be 40% to 50%
greater in 2035 than it is today. What’s the big deal about the baby boomers
increasing Social Security payments by 2% of GDP between 2010
and 2035 in a world in which output, and, hence, real income per worker is expected to be 40% to 50%
greater than it is today?
It is essential to recognize, however, that even though the
existence of a $2.6 trillion trust fund goes a long way toward solving the
funding problem the baby boomers present to the Social Security
Administration, it adds nothing toward solving the fiscal problem faced by the
federal government. The reason is that the Greenspan Commission’s
partial-advanced-funding scheme does not change the fiscal situation of the government when
it comes time for the baby boomers to retire.
As we saw in
Chapter 11, back in the 1980s, the
Reagan Tax Cuts led to huge
deficits in the federal budget that were not brought under control until the
1990s. One of the mechanisms that helped to bring these deficits under
control was the
increase payroll taxes paid by
working people as the Social Security System was
converted from a
pay-as-you-go system to a
partial-advanced-funding system. As was noted
above, since the mid 1980s
Social Security has had an annual
surplus, a surplus that increased the Social Security OASDI trust fund by $2.6 trillion. These funds were, in
turn, lent to the federal government
to help finance its general expenditures, to the effect that by 2001
the money
borrowed from the Social Security System’s trust funds in that year alone
amounted to 8.75% of the federal
budget.
The problem is, as the baby boomers began to retire
in the early 2000s, the amount of cash available to be borrowed from the
Social Security System began to dwindle, and in 2010 there was no cash left to
borrow even though the Social Security System still had a surplus in that
year. The reason is that even though there was a surplus in the budget
for Social Security in that year, the amount of cash the system took in from payroll
taxes was less than the amount of cash it paid out in benefits and costs.
This situation is explained in the passage from the Trustee's Report
quoted above:
Social Security expenditures exceeded the program’s
non-interest income in 2010 for the first time since 1983. . . .Through 2022 .
. . redemptions will be less than interest earnings, [and the] trust fund
balances will continue to grow. After 2022, trust fund assets will be
redeemed in amounts that exceed interest earnings. . . (TRSUM)
This means that in 2010 the government could no longer simply credit the
interest it owed the Social Security System to its account and borrow its surplus cash since there was no surplus cash left to borrow.
There was a cash deficit in the Social Security systems accounts, and
the federal government was forced to pay a portion of the interest it owed the
system in cash in order to fund this cash deficit.
As a result, since 2010 the federal government has been
forced to pay a portion of its interest obligation to the Social Security
System in cash in order for the Social Security System to pay its benefits and
administrative costs in cash. At the same time, the amount of money the federal government owes the Social
Security trust funds each year continues to grow because the amount of cash the federal
government has been forced to pay into the Social Security System each year
has been less than the amount of interest that accrues each year on the debt
the federal government owes to the system. The difference must be
credited to the Social Security System's trust fund which, in turn, increases
the trust fund.
This situation is expected to continue through 2022 when
the Social Security System's cash deficit is expected to equal the
amount of interest the government owes the system in that year. At that point the Social Security
trust fund is expected to peak, and from then on the trust fund is expected
to fall as the federal government is forced to redeem the government
bonds in the Social Security trust fund (as well as pay the interest that
accrues each year on its remaining debt to the Social Security trust fund) in
cash in order for the Social Security System to
meet its obligation to pay its administrative costs and benefit payments to the baby boomers
in cash.
There are only two ways the federal government can come
up with the cash needed to pay the interest on its debt to the Social
Security System and to begin paying back the principal it borrowed from
working people: It can either raise taxes or borrow the needed funds. If it
doesn’t raise taxes, it will have to borrow, and
it can’t borrow without
increasing the national debt. The only alternative is for the federal
government to default on its obligations to the baby boomers by reducing their
Social Security benefits.
Thus, when it comes to making up the difference between
payroll tax receipts taken in and benefits paid out it makes no difference
whether there is a trust fund or not. In either case, the government must
either borrow or tax to make up this difference. As a result, the trust fund
has no effect on the fiscal situation facing the government when the benefits
owed the baby boomers come due.[17.1]
But if prepaying a portion of their Social Security
benefits did not contribute to a solution to the government's fiscal problem
when the baby boom generation retires, just what did the Greenspan Commission
accomplished? What it accomplished was an increase in the taxes paid by
working people to support the general expenditures of the government. That
increase yielded the government $2.9 trillion from working people since 1983
that it would not have received if the Social Security System had stayed on a
pay-as-you-go basis. That's what prepaying a portion of the Social Security
benefits accomplished, and that's all it accomplished from the perspective of
the fiscal soundness of the government.
This is where the real crisis in Social Security lies, and
this is not an economic crisis. We are still talking about increasing
Social Security benefits by only 2% of GDP by 2035 in a situation where
increases in productivity is expected to increase output per worker by 40% or
50%. It is a moral and political
crisis, however, because our society has to decide how it is going to come up
with the funds necessary to make this adjustment or if it is going to not come
up with these funds and renege on its promise to the baby boomers. (Surowiecki)
The bipartisan
Moment of Truth report written by
Alan Simpson and
Erskine Bowles
is the end product of the President’s
National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform. While this report
was formally rejected by the Commission, it puts forth a set of recommendations to deal with
our federal
deficit and debt problems in a comprehensive way, recommendations that have
gained a significant amount of political support. Of particular interest
in this report are the recommendations regarding Social Security, Medicare,
and revisions of the tax code.
Concerning Social Security, the Simpson-Bowles
recommendations are summarized in Figure 17.2.
Source:
Moment of Truth Report.
These recommendations contain five key elements:
-
Gradually phase in progressive changes to the benefit formula while
increasing the minimum benefit and adding a longevity benefit. (29%)
-
Index
retirement age and earliest eligibility age to increase with longevity.
(18%)
-
Use a
chained CPI rather than the standard CPI to adjust benefits for changes in
the cost of living. (26%)
-
Gradually increase the income cap to cover 90% of wage income. (35%)
-
Add
newly hired state and local government employees to the program after 2020.
(8%)
The percentage in parentheses following each item indicates
its contribution toward eliminating the expected shortfall in Social Security
funding over the next seventy-five years.
The first element in this list combines the first, second, and forth
items in Figure 17.4 where the savings are supposed to be achieved by
making the benefit payout system more progressive—that is, by lowering the
benefits paid to high income recipients while, at the same time, increasing
the benefits paid to low income recipients. The suggestion that these
savings are coming from making the system more progressive is rather
disingenuous, however, in that the savings come from a net cut in benefits, not from the fact that the resulting payout scheme is
more progressive. If the increase in benefits paid to low wage earners were
equal to the decrease in benefits paid to higher wage earners there would be
no savings from this adjustment in progressivity.
The second item obviously achieves the savings, without any
pretext, through a straightforward
across the board cut in benefits by increasing the
retirement age. The third also achieves the savings by cutting benefits by
way of a controversial change in the way the Social Security cost of living
adjustment is calculated. (WSJ
SGS) The last two achieve their savings by increasing
the payroll tax base.
Thus, when we do the math, we find that these
recommendations solve Social Security’s future revenue problem by cutting
benefits to cover 73% of the expected shortfall and by expanding the tax base
to cover an additional 43% of the shortfall. (Presumably, the redundant 16%
of savings is there to maintain the Social Security trust fund that will be
lent to the government.) According to
Simpson and
Bowles, if we accept their recommendations Social
Security will be on a sound financial footing for the next 75 years.
It is worth
noting, however, that if these recommendations are implemented they will have
the effect of converting Social Security from an insurance program in which
the benefits provide some protection against a catastrophic loss into a kind
of non-means-tested
welfare program for the elderly
in which there are hardly any benefits at all. The extent to which this
is so is indicated in Figure 17.3 which shows the expected payout under
the current law and how the payout structure would change under the
Simpson-Bowles recommendations.
Source:
www.StrengthenSocialSecurity.org,
Benefits Chart.
Under this scheme benefits would fall by
47% for "'Maximum' Earners($106,800)", 39% for "'High' Earners ($68,934)",
27% for "'Medium' Earners ($43,084)" and even "'Low Earners'
($19,388)" would see a decrease. In addition, only 40% of the "'Very Low
Earners' ($10,771)" would see an increase while the remaining 60% would see
their benefits fall. This is not Social Security as we know it.
Even worse, the Simpson-Bowles scheme proposes to fund this
program through the payroll tax. The payroll tax is one of the most
regressive taxes there is. It is levied only on earned income (income
received from wages and salaries) with no deductions and only minor
exemptions, and the total amount of earned income taxed is capped where
the cap in 2011 was $106,800. It is not levied on unearned income (income
received in the form of interest, dividends, capital gains, rent, and
corporate profits) or on earned income above the $106,800 cap. As a result,
virtually all of the income of low income families is subject to the Social
Security tax since virtually all of their income comes from wages and
salaries below the cap, while virtually none of the income of the wealthy is subject to this
tax since virtually all of their income is either above the cap on earned
income or comes from unearned income.
The payroll tax is hardly an equitable way to finance a
welfare type program. The burden of financing this sort of program should fall
heaviest on those who can afford to pay, not on the backs of the working poor
as is the case when the payroll tax is used. It makes sense to use a payroll
tax to finance an insurance program. It does not make sense to use a
payroll tax to finance a welfare-type program.
Our
multiple-payer, third-party,
fee-for-service payment healthcare system whereby healthcare providers decide
with patients what services to provide and how much to charge while insurance companies or
the government picks up the tab virtually guarantees continually increasing
costs. There is a powerful incentive to over prescribe in this system and
little incentive to deliver quality healthcare in a cost effective manner
since the decisions as to what to charge and how much to prescribe are made primarily by
providers.
To make matters
worse, rising healthcare costs virtually guarantee that a continually
increasing share of the healthcare costs will be passed on to the government
as the higher costs force people, especially those with poor health, out of the private
healthcare system. This is so because as people are forced out of the
system society must decide the extent to which the government should pick up
the tab for those who can no longer afford the cost of private healthcare.
To the extent the government picks up the tab, it reinforces the process of
third-party payment irrespective of cost that leads to the increasing costs
that forces people out of the private healthcare system in the first place.
To the extent the government does not pick up the tab, people who could
otherwise be saved are left to die or to suffer with maladies that could
otherwise be cured. This choice begs the question: How many poor
people who cannot afford to pay for the cost of healthcare should be allowed
to suffer or die—in the wealthiest country on Earth—in order to lower the
costs for those who can afford to pay?
There is no
optimal answer to this question that is in any sense humane, and our attempt
to find one over the past 75 years while at the same time attempting to hang
on to our archaic
multiple-payer, third-party,
fee-for-service payment system has caused the American
healthcare system to become the least efficient among the advanced
countries of the world. We rank
51th in terms of life expectancy,
51th in terms of infant mortality,
24th in terms of the availability of doctors,
25th in terms of mother’s health,
37th in terms of the overall performance of our healthcare system, and
at the same time, we spend more for healthcare
per person and as a
percent of GDP than any other country
in the world.
(OECD
OECD Charts NYT
IOM JAMA1
JAMA2)
Over the past thirty years healthcare expenditures as
a percent of GDP have increased at the rate of 2.2% per year. At this
rate, expenditures as percent of GDP will double every 32 years.
Obviously something is going to give before this can occurred. The
only question is what: the government’s budget, employer sponsored health
insurance, or both?
The
Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act has attempted to address this
rising healthcare cost problem, but while there are a number of cost saving
provisions in this bill,
the Affordable
Care Act hangs on to the fee-for-service, multi-third-party-payer model. There is
no
single-payer mechanism or
public-option plan provided for in this
act to provide a direct mechanism by which costs can be controlled. In
addition, the 85% payout restriction on insurance companies that is part of this
bill means that once insurance companies reach this limit they will only be able to increase their profits
in the aggregate
if healthcare costs increase, thereby, increasing what insurance companies
can make from their 15% cut. This does not exactly provide an
incentive for insurance companies or providers to hold down costs, and if
healthcare costs continue to grow the way they have in the past, the cost of
Medicare and
Medicaid, which together make up the largest single component of our
social insurance system today, will eventually become unbearable.
In dealing with
healthcare, the main thrust of the Simpson’s-Bowles recommendations is to
reduce healthcare costs by forcing healthcare recipients, both public and
private, to pay a larger proportion of the cost. But, as was noted
above, this plan can only
reduce costs to the extent it forces those who cannot afford the added costs
out of the healthcare system with all of the implications that has for the
health of our population; to the extent the government picks up the
tab for those who cannot afford the added cost there is no saving. This
plan is just more of the same kind of thing we have been doing for the past 65
years, and there is no reason to think the results will be different: rising
healthcare costs with a larger and larger portion of the tab being picked up
by the government.
What is particularly disturbing about the Simpson-Bowles
bipartisan plan for deficit reduction, however, is that while they recommend
massive cuts in Social Security and Medicare benefits, at the same time they
recommend the top marginal income tax rate paid by corporations and the
wealthy be cut from
35% to 28%, that the marginal income tax rate paid by
middle-income earners be set at
22%, and that the lowest income tax rate paid by the
not so wealthy be increased from
10% to 12%.
It these changes are passed into law, the combined
14.2% [17.2] employee/employer payroll tax rate plus the
income tax rate in the lowest income bracket will equal 26.3%—less than two
percentage points below the maximum marginal rate corporations and
multibillionaires will pay. Those in lower end of the middle tax bracket will
face a combined marginal rate of
36.2%—8.2 percentage points above the
marginal rate multibillionaires and corporations will pay. Even though
Simpson and
Bowles also recommend treating dividends and capital
gains as ordinary income and recommend a few other changes that will make the
tax code somewhat more progressive, there is something very wrong here.
There was a surplus in the federal budget equal to
2.4% of GDP in 2000 before the massive
2001-2003 Bush tax cuts, before the invasion of Iraq,
and before those who ran our financial institutions devastated our economy. The
fiscal problems we face today are clearly the result of the Bush cut taxes
combined with the increases in defense expenditures squandered in Iraq and the
devastating recession brought on by the fraudulent, reckless, and
irresponsible behavior of those in charge of our financial institutions. Social Security
and Medicare had nothing to do with this mess.
And yet—in the name of fiscal responsibility—Alan Simpson and
Erskine Bowles, acting as co-chairs of
the
National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform, released their
Moment of Truth report in which they propose we 1) cut
Medicare benefits and increase the private cost of healthcare dramatically, 2)
convert Social Security into a welfare-type program paid for with payroll taxes in
order to avoid paying an increase in benefits equal to 2% of GDP, and, at the
same time, 3) give additional tax cuts to those at the top of the income
distribution, many of whom made fortunes out of the Iraq war and through
financing the housing bubble that devastated the economy of the entire world. And to add
insult to injury, we are also supposed to increase the taxes paid by those in
the lowest income tax bracket. This not only defies common sense, it
defies common decency.
The
Moment of Truth report released by the co-chairs of the
National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform does not deal with the deficit problem in a substantive
way. There is no discussion as to how the optimum level or quality
healthcare can be provided to the population in the most cost effective manner in
their report. No discussion as to how Social Security and Medicare can
be maintained as viable insurance programs. No discussion as to how the
optimum level of essential government services can be made available in their
most cost effective manner.
This report concentrates only on cutting government
services and lowering tax rates paid by the ultra wealthy. As a result,
it simply ignores obvious solutions
to our Social Security, healthcare, and fiscal problems—solutions that do not
entail emasculating Social Security and Medicare.
There are many ways to deal with the expected shortfall in Social Security
revenues needed to finance the benefits promised to the baby boomers that
would not involve drastic changes in the Social Security program. One would be to
-
Increase
the payroll cap to apply to 90% of covered earnings
as Congress intended back in 1977 or, perhaps, to an
even higher percentage.
-
Convert
the federal estate tax to a
dedicated Social Security tax that is credited
automatically to the Social Security trust fund.
-
Expand
the program to cover newly hired
state and local workers.
-
Implement
modest changes in payroll taxes and Social Security benefits, if needed, after
the above changes have been made and, perhaps, extend the payroll tax to
include unearned income and/or remove the income cap altogether.
Approaching the expected Social Security deficit problem in
this way would not require the draconian cuts in benefits put forth in the
Moment of Truth Report nor would it require draconian
payroll tax increases.
As we saw in Chapter 12, through
Chapter
16, it is the rising cost of healthcare that poses the most serious fiscal
problem faced by the federal government, and, as has been noted above, every
advanced country in the world that has better health statistics and lower
healthcare costs than we do has abandoned the cost ineffective
multiple-third-party payment system for
a
single-payer universal healthcare system that provides government
subsidized healthcare for all—paid for through taxes—where costs are
controlled through government negotiated prices. They pay higher taxes than we
do, but their higher taxes are more than offset by the savings in insurance
premiums and lower healthcare costs—not to mention the fact that they are
healthier than we are, and they live longer than we do. (OECD
OECD Charts NYT
IOM JAMA1
JAMA2)
The simplest, most efficient, and most cost effective way
to provide a comparable system for the United States would be to extend the
Medicare program to the entire population. This program works, and the
institutions necessary to run it are already in place. It would take
very little effort to retool Medicare to meet the needs of the entire
population compared to the massive effort it is going to take to
implement the
Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act.
By 2000, increases in the Social Security trust fund was
adding over $150 billion a year in cash flow and deferred interest payments to
the government’s general fund, and it continued to do so for the next eight
years. From 1996 through 2008, the federal government relied on the
increase in the OASDI trust fund to finance over 6% of its outlays and, as was
noted above, this
reached a peak in 2001when the money
borrowed from the Social Security System’s trust funds in that year alone
amounted to 8.75% of the federal
budget.
Now that the baby boomers are starting to retire, this
source of revenue is coming to an end. While some of the interest the
government owes the Social Security System each year can still be simply added
to the System's trust funds, cash receipts from payroll taxes have fallen
below the cash benefits and administrative costs the Social Security System
must pay out. As a result, the government must either borrow the difference
or it must increase non-payroll taxes in order to pay that portion of the
interest it owes the Social Security System each year in cash to meet this
cash shortfall—if that’s what our government chooses to do. It also has the
option of reneging on its agreement with the baby boomers by reducing their
benefits or increasing the payroll taxes paid by their children and
grandchildren.
Even though there are a number of
simple fixes that will solve the Social Security baby boomer retirement
problem, and it would be fairly easy to fix our healthcare system, none of
these fixes will work if the federal government is not
made fiscally sound. These fixes can only work if we come up with
the funds needed to make them work while, at the same time, coming up
with the funds needed to provide the other government services the American
people demand.
As we saw in Chapter 16, what
this means is that, if we are to preserve Social Security, Medicare, and
provide for all of the other government services that are demanded by the
American people, we must raise taxes.
(Fieldhouse
Diamond Sides)
It will, of course, also be necessary to
reregulate our financial system if we are to keep our financial institutions
from creating the kinds of economic disasters that unregulated financial
institutions have created throughout history. At the very lease we must
-
reenact the
Glass-Steagall Act
to eliminate the kinds conflicts of interests inherent
in conglomerate mega-bank financial institutions,
break up those financial institutions
that are "too big to fail," and
provide for direct regulation of hedge
funds, over-the-counter derivatives, and the market for repurchase
agreements with the power to set margin requirements for repurchase
agreement loans and capital requirements for Credit Default Swaps.
These are the minimum actions
required to keep those in charge of our financial institutions from creating
in the future the kind of economic catastrophes they have created in the past when unrestrained by government regulation—the
kind of economic catastrophe we are in the midst of today.
Simply passing laws, however, is not
enough. Government regulation
begins with the
law, but it ends with the regulators. It was the belief in free-market
ideology that was the primary cause of the financial crisis we face today, not
the absence of legislation. The
Home Ownership and Equity Protection Act
(HOEPA) passed 1994
gave the Federal Reserve the absolute authority to regulate the mortgage
market. Enforcing the laws against predatory lending practices, enforcing
strict underwriting standards for mortgage loans, and setting maximum loan to
value ratios on mortgages would have prevented the housing bubble that came
into being in the 2000s. The Federal Reserve had the absolute authority to do
all of these things under HOEPA during the housing bubble, but the ideological faith in free
markets to regulate themselves on the part of regulators, the administrations,
and the Congress kept the Fed from doing so.
(Bair)
In addition,
the regulators could have
petitioned the government to bring
Money Market Mutual Funds,
Cash Management Accounts, and repurchase agreements
under the purview of depository regulators during the Reagan administration
and to extend the regulatory authority of the
Security and Exchange Commission
and
Commodity Futures Trading Commission to regulate
hedge funds and the markets for Credit Default Swaps during the Clinton
administration, but, again, ideology stood in the way.
Until the terribly
misguided view of reality embodied in the
failed nineteenth-century ideology
of free-market capitalism is replaced in the minds regulators,
administrations, Congress, and the body politic by a pragmatic view of
financial regulation that recognizes the need for the government to rein in
and control the speculative and fraudulent urges of the financial sector there
is little hope of our being able to survive the current crisis with our basic
social institutions intact or to avoid similar economic catastrophes in the
future.
As was
noted at the end of Chapter 3, today we are
faced with the same kind of situation we faced in the 1930s:
Given
the state of mass-production technology,
the distribution of income is incapable of providing the domestic mass markets
needed to achieve full employment in the
absence of a speculative bubble.
If we do not come to grips
with this problem our domestic markets for mass-produced goods will continue
to erode; we will be plagued with boom and bust cycles of economic
instability, and it will be impossible to maintain the standard of living of
the vast majority of our population
as our economic
resources are transferred out of those industries that produce for domestic
mass markets and into those industries that produce for the privileged few.
(King)
Not only will it be impossible
to maintain the standard of living of the vast majority of our population if
the concentration of income is not reduced, those at the top of the income
distribution will eventually find they are getting a larger piece of an ever
decreasing pie. It is domestic mass markets that make mass production
possible, and it is mass production—made
possible by our domestic mass markets—that
made the United States the economic powerhouse of the world.
The erosion of our domestic mass markets erodes the very foundation on which
our economic system rests, and to the extent that foundation is undermined,
our ability to produce is undermined as well. (Ostry)
The only way a country can
take advantage of mass-production technologies in the absence of an income
distribution that provides a domestic mass market capable of purchasing
output produced without increasing debt relative to income is by producing for export and running a current account
surplus.
Unfortunately, continually running a current account surplus leads to increasing the debts of
foreigners relative to their incomes,
especially when those debts are accumulated through the process of financing
consumption or the production of capital goods in the midst of speculative
bubbles that do not increase productivity. Increasing domestic debt relative to
income, or the debts of foreigners relative to their incomes is not sustainable
in the long run. The transfer burden from debtor to creditor must
eventually overwhelm the system, and must eventually lead to a financial crisis that causes the system to collapse.
In the final analysis, it was
the rising debts in the importing countries relative to their incomes that led
to the current crisis. The only
way to avoid this kind of crisis is through producing for domestic markets
without a continually increasing debt relative to income. This, in turn,
requires a distribution of income capable of supporting the domestic mass
markets needed to purchase the domestic output that can be produced.
Given the extent to which non-federal debt has increased
relative to income over the past twenty-five years it should be obvious that
we are not going to be able to solve the economic problems we face today
without a major intervention on the part of the federal government. Simply
raising taxes is not going to solve our deficit/debt problem or return our
economy to full employment. As we saw in
Chapter 3
and again in Chapter 15,
it was the massive government expenditures during World War II that finally
brought us out of the Great Depression, and it was the fall in concentration of
income during and following the war that made it possible for our mass
production industries to survive. There is no reason to
believe we will be able to survive the current crisis with our basic social
institutions intact and without a fall in the standard of living of the vast
majority of the population in the absence of a similar effort on the part of the federal
government today and without a similar reduction in the concentration of
income.
The government has already had to step in to the tune of
$700 billion in TARP
funds and
trillions of
dollars of guarantees in order to bail out the
financial institutions that brought the current crisis down upon us, but this
is only placing a band aid on the economic wound we suffered as this bailout
transferred wealth and income from taxpayers to the bankers who caused the
problem in the first place. It is the mortgagors that should have been bailed
out, not the bankers who created the problems we face today.
(Bair)
The fiscal resources of the
federal government should be used to increase taxes and government
expenditures to mitigate the effects of the current recession and rebuild the
public infrastructure we have allowed to deteriorate over the past thirty
years. They should not be squandered on lower taxes for corporations and the higher income
brackets or on bailing out those who created the financial house of cards that
has fallen down upon us.
Mobilizing our fiscal recourses
by increasing taxes and government expenditures to provide relief to those
whose mortgages are underwater and waging a war on our deteriorating public
infrastructure certainly makes more sense than waiting for—or manufacturing—a
real war to justify the mobilization of these resources. If we do not approach
our non-federal debt and unemployment problems by increasing taxes and
government expenditures in a way that makes it possible to deleverage the
system while improving our public infrastructure our economic situation can
only get worse as our financial system struggles to survive. Our unemployment
problem will persist, and eventually the productivity of our economic
resources will begin to fall as our economic resources are transferred out of
those industries that produce for domestic mass markets. Our transportation,
water and waste treatment facilities, education, power distribution,
communication, regulatory, legal, and other governmental systems will continue
to deteriorate, and it will be impossible to maintain the standard of living
of the vast majority of our population.
These
things should be obvious, and, yet, our political leaders (at home and
those in Europe as well) are in the process of
negotiating how best to cut government expenditures and “entitlement”
programs—the very expenditures that
kept our economy from spiraling in to the abyss it
spiraled into in the 1930s and the very programs that allowed us
to avoid the wretched squalor and misery
we experienced during that dismal period of our history—and, at the same time,
they are negotiating how best to lower taxes on the upper income groups even
further.
At the
center of these negations is the
Moment of Truth Report
written by
Alan Simpson and
Erskine Bowles—the end product of the President’s
National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform. As we saw
above, the primary
recommendations of this report are to
-
Convert
Social Security from an insurance program in which the vast majority of the
participants benefit, into a
non-means-tested welfare
program for the elderly, funded by a regressive
payroll tax, in which only the poorest of the poor benefit.
-
Reduce
healthcare costs by forcing healthcare recipients, both public and private,
to pay a larger proportion of the cost directly thereby forcing those who
cannot afford the added costs out of the healthcare system—the ultimate
death panel solution to the healthcare cost problem whereby those who can’t
afford the added costs are simply allowed to suffer and die.
-
Cut the
maximum marginal tax rate paid by corporations and multibillionaires from 35% to 28%, set the
middle tax bracket at 22%, and increase the tax rate paid by the
lowest income earners from 10% to 12% thereby creating a situation in which
the combined 14.2% employee/employer payroll tax rate plus the
income tax rate in the lowest income bracket will equal 26.2%—less than two
percentage point below the 28% marginal rate corporations and
multibillionaires will pay. Those toward the lower end of the middle bracket
will face a combined marginal rate of
36.2%—8.2 percentage points above the
marginal rate multibillionaires and corporations will pay.
At the
same time, the
Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act
has added restrictions on the
Federal Reserve’s ability
to act in an emergency situation,
(Bair)
and the fundamental provisions of this bill do not go near far enough to
eliminate the conflicts of interest in our financial system or to reign in the
behavior of our financial institutions. In addition, those provisions of this
bill that do hold some promise to moderated the fraud and deception that has
pervaded our financial system over the past thirty years, the
Consumer Financial Protection Bureau
for
example,
are under attack on ideological grounds by a large
segment of the politically powerful.
The
ultimate question is whether we are going to deal with our problems by
increasing taxes and thereby enhance the government’s ability to solve them,
or are we going to follow the mantra of the free-market ideologues and
undermine the government’s ability to deal with these problems by cutting
taxes and government expenditures, dismantling our social-insurance programs,
turning Federal Reserve policy over to Congress and, thereby, cut the threads that have so far saved us
from the fate of the 1930s.
Lower taxes, less government,
and deregulation caused the economic problems we have today, and more of the
same is not going to solve these problems. If we are to solve these problems
we must strengthen government, not weaken it; we must increase taxes, not
lower them, and we must increase government expenditures as we rebuild the
regulatory systems that were dismantled since the 1970s and rebuild the public
infrastructure that has been allowed to deteriorate over the past forty years.
If we do not do these things
and, instead, continue to follow the failed ideological mantra of lower
taxes, less government, and deregulation we are most certainly going to end up
right back where we started in the 1930s. And if the political leaders
throughout the world continue to follow this failed ideological mantra and
refuse to come to grips with the root causes of the worldwide economic
catastrophe we face today, we are likely to end up where we ended up in the
1940s.
Endnote
[17.1]
It should be noted that privatizing individual Social Security
accounts also does nothing to solve the baby boomer retirement problem.
Even if the Social Security system were made up entirely of individualized
accounts that contained the government bonds now in the trust fund these bonds would still have to be redeemed by
the government when the owners of these accounts began withdrawing
retirement funds, or some non-Social-Security-account buyer would have to
be found who is willing to purchase these government bonds.
The situation would be even worse, not for the
government but for the Social Security account holders, if the private
accounts contained private securities. Aside from the vagaries of the
private securities markets, the flow of funds into the private securities
markets as the baby boomers built up their accounts would have undoubtedly
been a boon to these markets. It is just as undoubtable that the flow of
funds out of these markets as the baby boomers retired would be a serious
drag on these markets. The baby boomers would be buying as they drove
prices up and selling as they drove prices down, not exactly a formula for
getting rich. Such a scheme would, perhaps, serve the older baby boomers
well, but certainly not the younger baby boomers.
[17.2] The combined
rate is 14.2% rather than 15.3% since in combining the rates paid by the
employer and employee we must include the portion of the payroll tax
paid by the employer as part of the employee's income.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 18:
Ideology Versus Reality
George H. Blackford © 5/16/2013
For the past forty years the
Conservative Movement
has incessantly attacked
the American government as if the solution to all of our problems is to be
found in lowering taxes, cutting government expenditures, and in getting rid of
government regulations.
Few people seem to
realize that this movement is attacking
the same government that created the
Social Security System to provide
old age and disability insurance;
Medicare,
and
Medicaid
to provide health insurance for the aged and the indigent; the
Veterans Administration to serve our veterans;
unemployment
compensation to
soften the blow of unemployment for the unemployed; the
Food and
Drug Administration to protect us from tainted food and worthless or dangerous
drugs; the Security Exchange Commission to fight fraud in the financial sector
of our economy; the
Federal Reserve System to control the money supply and provide for
economic stability; the Consumer Protection Agency to protect us from
dangerous consumer products; the Environmental Protection Agency to prevent the
poisoning of the air we breathe, the water we drink, and the very ground on
which we live; the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
to provide for a safer workplace; the
National Institute of Health to
promote health research; the Centers for
Communicable Desease and
public health departments that fight the spread of communicable diseases;
the National Science Foundation that
promotes basic scientific research; and countless other institutions and
regulatory agencies that promote the general Welfare, as is called for in the
Constitution.
It is also the same government that created the
transcontinental railroad and
interstate highway systems along with all of our state highways, county roads,
and city streets; the military that provides for our national defense; the
police and judicial systems which set the rules and provide for law and order within society;
our firefighters who fight our fires; our national, state, and local park systems; and our land-grant college system and other public
college, university, secondary, and elementary school systems devoted to the
concept of universal education that has proved to be the backbone of economic
and social development within our society for the past 150 years. And
this is the same government that won
World War II and the
Cold War and that
has fueled the most powerful economic engine in the world.
These are all the
products of our government, and it is this government conservatives have been
attacking for the past forty years—the government of the United States of
America as created by the
Constitution
of the United States of America.
(Kuttner
Lindert
Amy)
Contrary to what free-market ideologues would have you believe, there is a
reason why we have government regulations.
In the real
world, government regulations are essential to the efficient and safe
functioning of markets.
We regulate the
markets for food and drugs and other consumer goods because without regulation
it is inevitable that dangerous foods and drugs and consumer goods that have the
potential to cause great harm to innocent people will be fraudulently or
negligently foisted on an unsuspecting public.
We regulate
markets to control pollution because without regulation it is inevitable that
our air and water, rivers and streams, fish and fowl, and even the very Earth on
which we live will become contaminated and poisonous to human beings.
We
regulate the work environment because without regulation it is inevitable that
the forces of competition and the drive for profit will lead to increasingly
dangerous and harmful work environments with sixteen to eighteen hour days and
eight and ten year old children working in coal mines.
Finally,
we regulate
financial markets not only because without regulation it is inevitable that
greed and the lust for profit will lead to fraudulent, reckless, irresponsible,
and foolish behavior on the part of those in charge of our financial
institutions that will cause a great deal of harm, not only to the individual victims who are
directly affected by this kind of behavior, but because throughout history, time and time again, we find that
this kind of fraudulent, reckless, irresponsible, and foolish behavior has led
to economic catastrophes that have brought the entire economic system to its
knees—catastrophes that have
led to an
unconscionable amount of hardship, misery, and suffering on the part of
innumerable individuals who
had nothing to do with the nefarious behavior that brought on these
catastrophes.
It is the presence of government regulation that moderates the forces within a
capitalist system that, if left unchecked, would lead to injury and harm to a
great number of innocent people, and it is the height of foolishness to think that somehow
life would be better for the vast majority of the population if we did away
with government regulation. The
fact is, that in the absence of a powerful force to intervene in free markets
to constrain them to serve humane ends, Capitalism promises to become a
cancerous growth on humanity that
will devour the very planet on which we live. The only force
available to intervene in in this way is a democratic government, and it is
clear from the history of Capitalism—or
at least it should be clear—that
we deny this reality at our
peril.
(Smith
MacKay
George
Marx
Veblen
Roosevelt
Haywood
Jones
Fisher
Josephson
Keynes
Polanyi
Schumpeter
Boyer
Galbraith
Musgrave
Domhoff
Kindleberger
Minsky
Skidelsky
Stewart
Zinn
Stiglitz
Phillips
Kuttner
Morris
Taleb
Lindert
Bogle
Harvey
Dowd
Galbraith
Baker
Stiglitz
Klein
Reinhart
Fox
Johnson
Amy
Sachs
Smith
Eichengreen
Rodrik
Graeber
IPCC)
We have been cutting back on government programs for forty years
now, and it hasn't exactly worked out for the best as we continue to struggle
with the end result of these cutbacks, namely, the worst economic crisis since the Great
Depression and a governmental system that can barely function today.
The free-market ideologues that
inspire the
Conservative Movement have a very
simplistic view of reality based on their concept of liberty and freedom. It
is their belief that individuals should be allowed the freedom to fend for
themselves in free and unfettered markets to provide for their own economic
well being without government interference or guarantees. It is the free
choices of individuals in free markets that create prosperity and wealth in
society, in their view, and individuals owe nothing to society save to honor
the contracts they freely enter into. And they definitely do not believe
in government mandated social insurance. Government mandated social insurance interferes
with the liberty and freedom of those, such as themselves, who do not wish
participate in or pay for these programs. They simply do not believe
that it is the purpose of government to promote the general Welfare, other than
to provide for national defense and to protect property rights. (Friedman)
The leadership of the
Conservative Movement
also believes that
if government will just get out of the way, the free choices of individuals in
free and unfettered markets will optimize human well being within society
through the discipline of the marketplace. Those who work hard and are
productive will be rewarded by the marketplace through higher incomes and
their ability to accumulate wealth in proportion to their contribution to
society. Those who do not work hard, are not productive, and do not
contribute substantially to society will not be so rewarded. (TP)
To the extent government interferes with this market
discipline, people no longer have an incentive to work hard, productivity
falters, output falls, and we are all made worse off. In this view, the
distribution of income and wealth so determined by free and unregulated
markets is fair and just, and anything the government attempts to do beyond
national defense and enforcing property rights is unfair and unjust and does
more harm than good as it destroys market discipline and causes
productivity and output to fall.
The arguments explaining this view of reality are put forth
with elegance and logical infallibility in such works as
Ayn Rand's,The Fountainhead and
Atlas Shrugged,
Friedrich von Hayek's,
The Road to Serfdom,
Milton Friedman's,
Capitalism and Freedom and
Free to Choose,
Ludwig von
Mises’s,
Human Action, and the
American Conservative Union’s,
Statement of Principles,
works that have inspired conservatives to ever higher levels of passion over
the past sixty years as well as having provided the backbone of their
intellectual arguments.
In addition, the academic discipline
of economics has provided a logically consistent and mathematically elegant
model of market behavior that describes how this ideal system of human
interaction in markets is supposed to work as well as the prerequisites for
the existence for such a system to actually work. (Kuttner
Taleb
Dowd
Galbraith
Fox
Musgrave
Stiglitz
Klein
Johnson
Smith)
It should not be surprising that the
logically infallible works listed above combined with the heroic efforts of academic economists to
explain how free markets are supposed to work have provided the intellectual foundation for
an ideological view of society that is totally out of touch with reality.
After all, you can prove anything with logic! All you have to do is
start with a false premise, and the logically infallible works listed above
are filled with false premises, beginning with the fact that the literature that provides the passion for
this ideological view is based on a straw-man caricature of tyrannical
government that completely ignores all of the essential functions that
government performs in our daily lives and without which civilized society is
impossible—the kinds of functions so beautifully explained by
Douglas Amy in his website,
www.
governmentisgood. com.
By the same token, the academic model that
explains how, and under what circumstances such an economy is supposed to work
not only completely ignores the role of government in our economic and social
lives, but the assumptions on which the logical consistency of this model
depends—the most important
being that no economic actor has the power to directly
influence
market prices, all market participants have
perfect
information as to the determination of market prices, that there are
no external costs
or benefits associated with the production or consumption of goods, and
that
people behave rationally—are
impossible to achieve in the real world.
The
free-market ideologues who dominate the Conservative Movement tell us that lower
taxes, less government, and deregulated free markets will solve all of our
economic problems and make everyone better off.
Yet, when we look at the era at the beginning of the twentieth century in Figure 18.1 when
taxes were low, government was small, and regulation was virtually nonexistent—a
state of nature that conservative ideologues hold as ideal—we
find that there was no increase at all in average real income
of the bottom 90% of the income distribution. The
real incomes of the bottom 90% didn't begin to increase during the twentieth
centaury until 1933 at the beginning of the
New Deal,
that is, until the era of higher taxes, more government, and more regulation of
the economic system ushered in by the New Deal began.
Source:
The World Top
Incomes Database.
What's more, when we look at the 40 year period that followed the beginning of
the New Deal we find that the average real income of the bottom 90% (excluding
capital gains)
increase fivefold as it went from $6,940 (measured in 2012 prices) in 1933 to
$34,956 in 1973.
We also find that during the 39
year period of lower taxes, less government, and deregulation that followed
1973 there was a repeat of the period that
preceded 1933—no
increase in the average real income of the bottom 90%. From 1974 through
2012, the average real income of the bottom 90% exceeded the high it had
achieved in 1973 for only a brief, two-year period in 1999 and 2000, and by
2012 it had fallen back to $30,439,
which was below the $31,205 level the
bottom 90% had achieved in 1967.
In light of this history, the conservative's notion that
lower taxes, less
government, and deregulation lead to prosperity for all is clearly absurd.
It is obvious to all but free-market ideologues that the
incomes people receive, and the wealth people are able to accumulate as they
participate in a market economy, do not necessarily correspond to how hard
they work or how productive they are or by how much they contribute to the
society as a whole. It is also obvious that the accomplishments of
individuals are not achieved by their own efforts alone, but are crucially
dependent of the social system in which they live that makes their individual
accomplishments possible.
No one can deny that the fortunes accumulated by
Bill Gates,
Paul Allen,
Steve Jobs,
Steve Wozniak,
Robert Noyce,
Gordon Moore,
Andrew Grove, and countless others who
have made immeasurable contributions to the micro computer revolution over the
past forty years are comparable to their immeasurable contributions to the
well being of the society as a whole and are well deserved on that account
alone. They are living examples of everything the mythical world of
unregulated, free-market capitalism is supposed to be about.
It is also true, however, that they did not achieve their
immense accomplishments on their own. Their accomplishments were built on
the backs of giants throughout history who developed the science that made
their successes possible and depended crucially on the university system that
has evolved over the centuries that made that science possible. Their
successes would have been impossible without the tremendous technological
breakthroughs in the aerospace program and as a result of government sponsored
computer research during World War II, and there is a certain amount
noncompetitive monopoly power that has contributed to the size of their
fortunes.
At the same time, it is impossible to deny that luck played a major role in
determining the size of their fortunes as well—that had they been born in a different era or into families living
in desperate straits in Sub-Saharan Africa or some other desperate place in
the world rather than in this era and into moderately well to do families in
the United States they would have been far less successful in life.
As a result of all of these social factors, and many more, they owe an immense debt of gratitude to the society that made it possible
for them to flourish in the way they have flourished. (Alperovitz)
When we look at the income received and wealth accumulated
by others in today’s world, however, we see a very different picture. When we
look at the incomes received and fortunes accumulate by the
executives of
General Motors as they drove the world’s largest automobile company into
bankruptcy; by the savings and loan
owners and managers as they financed the
commercial real estate bubbles in the 1980s; by
the corporate raiders who
drove American businesses deeper and deeper into debt and countless firms into
bankruptcy; by
those who hyped worthless internet stocks in the 1990s; by the
executives of
Drexel Burnham Lambert,
Enron,
Global Crossing,
WorldCom,
Fannie
Mae, and countless other individuals that used insider information, stock
manipulation, or phony accounting practices to generate paper profits to
justify increases in their multimillion dollar salaries and bonuses as they
ran the businesses they headed into the ground; by those who originated
millions of subprime and alt-A mortgages through fraud and deception in the
2000s; and by those who gave unwarranted triple-A ratings to the
mortgage backed securities, securitized these mortgages, and created the
worldwide crisis we are in the midst of today we do not find living examples
of everything the mythical world of unregulated, free-market capitalism is
supposed to be about. Instead, we find living examples of what real-world,
unregulated, free-market capitalism is actually about.
The unconscionable incomes and massive
fortunes these individuals accumulated have nothing to do with economic
efficiency or the contributions these individuals have made to the society as
a whole. Their contributions to economic efficiency and to society as a whole
were negative, and even if they returned all of the income they received and
wealth they accumulated to the society that made their success possible there
would still be a tremendous net loss.
Yet somehow, in the eyes of the free-market
ideologue, the current economic catastrophe is supposed to be the fault of the
individuals who lost their homes, their jobs, their life's savings, and their
hopes and dreams for the future while those who perpetrated the fraud that
caused this disaster and made billions of dollars in the process are not only
held blameless but are, in fact, idolized by virtue of the fact that they made
money on the deal. There is a terrible perversion in an ideological view
of the world that blames the victims for allowing themselves to be preyed upon
and extols the virtues of the predators who made fortunes in the process of
creating a disaster for the rest of society.
The ideological explanation for the
fall in real income for 90% of the families over the past forty years
in terms of their refusal to work harder or because they haven’t increased
their productivity or contributed more to the society as a whole makes no
sense at all. Hours of overtime worked in the manufacturing sector increased
by
67.9% from 1980 through 1995 while
output per hour worked increased by at least
30% (and probably more than
50%), and total manufacturing output
increased by
42.8%. At the same time, the average
hourly earnings in the manufacturing sector decreased by
7.2% in real
terms after adjusting for the increase in consumer prices. In other words,
even though hourly workers in the manufacturing industries worked harder, were
more productive, and the total output they produced to the benefit of the
society as a whole increased, they were rewarded by a decrease in their real
wage.
The incomes people receive and the wealth people are able
to accumulate as they participate in a market economy depend as much on
economic and political power as on hard work, productivity, and economic efficiency, and who
has that power depends crucially on government policy. (Dillow) When government policy
-
opposes public financing
of political campaigns and allows the money provided by political PACs,
corporations, and wealthy individuals to dominate the political process,
-
favors unregulated markets,
-
allows the concentration of monopoly power into
the hands of larger and larger corporations,
-
allows the profits of international banks and
corporations to determine international trade and financial policy,
-
not only opposes collective bargaining on the
part of labor unions, but employs government power to suppress strikes and
refuses to enact and enforce laws against unfair labor practices,
-
provides massive
subsidies to industry through the provision of public infrastructure,
national defense, enforcement of civil law and order, and public education
for the labor force as well as for the population at large, while at the same
time
-
imposes a tax structure on the
populace that does not recoup the costs of these subsidies from those who
benefit from them the most, but, rather, places this burden on the backs of
those who benefit from them the least
economic and political power gravitates into the hands of the economically and politically
powerful few, and, as their incomes and wealth soar to astronomical heights,
fraud and predation flourishes, the
public
infrastructure and social capital
that made their
success possible declines to the detriment of future generations, and the vast majority of the population founder in
the wake of the economic catastrophes that result.
On the
other hand, when government policy
-
provides public financing for political
campaigns and offsets the money provided by political PACs, corporations,
and wealthy individuals by providing equal time and equal funds to political
campaigns,
-
favors regulating market behavior to promote the
general Welfare,
-
prevents the concentration of monopoly power
into the hands of larger and larger corporations whenever desirable and
regulates the monopoly power that cannot be eliminated whenever necessary,
-
maintains a balance in trade that benefits the
American people rather than maximizes the profits of international financial
institutions and corporations,
-
not only encourages collective bargaining on the
part of labor unions, but employs the power of government to enact and
enforce laws against unfair labor practices,
-
provides massive subsidies to industry through
the provision of public infrastructure, national defense, enforcement of
civil law and order, and public education for the labor force as well as for
the population at large while at the same time,
-
imposes a tax structure on the
populace to recoup the costs of these massive subsidies from those who
benefit from them the most and does not place this burden on the backs of
those who benefit from them the least
economic and political power gravitates from the privileged few into the
hands of the vast majority of the population, and, while the incomes and wealth
of the few still grow to astronomical heights, the income and wealth of those
few do not soar to such dizzying heights that the vast majority of the
population is left behind. Income and wealth does not flow from the
kinds of massive fraud and predation that lead to economic catastrophes, and
the public infrastructure and social capital that made their success possible is able to grow to
the benefit of future generations. (Amy
Kuttner
Musgrave
Johnson
Lakoff
Galbraith
Stewart
Smith
Black
Rodrik
Lindert
Prasad
Fieldhouse
Diamond
Sides)
In the utopian world
of free-market ideology it's all so simple: Deregulate the financial system;
get rid of the EPA,
SEC,
FDA,
CFTC,
Social Security,
Medicare,
Medicaid,
unemployment
compensation;
cut government expenditures; lower taxes, and all of our problems will go
away. But in the real world it’s not that simple.
You do not have to be an economist to look around the world and see that
unregulated, free-market capitalism is not the sine qua non of economic prosperity
and social wellbeing. All of the most prosperous countries of the world,
especially in North America and Western Europe, contain significant and
essential elements of what right-wing ideologues call socialism. At the same time, the vast majority of
people who live in non-socialist countries live in abject poverty. The
fundamental difference between the prosperous and free, and the impoverished
and enslaved throughout the world is the quality of their governments.
When
you step back and look at the world as it actually is you find that all of the
most productive economies in the world—in particular, those of Western Europe
and North America—are what free-market ideologues call socialist countries; they
all have a major portion of their economies dominated by government. Not
only do they all have government provided public infrastructure (things like
roads and highways, ports and airports, public health and sanitation, legal and
criminal justice systems, and public education), they all have government
provided social-insurance programs such as Social Security, government provided
healthcare, unemployment compensation, and welfare assistance for the less
fortunate.
The fact that all of
these economic powerhouses have a substantial portion of the economies dominated
by government is no accident. A capitalist system cannot prosper without
government provided public infrastructure and social insurance.
Without public
infrastructure it is simply impossible for the system to prosper.
Where would American industry be without its public transportation, educational,
health, and legal systems? We would be living in the kind of tribal
society they have in Afghanistan or Somalia, and our economic system would be
equally dysfunctional.
Nor can a capitalist
system prosper in the absence of a social insurance system. In the utopian
world of free-market ideology there is no need for social insurance because
market discipline forces everyone to be productive and everyone is rewarded in
proportion to their productivity. If someone isn’t productive it’s their
own fault. They deserve what they get, which is, of course, nothing.
As a result, everyone is forced to be productive and we all live happily ever
after.
While this is the way
it works in the make-believe, utopian world of free-market ideology, this is not
the way it works in the real world. In the real world the ability for
people to prosper depends not only on their own efforts but on the way in which
the entire economic system functions. When that system functions
smoothly and efficiently opportunities to be productive abound, and everyone,
save the most foolish and lazy, are able to prosper, but when the system falters
opportunities evaporate and large segments of the population are left destitute.
When this happens, those who are still able to prosper can look down their noses
at those who are left destitute and say “It’s your fault! I can prosper, why
can’t you?”, but this misses the point.
While
those who are able to prosper may think it is the fault of the losers for their
lot, those who are left destitute don’t think that way, and whether it is their
fault or not is irrelevant in the grand scheme of things. Those who are
left destitute suffer unbearable hardship in this situation, and in the real
world people do not suffer unbearable hardship quietly unless they are forced to
do so. Unbearable hardship leads to civil unrest—which is a polite way of
saying riots in the streets and mob violence of the sort we are witnessing in
the Middle East today—and if left unchecked, the resulting civil unrest
threatens the very foundation on which the social and economic systems of
society rest.
Those who are able to
prosper when the economy falters have but two choices in the face of this
violence: They can either provide
public assistance or suppress the civil unrest. Suppressing civil unrest,
if successful, has the effect keeping those who are able to prosper in power
while forcing those who are left destitute out of the productive sectors of the
economic system. This has the effect of limiting the economic
possibilities of the system as a whole as the economy stagnates, which has been the fate of
innumerable countries around the world where repressive governments have forced
large segments of their populations out of the productive sectors of their
economies in order to maintain the power of the economically and politically powerful few.
The result is large segments of their populations in which people live at a
subsistence level, barely able to feed themselves.
On the other hand, if
the attempt to suppress civil unrest is unsuccessful, the result is inevitably a
complete destruction of the existing social and economic orders as exemplified
by the histories of countries such as Russia, China, North Korea, Cuba, and
Vietnam.
Those countries with
repressive governments are to be compared to those in North America and Western
Europe where, instead of suppressing civil unrest, governments have
provided public assistance through the development of social-insurance programs
such as Social Security, unemployment compensation, welfare, and government
organized healthcare. These countries have not only been able to quell the
civil unrest that results when the economic system fails to provide for a
substantial portion of its population, they have been able to incorporate the
vast majority of their populations into the productive sectors of their
economies as employers, employees, and customers. In so doing, these
countries have been able to create and sustain the domestic mass markets needed
to justify mass-production technologies, and, as a result, they have become the economic powerhouses of the world.
The point is, there are
certain things that are essential for economic prosperity, some of which (market
regulation, public infrastructure, and social insurance) only government can provide and
others (the profit motive and markets) only private enterprise can provide.
It takes both government and private enterprise to make the economic system
prosper, and for the economic system to prosper there must be a balance between
government and private enterprise. All you have to do to see how this
works in the real world is compare the economic prosperity of those countries in
the world that have provided this balance in the past—the countries in North
America and Western Europe—with those that have not.
Not only are the simplistic ideas of free-market
ideologues simply wrong when it comes to denying the need
for government regulation within the economy, their simplistic caricature of
government as being little more than a tyrannical force that must be resisted
at all cost ignores the vital and essential role government plays in
guaranteeing the freedom and liberty of individuals in our society.
This caricature fails to acknowledge
that there can be no individual freedom or liberty for the vast majority of
the population within society in the absence of an effective government
dedicated to guaranteeing these rights. For
those who doubt this proposition, I invite you to spend your next vacation in
Juarez, Baghdad, Kandahar, Mogadishu, Damascus, or any of the innumerable other places
on this lonely planet where the government is either unable or unwilling to
protect the rights of all individuals from the predations of others. In so
doing you will be able to gain firsthand experience with what individual
freedom and liberty are like in a world with a nonfunctioning government or a
government that only protects the rights of the privileged and powerful few
and ignores the rights of the rest of the population.
If the government does not protect your rights against those who would
otherwise have the power to limit your freedom and liberty within society who
will? (Amy
Kuttner)
Free-market ideologues are
simply wrong in their simplistic belief that government interference with free
markets must necessarily lead to economic inefficiency and a lack of
individual freedom and that the only way to achieve economic efficiency
individual freedom is through unfettered free markets. The clear and
unambiguous lesson of history is that the lack of government interference in
markets leads to appalling levels of waste, fraud, and inefficiency combined
with an appalling level of human degradation for those who lack the personal,
political, or economic power necessary to defend themselves from those who
seek to prey on the vulnerable.
No matter how mathematically eloquent, logically
irrefutable, and emotionally appealing the simplistic beliefs of free-market
ideologues may be as they pertain to the magical powers of free-market
capitalism to create individual freedom and economic efficiency in a world free of government intervention, the simple fact is that
these beliefs are completely out of touch with the real world. They
only apply to
the mythical world
free-market ideologues have created in their own minds, and all of
economic history belies the relevance of these simplistic beliefs to the real
world in which we actually live. (Smith
MacKay
George
Marx
Veblen
Roosevelt
Haywood
Jones
Fisher
Josephson
Keynes
Polanyi
Schumpeter
Boyer
Galbraith
Musgrave
Domhoff
Kindleberger
Minsky
Stewart
Zinn
Stiglitz
Phillips
Kuttner
Morris
Taleb
Lindert
Bogle
Harvey
Dowd
Galbraith
Baker
Stiglitz
Klein
Reinhart
Fox
Johnson
Amy
Sachs
Smith
Eichengreen
Rodrik
Graeber)
The fact is, there is no such thing, and there never can be
such a thing, as a free market that is independent of government. It takes the
heavy hand of government to make markets work, and for whom they work—the
society as a whole or the economically and politically powerful few—depends
crucially on government policy. When markets fail there is a chance that
government can do something about it. When governments fail all is lost. The
single most damning failure of the free-market ideologues who have driven the
Conservative Movement for the past forty years is their failure to grasp this
obvious and simple fact along with the equally obvious and simple fact that
the benefits of good government are not free, but must
be paid for with taxes.
An efficient, well functioning government that
promotes the general Welfare and protects the rights of all people is an
essential prerequisite for civil order in society. (Amy)
When the government fails to promote the general Welfare or to protect the
rights of all people and, instead, allows fraud and predation to run amuck,
the growing inequities that accumulate as the rich get richer and the poor get
desperate inevitably leads to violence—individual and mob violence on the part
of those who are desperate or whose rights are abused for lack of state
intervention, and state violence on the part of the government to suppress
those who strike out in desperation or rise up to protest their grievances.
This is the story told by the
Anti-Renter Movement of 1839-1846, the
Molly Maguires of the 1870s, the
Great Rail Strike in 1877, the
Haymarket Riot in 1886, the
Coeur d'Alene Strike in 1892, the
Homestead Strike in 1892, the
Western Federation of Miners founded
in 1893, the
Pullman Strike in 1894, the
Leadville Strike in 1896, the
Lattimer Massacre
in 1897, the
United Mine Workers of America founded
in 1900, the
Cripple Creek Strike in 1904, the
International Workers of the World
founded in 1905, the
Pressed Steel Car strike in 1909, the
Lawrence Massachusetts Strike in 1912,
the
Italian Hall Disaster in 1913, the
Ludlow Massacre in 1914, the
Everett Massacre
and
Preparedness Day bombing
in 1916, the
Palmer Raids in
1918 through 1921, the
Great Steel Strike
in 1919,
the
Wall Street Bombings
in 1919 and 1920, the
Battle of Blair Mountain in 1921, the
Ford Hunger March Massacre in 1932,
the
Pixley Cotton Strike in 1933, the
General Textile,
Minneapolis Teamsters,
Auto-Lite,
San Francisco longshoremen strikes in 1934, the
Little Steel, Massillon, Youngstown,
and
Memorial Day Massacres in 1937.
This is all part of our history, and with the
triumph of free-market ideology over rational thought these past forty years
we are well on our way to repeating it. (Boyer
Zinn
Haywood
Jones Amy
Klein
Stiglitz
Domhoff)
Where Did All The Money Go?
Chapter 19: Beyond the Current Crisis
George H. Blackford © 5/15/2013
Globalization, combined with technological improvements in
transportation and communication over the past thirty years have led to
incredible growth in productivity and output throughout the world.
Unfortunately, this growth is derived from the same
failed nineteenth century
ideological paradigm of free-market capitalism that led to the deregulation of
our financial system.
As we have seen, this paradigm is terribly flawed in its
failure to understand the necessity to regulate financial markets or to
understand the dependence of mass-production technologies on the existence
of domestic mass markets. It is also
terribly flawed in its failure to understand the necessity to regulate
pollution and to preserve our natural resources.
This nineteenth-century paradigm assumes
that the quantities of goods and services produced are determined in markets
through the interactions of buyers and sellers in such a way as to minimize
the costs of producing while at the same time maximizing the benefits to
society as a whole. The academic discipline of economics has provided a
logically consistent and mathematically elegant model of market behavior that
describes how this ideal system of human interaction is supposed to work as
well as the prerequisites for the existence for such a system to actually
work.
Unfortunately, the assumptions on which the
logical consistency of this model depends—the most
important being that no economic actor has the power to
directly influence
a market price, all market participants have
perfect
information as to the determination of all market prices, that there are
no external costs
or benefits associated with the production or consumption of any good, and
that
people behave rationally—are
impossible to achieve in the real world.[19.1]
The particular shortcoming of this
model I wish to discuss here is the problem of externalities.
At the core of the economic theory that explains how the benefits to
society as a whole are maximized in a market economy is the requirement that
market prices
reflect the costs to society as a whole that result from producing goods and
services and that market prices also reflect the benefits to society as a
whole that result from consuming the goods and services that are produced. This theory breaks down whenever
there are costs or benefits that are external to the process of
production or the act of consumption and, as a result, are not reflected in
the market price. (Musgrave)
To see how this breakdown occurs, consider the problem of disposing of the
toxic waste generated in the process of producing chemicals.
A chemical company can minimize the cost it must pay—its
private costs—to dispose of its toxic waste and, thereby, maximize its
profits, by simply dumping its waste into the nearest stream or ditch.
The polluted streams and aquifers that result threaten our supplies of potable
water and cost society dearly. When a chemical company is able to
externalize the costs of disposing of its toxic waste in this way, the private
costs of producing chemicals are substantially less than they would be if the
company had to pay these costs, and the true costs to society as a whole of
the chemicals produced are not reflected in their prices. This leads to
an over production of chemicals in the sense that if chemical companies had to
pay the true costs of producing chemicals, which would include the cost of
safely disposing of their toxic waste, the price
they would be willing to sell chemicals for would be
higher, less would be purchased, and less would be produced. (Smith
Kuttner
Musgrave)
What’s more, if chemical companies are not prevented by
law from dumping their toxic waste, they will have no choice but to dump it
because those companies that try to be socially responsible and dispose of their toxic
waste safely will have higher costs than those that do not try to be socially
responsible. As a result, socially responsible companies will be driven out
of business by socially irresponsible companies as irresponsible companies
drive market prices below the costs that must be paid by companies that try to
dispose of their toxic waste responsibly.
In other words, chemical companies must be forced by the
government to be socially responsible or they will be forced by the market to
be socially irresponsible. That’s how markets work, and the only alternative to
government intervention in the face of these kinds of external costs is to
allow the external costs to destroy the environment on which the human race
depends for its very existence.
This problem is, of course, not limited to
the chemical industry. The cheapest way to produce electricity is by
burning high sulfur coal and spewing the effluent into the atmosphere.
The acid rain and concomitant deforestation of the planet that result are
costs to society as a whole that are not reflected in the market price and are
not borne by the producers or consumers of electricity in the absence of
government regulation.
The
cheapest way to
run a nuclear power plant is to scrimp on safety, a practice which places
enormous geographical regions at risk of utter devastation, the costs of which
are not reflected in the market price of nuclear generated electricity and are
not borne by the producers or consumers of nuclear generated electricity in
the absence of government regulation.
The cheapest way to control pests in
agricultural is through the use of long lasting, carcinogenic chemicals such
as DDT which have devastating, long lasting consequences for human health and
the environment, the costs of which are not reflected in the market price and
are not born by the producers and consumers of agricultural products in the
absence of government regulation.
The cheapest way to make paint or gasoline
is by adding lead to the mix which spreads this toxic element throughout the
environment, the costs of which are not reflected in the market price and are
not born by the producers and consumers of paint or gasoline in the absence of
government regulation.
The list of dangers to the environment from unregulated
markets when there are external costs goes on and on, and the dangers are not
confined to external costs of production. There can be external costs of
consumption as well. The most obvious threat to the environment today is the
buildup of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere that is leading to global
warming. One of the largest sources of greenhouse gases is the carbon dioxide
produced by burning gasoline in the internal combustion engines that power our
automobiles. The threat to the planet is imminent, and there is no way
markets can deal with this threat because it arises from the external costs of
consuming gasoline, costs that are not reflected in the price of gasoline.
Since the price of gasoline does not come anywhere near
reflecting the costs to the world community from driving our cars, consumers
of gasoline do not have to pay these costs. Consumers of gasoline gain all of
the benefits of cheap transportation while they destroy the ecological balance
of the carbon cycle,
and there is no market mechanism that can keep this from happening in the
absence of government intervention. In fact, in the absence of government
intervention, it is inevitable that the market must destroy the carbon cycle
balance because it will always be cheaper and more convenient for most people
to drive cars than to utilize more fuel efficient forms of transportation so
long as those who drive cars have to pay only the private costs of producing
gasoline and do not have to pay the social costs of consuming gasoline.
There exists no mechanism within a market system of
economic organization to control the external costs of production and
consumption in the absence of government intervention, and it is inevitable
that a system of free markets that allows each individual and firm to force
the rest of the world to pay these costs will eventually destroy itself if the
government does not step in to keep this from happening.
Not only does the nineteenth century ideological paradigm
of unregulated free markets ignore the serious environmental problems that
result from external costs, this paradigm also ignores the voracious appetites
with which free markets devour natural resources. This aspect of
free-market
capitalism, along with the problem of pollution, was of little consequence in
the nineteenth century when the world’s population was but a fraction of what
it is today, when only a small fraction of world’s economy was industrialized,
and when the vast majority of the world’s population lived a communal
existence based on self sustaining, renewable technologies. The fact that a
relatively small industrialized sector of the world community consumed natural
resources at an accelerated rate and polluted the environment out of
proportion to its size was of little consequence in such a world. This is not
the case today.
Figure 19.1 plots the
United Nations estimates
of the world’s population from 1000AD through 2150.
It should be clear from this plot that today’s world is dramatically different
from what it was in the nineteenth century. The world’s population increased
by 68% in the 100 years from 1800 to 1900 as it went from 980 million to 1.65
billion. In the next 50 years it increased by another 53% to 2.5 billion. It
then increased dramatically as it went from 2.5 billion in 1950 to 6.06
billion by 2000, a 142% increase in just 50 years. Barring a worldwide
economic catastrophe, the world’s population is expected to increase by
another 50% in the next 40 years as it approaches 9 billion people by 2050. (UN
Sachs)
Source: United Nations,
The World at Six Billion.
Not only has the world’s population grown at an astounding
rate over the past fifty years, the world’s output of goods and services has
grown at an even more astounding rate, especially in recent years. As the
world’s population increased by 11% from 1980 through 2010, its output of
goods and services increased by almost 50%. At the same time the proportion
of the world’s output produced by the advanced countries fell from 80% in 1980
to 67% in 2010. (UN)
This 16% drop in the contribution of the advanced countries
to the total output of the world’s economy as total output increased by 50% is both gratifying and alarming.
Gratifying because it means a larger portion of the world’s output is being
produced by the less developed countries of the world with all of the potential that
holds for the improvement in economic well being for the impoverished in those
countries. At the same time it is alarming because that increase in output is
based on a flawed economic paradigm that is unsustainable.
The tremendous increase in economic productivity and output
that has made the remarkable increase in the world’s population possible over
the past three-hundred years have come from technological advances that have
allowed us to harness the energy stored in but three natural resources,
namely, coal, oil, and natural gas. In the eighteenth and nineteenth
centuries we mastered the technology of coal, and in the twentieth century we
mastered the technology of oil and natural gas. Today’s economic system
depends crucially on these three natural resources, especially oil, all of
which are nonrenewable and all of which pose a serious threat to the
environment.
As was noted above, this was of little consequence in the
nineteenth century when the world’s population was relatively small and a
relatively small sector was industrialized, but in the twenty first century
with the world’s population approaching nine billion people and the entire
world striving toward industrialization, the nonrenewable nature of our
resources and the inevitable consequences of accelerating pollution cannot be
ignored. The economic output of the world would have to increase by a factor of 3.5 over the next forty years to bring the rest of the world’s population up to
the standard of living enjoyed by the advanced countries today even if there
were no increase in the world’s population or in the standard of living in the
advanced countries. The increase would have to be by a factor of 4.6 if
the world’s population were to rise to the expected nine billion, and even
more if the standard of living in the advance countries were to increase as
well.[19.2]
The math is irrefutable, and there is no way unregulated free markets are
going to defeat this math.
With the incredible advances in transportation that have
evolved over the past sixty years, combined with the unimaginable network of
instant worldwide communication that came into being during the last twenty,
the drive for industrialization in today’s world cannot be stopped. The
concomitant effects on the environment and the limitations placed on
development by the finite nature of our natural resources—specifically, oil
but
potable water as well—must be acknowledged and dealt with if widespread
famine and starvation are to be avoided in the future. (Sachs)
In dealing with the problems of pollution and dwindling
natural resources, free-market ideologues are in a state of
denial. When it comes to global warming they argue 1) there is no such thing
as global warming, 2) even though there is global warming it’s not our
fault, and 3) if the government will just get out of the way free markets will
solve the problem. (PRC)
In dealing with the problem of preserving our natural resources they insist
that the actions of free individuals in unregulated free markets that are free
of government intervention will solve these problems without our having to
worry about them.
It is worth keeping in mind, however, that
these are the same people who
deregulated our financial
system,
facilitated the concentration of monopoly power into the hands of larger and
larger, too-big-to-fail institutions, guided our trade policies into
continuing trade deficits and the outsourcing of our manufacturing sector,
failed to enforce laws against fraud and unfair labor practices, and imposed a
tax structure on the populace that is incapable of maintaining the
public
infrastructure and
social capital from
which those at the top of the income distribution have benefited so greatly—the
same people whose policies
undermined our mass markets and drove the world’s financial system to the
brink of destruction. And these
same free-market ideologues are now blaming “entitlement programs” for the
economic catastrophe their policies have created as they block the tax
increases needed to deal with the resulting deficit/debt problem and insist on
cutting Social Security, Medicare, and other social-insurance programs in
order to balance the federal budget.
Given this record, it is difficult to
understand why anyone would take these people seriously, but, unfortunately,
much of the electorate does take them seriously, as does the leadership of
both the Republican and Democratic parties.
Over the past thirty years free-market
ideologues have been able to block virtually every attempt to
deal with the problems posed by rapidly rising external costs brought about by
rapidly increasing population and economic growth in a world economy fueled by
nonrenewable natural resources. Their influence in the United States has led to
Carter’s energy
program being dismantled in the 1980s,
CAFÉ standards
that barely changed after 1984 until gasoline prices peaked in the mid 2000s, funding for the cleanup of
superfund toxic waste sites being
allowed to expire in 1995, the United States walking away from the
Kyoto Protocol
on global warming in 2001, and water pollution restrictions being reduced in
2003. (Hartmann
NHTSA GAO
Time
CSM)
Their continued success in this regard does not bode well
for the future. Aside from the problem of global warming, the
transportation and agricultural systems we have developed as a result of
modern technology depend crucially on oil. These systems have led to
incredible increase in productivity over the past fifty years, but in the face
of increasing world population and economic growth this
technology is unsustainable.
As world oil reserves dwindle and the demand for oil
increases, the price of oil must increase, and, in turn, the productivity of
our transportation and agricultural systems must decline. Until we are
able to find a renewable source of energy to replace oil, prospects for the
future are dim. In the meantime, it is going to become more and more
difficult to feed the world’s population, and a rise in conflict, political instability, and turmoil throughout the world is inevitable. (EB)
If we value the kind of world we leave to our children and
grandchildren we cannot sit back and hope for the best as unregulated markets
squander our natural resources and pollute our planet. The problems
posed by population growth, the drive to industrialize, and the finite nature
of our natural resources cannot be solved by markets alone. They can
only be solved through the international cooperation of governments. (Sachs)
Endnote
[19.1]
It is, perhaps, worth noting
that this fact is well known and well understood within the discipline of
economics and is accepted by virtually all who know anything at all about
the discipline or about the world in which we actually live. It’s not open
to debate except, of course, among those who are either completely out of
touch with reality or who make their living by denying this fact.
[19.2] These
estimates are derived from the following table taken from the
International Monetary Fund, World Economic Outlook Database:
Country
Group Name |
Subject
Descriptor |
Units |
Scale |
2010 |
Adv. economies |
GDP(PPP) |
Cur.Int.dollar |
Billions |
38,693.78 |
Adv. economies |
GDP(PPP)/capita
|
Cur.Int.dollar |
Units |
38,024.65 |
Adv. economies |
Population |
|
Billions |
1.01 |
Emrg. & dev. economies |
GDP(PPP) |
Cur.Int.dollar |
Billions |
34,505.83 |
Emrg. & dev. economies |
GDP(PPP)/capita
|
Cur.Int.dollar |
Units |
5,953.64 |
Emrg. & dev. economies |
Population |
|
Billions |
5.80 |
where population is estimated by dividing GDP(PPP) by
GDP(PPP)/capita.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Acknowledgements / Autobiographical Information
I was born on August 28, 1942 in Flint, Michigan. The earliest childhood
memory I can date was August 14, 1945. I was standing with my mother in front
of our house on Edmond St. and asked her why all the cars were blowing their
horns. She look down at me and said "Because the War is over." My next
earliest memory was November 30 of that year when my father came home
from the Army. All of my family in my parents' generation served in that
war—my father and uncles in the military, my mother and aunts in the in the
factories. The experiences of my parents' generation during the war, and during
the depression that preceded the war, have had a profound effect on my view of
the world throughout my life.
I have been married twice, and raised six children—five daughters and one
son—the oldest of which is 52 and the youngest 27. I have eight grandchildren
and five truly amazing great grandchildren. No one really expects to have great grandchildren until it happens!
I am what I would call a state-school economist. I graduated from the
University of Michigan-Flint in 1966 and received a Masters Degree in
economics from the University of Michigan-Ann Arbor in 1967. I taught
economics for a year at Ferris State College in Michigan as an instructor. I
then entered the Ph.D. Program in economics at the State University of New
York at Buffalo where I taught economics in the night school for three years.
In 1972 I moved to Potsdam, NY and taught at the Potsdam state college for a
year then returned to Buffalo in 1973 and taught at the Buffalo state college
until 1979. I received a Ph.D. in economics from the State University of New
York at Buffalo in 1974. My dissertation was in monetary and macro economic theory.
In 1979 I moved back to Flint to chair the Department of Economics at the
University of Michigan-Flint and taught there until 1987. I also taught a year at
GMI Engineering & Management Institute, now known as Kettering University.
I then put together a statistical package, left academia and began selling my
statistical package to colleges and universities and to publishers as a
supplement to statistics textbooks. Other than
my statistical
package and its manuals, my publication record is sparse—one
article in the
Eastern Economic Journal, a
note in the Journal of Political Economy, and a
number of papers on monetary and macroeconomic theory in various papers and proceedings.
I spent the twenty years leading up to the crisis in 2008 reading mostly mathematics and statistics
books and paid very little attention to the real world other than to watch the
news. The financial crisis took me entirely by surprise. I knew there was a
problem in the housing market and that economic nonsense had been at the
center of the political debate in our country for over thirty years, but I
assumed, naively it turned out, that cooler heads would prevail, and
sound economic policies would always be enforced. I had no idea the extent to
which ideological beliefs had taken over the discipline of economics since I
left academia or that our financial
institutions would be allowed to overextend themselves to such an extent they
could bring down the economy of the entire world.
After the crash in 2008 I decided to set aside other pursuits and try to find out
what had been going on in the world of economics since I left academia. I read
virtually everything I could get my hands on relating to the financial crises
in an attempt to understand how we got to where we are today. The result is
the collection of papers in Where Did
All the Money Go? and those posted on my
www.rwEconomics.com website.
It will be
apparent in some of the essays that my academic interests go beyond economics
to history, political science, psychology, and philosophy. I attribute these
interests to a two year, twenty credit hour Western Civilization program
offered at Alma College, which I attended as a freshman and sophomore, and to
a number of very talented and highly dedicated teachers I had the privilege of
being influenced by in my tender years. Alma’s Western Civilization program
was team taught and most of the faculty participated in the program. It
provided an integrated, interdisciplinary and comprehensive view of the
cultural, political, and economic evolution of our 10,000 years of history
that was truly remarkable. Sadly, this program is no longer offered
today.
As for the very talented and highly dedicated teachers I had the privilege of
being influenced by, I would like to take the opportunity to acknowledge them
here: In grade school: Mrs. Shegus, Mrs. Lockner, and Miss Fortiner. In
junior high: Neil Cason. In high school: Charles Shinn, Joseph T. Davis,
William H. Whitemore, and Barbara and Robert Anderlik. In college: Frank
Jackson, William M. Armstrong, Florence A. Kirk, Louis R. Miner, Louis Toller,
Alfred C. Raphelson, Elston W. Van Steenburgh, Paul G. Bradley, and Virgil M.
Bett. In graduate school: W. H. Locke Anderson, Daniel B. Suits, Kenneth E.
Boulding, Saul H. Hymans, Mitchell Harwitz, Cliff L. Lloyd, Ray Boddy, James
Crotty, Winston Chang, and Nagesh S. Revankar. Each of these individuals had a
profoundly positive influence on my life, and I will be indebted to each
forever.
My indebtedness goes beyond academia, of course, and especially to my family.
My wife, Dolores M. Coulter, has been a pillar of strength in our relationship
for over thirty years. I would be lost without her. I am also indebted to my
two sisters, Kathy J. Ross and Gay S. Towfiq, and to my brothers and sisters
in-law, James Ross, Basim Towfiq, Melissa and Mark Scharrer, Mary Cerreto and
David Coulter, Theresa Coulter, Malcolm Coulter, and Gordon C. FitzGerald as
well as my former wife, Karen F. Blackford. All are more than family,
but friends that have always been there to do what they could when the need
arose. Then there are the cousins, spread throughout the country and too
numerous to mention or even keep track of, all of whom provide a sense of
belonging and connectedness in this isolated world.
I am particularly indebted to the generations that came before, especially to
my grandparents, Mary and Henry White and Juanita and George Blackford, as
well as grandpa Hendrick L. Adams and grandma Delia Coulter, and to my great
aunts and uncles, Grace Cuvrell, Louise and Enoch Anderson, Minnie and Joe
Baumgartner, Cecil and Will Baumgartner, Louie Baumgartner, and Lizzie and
Rudolph Baumgartner. They led remarkable, hardworking, and honorable lives and
set sterling examples for me to live up to, as did my parents, Marion R. and
George P. Blackford, and my fathers and mothers in-law, Eunice and Cecil W. FitzGerald and Helen and Malcolm Coulter.
The same is true of my aunts and uncles: Oliver White, Cecil and Frank Pugh,
Lois and Thomas Shinas, Carol and Charles Cardwell, Donna and David Cuvrell,
Marsha and Louis Irwin, Marjorie and Dick Blackford, Yvonne and William
Finley, and Marilyn and Gene Glanton. I have not always been able to live up
to the examples they set, but I will be forever grateful their examples were
there for me to look up to, to admire, and to strive for.
Then there are the kids: Heidi, Steve, Robin,
Theresa, Cherilyn, Brad, Terri, Mark, Leigh, Bobby, Sandy, Chelsea, Jeremy,
Cynthia, Jason, Stephanie, Shannon, Joe, Stevie, Elizabeth, Ed, Jessica,
David, Ryan, Andrea, Ashley, Tauri, Shawna, Maria, Anna, Caley, Sam, Emma, Alex,
Aidan, Lucas, Joey, Sophia, Maxwell, Lily, and Brily. What does it all mean without
them? It is for them that I posted my website in the hope it will contribute
toward a better understanding of the world in which we live and toward a
better future for all our children.
I wish to thank those who have directly and indirectly
contributed to this website: Harry Frank, Gillian Garcia, Rajindar Koshal, G.
William Domhoff, Douglas J. Amy, James DiGiacinto, Nick Seraphinoff, Paul
O’Brien, my wife Dolores, sister Kathy, brother-in-law Jim, sister-in-law
Mary, niece Cherilyn, daughter Elizabeth, granddaughter Shannon,
grandsons Jason, Ryan, and Stevie, brother-in-law Malcolm, and my uncle
Gene for their constructive criticisms of the ideas contained in earlier
drafts of various papers. This is especially so for my uncle Gene who was
particularly conscientious in responding to my pleas for help before he passed
away in October of 2009. His friend, Robert Maximoff, described my uncle best
with the quote from Shakespeare: "His life was gentle, and the elements so
mixed in him that Nature might stand up and say to all the world, 'This was a
man.'" He was a very good man and is deeply missed by all who knew him.
I also wish to thank Gloria McIntyre Zucker, Gail Rodd, Doris Suciu, Jim Hoffmeister,
Robert Maximoff, my Aunt Marjorie and Uncle Dick, and my nephews Bobby and
Brad for the encouragement they have given me.
Finally, I wish to thank Karl Agcaoili, Hugh Connelly,
Tobias Adrian, Patrick Locke, Adrienne Pilot, Bob Rand, and Benjamin Mandel
for the assistance they have given me in sorting through government data
sources.
Where Did All The Money Go?
Selective Bibliography
Amazon.com publishes reviews by readers
that give you some idea what others think of each book. The links to
books below take you to these reviews, whenever they are available.
The author's name is generally linked to an online biography.
Acharya, Viral and
Matthew Richardson (Editors),
Restoring Financial Stability: How to Repair a Failed System
(2009) is a collection of papers written by the faculty of the
New York University Stern School of
Business that explain the fundamental causes of the current financial
crisis and offers proposals as to how to prevent such crises in the future.
Akerlof, George and
Robert J. Shiller (2009)
Animal Spirits: How Human Psychology Drives the Economy, and Why It Matters
for Global Capitalism examines the role of confidence in causing
depressions.
Alperovitz, Gar and Lew Daly,
Unjust Deserts: How the Rich Are Taking Our Common Inheritance
(2008) examines the contribution of what we have inherited from the past to
our ability as individuals to produce wealth in the present.
Altemeyer, Bob,
The
Authoritarians (2006) examines the
scientific research pertaining to the personal beliefs actions of those people
who are particularly susceptible to rightwing propaganda as well as those of
the leaders of right-wing movements. He relates this research to the history
of rightwing movements the 1930s as well as to the rightwing movements today.
Most important, he explains why these movements pose a threat to our freedom
and to the very existence of our democratic society.
Amy, Douglas J.,
Government is Good: An Unapologetic Defense of a Vital Institution
(2010) provides a comprehensive discussion of the role of government in
providing for the common good in society that explains why strong government
is essential to our economic wellbeing and individual freedom and liberty.
Amy's work provides a lesson in civics that the American electorate
desperately needs.
Bair, Sheila A.,
Bull by the Horns: Fighting to Save Main Street from Wall Street and Wall
Street from Itself (2012) not only examines the
interactions between the regulatory agencies during the financial crisis, but
provides an exceedingly good explanation of the problems that led to the
crisis, and the kinds of regulatory changes needed to avoid this kind of
crisis in the future.
Baker, Dean,
Taking Economics Seriously (2010) examines how economic are being misused and how they should be used to
deal with economic problems .
———,
Plunder and Blunder: The Rise and Fall of the Bubble Economy
(2009) explains the nature of speculative bubbles, why speculative bubbles
have become such an endemic part of our economic system over the past thirty
years, and how the housing bubble led to the crisis of 2008.
———,
and Mark
Weisbrot,
Social Security: The Phony Crisis (1999) explains why there is no
economic or demographic crisis that requires the dismantling of the Social
Security System.
Bernanke,
Ben S.,
Essays on the Great Depression (2000) provides a collection of essays on the causes and nature
of the Great Depression from a Neoclassical perspective. It also examines the
role of the Gold Standard in the international transmission of the economic
collapse among countries.
Black,
William K.,
The Best Way to Rob a Bank Is to Own One: How Corporate Executives and
Politicians Looted the S&L Industry (2005) provides an in depth
look at the savings and loan crisis of the 1980s.
Bogle, John C.,
Enough: True Measures of Money, Business, and Life (2009) examines the
breakdown in business ethics that has accompanied the government deregulation
of the economic system over the past thirty years.
———,
The Battle for the Soul of Capitalism by (2005) examines the
transformation of the American capitalist system from owner's capitalism where
stock owners control corporations to manager's capitalism where managers
control corporations. This book makes an extremely important contribution to
the understanding of how today's economic system works.
Bookstaber, Richard,
A Demon of Our Own Design: Markets, Hedge Funds, and the Perils of Financial
Innovation (2007) examines the role of market complexity in risk management and
economic instability.
Boyer, Richard O. and
Herbert M. Morais,
Labor's Untold Story (1979)
tells the story of the labor movement from the
prospective of the union organizers.
Bruner, Robert F.,
The Panic of 1907: Lessons Learned from the Market's Perfect Storm
(2007) provides a comprehensive examination of the
financial crisis of 1907 that led to the founding of the Federal Reserve
System in 1913.
Buchanan, James M., and
Richard A. Musgrave
Public Finance and Public Choice: Two Contrasting Visions of the State
(2004) provides a valuable insight into the way in which the
fundamental issues surrounding the free market ideology have been debated
within the discipline of economics.
Carson,
Rachel,
Silent Spring (1962) examined the effects of pollution on the environment in the United
States.
Carville, James and
Paul Begala
Take It Back: Our Party, Our Country, Our Future (2008) discusses some of the consequences of the rise of Free Market Movement in
the United States over the past forty years and the failure of the Democratic
Party to confront these consequences.
Cassidy, John,
How Markets Fail: The Logic of Economic Calamities (2009) is the most uneven book I have ever read. Part I provides an
excellent discussion of the failings of Utopian Economics, Part II provide an
adequate discussion of Reality-Based Economics, and Part III contains so many
misstatements, misunderstandings, and outright falsehoods that it appears to
have been written by someone other than the person who wrote Part I. I do not
recommend reading this book beyond Chapter 16.
Chandrasekaran, Rajiv,
Imperial Life in the Emerald City: Inside Iraq's Green Zone
(2006) documents the role that ideological bias played in the ineptitude,
incompetence, and corruption played in our attempts at nation building in
Iraq. When read in conjunction with
Naomi Klein’s book,
The Shock Doctrine, it would appear that this ineptitude and
incompetence may have been intentional.
Chriss,
Neil A.,
Black-Scholes and Beyond: Option Pricing Models (1997) explains the
Black-Scholes model of option pricing and the way this model has been extended
to handle the pricing of other derivatives.
Cohan, William D.,
House of Cards: A Tale of Hubris and Wretched Excess on Wall Street
(2009) tells the story of the fall of Bear Stearns.
Cooper, George,
The Origin of Financial Crises (2008) examines the role of the rational/efficient market fallacy of the
Chicago School in deregulating the financial markets and generating the
housing crises.
Derman,
Emanuel,
My Life as a Quant: Reflections of Physics and Finance (2005) examines
the role played by mathematicians, physicists, and other quantitative types on
Wall Street from1985 through 2005.
Domhoff, G. William,
Who Rules America?
(1967) is the first in a series of books by Domhoff that examine the power
structure in America and explains how that power structure maintains control
within our society. Much of Domhoff's analysis is explained on his
website,
http://sociology.ucsc.edu/whorulesamerica/
———,
Who Rules America Now? A View From the 80s
(1986) is an update of
Domhoff's 1967 book that examines the changes in the power structure that took
place in the 1970s and early 1980s.
———,
The Myth of Liberal Ascendancy: Corporate Dominance from the Great Depression
to the Great Recession (2014) is a truly
remarkable book in which Domhoff examines in great detail the way in which the
conservative political collation in the United States has dominated American
economic policy since 1939.
Dowd, Kevin and
Martin
Hutchinson,
Alchemists of Loss: How Modern Finance and Government Intervention Crashed the
Financial System (2010) provides an account of how institutional
changes led to perverse incentives and short-rum, optimizing behavior that,
when combined with naive risk models and a misguided belief in the efficiency
of markets ultimately led to excess risk taking and inevitably to a collapse
of the system. The authors attempt to explain all of this in terms of
government meddling with the economy in spite of the fact that the prelude to
this crisis was twenty odd years of deregulation in which the government
refused to meddle in the markets.
Durbin, Michael,
All About Derivatives (2006) provides a
basic introduction to derivatives, what they are, how they are priced, and how
they are used.
Eichengreen, Barry,
Exorbitant Privilege: The Rise and Fall of the Dollar and the Future of the
International Monetary System (2011) examines the role of the dollar in international
finance and trade and explains why the US financial crisis has not yet led to
an international exchange collapse and what could cause this situation to
change.
———,
Golden Fetters: The Gold Standard and the Great Depression, 1919-1939
(1995) examines how the functioning of the post World War I gold standard
contributed to the Great Depression of the 1930s.
Ferrara, Peter
J.,
Social Security: The Inherent Contradiction (1980) is an example
of the schizophrenic nature of ideological logic. In the course of
trying to prove the inherent contradiction of attempting to serve a welfare
function within the context of an insurance program, Ferrara unwittingly
provides a compelling argument for eliminating the income cap on payroll
taxes and extending Social Security taxes to unearned income. His
argument that the pay-as-you-go nature of Social Security reduces economic
growth depends crucially on the dubious (I would say absurd) assumption that
an increase in saving forces investors to invest. At the same time, his
seemingly irrefutable math/logic that Social Security beneficiaries would be
better off if they were to put their payroll tax money in private investment
accounts is oblivious to the risks involved in this scheme and the dismal
history of private retirement accounts and pension funds going broke.
Farmer, Roger E. A.,
Expectations, Employment, and Prices
(2010) an original work that attempts to integrate
modern macroeconomic theory with Keynes's theory of expectations.
FCIC,
The Financial Crisis Inquiry Report, Authorized Edition: Final Report of the
National Commission on the Causes of the Financial and Economic Crisis in the
United States (2011) provides an in depth examination of the 2008
financial crisis.
FDIC,
History of the 80s, (1997) provides
an insightful analysis of the regulatory failures that led to the financial
crisis of 1988. Again, it is astounding how the Bush Administration
either ignored or was completely oblivious to principles explained in this
book. This book can be read on line by clicking on one of the above links.
Fisher, Irving,
Booms and Depressions (1932) provides the first explanation as to how excess leverage
inspired during an economic boom leads to financial crises and economic
collapse in a capitalistic system.
Fox, Justin,
The Myth of the Rational Market: A History of Risk, Reward, and Delusion on
Wall Street (2009) examines the history of the rational/efficient
market hypothesis as it was created by the free market ideologues in the
utopian world of the Chicago School of Economics.
Frank, Thomas,
The Wrecking Crew: How Conservatives Rule (2008) explains the role of the
Free Market Movement in the rise of the Republican Party from the Goldwater
defeat in 1964 through the present and explains the role of each of the
participants and factions in this rise, including the role played by Jack
Abramoff from the 1970s onward.
———,
What’s the Matter With Kansas: How Conservatives Won the Heart of America
(2004) explains how
the Rightwing Propaganda Machine was able to shift the body politic to the
right in Kansas.
Freeman,
Joshua B.,
Working-Class New York: Life and Labor Since World War II
(2000) presents a history of New York City since World War II in which he
examines the effects of the policies discussed by
Tabb through to 2000.
Friedman, Milton and
Rose Friedman,
Free to Choose: A Personal Statement (1980) is a well written explanation of Friedman’s view of the
benefits of free market capitalism. It combines an insightful analysis of the
inefficiencies of government interference with markets with an appalling lack
of insight as to the harm caused by market failures in the lives of ordinary
people.
———
and
Anna Jacobson Schwartz,
A Monetary History of the United States, 1867-1960 (1971) is a well written tome that provides a
comprehensive history of the financial system in the United States.
———
and
Anna Jacobson Schwartz,
The Great Contraction, 1929-1933 (1963) is also a rather short, very well written history
of the stock market crash of 1929 and its aftermath.
———,
Capitalism and Freedom (1962) provides an explanation of Friedman’s view of the
relationship between free market capitalism and his concept of freedom.
Galbraith, James K.,
Inequality and Instability: A Study of the World Economy Just Before the Great
Crisis (2012) examines the role of inequality in increasing
unemployment and economic instability.
———,
The Predator State: How Conservatives Abandoned the Free Market and Why
Liberals Should Too (2008) examines the institutional changes in the world economy that
have taken place over the past sixty years and suggests a plan to deal with
the disastrous consequences that have resulted from the free market economic
policies of the past thirty years.
Galbraith, John Kenneth,
The New Industrial State (1966) examines the role of technology,
technocrats, and government within the modern economic system.
———,
The Affluent Society,(1958) examines the way in which the power
structures within the economic system develop and counterbalance each other.
———,
The Great Crash of 1929 (1955) is a rather short, very
well written history of the stock market crash of 1929 and its aftermath.
Garcia, Gillian,
Carl-Johan Lindgren, and
Matthew I. Saal,
Bank Soundness and Macroeconomic Policy (1996) provides a comprehensive analysis of the
kinds of problems faced by financial regulators throughout the world and the
kinds of regulatory policies that are essential for effective regulation of
the financial system. It is astounding how the Bush Administration either
ignored or was completely oblivious to the principles explained in this book.
Gasparino, Charles,
The Sellout: How Three Decades of Wall Street Greed and Government
Mismanagement Destroyed the Global Financial System (2009) is a somewhat
uneven account of the of the history of the financial system over the past
thirty years in the sense that his grasp of basic economics in some areas is
lacking (he sees the FDIC as bailing out banks and the GSEs as guaranteeing
mortgages, which indicates a fundamental misunderstanding of these
institutions). Other than that Gasparino's history of this period is quite
good. It is fairly comprehensive, objective, and surprisingly, for the most
part, non-ideological.
Gelinas, Nicole,
After the Fall: Saving Capitalism from Wall Street and Washington
(2009) provides a concise statement of the kinds of regulations that are
necessary to avoid future financial crises. Specifically, she argues
that the principles of regulation needed today are the same as those put in
place in the 1930s which allowed us to avoid financial crises for fifty odd
years until they were dismantled beginning in the 1970s. These
principles include limiting speculative bowering by imposing margin/capital
requirements, requiring full exposure on the part of financial intuitions, and
circumscribing reckless exposure to risk on the part of these institutions.
Graeber, David,
Debt: The First 5,000 Years (2010) is a fascinating history of
debt, its relationship to money, and the role it has played throughout
history. This is a very important book.
Harrington, Michael,
The Other America: Poverty in the United States
(1962) examined poverty in the United States.
Hartmann, Thom,
Cracking the Code: How to Win Hearts, Change Minds, and Restore America's
Original Vision (2008) provides a very well written nonacademic explanation of the
framing mechanism.
———,
Screwed: The Undeclared War Against the Middle Class - And What We Can Do
about It (2007) discusses some of the consequences of the rise of free market
capitalism in the United States over the past forty years.
Harvey, David,
A Brief History of Neoliberalism (2005) discusses the hypocrisy
endemic in the Free Market Movement in terms of what is called
Neo-Conservatism in the United States and Neoliberalism in the rest of the
world. This book documents the way in which the policies of free market
ideologues when implemented in the name of freedom and economic prosperity for
all have lead to freedom and economic prosperity for the few and desperation
for most everyone else.
Hayek,
Friedrich von,
The Road to Serfdom (1944)
has proved to be one of the seminal documents of the Free Market Movement. It
provides the basis for the argument that government intervention in markets
leads to totalitarian socialism. A Reader’s Digest condensed version of this
book is available
on line.
Haywood, William,
Autobiography of "Big Bill," Haywood (1966) tells
the life story of Big Bill Haywood and his involvement in the labor movement
in founding the Western Federation of Miners and the International Workers of
the World during the latter half of the nineteenth century.
Heilbroner,
Robert,
The Worldly Philosophers: The Lives, Times And Ideas Of The Great Economic
Thinkers (1955-1999) is the place to start. This book provides a history of
economic thought throughout the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, and has
gone through seven additions.
Henriques, Diana
B.,
The White Sharks of Wall Street: Thomas Mellon Evans and the Original
Corporate Raiders (2000) examines the beginnings of the hostile takeover and
leverage buyout craze leading up to the 1980s.
Huntington, James B.,
Work's New Age: The End of Full Employment and What It Means to You (2011) examines the problems automation creates in maintaining full employment
in today's world.
Isikoff, Michael and
David Corn,
Hubris: The Inside Story of Spin, Scandal, and the Selling of the Iraq War
(2006) documents the
way in which the Bush Administration distorted available intelligence in order
to justify their invasion of Iraq.
Johnson,
Haynes,
The Age of Anxiety: McCarthyism to Terrorism (2006) shows the similarities between the tactics used in the
McCarthy Era and those used by the Rightwing Propaganda Machine today.
Johnson, Simon and James Kwak,
White House Burning: The Founding Fathers, Our National Debt, and Why it
Matters to You (2012) examines the his history of the federal debt
and explains the fundamental choices we are faced with today in dealing with
our federal deficit/debt problem.
———,
13 Bankers: The Wall Street Takeover and the Next Financial Meltdown (2010)
compares the way financial crises are dealt with in third world countries and
how we dealt with the crisis of 2008.
Jones, Mary Harris
and Mary
Field (editor) ,
The Autobiography of Mother Jones (1996) tells the life story of Mother Jones and her involvement in the labor movement
during the latter half of the nineteenth century.
Josephson, Matthew,
The Robber Barons (1934) is, of course, the classic work
describing the excesses of free market capitalism in the latter half of the
nineteenth century.
Kennedy, David M.,
Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945
(1999) provides an in depth account of the ways in which the Great
Depression and World War II changed the American society from 1929 through
1945.
Keynes, John M.,
The General Theory of Money, Interest, and Prices (1936) (Electronic
Edition) is the classic work on the economics of depressions.
Kindleberger, Charles
P. The
World in Depression, 1929-1939: Revised and Enlarged Edition (History of the
World Economy in the Twentieth Century)
(1986) is a comprehensive examination of the Great Depression from the
perspective of how it reverberated throughout the world.
———,
and
Robert Aliber,
Manias, Panics, and Crashes: A History of Financial Crises (2005) provides an update to MacKay's tome and is much easier to
read.
Kirk, Russell,
The Conservative Mind: From Burke to Eliot (1953-1985) explains the
conservative movement in the United States and England from the eighteenth
century through the mid 1980s in terms of 1) an abiding faith in Natural Law
as determined by a Devine Providence, 2) the superiority of intuition,
predigests, and tradition over the scientific method in the search for meaning
and truth, and 3) the belief that ideas are more important than facts in this
regard. Unfortunately, Kirk fails to explain how a movement which he shows to
have fought the spread of Free Market Capitalism and Democracy for over one
hundred and fifty years has managed to become the unquestioning, fanatical
champions of these two institutions in today's world.
Klein, Naomi,
The Shock Doctrine: The Rise of Disaster Capitalism (2008) is probably the most
shocking book I have ever read. It explains the role free market ideologues
have played in international finance over the past forty years, and documents
the disastrous consequences of their policies throughout Latin America,
Eastern Europe, Indonesia, Iraq, and South Africa.
Krugman, Paul,
The Great Unraveling: Losing Our Way in the New Century (2009) chronicles the economic misdeeds of the Bush Administration .
———
The Return of Depression Economics and the Crisis of 2008 (2009) examines the historical context in which the current
financial crisis occurred and the underlying economics that brought this
crisis about.
———
The Conscience of a Liberal (2007) discusses the way in which the
Rightwing Propaganda machine is organized and the economic effects of this
take over of the Republican Party on our society.
———
Peddling Prosperity: Economic Sense and Nonsense in an Age of Diminished
Expectations (1995) explains the economic sense and nonsense generated
by the Rightwing Propaganda Machine.
Kuhn, Thomas,
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (1962) presents, what was
at the time Kuhn published this book, an iconoclastic explanation of the way
in which scientific truth changes over time.
Kuo, David,
Tempting Faith: An Inside Story of Political Seduction (2006) discusses the
hypocrisy with which free market ideologues have used the Christian Right for
their political and economic ends.
Kuttner,
Robert,
The Squandering of America: How the Failure of Our Politics Undermines Our
Prosperity (2008) is a sequel to his
Everything for Sale that examines the role the deregulation of
economic behavior has played in undermining democratic institutions. He shows
how giving lip service to the Utopian Capitalist's ideals has led to the
squandering of America's economic resources and the concentration a larger and
larger portion of our wealth and income in the hands of fewer and fewer
people, and how this concentration of wealth and power has undermined the
wellbeing of the vast majority of Americans.
———,
Everything for Sale: The Virtues and Limits of Markets (1999) provides a devastating critique of the economic foundations of the
free market ideology. It is one of the best, and most important books on the
discipline of economics I have read. Anyone who considers herself an
economist, or who has even a passing interest in the discipline of economics
should read this book. Only the most ardent true believer in the free market
ideology can fail to grasp its significance.
Lakoff,
George,
The Political Mind: Why You Can't Understand 21st-Century American Politics
with an 18th-Century Brain (2008)
explains the mechanism by which the Rightwing Propaganda Machine frames the
political debate in our country to divert the debate from substantive issues
to non-substantive issues within the context of the cognitive sciences.
———,
Whose Freedom?: The Battle Over America's Most Important Idea
(2006) explains the mechanism by which the Rightwing Propaganda Machine
frames the fundamental concept of freedom to engender support for their
agenda.
———,
Don't Think of an Elephant: Know Your Values and Frame the Debate--The
Essential Guide for Progressives (2004)
provides a nonacademic explanation of the framing mechanism of the Cognitive
sciences.
Lansley, Stewart,
The Cost of Inequality: Why Economic Equality is Essential for Recovery
(2012) examines the effects of inequality on the
British economy with comparisons with the United States.
Levin, Carl and
Tom Coburn,
Wall
Street and the Financial Crisis: Anatomy of a Financial Collapse
(2011) provides both a comprehensive overview of the financial crisis and a
detailed analysis of some of the major actors that helped to bring on this
crisis.
Levitt, Arthur,
Take on the Street: How to Fight for Your Financial Future (2002)
examines the regulatory issues at the SEC during Levitt's tenure as Chairman
of the SEC from 1993 through 2000.
Lewis, Michael,
Liar's Poker: Rising Through the Wreckage on Wall Street (1989) examines the effects of deregulation during the 80s on the
behavior of the financial sector as it led to the savings and loan crisis in
the late 80s.
———,
The Big Short: Inside the Doomsday Machine (2011) chronicles the
events leading up to the Crash of 2008 through the eyes of a number of
investors who saw it coming and shorted the market to make money off the
crash.
Lindert, Peter H.,
Growing Public: Social Spending and Economic Growth Since the Eighteenth
Century Volume 1 and
Volume 2 (2005) provides a compelling history and analysis of the
evolution of social welfare/transfer systems over the past three-hundred
years.
Volume 2 examines the statically analysis on which Lindert's
conclusions are based.
Lowenstein, Roger,
The End of Wall Street (2010)
examines the housing bubble from its inception through the crash of 2008.
———,
Origins of the Crash: The Great Bubble and Its Undoing (2004)
examines the effects of deregulation on the dotcom and telecom bubbles
during the 1990s and early 2000s.
———,
When Genius Failed: The Rise and Fall of Long-Term Capital Management
(2002) examines the effects of deregulation during the collapse of
the Long-Term Capital Management hedge fund and the way in which it threatened
to take down the entire financial system.
Lowndes,
Joseph E.,
From the New Deal to the New Right: Race and the Southern Origins of Modern
Conservatism (2009) examines the mechanisms by which southern conservatives took over
the Republican party.
Lux, Michael ,
The Progressive Revolution: How the Best in America Came to Be (2009)
examines the history of the Progressive movement in the United States.
Mayer, Jane,
The Dark Side: The Inside Story of How The War on Terror Turned into a War
on American Ideals (2008) documents the way in which the free market ideologues of the
Bush Administration subverted the American government into adopting a policy
of torturing people to serve their ends. It is very explicit in its
discussion of the kinds of torture techniques used, the extent to which these
techniques were used, and on whom these techniques were used. I do not
recommend that everyone read this book. It is very upsetting.
MacKay, Charles,
Extraordinary Popular Delusions and the Madness of Crowds (1841)
is, of course, a classic tome on the subject of economic bubbles and other
kinds of mass delusions. Unfortunately, it is rather dry reading and not
nearly as fun as its title suggests.
Meltzer, Allan H.,
A History of the Federal Reserve, Volume 1: 1913-1951 (2003) examines
the history of central banking and of the Federal Reserve through 1951.
Miller, T. Christian,
Blood Money: Wasted Billions, Lost Lives, and Corporate Greed in Iraq
(2006) documents the conflicts of interests and the huge
fortunes that were made through political patronage in Iraq.
Minsky, Hyman P.,
Stabilizing an Unstable Economy (1986/2008)
extends Keynes and Fisher's explanations of the Great Depression and explains how economic and psychological
forces in the financial sector has a destabilizing effect on the economy in a
capitalistic system. It is one of the most underrated books, until recently,
in economics.
Mises, Ludwig von,
Human Action: A Treatise on Economics (1949)
is also a seminal document of the Free Market Movement. This tome provides
the “praxeological” arguments for the notion that the underlying assumptions
of the free market ideology are universal truths and explains why all that is
good in the world comes from free markets and everything that is bad comes
from interfering with free markets. This book is available
on line.
Morris, Charles R.,
The Two Trillion Dollar Meltdown: Easy Money, High Rollers, and the Great
Credit Crash (March 2008) explains the housing bubble and its bursting in 2007 and
forecasted the crash of 2008 six months before it happened. Morris explained
in detail why the coming crash was inevitable.
———,
Money, Greed, and Risk: Why Financial Crises and Crashes Happen
(1999) examines both the history and the economics of financial
crises and evaluates the inadequacy and the importance of regulation in
moderating these crises.
Musgrave, Richard,
The Theory of Public Finance: A Study in Public Economy (1959) is a classic work on the functions of government in the economic
system.
Nader, Ralph,
Unsafe At Any Speed The Designed-in Dangers of the American Automobile
(1965) chronologies the safety problems in the American
automobile industry.
Orwell, George,
1984 Nineteen eighty four (1948)
seems to provide both a warning and a guide to the free market movement: A
warning as to the evils of totalitarian socialism, and a guide as to how to
rule and control public opinion in a free market society.
Palley, Thomas I.,
The Economic Crisis: Notes From the Underground (2012) examines
the causes of the economic crisis and the failure of the economics profession
to foresee and explain it.
Patterson, Scott,
The Quants: How a New Breed of Math Whizzes Conquered Wall Street and Nearly
Destroyed It (2010) explores the role of hedge funds,
quantitative models, and the belief in
self-adjusting free markets
in the meltdown of
the economic system from 2007 through 2008. Provides some insight into the way
electronic trading works in the global economy.
Perino, Michael,
The Hellhound of Wall Street: How Ferdinand Pecora's Investigation of the
Great Crash Forever Changed American Finance (2010) explains the
importance of the Pecora Hearings in bringing about the financial regulation
of the 1930s.
Phillips, Kevin P.,
Bad Money: Reckless Finance, Failed Politics, and the Global Crisis of
American Capitalism (2008)
provides a penetrating analysis of the way in which the rise of speculative
finance combined with the geopolitics of oil and the failure of domestic
politics in the United States to meet the challenge of state capitalism in the
developing world led to the economic crisis with which we are faced.
———,
Wealth and Democracy: A Political History of the American Rich (2002)
provides an encyclopedic examination of the rise and fall of the Spanish,
Dutch, and British empires and the striking similarities with the development
of the United States' empire over the past 200 years.
———,
The Emerging Republican Majority (1969)
provides a comprehensive analysis of the changes in the voting trends through
the 1968 election that eventually led to the Republican majority in the
country.
Polanyi, Karl,
The Great Transformation (1944) provides a critical view of the
fundamental assumptions that underlie the Utopian Capitalist’s view of
reality. The uniqueness of this book and its insight into the human
condition makes it one of the most important, if not the single most important
contribution to this debate. Unfortunately, it has received very little
recognition within the discipline of economics.
Rajan, Raghuram G.,
Fault Lines: How Hidden Fractures Still Threaten the World Economy
(2010) I a very disappointing book. While it contains some understanding
of the current crisis, it contains innumerable ideological clichés and
indicates a fundamental misunderstanding of the role government housing played
in this crisis.
———
and
Luigi Zingales,
Saving Capitalism From the Capitalists: Unleashing the Power of Financial
Markets to Create Wealth and Spread Opportunity (2003) argues for
the need to regulate the financial markets.
Rand, Ayn,
Atlas Shrugged (1959) concludes with the utopian dream of the Utopian Capitalists—a world
without government where we all just get along.
Reich, Robert,
Aftershock: The Next Economy and America's Future (2010) examines
the consequences of the current crisis and argues that the long run effect of
this crisis is going to be sustained unemployment in the absence of a
redistribution of income.
Reinhart,
Carmen M. and
Kenneth S. Rogoff,
This Time is Different: Eight Centuries of Financial Folly (2009)
examines eight centuries of financial crises and shows how the crises arise
from the same kinds of speculative behavior and are imminently predictable.
Ricks, Thomas E.,
Fiasco: The American Military Adventure in Iraq, 2003 to 2005
(2006) examines the way in which the ideological biases in the
Bush Administration have led to the fiasco in Iraq. At the same time I was
terribly impressed by the integrity of the American military in the picture
that is painted by Ricks, particularly as it relates to the loyalty of the
military to the Constitution and the requirement of civilian control. This is
a very good book for anyone interested in military history and who takes pride
in our military.
Rodrik, Dani,
The Globalization Paradox: Democracy and the Future of the World Economy (2011) explains the inherent conflict between globalization, national
sovereignty and democratic politics.
———,
Has Globalization Gone Too Far? (1997) examines who loses and who gains from globalization and explains
how globalization leads to economic and social instability.
Roubini,
Nouriel and
Stephen Mihm,
Crisis Economics: A Crash Course in the Future of America (2010)
provides one of the best analyses of how financial crises come into being,
particularly the crisis of 2007-2008, and of the nature of the problems the
current crisis is going to cause going forward.
Sachs, Jeffrey D.,
Common Wealth: Economics for a Crowded Planet (2008)
provides a sobering view of the economic situation in the world today and not
only explains the need for governmental intervention to deal with our economic
problems, but the need for international cooperation among governments to
solve these problems.
Sanger, David E.,
The Inheritance: The World Obama Confronts and the Challenges to American
Power (2009) examines the problems created by the Iraq war and the
economic collapse with regard to American influence through out the world.
Scahill, Jeremy,
Blackwater: The Rise of the World's Most Powerful Mercenary Army
(2007)
examines the corruption involved in privatizing the military functions of
government.
Schlefer,
Jonathan,
The Assumptions Economists Make (2012) provides a comprehensive
overview of the history of economic thought as this history relates to modern
divisions within the discipline of economic today. It is a must read for
anyone who wishes to understand the discipline.
Schumpeter, Joseph
A.,
Capitalism, Socialism, and Democracy (1942) is a classic work
that undertakes a detailed examination of the fundamental issues surrounding
capitalism, socialism, and democracy.
Shirer, William
L.,
The Rise and Fall of the Third Reich: A History of Nazi Germany
is the classic work on the history of Hitler and his rise to power in
Germany.
Sirota, David,
Hostile Takeover: How Big Money and Corruption Conquered Our Government--And
How We Take It Back (2007) examines how the corporate takeover of
our government has led to corruption in our everyday lives.
Skidelsky, Robert,
Keynes: The Return of the Master (2012) discusses the resurgence
of Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes since the Crash of 2008.
Smith, Adam,
An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations
(1776) is, of course, a classic in the true sense that it is a book everyone
knows but no one has read. I know of no other book that has been used so
often to create a false air of authority save the Bible and, perhaps, the
Koran.
Smith, Yves,
ECONned: How Unenlightened Self Interest Undermined Democracy and Corrupted
Capitalism
(2010) examines the role played by economics in the financial the 2008
financial crisis and provides a biting criticism of economic dogma.
Sorkin,
Andrew Ross,
Too Big to Fail: The Inside Story of How Wall Street and Washington Fought to
Save the Financial System---and Themselves (2009) examines the actions of Secretary of Treasury Paulson,
New York Fed Chairman Geithner, and the various Wall Street players as they
attempted to stabilize the financial system from the fall of Bear Sterns
through the passage of the TARP program.
Stewart, James B.,
Den of Thieves
(1992) examines the hostile takeover, leverage buyout junk bond craze in the
1980s.
Stiglitz, Joseph E.,
The Price of Inequality: How Today's Divided Society Endangers Our Future
(2012) examines the
way in which the increase in the concentration of income leads to economic
instability.
———,
Freefall: America, Free Markets, and the Sinking of the World Economy
(2010) examines of the economics of financial crisis and evaluates the
inadequacy and inequity of the policy responses to this crisis.
———,
The Roaring Nineties: A New History of the World's Most Prosperous Decade
(2003) examines the economic deregulatory policies of the Clinton
Administration and how they led to the dotcom and telecom bubbles.
———,
Globalization and Its Discontents (2002)
examines the ideological conflict between the International Monetary Fund and
World Bank in dealing with financial crises during the 1990s.
Tabb, William K.,
The Long Default: New York City and the Urban Fiscal Crisis
(1982)
examines the effects of the policies of free market ideologues in managing New
York City’s financial crisis during the 1970s.
Taleb,
Nassim Nicholas,
The Black Swan: The Impact of the Highly Improbable (2007) examines the role of market complexity and
uncertainty in risk management and economic instability.
Tett, Gillian,
Fool's Gold: How the Bold Dream of a Small Tribe at J.P. Morgan Was Corrupted
by Wall Street Greed and Unleashed a Catastrophe (2009) tells
the story of the role played by J.P. Morgan in creating Credit Default Swaps
and how these and other derivatives brought on the financial crisis.
Veblen, Thorstein,
The Theory of the Leisure Class (1900)
is, without question, the most entertaining of all the books written on the
excesses of free market capitalism.
———,
The Theory of
Business Enterprise (1900)
is probably the first objective account of nineteenth century business in the
United States.
Weitzman, Hal,
Latin Lessons: How South America Stopped Listening to the United States and
Started Prospering (2012) examines
the effect of the Washington Consensus on Latin America and the reaction to
this consensus during the first decade of the new millennium.
Wessel, David,
In Fed We Trust: Ben Bernanke's War on the Great Panic (2009)
examines the actions of Chairman Bernanke's in his attempt to stabilize the
financial system throughout the financial crisis from its beginning.
Westen, Drew,
The Political Brain: The Role of Emotion in Deciding the Fate of the Nation
(2007) is one of the most important books I have ever read. It explains
the importance of emotional appeals in the basic psychology of the Rightwing
Propaganda Machine and how this machine has used these appeals to shift the
mind of the body politic to the right. More important, it explains why this
shift in the mind of the body politic is the fault of the Democratic Party.
Wheelan, Charles,
Naked Economics: Undressing the Dismal Science (2010)
provides a lucid, though uncritical, exposition of
many basic concepts in economics but seems to be at a loss in its attempt to
explain the economic catastrophe we are in the midst of today.
White, Mel,
Religion Gone Bad: The Hidden Dangers of the Christian Right
(2006) examines the role the
religious right in the Republican Party.
Zakaria, Fareed,
The Post-American World (2009)
examines the problems created by the Iraq war and the economic collapse with
regard to American influence through out the world.
Zinn, Howard,
A People's History of the United States
(2003) provides an examination of US history from the prospective of ordinary
people as opposed to from the prospective of the political and economic
elites.
| |
|